Sie sind auf Seite 1von 572

JAN-701B/901B

ECDIS

INSTRUCTION
MANUAL

For further information,contact:

Not use the asbestos

URL

http://www.jrc.co.jp

Marine Service Department


Telephone : +81-3-3492-1305
+81-3-3779-1420
Facsimile :
tmsc@jrc.co.jp
e-mail :
AMSTERDAM Branch
Telephone : +31-20-658-0750
Facsimile :
+31-20-658-0755
e-mail :
service@jrceurope.com
SEATTLE Branch
Telephone : +1-206-654-5644
Facsimile :
+1-206-654-7030
e-mail :
marineservice@jrcamerica.com
CODE No.7ZPNA4056D

01ETM

DEC. 2012 Edition 6

ISO 9001, ISO 14001 Certified

JRC

Printed in Japan

Cautions for High Voltage


High voltages, ranging from several hundreds to tens of thousands of volts, are used in
electronic apparatus, such as radio and radar instruments. These voltages are totally
harmless in most operations. However, touching a component inside the unit is very
dangerous. (Any person other than authorized service engineers should not service,
inspect, or adjust the unit.)
High voltages on the order of tens of thousand volts are most likely to cause instant
deaths from electrical shocks. At times, even voltages on the order of several hundred volts
could lead to electrocution. To defend against electrical shock hazards, don't put your hand
into the inside of apparatus. When you put in a hand unavoidably in case of urgent, it is
strongly suggested to turn off the power switch and allow the capacitors, etc. to discharge
with a wire having its one end positively grounded to remove residual charges. Before you
put your hand into the inside of apparatus, make sure that internal parts are no longer
charged. Extra protection is ensured by wearing dry cotton gloves at this time. Another
important precaution to observe is to keep one hand in your pocket at a time, instead of
using both hands at the same time.
It is also important to select a secure footing to work on, as the secondary effects of
electrical shock hazards can be more serious. In the event of electrical shocks, disinfect the
burnt site completely and obtain medical care immediately.

Precautions for Rescue of Victim of


Electric Shock
When a victim of electric shock is found, turn off the power source and ground the circuit
immediately. If this is impossible, move the victim away from the unit as quick as possible
without touching him or her with bare hands. He or she can safely be moved if an insulating
material such as dry wood plate or cloth is used.
Breathing may stop if current flows through the respiration center of brain due to electric
shock. If the electric shock is not large, breathing can be restored by artificial respiration. A
victim of electric shock looks pale and his or her pulse may become very weak or stop,
resulting in unconsciousness and rigidity at worst. It is necessary to perform first aid
immediately.

Method of First-Aid Treatment


Precautions for First-Aid Treatments
Whenever a person is struck by an electrical shock, give the patient artificial respiration
immediately on the spot, unless it is absolutely necessary to move the patient for safety's
sake. Once started, artificial respiration should be continued rhythmically.
(1) Refrain from touching the patient carelessly as a result of the accident; the first-aider
could suffer from electrical shocks by himself or herself.
(2) Turn off the power calmly and certainly, and move the patient apart from the cable
gently.
(3) Call or send for a physician or ambulance immediately, or ask someone to call doctor.
(4) Lay the patient on the back, loosening the necktie, clothes, belts and so on.
(5) (a) Feel the patient's pulse.
(b) Check the heartbeat by bringing your ear close to the patient's heart.
(c) Check for respiration by bringing your face or the back of your hand to the patient's
face.
(d) Check the size of patient's pupils.
(6) Opening the patient's mouth, remove artificial teeth, cigarettes, chewing gum, etc. if
any. With the patient's mouth open, stretch the tongue and insert a towel or the like into
the mouth to prevent the tongue from being withdrawn into the throat. (If the patient
clenches the teeth so tight that the mouth won't open, use a screwdriver or the like to
force the mouth open and then insert a towel or the like into the mouth.)
(7) Wipe off the mouth to prevent foaming mucus and saliva from accumulating.

Treatment to Give When the Patient Has a


Pulse Beating but Has Ceased to Breathe
Performing mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration - Fig. 1
(1)
(2)
(3)

(4)
(5)

(6)

Bend the patient's face backward until it is directed to look back. (A pillow may be
placed under the neck.)
Pull up the lower jaw to open up the airway. (to spread the airway)
Pinching the patient's nose, breathe deeply and blow your breath into the patient's
mouth strongly, with care to close it completely. Then, move your mouth away and
take a deep breath, and blow into his or her mouth. Repeat blowing at 10 to 15 times
a minute (always with the patient's nostrils closed).
Continue artificial respiration until natural respiration is restored.
If the patient's mouth won't open easily, insert a pipe, such as one made of rubber or
vinyl, into either nostril. Then, take a deep breath and blow into the nostril through
the pipe, with the other nostril and the mouth completely closed.
The patient may stand up abruptly upon recovering consciousness. Keep the patient
lying calmly, giving him or her coffee, tea or any other hot drink (but not alcoholic
drink) to keep him or her warm.

Meouth-to-mouth artificial respiration with the patient's head lifted


(1) Lift the back part of the patient's
head. Support the forehead with one
of your hand and the neck with the
other hand..
Many patients will have their airways
opened by lifting their head in this
way to ease mouth-to-mouth artificial
respiration.

(2) Closing the patient's mouth with your


mouth, press your cheek against the
patient's nose.
Alternatively, hold the patient's nose
with your finger to prevent air leak
.
(3) Blowing air into the patient's lungs.
Blow air into the patient's lungs until
chest is seen to rise. The first 10
breaths must be blown as fast as
possible.

Fig.1 Mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration

Treatment to Give When the Patient Has No


Pulse Beating and Has Ceased to Breathe
Performing cardiac massage - Fig. 2
If the patient has no pulse beating, with the pupils open and no heartbeat being heard,
the patient has a cardiac arrest and requires immediate artificial respiration. Continue
this until a medical specialist arrives, and follow his or her directions after that.
(1)

(2)

(3)

Putting one hand on about the lower one third of the patient's ribs and the other hand
over the back of the first, with your elbow fully stretched (with bended elbow, you
cant press to the extent the patients ribs are depressed), apply your body weight to
the hands to press the patient's body until it is depressed about 2 cm (Repeat this
about 50 times a minute). (Cardiac massage.)
If only one first-aider is available, perform a cardiac massage about 15 times and
then give mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration 2 times. Repeat this sequence. If two
first-aiders are available, while one person performs a cardiac massage 15 times,
and the other should give mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration 2 times. Repeat this
sequence (combined cardiac massage and mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration
method).
Check the patient's pupils and feel the pulse from time to time. When the pupils are
restored to normal and the pulse begins to beat regularly, stop treating and keep the
patient calm while giving him or her coffee, tea or any other hot drink to keep him or
her warm while watching him or her carefully.

Fig.2 Cardiac massage

PREFACE
Thank you for purchasing the JRC JAN-701B/901B ECDIS/Conning Display.
This equipment consists of ECDIS (Electronic Chart Display and Information
System) and Conning Display.
This ECDIS meets the performance standards of the IMO (International Maritime
Organization) and the IHO (International Hydro graphic Organization), and serves to
improve safety, reduce fuel combustion, reduce voyage time and automate voyages.

For the best operation and performance results, read this manual thoroughly
before use.
Keep this manual in a convenient place for future reference.
Make use of this manual when experiencing operation difficulties.
This LCD uses 1,310,000 (JAN-701B)/1,920,000 (JAN-901B) or more TFTs
(Thin Film Transistor).
If some pixels on the screen are not clear, the color is different, or the screen is
brighter than usual, it is not because of defect, instead it is because of inherent
characteristic of the TFT display technology.
The information in this manual is subject to change without notice at any time.

Before Operation
Pictorial Indication
Various pictorial indications are included in this manual and are
shown on this equipment so that you can operate them safely and
correctly and prevent any danger to you and / or to other persons
and any damage to your property during operation. Such
indications and their meanings are as follows.
Please understand them before you read this manual:
This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be in
danger of being killed or seriously injured if this indication is
neglected and this equipment is not operated correctly.

This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be


injured or any property damage is supposed to occur if this
indication is neglected and this equipment is not operated
correctly.

Examples of pictorial indication


The mark represents CAUTION (including DANGER and WARNING).
Detailed content of CAUTION (Electric Shock in the example on the
Electric left.) is shown in the mark.
The

mark represents prohibition.

Detailed content of the prohibited action (Disassembling Prohibited in


Disassembling the example on the left) is shown in the mark.
The mark represents instruction.
Detailed content of the instruction (Disconnect the power plug in the
example on the left) is shown in the mark.

Warning label
There is a warning label on the top cover of the equipment.
Do not try to remove, break or modify the label.

vi

Precautions Upon Equipment Operation

Never remove the cover of this equipment.


Touching the high-voltage section inside will cause an electric shock.

Do not attempt to disassemble or tamper with this equipment.


Otherwise, a fire, an electric shock, or a malfunction may occur.

Do not place a glass or cup containing water, etc., or a small metal object on
this equipment.
If water or such object gets inside, a fire, an electric shock, or a malfunction
may occur.
In case water or a metal object gets inside the equipment, turn off the power
immediately, unplug the power supply cable from an electric outlet, and contact
our head office, or a nearby branch or local office to request servicing.
Keeping the equipment in operation under such condition may cause a fire, an
electric shock or a malfunction.
In case you find smoke, strange smell or unusual heat coming from the
equipment, turn off the power immediately, unplug the power supply cable from
an electric outlet, and contact our head office, or a nearby branch or local office
to request servicing.
Keeping the equipment in operation under such condition may cause a fire or
an electric shock.
Do not use the offset function during navigation.
If the equipment is used with the offset value entered as the own ship position,
the position of your ship displayed on the screen is shifted from the real one,
and accidents may result.
When the offset values are entered, the background color of the position panel
on the display panel is colored in sky blue, and the message Position Shift is
displayed in the message display area. Check these indications, and cancel the
offset function if necessary.

vii

If the LCD module breaks and the liquid inside spills out to stick to your skin,
wash it off immediately under running water for more than 15 minutes. If you
find any skin problem afterwards, consult a doctor immediately. If the liquid gets
in your eye, wash it off immediately under running water for more than 15
minutes, and then, consult a doctor as soon as possible.
Before starting automatic sailing, be sure to check the safety of the route and
crossing safety contour.
Otherwise, accidents may result.
If the own ship has arrived at the boundary of a WPT during automatic sailing,
be sure to check the safety and perform turning manually (press the [TURN]
key ).
Otherwise, the ship keeps the course with the leg bearing, and accidents may
result.
Input the parameter accurately according to the specification of the ship.
Otherwise, accidents may result.
After changing the setting, execute to exit Navigation & Planning.
Otherwise, accidents may result because ECDIS is not affected by the set
parameter.
Before disposing of used lithium batteries, insulate them by applying tapes on
their
and
terminals.
Otherwise, they may short-circuit to generate heat, explode or cause a fire.
Before reading and writing of the file by using the USB storage, confirm that
there is not a computer virus in the USB storage.
Otherwise they may affect other equipments and may cause a malfunction.
Never attempt to check or repair the inside of the equipment.
Checking or repair by an unqualified person may cause a fire or an electric
shock.
Contact our head office, or a nearby branch or local office to request servicing.

viii

Do not use or leave the equipment under direct sunlight or in the temperatures
above 55C for a long time.
Otherwise, a fire or a malfunction may occur.
Do not block the ventilation opening of the equipment.
Otherwise, heat may accumulate inside to cause a fire or a malfunction.

This equipment is intended for use as an aid to navigation only.


If no backup measures are taken, such as using another EDIS unit for
confirmation, be sure to use official marine charts together with this
equipment to make any navigational decision.
This equipment is not designed to assess the positional information
automatically for navigation.
The positional information should always be checked by the user against
such information from other sources.
Otherwise, accidents may result.
Do not touch the equipment with hands or gloves wet with water.
Otherwise, an electric shock or a malfunction may occur.

Do not turn off the power during index creation by Chart Portfolio.
Otherwise, a malfunction may occur.

Do not leave the floppy disk in the floppy disk drive after use.
Also, do not leave the CDDVD in the DVD drive.
Malfunctions of the drives may result.
Do not place any object on the operation panel.
Avoid placing anything extremely hot, in particular, as this may deform the
panel.
Do not apply any undue shock on the operation panel, trackball and dials.
Otherwise, a malfunction may result.

ix

Do not turn on the power of the equipment with a floppy disk inserted in the
floppy disk drive.
The equipment will not start normally.
If checking of the equipment is unavoidably necessary, be sure to turn off the
power before starting checking.
Otherwise, a fire or a malfunction may occur.
If a fan alarm or CPU temperature rise alarm has occurred, immediately turn off
the power.
Keeping the equipment in operation under such condition may cause a fire or a
malfunction.
After turning off the power, contact our head office, or a nearby branch or local
office to request servicing.
Edit routes in accordance with the world geodetic system (WGS-84).Use of
routes edited with any other geodetic systems may cause accidents.
During sailing, be sure to check own ships position and bearing as often as
necessary, regardless of whether the automatic sailing is in operation or not.
Otherwise, accidents may result.
Do not turn off the power during Backup / Restore.
Otherwise, a malfunction may occur.

Do not leave the USB Storage in the USB port after use.
Malfunctions may result.
In the case of turning on the power under the condition of low temperature, do
pre-heat less than 30 minutes.
The equipment will not start normally.
Recover the system with [Recovery Boot CD] after reading an explanation well,
and having understood the function of [Recovery Boot CD] enough.
Dont continue the recovery as leave disk structure abnormal. Otherwise a
malfunction may occur.
This equipment is the system which is totally different from ECDIS
JAN701B/901B. Dont recover the system by a tool except attached [Recovery
Boot CD]. Otherwise a trouble and a malfunction may occur.
Use the Recovery Boot CD which is attached each device.
When using the Recovery Boot CD which is attached other device, it might
cause the trouble and the breakdown of the equipment.
The judgement of formal or informal about chart is depend on the
Administration organization of the flag state. About the offically of the chart,
please contact the Administration organization.

xi

Equipment Appearance
Stand-alone type (JAN-701B)

xii

Stand-alone type (JAN-901B)

xiii

Glossary
AIS

: Automatic Identification System

ARCS

: Admiralty Raster Chart Service. A raster chart published by UKHO.

ARPA

: Automatic RADAR Plotting Aid. Collision prevention radar.

AUTO SAIL

: The system automatically navigates to keep the scheduled route. Same as


automatic sailing.

Base CD

: Chart CD containing a complete chart data.

Cell Permit

: A file containing an encryption key for S-63 chart. Supplied by UKHO,


PRIMAR STAVANGER, and Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department of
Japan Coast Guard.

Chart Portfolio

: Software to manage the charts. Imports and updates the charts.

C-MAP Ed.3

: C-MAP Edition 3. A digital chart format by C-MAP Norway.

C-MAP

: Nautical chart in a digital format by C-MAP Norway.

CTS

: Course to steer. Heading command.

COG

: Course Over the Ground

Data Server

: Organization providing S-63 chart.

Display

: Screen displayed on the LCD.

DIST

: Distance

DR

: Dead Reckoning

EBL

: Electronic Bearing Lines

ECDIS

: Electronic Chart Display and Information System

ENC

: Electronic Navigation Chart. Meaning S-57 and S-63.

ETA

: Estimated Time of Arrival

ETD

: Estimated Time of Departure

F.ETA

: Final ETA. Estimated time of arrival to the final waypoint.

xiv

GC

: Great Circle

HDG

: Ships heading

Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department:


Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department of Japan Coast Guard.
Publisher of ENC.
Import (for Chart Portfolio)

: A procedure of enabling the chart supplied by Base CD to be displayed on


ECDIS.

Leg

: Line between two consecutive waypoints

LMT

: Local Mean Time

LON

: Longitude

Primary

: Main positioning sensor.

PRIMAR STAVANGER

: A Norwegian company supplying charts. Publisher of encrypted charts, S-63.

Range

: An area of the chart displayed on the screen. Represented by one half of the
length of the chart display screen.

RL

: Rhumb Line

Rubber band

: Border that indicates the selected range.

S-57

: IHO transfer standard for digital hydrographic data.

S-63

: IHO Data Protection Scheme

SA Certificate file

: An electronic file certifying the supplier of S-63 chart. Required for import/
update of S-63 chart.

Scale

: The display scale.

SENC

: System Electronic Navigational Chart

Ship-avoiding operation

: To operate the ship in order to avoid obstacles during automatic navigation,


regardless of the scheduled route.

SOG

: Speed Over the Ground

Spot depth

: Numeric representation of depth.

TCS

: Track Control Systems

UKHO

: United Kingdom Hydrographic Office

xv

Update (for Chart Portfolio)

: A procedure of reflecting the update data supplied by Update CD on the


imported chart.

Update CD

: Chart CD containing the chart data updated from Base CD. Base CD data has
been imported.

USER CODE

: A user-specific code assigned by JRC. Required in using ARCS and S-63


charts.

UTC

: Universal Time, Coordinated

VRM

: Variable Range Markers

WOL

: Wheel Over Line

WOP

: Wheel Over Point

WPT

: Waypoint

WPT-WPT

: The division of the leg specified by two waypoints. Displays data between two
consecutive waypoints.

XTD

: Cross Track Distance

XTL

: Cross Track Limit

xvi

Contents
PREFACE ................................................................................................................................................... v
Before Operation ............................................................................................................................. vi
Precautions Upon Equipment Operation ....................................................................................... vii
Glossary ................................................................................................................................................... xiv
1 Overview ...............................................................................................................................................1-1

1.1 Function.................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-2


1.2 Features ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.3 Components............................................................................................................................................................................ 1-5
1.4 Construction ........................................................................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.5 System Configuration........................................................................................................................................................1-12
2 Names and Functions ...........................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Function of Operation Panel and LCD brilliance control ...................................................................................... 2-2
2.2 Function of the Screen (ECDIS)..................................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.2.1 Display Panel ............................................................................................................2-7
2.2.1.1 Own Ship Information .....................................................................................2-8
2.2.1.2 The Other Ship Displaying Status .................................................................2-10
2.2.1.3 Auto Sailing Status ........................................................................................2-12
2.2.1.4 The setting of the route .................................................................................2-12
2.2.1.5 The other information on the own ship..........................................................2-13
2.2.1.6 CHART Information for S-57/C-MAP ............................................................2-15
2.2.1.7 CHART Information for ARCS.......................................................................2-16
2.2.1.8 Tools Panel....................................................................................................2-17
2.2.1.9 Brilliance Setting Panel .................................................................................2-18
2.2.2 Menu Title Bar .........................................................................................................2-19
3 Basic Operation of ECDIS ....................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Menu Operation ..................................................................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.1.1 How to Select the Menu ............................................................................................3-3
3.1.1.1 How to Use the Trackball ................................................................................3-3
3.1.1.2 How to Select the Menu..................................................................................3-5
3.1.1.3 How to Use the context Menu.........................................................................3-8
3.1.2 Various Panels ........................................................................................................3-10
3.1.3 How to Enter Numbers and Letters.........................................................................3-12
3.1.3.1 Use of the PS/2 Keyboard ............................................................................3-12
3.1.3.2 Use of the Software Keyboard ......................................................................3-13
3.1.3.3 Numerical Input .............................................................................................3-14
3.1.3.4 Character Input .............................................................................................3-16
3.2 General Flowchart ..............................................................................................................................................................3-17
3.2.1 General Flowchart ...................................................................................................3-17
3.2.2 Flowchart for Sailing................................................................................................3-18
3.3 Power ON/OFF and Preparation..................................................................................................................................3-20
3.3.1 Power ON ([POWER]).............................................................................................3-20
3.3.2 Selecting the Startup Menu .....................................................................................3-21
3.3.3 Startup Screen and ARCS PIN Input (ARCS Only).................................................3-22
3.3.4 Power OFF Operation .............................................................................................3-24

3.3.5 Adjusting the Brightness and Sound Volume ..........................................................3-24


3.3.6 Changing the Display Color ([DAY/NIGHT])............................................................3-28
3.3.7 How to Release the Alarm ([ALARM ACK]) ............................................................3-30
3.3.8 Displaying the Radar Image ([RADAR])..................................................................3-37
3.3.9 The AIS/TT target Display .......................................................................................3-40
3.3.9.1 AIS/TT display ON/OFF ................................................................................3-40
3.3.9.2 Opening the AIS/TT list .................................................................................3-41
3.3.9.3 Target Track ..................................................................................................3-46
3.3.9.4 File operation ................................................................................................3-49
3.3.9.5 Display Received Message...........................................................................3-50
3.3.9.6 AIS sentence .................................................................................................3-50
3.3.9.7 Activating and Deactivating AIS Targets .......................................................3-50
3.3.9.8 Panel Display of AIS/TT Target .....................................................................3-52
3.3.10 MOB (Man OverBoard) .........................................................................................3-53
3.3.11 Using the DVD Drive and Floppy Disk Drive and DVD .........................................3-55

3.4 Shifting the Chart ...............................................................................................................................................................3-56


3.4.1 Shifting the Chart with the [HOME] button ..............................................................3-56
3.4.2 Shifting the Chart with the Cross Cursor.................................................................3-57
3.4.3 Shifting the Chart with the Hand Cursor..................................................................3-58
3.4.4 Shifting the Chart with the [Port List].............................................................................3-58
3.4.5 Displaying the Chart by Entering the Position ............................................................3-59
3.5 Zooming In/Out the Chart (S-57/C-MAP Only)................................................................................................3-60
3.5.1 Zooming Area Using the Rubber Band (S-57/C-MAP Only) ...................................3-60
3.5.2 Zooming In/Out (S-57/C-MAP Only) .......................................................................3-61
3.5.3 Switching the Range (S-57/C-MAP Only) ...............................................................3-62
3.5.4 Switching the Scale (S-57/C-MAP Only).................................................................3-63
3.6 Changing the Object Category (S-57/C-MAP Only)...........................................................................................3-64
3.7 Selecting Motion/Azimuth Mode ..................................................................................................................................3-66
3.7.1 Selecting Motion Mode............................................................................................3-69
3.7.2 Selecting Azimuth Mode............................................................................................3-69
3.7.3 Setting Chart Fix Mode............................................................................................3-70
3.8 My Port List..........................................................................................................................................................................3-71
3.8.1 Adding to My Port List .............................................................................................3-71
3.8.2 Deleting My Port List ...............................................................................................3-72
3.9 Selecting a S-57 Chart (S-57 Only)...........................................................................................................................3-73
3.10 ARCS Chart Display Options (ARCS Only)........................................................................................................3-74
3.10.1 Selecting Larger/Smaller Chart (ARCS Only)...........................................................3-74
3.10.2 Selecting Chart under Cursor (ARCS Only) .......................................................3-75
3.10.3 Selecting Chart from All (ARCS Only)...................................................................3-76
3.10.4 Changing Active Panels (ARCS Only) ..................................................................3-77
3.10.5 Loading a Low Resolution Chart (ARCS Only) ......................................................3-78
3.10.6 To Select the High Resolution Chart (ARCS Only)....................................................3-78
3.10.7 Displaying the Note and Diagram (ARCS Only) ...........................................................3-79
3.10.8 Displaying Temporary and Preliminary Notice (ARCS Only) .....................................3-80
3.10.9 Adjusting Datum (ARCS Only) ..............................................................................3-81
3.11 Displaying Chart in Various Ways (Multi View/Wide Range View)................................................................3-85
3.11.1 Multi View Screen..................................................................................................3-86

3.11.2 Selecting an Area ..................................................................................................3-87


3.11.3 Wide Range View Screen (S-57/C-MAP Only) .....................................................3-88

3.12 Selecting Route and To WPT ......................................................................................................................................3-89


3.12.1 Selecting Route and To WPT Using the Display Panel.........................................3-89
3.12.2 Distance Measurement .........................................................................................3-91
3.12.3 Use XTD Alarm......................................................................................................3-94
3.13 Displaying a User Map ....................................................................................................................................................3-95
3.14 Reading Out Information on the Object ..................................................................................................................3-96
3.15 Displaying the AIO ...........................................................................................................................................................3-99
3.16 Operating EBL/VRM .................................................................................................................................................... 3-101
3.16.1 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Operation Panel ................................................3-101
3.16.2 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Context Menu....................................................3-106
3.16.2.1 Selecting 1-step/2-step Option..................................................................3-106
3.16.2.2 Dropped EBL/VRM EBL1/VRM1 (EBL2/VRM2) ....................................3-108
3.16.2.3 Dropped EBL/VRM EBL1 (EBL2) ..........................................................3-109
3.16.2.4 Dropped EBL/VRM VRM1 (VRM2) ........................................................3-109
3.16.2.5 Dropped EBL/VRM Move Origin1 (Move Origin2) .................................3-110
3.16.2.6 CCRP EBL/VRM EBL1/VRM1 (EBL2/VRM2)........................................3-110
3.16.2.7 CCRP EBL/VRM EBL1 (EBL2) .............................................................. 3-111
3.16.2.8 CCRP EBL/VRM VRM1 (VRM2)............................................................ 3-111
3.16.3 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Display panel.....................................................3-112
3.16.3.1 Drawing and deletion EBL by the Display panel .......................................3-113
3.16.3.2 Drawing and deletion VRM by the Display panel......................................3-113
3.16.3.3 Changing the base point of EBL/VRM ......................................................3-114
3.16.4 Marker Setting .....................................................................................................3-115
3.17 Running Fix ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3-116
3.18 Monitoring Dragging Anchor...................................................................................................................................... 3-117
3.19 User-Marking/Highlighting ......................................................................................................................................... 3-119
3.19.1 Marking the Event Mark ......................................................................................3-119
3.19.2 Marking the Information Mark .............................................................................3-121
3.19.3 Marking the Tidal Stream Mark ...........................................................................3-122
3.19.4 Highlight ..............................................................................................................3-123
3.20
3.21
3.22
3.23
3.24
3.25

EBL Maneuver ................................................................................................................................................................ 3-125


Cross Bearing ................................................................................................................................................................. 3-127
Inputting Clearing Lines .............................................................................................................................................. 3-129
LOP(Line Of Position) ................................................................................................................................................. 3-130
Acquisition Zone ............................................................................................................................................................ 3-138
Multi Window.................................................................................................................................................................... 3-140
3.25.1 Using the Analog Meter.......................................................................................3-140
3.25.2 Other Multi Window display.................................................................................3-141
3.26 Cursor Auto Mode......................................................................................................................................................... 3-143
3.27 Logbook............................................................................................................................................................................. 3-145
3.27.1 Displaying the Logbook.......................................................................................3-145
3.27.2 Logbook Setting ..................................................................................................3-152
3.28 Own Ships Setting...................................................................................................................................................... 3-154
3.28.1 Own Ship Symbol................................................................................................3-155
3.28.2 Vector Display at POSN1 ....................................................................................3-156

3.28.3 Danger Detection Vector and Sector ...............................................................3-157


3.28.4 Track and Time Label Display .............................................................................3-159
3.28.5 Heading Line and Beam Line..............................................................................3-160

3.29 Chart Setting................................................................................................................................................................... 3-161


3.29.1 Chart Setting S-57/C-MAP/ARCS .......................................................................3-161
3.29.1.1 Setting the "View Common" tab ................................................................3-162
3.29.1.2 Setting the "View1" tab..............................................................................3-172
3.29.1.3 Setting the "View2" tab..............................................................................3-179
3.29.2 Other Chart Setting .............................................................................................3-180
3.29.3 Save Chart Setting ..............................................................................................3-181
3.29.4 Chart Setting List.................................................................................................3-182
3.30
3.31
3.32
3.33
3.34

Chart Abbreviations ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-183


Accepting the S-57 Updating Chart...................................................................................................................... 3-184
Graphical Index............................................................................................................................................................... 3-186
Date-dependant View.................................................................................................................................................. 3-188
Setting Radar Options................................................................................................................................................. 3-189
3.34.1 Setting of RADAR................................................................................................3-189

3.35 AIS/TT Setting............................................................................................................................................................... 3-190


3.35.1 AIS/Target Track Setting......................................................................................3-190
3.35.2 Association Setting ..............................................................................................3-195
3.36 Shifting Own Ship Position ........................................................................................................................................ 3-196
3.36.1 Shifting Using the Cursor ....................................................................................3-198
3.36.2 Shifting by Entering the Position .........................................................................3-199
3.36.3 Shifting by Entering the Offset Value...................................................................3-199
3.36.4 Canceling the Ship Offset....................................................................................3-199
3.37 Printing Display (Only when Connected to a Printer)............................................................................................ 3-200
3.38 Saving the Screen......................................................................................................................................................... 3-201
3.39 Displaying the Startup Menu (Exit the navigation & Planning).................................................................... 3-201
4 Route Planning......................................................................................................................................4-1
4.1 Route Planning....................................................................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.1 Setting the Route Options .........................................................................................4-4
4.1.2 Route Planning Using the Table Editor .....................................................................4-8
4.1.2.1 Table Editing Mode..........................................................................................4-8
4.1.2.2 Table Editing Menu and Button Functions (Table Editor) ...............................................4-9
4.1.2.3 Operation Flowchart for Table Editor ............................................................4-14
4.1.2.4 Making a New Route File (Table Editor) .......................................................4-16
4.1.2.5 Editing a Previous Route File (Table Editor) .................................................4-28
4.1.2.6 Importing Route Files....................................................................................4-29
4.1.2.7 Exporting Route Files....................................................................................4-30
4.1.3 Route Planning Using the Graphic Editor ...............................................................4-32
4.1.3.1 Graphic Editing Mode ...................................................................................4-32
4.1.3.2 Graphic Editing Menu and Button Functions (Graphic Editor) ..............................................4-33
4.1.3.3 Operation Flowchart for Graphic Editor (Graphic Editing) ...................................................4-37
4.1.3.4 Making a New Route File (Graphic Editing)..................................................4-39
4.1.3.5 Editing a Previous Route File (Graphic Editor).....................................................4-51
4.1.3.6 Importing Route Files....................................................................................4-52
4.1.3.7 Exporting Route Files....................................................................................4-53

4.1.3.8 Creating a Route Using EBL/VRM Keys and Dials...............................................4-54

4.2 Creating an Alternate Route ..........................................................................................................................................4-57


4.2.1 Operation Flowchart ................................................................................................4-57
4.2.2 Creating Alternate Route.........................................................................................4-58
5 Chart Editing .........................................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Chart Edit Mode .................................................................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2 Menus and Button Functions........................................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.1 Chart Editing Menu....................................................................................................5-4
5.2.2 Button Functions .......................................................................................................5-8
5.3 User Map Editor Operation ............................................................................................................................................... 5-9
5.3.1 Flow of User Map Edit ...............................................................................................5-9
5.3.2 Operation when Editing User Map ..........................................................................5-11
5.3.2.1 Creating a New User Map.............................................................................5-11
5.3.2.2 Editing a User Map .......................................................................................5-14
5.3.2.3 Merging User Maps.......................................................................................5-16
5.3.2.4 Importing User Maps.....................................................................................5-17
5.3.2.5 User Map Setting ..........................................................................................5-18
5.4 Manual Update Operation................................................................................................................................................5-19
5.4.1 Flow of Manual Update ...........................................................................................5-19
5.4.2 Operation when Manually Updating Objects...........................................................5-20
5.4.2.1 Manual Update Setting .................................................................................5-23
5.5 Entering Objects .................................................................................................................................................................5-24
5.5.1 Selecting Object Types............................................................................................5-26
5.5.2 Entering Objects......................................................................................................5-27
5.5.3 Hiding Objects (Only during the Manual Update Operation)...................................5-40
6 Automatic Sailing...................................................................................................................................6-1
6.1 Automatic Sailing System ................................................................................................................................................. 6-2
6.1.1 Change of Course (Turning) of Normal Route ..........................................................6-2
6.1.2 Change of Course (Turning) of TCS Route...............................................................6-3
6.1.3 Route Monitoring and System Alarm.........................................................................6-4
6.2 Setting the Automatic Sailing .......................................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.3 Automatic Sailing Operation............................................................................................................................................. 6-7
6.3.1 Selecting the Route and the WPT.............................................................................6-8
6.3.2 Start Automatic Sailing of Normal Route ...................................................................6-9
6.3.3 Start Automatic Sailing of TCS Route .....................................................................6-10
6.3.4 Terminating the Automatic Sailing ...........................................................................6-11
6.3.5 Disconnect Automatic Sailing..................................................................................6-12
7 Tools and Setting/ Serviceman Menu ...................................................................................................7-1
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5

File Manager............................................................................................................................................................................ 7-2


System Information.............................................................................................................................................................. 7-5
Operating Time ...................................................................................................................................................................... 7-6
Color Test (ARCS Only) .................................................................................................................................................... 7-7
Sensor 7-8
7.5.1 Primary Position and Secondary Position .................................................................7-8
7.5.2 Bearing Setting..........................................................................................................7-9
7.5.3 Speed Setting ..........................................................................................................7-10
7.5.4 Date Data Source Setting........................................................................................7-10

7.5.5 Time Zone Data Source Setting ..............................................................................7-11

7.6 Color and Brilliance Setting............................................................................................................................................7-12


7.7 Setting the User Key.........................................................................................................................................................7-13
7.8 Setting Date/Time .............................................................................................................................................................7-14
7.9 Clear Voyage Distance .....................................................................................................................................................7-15
7.10 Setting the Alarm Options............................................................................................................................................7-16
7.11 Radar Process Setting ...................................................................................................................................................7-18
7.12 Language..............................................................................................................................................................................7-18
7.13 Code Input...........................................................................................................................................................................7-19
7.14 Analog Correct Value .....................................................................................................................................................7-20
7.15 Own ships Parameter Setting ...................................................................................................................................7-21
7.15.1 Ships Parameter...................................................................................................7-21
7.15.2 CCRP Setting ........................................................................................................7-22
7.16 Line Monitor........................................................................................................................................................................7-23
7.17 Adjust Radar Bearing, Range and Antenna Height..............................................................................................7-24
7.18 Installation Information...................................................................................................................................................7-26
7.19 TCS Maintenance.............................................................................................................................................................7-27
7.20 Radar Initial Setup............................................................................................................................................................7-28
7.21 Data Backup/Restore.....................................................................................................................................................7-29
7.21.1 How to backup the data.........................................................................................7-30
7.21.2 How to restore the data .........................................................................................7-31
8 Playback................................................................................................................................................8-1
8.1 Entering/Exiting the Playback ......................................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.2 Playing Back the Logging Data........................................................................................................................................ 8-6
9 Reference..............................................................................................................................................9-1
9.1 Alarm Function....................................................................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.2 Chart-Related Alarm Information................................................................................................................................... 9-7
9.2.1 Alarm Information of ARCS Chart .............................................................................9-7
9.2.2 Alarm Information of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart ...................................................................9-9
9.2.3 Alarm Information of S-57/S-63 Chart .....................................................................9-10
9.3 Abbreviation for Geodetic System...............................................................................................................................9-16
9.4 List of standard terms, units and abbreviations.....................................................................................................9-17
9.5 Data Formats of Files that ECDIS can Import/Export ........................................................................................9-22
9.5.1 File Types ................................................................................................................9-22
9.5.2 File Names ..............................................................................................................9-22
9.5.3 CSV File Data Structure ..........................................................................................9-22
9.5.3.1 Route Files ....................................................................................................9-23
9.5.3.2 User Chart Files ............................................................................................9-28
9.5.3.3 Logbook File..................................................................................................9-39
9.6 Display Symbols ..................................................................................................................................................................9-43
9.7 Set value list when starting ECDIS .............................................................................................................................9-66
10 Maintenance and Inspection .............................................................................................................10-1
10.1 Confirming Alarm ..............................................................................................................................................................10-3
10.2 Daily Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................................10-4
10.2.1 Color Pattern (S-57) ..............................................................................................10-5
10.2.2 Gray Scale.............................................................................................................10-6
10.3 Replacing Consumables .................................................................................................................................................10-6

10.4 The PWR FAIL Lamp and Power Supply Input .....................................................................................................10-7
10.5 User Maintenance Menu................................................................................................................................................10-8
10.5.1 Displaying/Hiding the User Maintenance Menu ....................................................10-8
10.5.2 Disk Information ..................................................................................................10-10
10.5.2.1 Drive Information.......................................................................................10-10
10.5.2.2 File Information .........................................................................................10-11
10.5.3 Setting HDD organization....................................................................................10-12
10.5.4 Hardware Key Information ..................................................................................10-13
10.5.5 CD Cleaner..........................................................................................................10-14
10.6 Recovery by Image File............................................................................................................................................... 10-15
10.6.1 Recovery by Image file in case of old processing unit (NCM-860) .....................10-17
10.6.2 Recovery by Image file in case of new processing unit (NCM-860A).................10-19
10.7 Troubleshooting.............................................................................................................................................................. 10-21
11 Operation of Multi Window ................................................................................................................11-1
11.1 Operation of Multi Window............................................................................................................................................11-2
11.1.1 Selecting Multi Window .........................................................................................11-2
11.2 Configuration for Each Graph......................................................................................................................................11-4
11.2.1 Course BarTab...............................................................................................11-5
11.2.2 ClimateTab.....................................................................................................11-5
11.2.3 Ship (Voyage)Tab ..........................................................................................11-6
11.2.4 Ship(Docking)Tab ..........................................................................................11-6
11.2.5 Current/WindTab............................................................................................11-7
11.2.6 Depth GraphTab ............................................................................................11-7
11.2.7 Engine GraphTab...........................................................................................11-8
11.2.8 Gyro/RudderTab ............................................................................................11-8
11.2.9 DraftTab .........................................................................................................11-9
11.2.10 CurrentTab...................................................................................................11-9
11.2.11 Menu ControlTab .......................................................................................11-10
12 Display and View of Multi Window ....................................................................................................12-1
12.1 Display of Each Information .........................................................................................................................................12-2
12.1.1 Display of Navigation Information .........................................................................12-2
12.1.1.1 Rearranging Blocks.....................................................................................12-3
12.1.1.2 Changing Block Size...................................................................................12-3
12.2 View of Each Information ..............................................................................................................................................12-4
12.2.1 View of Navigation Information .............................................................................12-4
13 After-Sales Service............................................................................................................................13-1
13.1 Maintenance Service.......................................................................................................................................................13-2
13.2 Retention Period of Repair Parts ..............................................................................................................................13-2
13.3 When Asking for Service ...............................................................................................................................................13-2
13.4 Checks and Inspection ...................................................................................................................................................13-2
14 Disposal ............................................................................................................................................14-1
14.1 Disposal of the Product.................................................................................................................................................14-2
14.2 Disposal of Used Batteries...........................................................................................................................................14-2
14.3 Disposal of LCD Module ................................................................................................................................................14-2
15 Specifications ....................................................................................................................................15-1
15.1 Bridge Display Terminal .................................................................................................................................................15-2
Index ...........................................................................................................................................................1

END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR JAN-701B/901B SERIES ECDIS SOFTWARE......................4


Repair Request Form..................................................................................................................................7

Overview

1-1

1.1 Function
This equipment is navigation system with ECDIS (Electronic Chart Display and Information System)
functions conforming to the ECDIS Performance Standards adopted in IMO Resolution MSC.232(82),
and also meets IMO Resolutions MSC.191(79) and A694(17). Consequently, this equipment can become
the core of an integrated navigation system (INS) or integrated bridge system (IBS) that supports
one-man bridge operation.
Safe sailing
Energy-saved sailing

ECDIS functions:
ECDIS
Compliance with the ECDIS defined by the IHO/IMO
The customers are recommended to monitor information about updated ECDIS software
version visiting to JRC website
(http://www.jrc.co.jp/eng/product/marine/application/ecdis_version.html).
Availability of S-57 (supporting S-63) format, C-MAP Ed.3, and ARCS as chart databases
Own ships track display and planned-route display on the electronic chart
Automatic checking of the safety contours and dangerous areas of the own ship (not available for
ARCS)
TT target display and AIS target display on the electronic chart
Superimpose display of radar echo on the electronic chart (when ECDIS is used with the optional
radar overlay kit)
True/Relative motion display
North-up/Course-up display
Display of route information such as latitude/longitude at destinations, bearings/distances up to
waypoints, and planned arrival time
Availability of two EBLs/VRMs
Writing of memos with alphabetic characters into the electronic chart
Display of information such as the date/time, current position, heading, and ships speed
Display symbols used to present chart information are presented in accordance with S-52 and its
appendices.
Display specifications
Size: 19-inch color LCD (JAN-701B)
23.1-inch color LCD (JAN-901B)
Selection of colors (conforming to the IMO/IHO) suitable for the daytime, nighttime, dawn, and
dusk Display of the symbols and colors recommended by the IHO.

Navigation Planning
Editing of route information
Addition, deletion, and modification of waypoints on the electronic chart
Calculation of the distance between waypoints, bearings, and planned arrival time
Up to 512 waypoints per route
Checking on the crossing of the safety contours and dangerous areas on created routes

Automatic sailing functions


Route tracking
Course change
1 Overview

1-2

Alarm functions
Safety depth crossing alarm
Dangerous areas crossing alarm
Waypoint arrival alarm

ECDIS

XTD alarm

Logging functions
Logging of navigation information onto the hard disk
Own ships playback using logged data

1-3

1 Overview

1.2 Features
This ECDIS has the following features:

ECDIS functions:
Displays vector charts such as S-57 and C-MAP, and raster charts such as ARCS
Safe navigation ensured by the crossing alarm function for safety contours and dangerous areas
and the guard ring function (not available for ARCS)
Optimized displays of navigation warnings, weather warnings, and emergency messages from the
connected Navtex receiver
Ease of operation supported by high-speed drawing and high-speed processing
Ease of user chart creation
Multi view function to display two charts at a time (not available for C-MAP Ed.3 and ARCS)
Wide range view in addition to single or multi view
Route planning in two ways, using table editor or graphic editor
Creation of alternative route during voyage
Automatic sailing by connecting with autopilot
Playback function to check the voyage
S-57 update portfolio

1 Overview

1-4

1.3 Components
A list of components and optional accessories is shown below.

ECDIS

Components
Name

Model

Quantity

Comment

Display Unit

Monitor Unit

(JAN-701B)

NCD-2095

(JAN-901B)

NCD-2096

(JAN-701B)

NWZ-173-E

(JAN-901B)

NWZ-170-E

Operation Unit

Main Unit

Included in the main unit

NCE-5163-E

Processing

(JAN-701B)

NCD-1444

Included in the main unit

Unit

(JAN-901B)

NCD-1445

Included in the main unit

Instruction Manual (Japanese)

7ZPNA4055D

Instruction Manual (English)

7ZPNA4056D

AOB Additional Kit

MPXP34119

Option

SRB Additional Kit

MPXP34118

Option

Radar Overlay Kit

MPXP34117

Option

Optional Mini Keyboard Kit

MPXP33223A

Canvas cover

(JAN-701B)

(JAN-901B)

MPOL30345A

(JAN-701B)

MPOL30350

Lightproof hood
Accessory

CD Cleaner
FD Cleaner

7ZZNA0426B

1-5

1
1

Option
Packing in 1box

1 Overview

1.4 Construction
The outline drawing of the unit is shown below.

Mass: Approx. 125 kg

Cable Inlet

Warning label

NCD-2095 Bridge Display Terminal (JAN-701B) (UNIT: mm)


1 Overview

1-6

ECDIS

Mass: Approx. 150kg

Cable Inlet

Warning label

NCD-2096 Bridge Display Terminal (JAN-901B) (UNIT: mm)

1-7

1 Overview

1 Overview

1-8

Flash-mount type
NCD-1444-T Processing Unit (UNIT: mm)

MASS:APPROX. 85kg

1-9

1 Overview

Flash-mount type
NWZ-173-ET 19 LCD Unit (UNIT: mm)

MASS:APPROX. 13.3kg

ECDIS

1 Overview

1-10

Flash-mount type
NWZ-170-ET 23.1 LCD UNIT (UNIT: mm)

MASS:APPROX. 25kg

ECDIS

MASS:APPROX. 3.5kg

NCE-5163-E Operation Panel

1-11

1 Overview

1.5 System Configuration


The following diagram shows an example system configuration connected with this equipment.
When ECDIS mode is used, it displays navigation data received from the sensor.

/ CONNING

1 Overview

1-12

Names
and
Functions

2-1

This equipment can be operated both from the Operation panel and the display.

2.1 Function of Operation Panel


and LCD brilliance control
(1) Function of operation panel
Fig. 2.1 and Fig. 2.2 show the operation panel. Table 2.1 describes the name and function of each
part on the operation panel.

23

25

10

11

12

13

14

15

24

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

Fig. 2.1 Operation Panel

2 Names and Functions

2-2

26

27

Table 2.1 Names and Functions


No.

Name

Function

POWER

Turns the power on.

PWR FAIL

Indicates the AC power supply error.


(See 10.4 The PWR FAIL Lamp and Power Supply Input.)

PWR ACK

Stops the alarm at occurrence of PWR FAIL.


(See 10.4 The PWR FAIL Lamp and Power Supply Input.)

VIDEO*1

Adjusts the brightness of radar echoes.

5
6

RAIN

*1

Suppresses rain/snow clutter.

*1

SEA

Suppresses sea clutter.

*1

GAIN

RANGE

Adjusts receiver gain.

TURN

*2

10

ALARM ACK

Press to acknowledge an alarm.

11

ROUTE PLAN

Starts/ends route the route planning function (table editor).

12

DAY/NIGHT

Changes the display color of the screen to suit the lighting conditions of the bridge.

13

PANEL

Dims the operation panel in five steps.

Range up.

Range down.
Starts turning.

*1

14

RADAR

15

AUTO SAIL*2

Turns ON/OFF the radar echo display on the chart.


Starts/Stops auto sail.

16

MENU

Display Menu title bar.

17

AIS/TT

Selects AIS/TT display.

18

HOME

Returns the own ships position into the display.

19

MOB

MOB (Man-Over-Board) panel opens.


When hold down for more than three seconds, MOB panel is closed.

20

USER

21

OPTION 1

22

OPTION 2

One of the following user-registered functions is executed:


(See 7.7 Setting the User Key.)
- Starting the route graphic editor
- Starting the chart editor
- Displaying the chart option setting screen
- Displaying the own ships option setting screen
- Adding to the port name list
- Displaying the port name list
- Changing the ARCSs active panel
- Loading ARCSs low resolution
- Displaying the logbook
- Printing the screen contents
- Saving Screen
- Saving chart option setting
- Displaying chart option setting list
- Changing S-57/C-MAP chart display BASE temporarily
- PreSet Multi Window

23

EBL1/EBL2

Turns the EBL (Electronic Bearing Line) ON/OFF, and operates the
EBL.

24

VRM1/VRM2

Turns the VRM (Variable Range Marker) ON/OFF, and operates the
VRM.

2-3

2 Names and Functions

ECDIS

Table 2.1 Names and FunctionsContinued


No.

Name

Function

25

TRACK BALL

The trackball is used to move the cursor on the screen for position
designation, selection of buttons on the display panel, menu
designation, etc.

26

LEFT BUTTON

Used for selecting a button, menus and options on the screen.


Pressing the left button is written as left-click in this book.

27

RIGHT BUTTON

Used for confirming alarms.


Pressing the right button is written as right-click in this book.

*1: Effective only when optional radar overlay kit is installed.


*2: Effective only when the equipment is linked to auto pilot.

(2) LCD brilliance control


The screens brightness can be adjusted by using the brilliance control on the display panel.
By keeping the brilliance control pressed, the screens brightness will be adjusted to an optimal
condition automatically.
JAN-701B

Brilliance control

JAN-901B

Brilliance control

Note:
For JAN-901B, pressing the brilliance control will automatically adjust the screens brightness to an
optimal condition.
When the adjustment is completed, AUTO ADJUSTMENT COMPLETE will appear on the display.
Press the brilliance control again to erase the indication.

This equipment can be operated both from the Operation panel and the display.

2 Names and Functions

2-4

2.2 Function of the Screen (ECDIS)


The functions of the display of the ECDIS unit are described here.
The screen consists of three areas, the chart display area, TCS bar and display panel (information
display area). The menu title bar appears when this equipment enters the menu mode.
Menu title bar

North arrow mark

Chart Display area

TCS bar

Display panel

Chart Display Area:


The chart display area displays the electronic chart stored on hard disk. (S-57, C-MAP and/or ARCS
charts)
On the chart, the following will be displayed according to your settings:
Your ships symbol and vector at the primary position
Your ships symbol and vector at the secondary position
Head line
Primary position track and time label
Secondary position track
EBL/VRM markers
RADAR echo
Other ship symbols, vectors and ships track (when AIS/TT is installed)
Etc.
Also, various screen panels will be displayed on electronic charts according to the function in use.

Display Panel:
The display panel displays various navigation information for sailing including alarms. Also, buttons that
will be frequently used for navigation operation are arranged in this panel.

Menu Title Bar:


When you move the cursor top of screen, the menu title bar opens to allow menu operation.
Left-clicking the chart display area will close the menu title bar.

2-5

2 Names and Functions

ECDIS

TCS Bar:
Information bar for Auto Sail. Most of the items in the TCS bar display a value by choosing route on the
Display Panel.

To WPT: Number of To WPT


Next WPT: Next number of To WPT
TTG:
Estimated Time of Arrival at the To WPT
ETA:
Speed to arrive at the to WPT by the planned time
XTD:

XTD (Cross Track Distance)

XTL:

XTL (Cross Track Limit)

In XTD and XTL, displayed side of P (Port side) and S (Starboard side).
NM/m:

Selecting units of distance. This setting is applied to XTD and XTL.

CRS:

Bearing from To WPT to Next WPT

Alarms:

The number of alarm occurring now

Warnings: The number of warning occurring now

2 Names and Functions

2-6

2.2.1 Display Panel


The contents of display panel will change according to the chart being selected, either S-57/C-MAP or
ARCS. The following shows the typical displays common to S-57/C-MAP and ARCS

ECDIS

Own Ship Information; See 2.2.1.1.

The other ship displaying status; See 2.2.1.2.


Auto sailing status. See 2.2.1.3.

The setting of a route and the display of the WPT


information; See 2.2.1.4

The other information on the own ship; See 2.2.1.5

Chart information: The item depends on ARCS


chart and other chart.
ARCS Chart: See 2.2.1.7
S-57/C-MAP: See 2.2.1.6

Tools and Brilliance Setting; It changes a display at


the arrow button.
Tools: See 2.2.1.8
Brilliance: See 2.2.1.9
The alarm which occurs at present can be
confirmed.
Besides, you can do acknowledge of the alarm and
display of the alarm list. See 3.3.7
Bearing and distance from cursor
to own ship.

The position of cursor.


Latitude / Longitude

2-7

2 Names and Functions

2.2.1.1 Own Ship Information


1)

The Basic Information

Chosen CCRP (Consistent Common Reference Point):


CCRP can be set from four (CCRP1-CCRP4). The
CCRP setting can be changed in menu [Serviceman] [Installation] - [CCRP Setting].

The picture freeze indicator:


This indicator is animating while the
screen-display is working normally.
Heading by HDG Sensor:
The name of the sensor and the present value
are displayed.
Speed Through the Water by STW sensor:
The name of the sensor and the present value
are displayed.
Course Over the Ground and Speed Over the
Ground by primary sensor:
The name of the sensor and the present value
are displayed.
CCRP position by primary position sensor:
When the offset values are entered, the
background color is colored in sky blue.

Primary sensor information: It is fixing on "POSN1".


The name of the primary sensor is displayed.
Geodetic system name: It is fixing on "WGS-84".
If the geodetic system displays a chart except "WGS-84" at the
ARCS chart, the background changes to the sky blue.
It displays a current time.
By pushing the UTC/LMT button, the interval of UTC-LMT can be changed.
In case of UTC display, a time zone is displayed as + 00:00.
In case of LMT, a set value is displayed in the time zone.
The following item can be changed setting in menu [(7)Main] - [(0)Setting] [(3)Date/Time
Setting]
Date / Time / Time Zone (if manual setting)

2 Names and Functions

2-8

Note:
The following item can change setting in menu [Main]-[Sensor].
Heading Sensor: It chooses from the connected equipment or manual setting.
STW Sensor: It chooses from the connected equipment or manual setting.
POSN1 (Primary sensor): It chooses from the connected equipment or Dead Reckoning.
POSN2: It isn't reflected in the display panel. POSN2 can set like POSN1, or unused.
Date and Time Sensor: It chooses from the connected equipment or manual setting.
Time Zone Sensor: It chooses from the connected equipment or manual setting.
The following table shows the relation of the sensor name of the display panel to the sensor setting
by POSN1.
POSN1 Sensor

Input data

Setting

2)

Display name on

Display name on

COG and SOG

position

DGPS1

GPS

(GPS)

GPS1

DGPS1

Differential GPS

(GPS)

DGPS1

DGPS2

GPS

(GPS)

GPS2

DGPS2

Differential GPS

(GPS)

DGPS2

GPS-Compass

GPS-Compass

(GPS)

GPS-C

Loran-C

Loran-C

(Loran)

LORAN-C

DR

(Dead Reckoning)

(DR)

DR

CTS / Vector Time / Water Depth

CTS (Course to Steer):


It is displayed direction azimuth to be sending to Auto Sailing system.
It is displayed during Automatic Sailing.

Vector time:
It is displaying time for vector length; Ground-referenced
velocity and Water-referenced velocity.
Vector time can be set on menu [(4)Own Ship/Track] [(0)Setting].
Depth:
It displays water depth and the standard position from the Depth sensor.
The kind of the standard position: Transducer, Surface, Keel.

2-9

2 Names and Functions

ECDIS

2.2.1.2 The Other Ship Displaying Status


In case of setting to display on the chart about the other ship information, an information name is displayed
in this column.
RADAR 1 or RADAR 2 : [MENU]-[(7)Main] [(9)Radar Overlay]- [(1)Radar 1] or[(2)Radar 2]
TT1 (Target Track 1) : [MENU][(1)AIS/TT][(1)TT1] or [(4)All]
TT2 (Target Track 2) : [MENU][(1)AIS/TT][(2)TT2] or [(4)All]
AIS (Automatic Identification System) : [MENU][(1)AIS/TT][(3)AIS] or [(4)All]

Association Setting:

When Association Setting is valid, AIS and TT targets


which are in same position are integrated..

Association Setting can change validity by clicking this


item. While Association Setting is valid, the background
color of this item changes.
It does the detailed setting of Association Setting with
menu [MENU][(1)AIS/TT][(0)Association Setting]..

If AIS is not use, Association Setting is disappeared.

Filter Setting:
It changes filter setting by AIS.
The shape of the filter has two kinds of "Ring" and "Sector". While Filter Setting is valid, the background
color of this item changes.. The setting can be changed to each shape. When both filters are invalid,
AIS filter is not function.
The feature of the filter includes two kinds of [Priority]displaying only within the limits) ,[Display](having
priority of display within the limits). It does the change of this setting and the other detailed setting with
menu [MENU][(1)AIS/TT][(0)AIS/TT Setting].

2 Names and Functions

2-10

Other Ship Information displaying procedure:


RADAR1 or RADAR2
When selecting [MENU][(7) Main][(9) Radar Overlay][(1)Radar 1], it is displayed with [RADAR1].
When selecting [MENU][(7) Main][(9) Radar Overlay][(2)Radar 2], it is displayed with [RADAR2]..
It becomes blank when making the check of [Radar Overlay] invalid.
[RADAR1] or [RADAR2] is as displayed even if it does an off center in the radar overlay and it makes
Radar Overlay off.
TT1 (Target Track 1)
Following is displayed by "TT1" input data when selecting [MENU][(1)AIS/TT]-[(1) TT1].
TT1(REL)
TT1(GND)
TT1(SEA)
Blank is displayed when not selecting [MENU][(1)AIS/TT]-[(1) TT1].
When using ground-speed stability of Internal TT.
[TT1-INT(GND) ]is displayed in box, and box is blank displayed.
When using through-the-water-speed of Internal TT.
[TT1-INT(SEA) is displayed in box, and box is blank displayed.
TT2 (Target Track 2)
Following is displayed by "TT2" input data when selecting [MENU][(1)AIS/TT]-[(2) TT2].
TT2(REL)
TT2(GND)
TT2(SEA)
Blank is displayed when not selecting [MENU][(1)AIS/TT]-[(2) TT2].
AIS
"AIS" is displayed when selecting [MENU][(1) AIS/TT]-[(3) AIS].
Blank is displayed when not selecting [MENU][(1) AIS/TT]-[(3) AIS].

2-11

2 Names and Functions

ECDIS

2.2.1.3 Auto Sailing Status


The auto sailing status panel will be displayed as follows:
Displays the autopilot steering mode.
See the autopilot instruction manual for descriptions of the various steering modes.
BLANK: Not Auto Sailing
MAN: Manual turning mode

BLANK: Not Auto Sailing


KEEP: Keep tracking the current leg
DIRECT: Direct route to Waypoint
TURN: Changing the steering
AVOID: Under ship-avoiding operation

AUTO: Auto turning mode

NotRDY: Not ready to Auto Sailing


(The route has not been loaded, or a POS1, Gyro, Log, or A/P alarm has occurred.)
READY: Ready to Auto Sailing
CONV: Conventional (Normal) type Auto Sailing
TCS: TCS type Auto Sailing

Note:
To use auto sailing feature, the Auto Pilot equipment must be connected.

2.2.1.4 The setting of the route


The setting of a route and the display of the WPT information

Route name being selected (UNLOAD appears if nothing is selected.


Drop-down list shows all route names.)
When clicking Route combo box, a drop down list of route files is displayed.
First line: File name
Second line: Comment of route file
Next waypoint being selected
(Drop-down list shows the selectable waypoints manually.)
When starting Auto Sail, the combo box can not be selected
from except WPT which is heading at current.

Bearing and Distance from the ship to the To WPT

2 Names and Functions

2-12

2.2.1.5 The other information on the own ship


CALC: (Actual Speed)
Destined waypoint (selectable from the drop-down list)
Distance from the ship to the to destined waypoint
ECDIS

Actual Speed
Estimated Time of Arrival at the to destined waypoint
Speed to arrive at the to destined waypoint by the planned time
Actual Speed mode: The mode switches over by clicking this button.

CALC: (Input ETA to calculation Average Speed)


Displays speed to arrive at the destined waypoint by the estimated
time of arrival
Setting of estimated time of arrival
Actual Speed mode: The mode switches over by clicking this button.

CALC: (Input Average Speed to calculation ETA)

Setting of speed
Displays time to go and estimated time of arrival to the destination No.

Actual Speed mode: The mode switches over by clicking this button.

Drift:

Current direction calculated by the difference between the COG


and HDG vectors
Current speed calculated by the difference between the COG
and HDG vectors.

Route:
Estimated Time of Arrival at the final waypoint

Total sum of distance between the own ship and the starting WPT000.

2-13

2 Names and Functions

WPT:

Name of displayed WPT


Latitude of displayed WPT
Longitude of displayed WPT

Select from To / Next


To: Displays To WPT
Next: Displays Next to To WPT

Pair:
[Pair] tab isn't displayed when not using TCS type Auto Pilot.
Plan course, actual heading azimuth of own ship
are displayed.

Plan vessel speed, actual through the


water speed of own ship are displayed.
Plan turn course radius, order turn course
radius is displayed.

2 Names and Functions

2-14

2.2.1.6 CHART Information for S-57/C-MAP


When left-clicked, EVENT mark is put at the own ship position.
When left-clicked, MOB (Man-Over-Board) panel opens.
When left-clicked, shows the registered port name list.
Selected port name position will be displayed on the chart.

ECDIS

The selecting Drop-down list is lit in green.


SENC (System Electronic Navigation Chart) information level
selectable with the drop down list button.
Base:
Shows basic information such as geographic area.
(This is not intended to be sufficient for safe navigation.)
Standard: Shows standard information (First selection at power ON).
Other:
Shows all information.
!:
Shows all objects that belong to standard information.
Scale of the chart being displayed
(Drop-down list shows all available scales.)
Range of the chart being displayed
(Drop-down list shows all available ranges).
Motion (selectable with the drop-down list button)
True:
Your ship moves on the chart. When the ship reaches the
predetermined limit on the screen, the chart is automatically
shifted to keep display the ship.
Relative: Your ship stays on the screen and the geographic objects
move instead.
Free:
Chart is displayed regardless of the ships movement.

Azmuth (selectable with the drop-down list button)


North Up:
The chart always orients north.
Course Up: Your ships heading faces up on the screen.
(The chart rotates. After, the screen keeps the set direction.)
Rotation:

You can rotate the chart by the specified amount using the degree
specifying box on this panel.

WPT Up:

The direction from ship to To WPT always faces up on the screen.


(The chart rotates. This is effective in the relative mode.)

Rotational degree entry box for Azimuth Rotation.


Home: Displays your ship on the screen.
Zoom In: You can magnify the range.
Zoom Out: You can reduce the range.
Zoom Area: You can magnify the specified area using a rubber band.

2-15

2 Names and Functions

2.2.1.7 CHART Information for ARCS

Note:
Function of the [EVENT], [PORT LIST] and [HOME] buttons
is the same as for S-57/C-MAP.

Displays the geodetic system of the chart.

Displays the original scale of the chart.


Scale Of the chart being displayed
Range of the chart being displayed
Motion (selectable with the drop-down list button)
True: Your ship moves on the chart. When the ship reaches
the predetermined limit on the screen, the chart is automatically
shifted to keep display the ship.
Relative: Your ship stays at the center of the chart and the geographic
objects move instead.
Free: Chart is displayed regardless of the ships movement.

Chart offset values

Opens the Select Chart panel. You can select the ARCS chart
you want.

2 Names and Functions

2-16

2.2.1.8 Tools Panel


Refer to 3.15.3
Units of distance switch button

Azimuth of EBL switch button

When left-click, units of VRM distance is changed.

T: True North mode

[NM] -> [km] -> [sm] -> [NM] ->

R: Bearing Reference mode

Tool area switch button


Displaying position of cross point
on EBL1 and VRM1
Displaying position of cross point
on EBL2 and VRM2
Base point mode switch button
[Blank]: CCRP mode
D: Dropped point mode
Active/Inactive of EBL1/EBL2 switch button
Active: Displaying EBL line on chart display area
and displaying EBL azimuth
Inactive: Displaying OFF
Active/Inactive of VRM1/VRM2 switch button
Active: Displaying VRM line on chart display area
and displaying VRM distance
Inactive: Displaying OFF
EBL1/EBL2 edit mode switch button
Active: Displaying EBL line and having the right to operate by EBL dial.
VRM1/VRM2 edit mode switch button
Active: Displaying VRM line and having the right to operate by VRM dial.

2-17

2 Names and Functions

ECDIS

2.2.1.9 Brilliance Setting Panel


Refer to 3.3.5.

Tool area switch button


Day-Night level switch button
When left-click, display level is changed.
[DAY1]-> [DAY2]-> [DAY3]-> [DUSK]->
[NIGHT]-> [DUSK]-> [DAY3]
AIS/Tracked Target brightness switch button
Changing 0 to 4 level every Day-Night level.
Video brightness switch button (In using radar)
Changing 1 to 4 levels every Day-Night level.

Operation panel light brightness switch button


Changing 0 to 4 level every Day-Night level.

2 Names and Functions

2-18

2.2.2 Menu Title Bar


When you move the cursor top of screen, the menu title bar opens and you can access to various
menus.

ECDIS

The following shows the menu trees:


Table 2.2 Menu Tree
Main Menu
(1) AIS/TT

Submenu

Submenu/Option

(1) TT1

3.3.9.1

(2) TT2

3.3.9.1

(3) AIS

3.3.9.1

(4) All

3.3.9.1

(5) Deactivate All AIS

3.3.9.7

(6) All List

3.3.9.2

(7) Select List

3.3.9.8

(8) Target Track

(1) Target Track Setting


(2) File Operation

(9) Own Ships AIS Data


(1) Message
(0) AIS Sentence

(3) Auto Sail

3.3.9.5

(2)Broadcast Message

3.3.9.5

(1) VDM

3.3.9.6

(2) TTD1

3.3.9.6

(3) TTD2

3.3.9.6
3.35.1
3.35.2

(1) Table Editor

4.1.2

(2) Graphic Editor

4.1.3

(2) Create Alternate Route

4.2

(3) Distance Measurement

3.12.2

(4) Use XTD Alarm

3.12.3

(0) Setting

6.3.2 / 6.3.3

(1) Start

6.3.4

(2) Stop

6.2

(0) Setting
(4) Ownship/Track

3.3.9.4

(1)Addressed Message

(0) Association Setting


(1) Route Planning

3.3.9.3
3.3.9.2

(0) AIS/TT Setting


(2) Route

Reference

(1) Adjust

3.36.1
(1) Cursor

3.36.2

(2) Enter Position

3.36.3

(3) Enter Offset

3.36.4

(4) Clear Offset

3.3.9.1

2-19

2 Names and Functions

Table 2.2 Menu Tree -- Continued


Main Menu
(4) Ownship/Track

(5) User Map

Submenu
(2) Anchor Watch

Submenu/Option
(1) Create Monitoring Circle

3.18

(2) Clear Monitoring Circle

3.18

(0) Setting

3.28

(1) Select User Map

3.13

(2) Unselect User Map

3.13

(3) User Map Editor


(6) Chart

Reference

(1) Marking/Highlighting

(2) Off Center


(3) User Setting

5.3
(1) Event Mark

3.19.1

(2) Information Mark

3.19.2

(3) Tidal Stream Mark

3.19.3

(4) Highlight

3.19.4

(5) Delete Event Mark

3.19.1

(1) Enter Position

3.4.5

(2) Home

3.4.1

(1) Save My Port List

3.8.1

(2) My Port List

3.8.2

(3) Save Chart Setting

3.29.3

(4) Chart Setting List

3.29.4

(4) Select S-57 Chart

3.9

(5) Fix View

3.7.3

(6) Accept S-57 Updates

3.31

(7) Graphical Index

3.32

(8) Manual Update


(1) Multi View

(2) Chart Portfolio

5.4
(1) Single View

3.11.1

(2) Top Bottom

3.11.1

(3) Right Left

3.11.1

(4) Right Top View

3.11.1

(5) Left Top View

3.11.1

(6) Right Bottom View

3.11.1

(7) Left Bottom View

3.11.1

(8) Select Area

3.11.2

(9) Wide Range View

3.11.3

(1) Create
(2) Top Window

(3) Chart Abbreviation


(4) ARCS

(5) Setting
(7) Main

30
(1) Temporary and Preliminary

3.10.8

(2) Adjust Datum Offset

3.10.9

(3) Datum Transformation

3.10.9

(1) S-57/ C-MAP/ARCS

3.29.1

(2) Other Chart

3.29.2

(1) EBL Maneuver

3.20

/Remove EBL Maneuver


(2) Cross Bearing
(3) Create Clearing Line

2 Names and Functions

3.21
(1) Not Less Than

3.22

(2) Not More Than

3.22

2-20

Table 2.2 Menu Tree -- Continued


Main Menu
(7) Main

Submenu
(4) LOP

Submenu/Option

Reference

(1)Create Lop

3.23

(2)Delete All LOP

3.23

(5) Print

3.37

(6) Save Screen

3.38

(7) Logbook

3.27.1

(8) Multi Window

(9) Radar Overlay

(1) PreSet

3.25.2

(2) Analog Meter

3.25.1

(3) Climate

3.25.2

(4) Draft

3.25.2

(5) Current Wind

3.25.2

(6) Course Rudder Graph

3.25.2

(7) Course Bar

3.25.2

(8) Ship

3.25.2

(9) Engine Graph

3.25.2

(5) Wind Graph

3.25.2

(6) TEMP Graph Setting

3.25.2

(7) PreSet Save

3.25.2

(0) Option

3.25.2

(1) Radar1

3.3.8

(2) Radar2

3.3.8

(3) Range Ring

3.3.8

(4) Bearing Scale

3.3.8

(0) Setting

7.11

(1) Make AZ

3.24

(2) File Manager

7.1

(3) Test

(1) Alarm Log

3.3.7

(2) System Information

7.2

(3) Operating Time

7.3

(4) ARCS Color Test

7.4
7.5

(4) Sensor

7.13

(5) Code Input


(0) Setting

(1) Color and Brilliance Setting 7.6


(2) Option Key Setting

7.7

(3) Date/Time Setting

7.8

(4) Marker Setting

3.16.2.1

(5) Logbook Setting

3.27.2

(6) Voyage Distance Clear

7.9

(7) Display Panel Setting

3.25.1

(8) Alarm Setting

7.10

(9) Radar Process Setting

7.11

(1) Language

7.12

(0) Buzzer Volume

3.3.5

(0) INS Setting


3.39

(0) Exit

2-21

2 Names and Functions

ECDIS

Table 2.2 Menu Tree -- Continued


Main Menu

Submenu

(1) Serviceman

Submenu/Option

Reference

(1) Line Monitor

7.16

(2) Adjust

7.17

(3) Installation

(1) Installation Information

7.18

(2) CCRP Setting

7.15.2

(4) Ship's Parameter

7.15.1

(5) TCS Maintenance

7.19

(6) Radar Initial Setup

7.20

(7) Data Backup/Restore

(1) Backup

7.21.1

(2) Restore

7.21.2

(0) Exit Serviceman Menu

Context Menu
Main Menu

Submenu

Reference

Abort

3.1.1.3

Activate AIS

3.3.9.7

Deactivate AIS

3.3.9.7

TGT Data

3.3.9.7

Cancel TGT Data

3.3.9

TGT Property

3.3.9

S-57/C-MAP /ARCS Information

3.14

Other Information

3.14

Auto mode

3.26

Zoom Area

3.5.1

Dropped EBL/VRM

CCRP EBL/VRM

EBL1/VRM1

3.16.2.2

EBL2/VRM2

3.16.2.2

EBL1

3.16.2.3

EBL2

3.16.2.3

VRM1

3.16.2.4

VRM2

3.16.2.4

Move Origin1

3.16.2.5

Move Origin2

3.16.2.5

EBL1/VRM1

3.16.2.6

EBL2/VRM2

3.16.2.6

EBL1

3.16.2.7

EBL2

3.16.2.7

VRM1

3.16.2.8

VRM2

3.16.2.8

Running Fix / Remove Running Fix

3.17

High Resolution Area

3.10.6

Load Low Resolution

3.10.5

Select Chart Under Cursor

3.10.2

Change Active Panel

3.10.4

Note and Diagram

3.10.7

2 Names and Functions

2-22

Basic
Operation
of ECDIS

3-1

Do not place any object on the operation panel.


Avoid placing anything extremely hot, in particular, as this may deform the
panel.
Do not apply any undue shock on the operation panel, trackball and dials.
Otherwise, a malfunction may result.

Notes on Description:
(1) Keys/Buttons/dials/menu names:
The keys on the operation panel, buttons on the display panel and the menu names are written as
[xxxx] in this book.
Example:
[RADAR] key (on the operation panel)
[MENU] button (on the display panel)
[(1) Cursor] (menu name)

(2)

Menu operation description:


The sequential operation to access to a menu is written as follows:
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(2) Information Mark] in that order.
You will learn how to access to a menu later.
Before starting operation, please understand how to operate the menu referring to 3.1 Menu
Operation.
The flowchart described in 3.2 General Flowchart will give you general procedure for this
equipment.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-2

3.1 Menu Operation


To operate this equipment, it is necessary to know how to select menus and set options in the menus.
Basic procedure to access to a menu and set options using the trackball section are described here. Also,
major panel (dialog box, etc.) types that will appear during operation, and how to enter numbers and letters
are described.

3.1.1 How to Select the Menu

ECDIS

3.1.1.1 How to Use the Trackball


Trackball section on the operation panel

Trackball
(Moves the cursor.)

Left button
(Left-click)

Right button
(Right-click)

Trackball:
The trackball is used to move the cursor on the
screen for position designation, selection of buttons
on the display panel, menu designation, etc.
Left button:
Used for fixing and selecting a position on the chart,
or selecting a button, menus and options on the
screen. Pressing the left button is written as
left-click in this book.
Right button (context menu selection button):
Used for displaying a context menu on the screen.
Pressing the right button is written as right-click in
this book.

3-3

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

Major cursors
Lens Cursor
Appears when area zoom function is
selected. The rubber band can be
drawn to magnify an area.

Cross Cursor
Indicates the position on the chart.
Marking Cursor

Appears while operation in following


modes.

Hand Cursor
Appears when the cursor is moved
while pressing and holding down the
left button in the chart area. You can
grip and move the chart freely.

Information Mark
Tidal Stream Mark
Highlight
LOP
Edit Cursor
Appears while moving object in User
Map Editor/ Manual Update and
Route Graphic mode. Used to change
objects and WPTs.

OffSt Offset Cursor

Arrow Cursor (Pointer)


Indicates the position on the display
panel, menu title bar and panel
(dialogue box, etc.)

Box Cursor
Indicates the position on the chart
while in User Chart Edit/Manual
Update mode and Route Graphic
mode.

Appears while setting offset in Adjust


Cursor mode.

Select Chart Under Cursor (ARCS)

Auto Mode Cursor

Appears while select chart in following


mode.

In each of the following modes, it


Click EBL/VRM line and operating

Select Chart Under Cursor

Click AIS Filter line and operating

(ARCS Only)

Click AZ Function line and operating

EBL/VRM Setting Cursor


Appears while setting EBL/VRM in
context menu.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

changes to the cursor with the angle.

3-4

3.1.1.2 How to Select the Menu


As for example, the following menu operation is described here.
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(2) Information Mark] in that order.
The general menu selection procedure is as follows:
(1) Opening the menu (entering Menu mode)
(2) Selecting the menu
ECDIS

(3) Selecting the submenu/options

(1) Opening the menu


For opening the menu, move the cursor top of screen, the menu title bar opens to allow menu operation.
[Menu Title Bar]

How to close the menu:


Left-clicking the chart display area will close the menu title bar.

3-5

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

(2) Selecting [(6) Chart] ([MENU] - [(6) Chart])


Select the [(6) Chart] on the menu title bar.
The Chart menu will open.

Step-by-step operation to select [(6) Chart] menu:


1) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor to [(6) Chart] on the menu title bar.
2) Left-click the left button on the trackball section to select the [(6) Chart] menu.
Then, the [(6) Chart] menu will open.
Explained as Left-click [(6) Chart].

The [(6) Chart] menu opens.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-6

(3) Selecting [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(2) Information Mark]


1) Left-click [(1) Marking/Highlighting] on the Chart menu.
Then, the Marking/Highlighting submenu will open.
2) Left-click [(2) Information Mark].
Then, the Location/Attribute panel will open.

Shifting the cursor


will also open the
submenu.

How to Close the Panel:


Left-click the [OK] or [Cancel].
[OK]:

Enables settings in the panel and close the panel.

[Cancel]:

Close the panel without changing the contents of the panel.

3-7

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

ECDIS

3.1.1.3 How to Use the context Menu


You may use the context menu by pressing the right button (by right-clicking).
Example: By right-clicking on the chart display

Right-clicking the chart may


open a context menu.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-8

Left-click a menu item you want.


e.g. Zoom Area.

Note:
In case of various operations which used the cursor, the operation can be aborted by choosing
"Abort" of the context menu.
Right-clicking on the chart may open a shortcut menu.

ECDIS

Left-click Abort to abort the current COG:

3-9

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.1.2 Various Panels


The major panel types that will appear on the screen and how to operate them are described here.

Value entry box


You can enter numbers.
1) First, left-click the entry box.
2) Next, enter the value.
3) To fix the entry, select other value entry
box, if any, or the [ENT] key.

Drop-down list
1) Left-click the button to open the
dropdown list.
2) Left-click an item you want from the
list.

Text box
You can enter numbers and letters.
How to enter, see 3.1.3 How to Enter Numbers and Letters.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-10

Tabs
You can display one of panels by selecting a tab.
1) Left-click one of tabs to display a panel.

Check box
Left-click the item to turn it ON or OFF.
ECDIS

The check mark () shows that the


selected item is set to ON.

Option button (Radio button)


You can select one of items you want.
Left-click one of items to turn it ON.
(Other items are automatically tuned
OFF.) The check mark

shows the

selected item.

List box
You can select any item in the list.
Left-click the item to turn it ON or OFF.
The check mark ( ) shows that the
selected item is set to ON.

To scroll up/down the list:


Left-click the [UP]/[DOWN] button.
While left-clicking the scroll bar, move
the trackball so that it moves upward or
downward.
The scroll bar will be located on the right
side or at the bottom of the panel.

Command buttons
Left-click the button to perform the button function.

3-11

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.1.3 How to Enter Numbers and Letters


You can enter numbers and letters into the value entry box or text box using the alphanumeric graphic
buttons on the display or optional full key board.

3.1.3.1 Use of the PS/2 Keyboard


Note:
You cannot enter letters using the PS/2 keyboard in case an optional PS/2 keyboard is not
installed.
1) Loosen the 2 screws in front of the equipment that fasten the PS/2 keyboard.

Screws (2 places)

2) Pull out the PS/2 keyboard.

Put in the PS/2 keyboard in the reverse order and fix it firmly when you place it.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-12

3.1.3.2 Use of the Software Keyboard


To input data, you can use numerical keyboard or Like the PS/2 keyboard.
By the column, the kind of the keyboard is changes.
Numerical keyboard:
Left-click to value entry box, numerical keyboard is displayed.
(See 3.1.3.3 Numerical Input)
ECDIS

(Input a number)

(Input latitude)

(Input the time)

Like the PS/2 keyboard:


Left-click to text box, Like the PS/2 keyboard is displayed.
(See 3.1.3.4 Character Input)

(Input comments)

3-13

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.1.3.3 Numerical Input


This section explains the numerical input rules.
Inputting number is displayed value entry box.
The function of each button is as follows.
[1] ~ [9], [0]: Input number is displayed right side that likes an electronic calculator.
[+]/[-], [N]/[S], [E]/[W]: Change contents except a number.
Plus / Minus, North / South, East / West
[CLR]: Clear the inputted value, and display default value.
[ENT]: FIX the inputting data, and close the software keyboard.
[Close]: Clear the inputted value and returns to default value, and close the software keyboard.

Example of inputting the numeric 4334.187S on LAT:


1) Left-Click on the LAT column. The software keyboard is displayed.
LAT column is displayed default value.

2) Input [4] on software keyboard. Inputting value is displayed LAT.


[4]
3) Similarly, input on software keyboard as follows.
[3]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[8]
[7]

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-14

4)

After inputting [LAT], left click the [S] bottom.

ECDIS

5)

Input [ENT] on software keyboard, the software keyboard is closed and the input data is fixed.

3-15

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.1.3.4 Character Input


This section explains the character input rules.
Inputting character is displayed on software keyboard. When fix data, the text area is entered the data.
The input character is displayed behind a character cursor. The character cursor is moved by <-, -> key
or left-clicking on input area.
The function of each button is as follows.
Alphanumeric key, Symbol key: Input character behind a character cursor on input area.
[Space]: Input space behind a character cursor on input area.
[BS]: Delete character before a character cursor.
[<-]: Move character cursor to the left.
[->]: Move character cursor to the right.
[ENT]: FIX the inputting data. Then the software keyboard is closed and the text area is entered

the

data.
[Close]: Clear the inputted text, and close the software keyboard. The text area is displayed

default

data.
The following button is changed to arrangement of software keyboard.
[abc]: Input the lowercase characters.
[ABC]: Input the uppercase characters.
[!#]: Input the symbol characters.
[Align]: In the setting [abc] or [ABC], change to arrange the software keyboard.
QWERTY or alphabetization

Example of inputting the characters Note 1:


Text box

1) Left-click on the arrow mark or in the text box. The cursor will appear in the text box.
2) With the software keyboard, press the [ABC] button. Then arrangement of keyboard is uppercase
characters.
3) Press the [N] key to input [N].
Character cursor
4) Press the [abc] button. Then arrangement of keyboard is lowercase characters.
5) Press the [o] button to input o.
6) Press the [t] button to input t.
7) Press the [e] button to input e.
8) Press the [1] button, and press the [ENT] key to fix the entry.
1

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-16

3.2 General Flowchart


The following shows a general flowchart to use JAN-701B/901B and the flowchart for sailing.

3.2.1 General Flowchart


Power switch ON

[Startup Menu]

[Startup Screen]
ECDIS

Select [Navigation &


Planning] in Startup Menu

Startup Screen
Input ARCS PIN
(ARCS only)
[Navigation & Planning Screen]

Navigation & Planning


Screen
Adjustments
Screen brightness
Operation panel brightness
Sound volume
Radar overlay, etc.

Sailing

[Navigation & Planning] will be


automatically displayed if [ ] is
left- clicked or no operation is
conducted for 10 seconds.

Display panel
(Information
display area)

(For detailed description, see 3.2.2 Flowchart for


Sailing.)
(From the [MENU])

Selects [Route]
Selects [To WPT]

Sailing monitoring
Alarm monitor
(Arrival, Route, etc.)

Operation panel
operation

Display panel
operation

Menu operation

Route Planning
Table editing
Graphical editing
Create alternate route
Chart Editing
User Map editor
Manual Update
Chart Portfolio
(S-57 only)

Exit and shutdown

Press the [POWER] key


on the operation panel

Power switch OFF

3-17

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.2.2 Flowchart for Sailing


Alarms:
If an alarm occurs, the alarm panel will blink in red and a sound will be
heard. Check the alarm contents and, after confirming it, press the
[ALARM ACK] key on the operation panel. Pressing the [Alarm List] on the
display panel shows the alarm contents. (For detailed description, see
3.3.7 How to Release the Alarm ([ALARM ACK]).)

Sailing start

Select [Route]

Select the [Route] you want from the display panel. (Initially "UNLOAD" is
shown.)

Select [To WPT]

Select the [To WPT] (for example 1 or Auto Select).

Move you ship to the sea

Move your ship manually. Your ship will always be displayed on the chart.

Ship's bearing

To WPT

Bearing to the To WPT

Your ship's symbol

Note:
Be sure that the background color is not sky
blue. If it is sky blue, your ship position is
shifted by the offset function. In this case,
return its color to gray. See, 3.34.4 Canceling
the Ship Offset.

Next Page

About Auto Sailing:


You can use automatic sailing when using together with the Auto Pilot equipment. For details, see
chapter 6 Automatic Sailing.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-18

Flowchart for Sailing -- Continued


The sequel from the
pre-page

When the ship crosses a waypoint boundary, there will be an updated next
WPT, and an Arrived at WPT alarm occurs.

Route monitoring
("Arrived at WPT" alarm
occurs when arrived at the
WPT.)
It repeats itself until the
ship arrives at the last
WPT before the final
destination.
Arrived at the final destination
("Arrived at LAST WPT" alarm
occurs.)

After confirming the alarm contents, press the [ALARM ACK] key on the
operation panel or the [Alarm Acknowledgement] button on the display
ECDIS

panel to stop the alarm.


[Alarm Acknowledgement] button

When the ship exceeds the boundary of the final destination, "Arrived at
LAST WPT" alarm will occur.
After confirming the alarm contents, press the [ALARM ACK] key on the
operation panel or the [Alarm Acknowledgement] button on the display
panel to stop the alarm.

Select "UNLOAD". Then the route selected disappears from the screen.
Unload the route

End of sailing

3-19

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.3 Power ON/OFF and Preparation


How to turn the power ON and OFF and preparation before sailing are described here.
Note that, when you turn the power OFF, you must terminate the system by following the termination
sequence described here.
Also, how to recover the system in case of hung up is explained.

3.3.1 Power ON ([POWER])


On the operation panel
Press the [POWER] key.
The power turns on, and the [POWER] key will light.

After a short while, the startup menu will be

displayed.

Do not turn on the power of the equipment with a floppy disk inserted in the
floppy disk drive.
The equipment will not start normally.
In the case of turning on the power under the condition of low temperature,
do pre-heat less than 30 minutes.
The equipment will not start normally.

[POWER] key
When ON: Lighting

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-20

3.3.2 Selecting the Startup Menu


The power turns on, and the [POWER] key will light. After a short while, the Startup menu will be
displayed.
You can select one of items.
Navigation & Planning
If [

] is left-clicked, the [Startup screen] will first appear, and then the Navigation & Planning screen will

be displayed.
Chart Portfolio
ECDIS

You can update the S-57/ARCS chart. Left-clicking this


menu will open the chart portfolio screen. (See Additional
Manual for Chart Installation.)
Chart Manager
You can update the C-Map chart. Left-clicking this menu
will open the Chart Manager screen. (See Additional
Manual for Chart Installation.)
Playback
The sailed passage can be replayed by the Playback
feature. When left-clicking this menu, Playback screen is
displayed.(See chapter 8 Playback.)
Color Pattern
Displays the S-57 chart color pattern. (See 10.2.1 Color
Pattern (S-57))

[Startup Menu]

Gray Scale
Displays the gray scale for the color test. (See 10.2.2
Gray Scale)
Note:
[Navigation & Planning] will be automatically
displayed if no operation is conducted for 10
seconds.

3-21

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.3.3 Startup Screen and ARCS PIN Input (ARCS


Only)
1) If ARCS has been installed, the ARCS PIN panel will be displayed after [Navigation & Planning]
is selected in the Startup menu. Input the ARCS PIN and left-click on the [OK] button. The
[Startup screen] will be displayed if the inputted ARCS PIN is correct and the [OK] button is
left-clicked on the ARCS PIN panel, or if the [Cancel] button has been left-clicked. If ARCS has
not been installed, however, the ARCS PIN panel will not be displayed. The [Startup screen]
will be displayed instead.
Note:
ARCS will not be displayed unless a correct
ARCS PIN is inputted on the ARCS PIN
panel.
ARCS will not be displayed if the [Cancel]
button is left-clicked on the ARCS PIN
panel.
The ARCS PIN panel is displayed only
once

after

[Navigation

&

Planning]

is

selected.
To show the ARCS PIN panel again after
left-clicking [Cancel], turn off the power of
ECDIS, and then, turn it on again to resume
the startup procedure.
ARCS will not be displayed after its contract
term has expired.

Note:
Use the software keyboard or PS/2
keyboard to input ARCS PIN.
Be sure to carefully read the caution
displayed on the startup screen.

[Startup Screen]

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-22

2) After the Startup screen appears, the Navigation & Planning screen will be displayed after a short
while.

[Navigation & Planning Screen (Example)]

ECDIS

3-23

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.3.4 Power OFF Operation


On the operation panel
Press the [POWER] key.
The power is turned off and the [POWER] key light goes out.

[POWER] key
When OFF: Unlit

Note:
If the [POWER] key is pressed during Navigation & Planning, gray screen will be displayed about
20 seconds, but the power will eventually be turn off.

3.3.5 Adjusting the Brightness and Sound Volume


Perform the following adjustments as required.

(1) Brightness of the screen ([BRILL])


Adjust the Brilliance control on the LCD monitor to adjust the brightness on the screen.
JAN-701B

JAN-901B

Brilliance control
Brilliance control

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-24

(2) Brightness of the operation panel ([PANEL])


Key operation:
1) On the operation panel
Press the [PANEL] key.
Each time you press the key, the operation panel brightness changes.
You can adjust the brightness in five steps.

Menu operation:

ECDIS

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) Color and Brilliance Setting] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) Color and Brilliance Setting] in that order.
In the User Chart editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) Color and Brilliance Setting] in that order.
The Color and Brilliance Setting dialog will appear.
2) The operation panel brightness is changed in [Keyboard] of [Brilliance].

Tool area on display panel operation:


1) The tool area is switched from [Tools] to [Brilliance] with tool area switch button.
2) The operation panel brightness is changed by left-clicking the panel brightness switch button.
Panel brightness
switch button

Each time you left-click the button, The operation panel brightness changes.

(3) Brightness of the radar overlay image ([VID])


Menu operation:
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) Color and Brilliance Setting] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) Color and Brilliance Setting] in that order.
In the User Chart editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) Color and Brilliance Setting] in that order.
The Color and Brilliance Setting dialog will appear.
2) The panel brightness is changed in [Rader Video] of [Brilliance].

Tool area on display panel operation:


1) The tool area is switched from [Tools] to [Brilliance] with tool area switch.
2) The brightness of Radar overlay image is changed by left-clicking the Video brightness switch .

Video brightness switch

Each time you press the key, the brightness of Radar overlay image changes.
3-25

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

(4) Brightness of the AIS/TT target symbol ([TGT])


Menu operation:
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) Color and Brilliance Setting] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) Color and Brilliance Setting] in that order.
In the User Chart editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) Color and Brilliance Setting] in that order.
The Color and Brilliance Setting dialog will appear.
2) The panel brightness is changed in [Target Symbol] of [Brilliance].

Tool area on display panel operation:


1) The tool area is switched from [Tools] to [Brilliance] with tool area switch button.
2) The panel brightness of target symbol is changed by left-clicking the [TGT] button.

[TGT] button
Each time you press the key, the brightness of target symbol changes.

(5) Volume Adjustment


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(0) Buzzer Volume] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(0) Buzzer Volume] in that order.
In the User Chart editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(0) Buzzer Volume] in that order.
The Buzzer Volume panel will appear.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-26

2) The alarm volume is changed in seven steps by moving the scroll bar of each alarm type. *1
3) To fix the changed setting and to close the panel, press OK. When pressing Cancel , the panel
is closed and the setting returns to the original condition.
*1 The volume of lift click sound remains the same regardless of the sound level setting.

Explanation and example of alarm type (Refer to 10.1 Alarm function)


Alarm Type

Explanation

Example (Alarm message)

System Alarm

Communication connection error and

POSN 1(Data)

hardware error

POSN1 shifted
AC offline

Operation Miss

Specifying an unrelated place

No Object

Exceeding the number of displays of

Not Allowed

AIS/TT

AIS 95% Capacity

Key ACK

Operating the key to the operation panel

(Pushing [ALARM ACK] key)

Setting Alarm

The initialization of ECDIS is insufficient

Safety contour not set


Safety depth not set

Navigation Alarm

Urgent warning on auto sail

Call-back navigator

Navigation Alarm

Nearing a dangerous object and an area

Crossing Safety Contour

Mid

Encountered abnormality of sailing

Approaching Wreck

Navigation Alarm

A variety of alarms of the others except

Timer

Low

the above.

CPA/TCPA

High

Dragging anchor

Loaded different datum chart

3-27

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

ECDIS

3.3.6 Changing the Display Color ([DAY/NIGHT])


You can change the display color to obtain optimum display matched with the lighting conditions on the
bridge. Select one of the following display colors
DAY1 (Day Bright)
DAY2 (Day Whiteback) For S-57/C-MAP only
DAY3 (Day Blackback)
DUSK (Dusk)

For S-57/C-MAP only

NIGHT (Night)

Key operation:
1) On the operation panel
Press the [DAY/NIGHT] key. Each time you press the key, the display color changes.
The order with which the display color switches over to:
DAY3-DAY2-DAY1-DUSK-NIGHT-DUSK-DAY1-DAY2-DAY3-DAY2-...
Note: When leaving for 3 seconds from the operation when operating from the darker one to the
lighter one, next key operation becomes operation from the lighter one to the darker one.

Menu operation:
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) Color and Brilliance Setting] in that order, and
then select one of items you want.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) Color and Brilliance Setting] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) Color and Brilliance Setting] in that order

Day-Night level
Day Bright
Day Whiteback (S-57/C-MAP)
Day Blackback
Dusk (S-57/C-MAP)
Night

When you select the level in "Day/Night" list and push [OK] or [Apply] button, the display color of
the screen will be changed.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-28

Tool area on display panel operation:


1) Tool area is switched from [Tools] to [Brilliance] with tool area switch button.
2) Display color is changed by [Day-Night level] switch button.

[Day-Night level] switch button


Each time you press the key, the display color changes. The order which a display color switches
over to is the same as the key operation. (Refer to "Key operation".)
Note:
When you change display colors, note that a [Night] color especially can make displayed
information difficult to read/see.

3-29

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

ECDIS

3.3.7 How to Release the Alarm ([ALARM ACK])


When the alarm occurs, the buzzer sounds and the alarm contents are displayed in the alarm display
area on the display panel to notify the operator of an alarm. When more than one alarm occurs, it changes
an alarm display every second.
After confirming the contents of the alarm, press the [ALARM ACK] key on the operation panel or
left-click the alarm acknowledge-button on the display panel to acknowledge the alarm. When confirming
an alarm, the buzzer sound stops and the alarm display disappears from the alarm acknowledge-button.
However, until the cause of the alarm is removed, in the alarm display area, the alarm maintains a
displayed condition.
[Alarm List] button displays the alarm record which occurred recently. When you want to see the alarm
which occurred in the past, it chooses "Logbook" from the menu. (See 3.26 Logbook)
The alarm acknowledge-button

[Alarm List]
botton

The alarm display area


Memo: For alarm settings, see 7.10 Setting the Alarm Options.

(1) When no alarm is found


If no alarm is found, the alarm display area displays [No Alarm].
Nothing is displayed here.
Displaying [No Alarm]

(2) When an alarm occurs


An alarm is displayed at the alarm acknowledge-button and in the alarm display area and the alarm
sound sounds.
Displaying the alarm
Blinking every 0.5 seconds
Displaying the alarm

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-30

(3) Acknowledging and canceling of the alarm (Stopping the alarm sound)
Notes:
Until it confirms the cause of the alarm, don't acknowledge an alarm.
1) The procedure of the alarm acknowledgement operation
On the operation panel
Press the [ALARM ACK] key.

ECDIS

On the display panel


Left-click the alarm acknowledge-button.
The alarm sound stops and the alarm display on the alarm acknowledge-button disappears.
However, in the alarm display area, it maintains the condition which the alarm occurred to.
To erase an alarm from the alarm display area, the problem which the alarm generated must
be solved.
No Alarm
Alarm occurs
Ex: The communication error occurs in POSN1.
The Alarm occurrence condition
(Not acknowledged)
The alarm sound sounds.
Blinking the alarm

Left-click the alarm acknowledge-button.

Displaying the alarm

Or, press

The Alarm occurrence condition

key.

(Not acknowledged)
The alarm sound stops
Disappearing the alarm

Resolved the occurring alarm

Maintaining the alarm displaying.

Ex.: The communication of POSN1 becomes


possible.

No Alarm

2) If two or more alarms have occurred, the display of the alarm acknowledge-button and the
display of the alarm display area is displaying alarm contents changed every second. When
acknowledging alarm, the acknowledgement operation is done about the displayed alarm when
operating.
3-31

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

(4) Displaying the alarm list


1) At any time, left-click the [Alarm List] button on the display panel.
Then, the Alarm List panel opens.
If you open the Alarm List panel when the alarm blinks, the alarm button in the Alarm List
also blinks.
After confirmation, you can acknowledge the blinking alarm by left-clicking the [ACK] button.
You can also open the Alarm List panel from the menu:
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(3) Test] - [(1) Alarm Log] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(3) Test] - [(1) Alarm Log] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Main] - [(3) Test] - [(1) Alarm Log] in that order.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-32

2) Left-click the [Close] button to close the Alarm List panel.


* When opening Alarm List once again, the tab to have been selecting last opens.

Detailed Alarm List refers to "9.1Alarm Function".


Icon blinks in red:
The alarm occurs and it is not acknowledged yet.
Icon stays in red:
The alarm is acknowledged but it is continuing.
Button changes to green when the alarm cause is removed.

Title of the tab displaying red:


Some alarm in the tab occurs.

ECDIS

No Icon:
The alarm does not
occur in the current
system configuration.

Icon in green:
No alarm.

ACK button in red, and blinking words:


Some alarm occurs and there are not acknowledged yet.
ACK button in red, and displaying words:
Some alarm occurs and all alarms are acknowledged.
ACK button in green:

No alarm.

3-33

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

[System Alarm Status] tab:


[System alarm status] is the alarm list of the hardware error and the communication error.
[System alarm status] is displaying, dividing into the category below:
No.1 Position Data Alarm
No.2 Position Data Alarm
No.1 Position Shift Alarm
Position Difference Alarm
Radar Data Alarm
Target Data Track Alarm
Gyro Data Alarm
Log Data Alarm
Autopilot Data Alarm
Hardware Alarm
[NAV. Alarm Status] tab:
[NAV. alarm status] is the list of the alarm which needs to solve when occurring during navigation.
[NAV. alarm status] is displaying, dividing into the category below:
Safety contour Alarm
Dangerous Alarm
Route Monitoring Alarm
Target Alarm
LAT. Limit Over Alarm
Anchor Alarm
Chart Alarm
ARCS Alarm
Area Alarm
[INFO/Warning] tab:
[INFO/Warning] is the list of the Information and Warning.
"Information" alarm occurs when not doing the initial setting. Alarm icon color is in blue when
occurring.
"Warning" alarm occurs when become condition that it should be careful of the sailing.
Alarm icon color is in yellow when occurring. "Warning" alarm is not need to acknowledge.
However, the alarm is displayed in the alarm display area during the occurrence.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-34

(5) Displaying the alarm Log table


You can display the alarm Log on the sailing.
Note:
The alarm history is displayed only latest 20 items. To check the past alarm lists, see 3.26
Logbook.
Menu operation:
1) In the normal menu

ECDIS

Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(3) Test] - [(1) Alarm Log] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(3) Test] - [(1) Alarm Log] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(3) Test] - [(1) Alarm Log] in that order.
Select the System Alarm Log tab or NAV.Alarm Log tab after open the Alarm List panel.

3-35

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

2) Left-click the [Close] button to close the Alarm List panel.


Alarm:
Displaying alarm
contents

Detected:
Displaying date when
the alarm occurred.

Acknowledge:
Displaying date when the
alarm acknowledged.

Icon blinks in red:


The alarm occurs and it is not acknowledged yet.
Icon stays in red:
The alarm is acknowledged but it is continuing.
No Icon:
The alarm is removed.

Removed*:
Displaying date when
the alarm removed.

All Clear:
Erase all displays of the alarm
except for the occurring alarm

*When switching off the power without acknowledge behind the alarm, all alarms are removed.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-36

3.3.8 Displaying the Radar Image ([RADAR])


You can turn ON/OFF the radar image on the chart. The radar image can be adjusted with the dials on the
operation panel.
Note:
To display a radar image, the optional radar board must be installed on the unit. Also, a radar
image must be sent from the radar system.
It is not possible to display the image from the Radar in chart conversion by Chart Portfolio.
If the radar system displays a short-range image, and a long-range image on the ECDIS at the
same time, the radar image on the ECDIS may be distorted.
While the radar image is displayed, the display range can be changed in 10 steps (0.5/0.75/1.5/3/6/
12/24/48/96/120nm).
If Display Color is [DAY1] or [DAY2], Display Color changes [DAY3] when radar display turn on.
For ARCS, the available display range differs depending on the chart displayed. If a display range
beyond 120nm is selected, the radar image will be turned off automatically.
Memo: For Radar settings, see 3.32 1Setting Radar Options

(1) Radar display ON/OFF from the menu


Turning ON/OFF the Radar 1:
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(9) Radar Overlay] - [(1) Radar 1] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(9) Radar Overlay] - [(1) Radar 1] in that order.
Each time you left-click [(1) Radar 1], the Radar 1 display is turned ON and OFF.
When it is turned ON, the mark is attached to the [(1) Radar 1].
The menu is closed and the image from the Radar 1 will be superimposed on the chart.
When the radar image is turned ON, the display range rings for radar echoes are shown in red.
* The scale combo box of the display panel becomes invalid.
* When Radar2 is displayed, the echo of Radar2 becomes hidden.
Turning ON/OFF the Radar 2:
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(2) Radar Overlay] - [(2) Radar 2] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(2) Radar Overlay] - [(2) Radar 2] in that order.
Each time you left-click [(2) Radar 2], the Radar 2 display is turned ON and OFF.
When it is turned ON, the mark is attached to the [(2) Radar 2].
The image from the Radar 2 will be superimposed on the chart.
When the radar image is turned ON, the display range rings for radar echoes are shown in red.
* The scale combo box of the display panel becomes invalid.
* When [Radar1] is displayed, the echo of Radar1 becomes hidden.

3-37

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

ECDIS

Turning ON/OFF the Range Rings:


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(9) Radar Overlay] - [(3) Range Rings] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(9) Radar Overlay] - [(3) Range Rings] in that order.
Each time you left-click [(3) Range Rings], the range ring display is turned ON and OFF.
When it is turned ON, the mark is attached to the [(3) Range Rings].
The range rings will be superimposed on the chart.
Turning ON/OFF the Bearing Scale:
1) It makes a Radar1 or Radar2 valid.
2) In the normal menu
Select [Main]-[Radar Overlay]-[Bearing Scale] in that order.
Each time you left-click [Bearing Scale], the bearing scale display is turned ON and OFF.
When it is turned ON, the mark is attached to the [Bearing Scale].
The bearing scale will be superimposed on the chart.

(2) Radar Overlay Setting from the menu


1) In the normal menu
Select [Main]-[Radar Overlay]-[Setting] in that order.
[Radar Overlay Setting] panel is displayed.
The following item can be adjusted:
[Gain]: Gain can be adjusted.
[Sea]: Sea can be adjusted.
[Rain]: Rain can be adjusted.
[Video]: Video can be adjusted.
Radar echo adjustment screen closes when left-click the [Close] button.

(3) Radar display ON/OFF from the operation panel


On the operation panel
Press the [RADAR] key.
The image from the radar selected by the menu operation above will be superimposed on the chart.
To clear the image, press the key again.
When the radar image is turned ON, the display range rings for radar echoes are shown in red.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-38

(4) Radar image adjustment (on the operation panel)


Note:
If menu panel adjustment ([(7) Main] - [(9) Radar Overlay] - [(0) Setting] Rader Option
panel) is selected, the following dials do not work. In this case, change the menu setting to
activate the dials. For details, see 3.32.1 Setting Radar Options.
[VIDEO]: Adjusting the brightness of radar echoes
The [VIDEO] dial adjusts the brightness of radar echoes. Turning the [VIDEO] dial to the right
increases the brightness. Adjust to the best brightness to view radar echoes.
[RAIN]: Suppressing rain and snow clutter
The [RAIN] dial suppresses clutter caused by rain and snow. Turning the [RAIN] dial
(ANTI-CLUTTER RAIN dial) to the right enhances the contours of targets that are hidden in images
of rain and snow.
Take care not to over-adjust this dial. Otherwise, you may miss small targets. This dial also reduces
sea clutter. So, using both the [RAIN] and [SEA] dials is more effective. Normally, keep this dial
turned as far as possible to the left.
[SEA]: Suppressing sea clutter
The [SEA] dial lowers the reception sensitivity in near distances to reduce sea clutter. Turning the
[SEA] dial (ANTI-CLUTTER SEA dial) to the right increases the effect of suppressing sea clutter.
Take care not to over-adjust this dial. Otherwise, you may miss small targets like buoys and small
boats.
[GAIN]: Adjusting sensitivity
The [GAIN] dial adjusts the reception sensitivity of RADAR echo. Turning the [GAIN] dial to the right
increases the reception sensitivity and widens the distances in which RADAR echo can be
observed.
Take care not to over-adjust this dial, as reception noise on screen increases. This worsens the
contrast and makes it more difficult to tell the difference between targets and RADAR echo.
Alternatively, turning the [GAIN] dial to the left to view near distances or screens containing closely
packed targets, decreases the reception sensitivity making targets easier to view.
Take care not to over-adjust this dial. Otherwise, you may miss small targets.

3-39

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

ECDIS

3.3.9 The AIS/TT target Display


You can turn ON/OFF the AIS/TT target information on the chart using the operation panel or from the
menu.
Note:
TT information is displayed only when it is received from the TT device system.
AIS information can be displayed only when it is received from the AIS device system.
For AIS/TT target settings, (see 3.33 .1AIS/TT Setting).

3.3.9.1 AIS/TT display ON/OFF


(1) AIS/TT display ON/OFF using the operation panel
On the operation panel
Press the [AIS/TT] key.
The target information sent from the radar currently selected will be superimposed on the chart.

(2) AIS/TT display ON/OFF from the menu


"TT 1" "TT 2" "AIS" can be independently selected. Selecting [All] can turns ON/OFF "TT 1" "TT 2"
"AIS" displays at the same time.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU]-[(1) AIS/TT ]-[(1) TT1] or [(2) TT2] or [(3) AIS] or [(4) All] in that order..
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU]-[(3) AIS/TT ]-[(1) TT1] or [(2) TT2] or [(3) AIS] or [(4) All] in that order..
Each time you select [(1) TT1], [(2) TT2], or [(3) AIS], its display is turned ON and OFF.
When you select [(4) All], items [(1) TT1] [(2) TT2] [(3) AIS] are simultaneously turned ON/OFF.
When the selected item is turned ON, the mark is attached.

(3) Built-in of co-processor


Internal TT target is displayed on the Chart.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-40

3.3.9.2 Opening the AIS/TT list


Note that the items Bearing, Distance, CPA ,TCPA in the table are the filtered value by the
AIS/TT settings. See 3.33.1 AIS/TT Setting .
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) AIS/TT] - [(6) All List] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(3) AIS/TT] - [(6) All List] in that order.
ECDIS

The All List panel opens.


2) Perform the following operation.
Left-click one of the tabs, to open the TT1 or TT2 or AIS list.
When you opened AIS tab, the [View AIS Detail] becomes active.

Left-click the [Close] to close the All List panel.

3) AIS Filter
It is displayed according to the display range item which was set in AIS filter.
See 3.33.1 AIS/TT Setting .

3-41

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

List items:
The items are the same for "TT1" "TT2" "AIS". The P1, P2, etc. are the target number.
Bearing:

Bearing to the AIS/TT target

Range:

Distance to the AIS/TT target

Heading: Heading of the AIS/TT target


COG:

Course of the AIS/TT target

SOG:

Speed of the AIS/TT target

Position: Position of the AIS/TT target


CPA:

Closest Point of Approach

TCPA:

Time to Closest Point of Approach

Status:

Status of the AIS/TT target

[View AIS Detail] button function:


You can view the detailed information on AIS.
When you left-click this [View AIS Detail], the AIS Information panel will open.
Left-click the [Close] to close the AIS Information panel.

[The item of AIS Information]

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-42

Target ID:
Ships Name:
Name of the AIS target ship
MMSI:
9-digit unique user ID
Status:
Sleeping / Activated / Lost
NAV Status
up to 10 characters
0: Under Way Using Engine: Under way
1: AT ANCHOR: Anchoring
2: NOT UNDER COMMAND: Not under command
3. RESTRICTED MANOEUVRABILITY: Steering capabilities are limited
4: CONSTRAINED BY HER DRAUGHT: Draft is limited
5: MOORED: Mooring
6: AGROUND: Grounding
7: ENGAGED IN FISHING: Fishing
8: UNDER WAY SAILING: Sailing
9: RESERVED FOR HSC: High-speed craft
10: RESERVED FOR WIG: Wing-in-ground effect craft
15: NOT DEFINED: Undefined

Call Sign:
Call sign on the own station (up to 7 characters)
IMO No.:
9-digit number
CPA:
Closest point of approach to the AIS target
TCPA:
Time to closest point of approach to the AIS target
Position Sensor:
Types of sensors the AIS target uses
0: NOT DEFINED
1: GPS: GPS
2: GLONASS:
GLONASS
3: Combined GPS/GLONASS: GPS/GLONASS combined type
4: Loran-C:
Loran-C
5: Chayka:
Chayka
6: Integrated Navigation System: Integrated Navigation System
7: Surveyed:
Measuring type
8-15: Not used:
Not used
Position Accuracy:

[>10m] / [<10m]

3-43

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

ECDIS

Ships Type:
Types of AIS target
2X: WIG: Wing-in-ground effect craft
30: FISHING VESSEL: Fishing vessel
31: TOWING VESSEL: Towing vessel
32: TOWING VESSEL-L > 200M B -> 25M: A towing vessel having a length of 200m or longer,
or a width of 25m or longer
33: DREDGE OR UNDERWATER OPE (Engaged in dredging or underwater operation): A
vessel that is dredging or conducting underwater operations
34: VESSEL-DIVING OPE (Engaged in diving operation): A vessel conducting underwater
operations
35: VESSEL-MILITARY OPE (Engaged in military operation): A vessel being engaged in
military operations
36: SAILING VESSEL: Sailing vessel
37: PLEASURE CRAFT: Pleasure craft
4X: HSC (High speed craft): High-speed craft
50: PILOT VESSEL: Pilot vessel
51: SEARCH AND RESCUE VESSELS: Salvage vessel
52: TUGS: Tugboat
53: PORT TENDERS: Tender boat
54: WITH ANTI-POLLUTION EQUIP (Vessels with anti-pollution facilities or equipment):
Clean-up vessel
55: LAW ENFORCEMENT VESSELS: Patrol vessel
58: MEDICAL TRANSPORTS: Medical vessel
59: RESOLUTION NO18: MOB-83 (Ships according to Resolution No18 (Mob-83)): Vessels
defined by the Radio Regulation
6X: PASSENGER SHIPS: Passenger ship
7X: CARGO SHIPS: Cargo ship
8X: TANKER: Tanker
9X: OTHER TYPE OF SHIP: Other types of ships
For categories 2X, 4X, 6X, 7X, 8X, and 9X, the second digit indicates types of loaded cargoes/status.
X1: CATEGORY A (DG/HP/MP)
X2: CATEGORY B (DG/HP/MP)
X3: CATEGORY C (DG/HP/MP)
X4: CATEGORY D (DG/HP/MP)
X9: NO ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
X0: ALL SHIPS OF THIS TYPE
For categories 6X, 7X, 8X, and 9X, the second digit indicates a vessel status.
X5: NOT UNDER COMMAND: Not under command
X6: RESTRICTED BY (her ability) MANOEUVRE: Steering capabilities are limited
X7: CONSTRAINED BY (her) DRAUGHT: Draft is limited
Latitude:
Longitude:
Bearing:
Range:
COG:
SOG:
Length:
Beam:
Draft:
Heading:
Rate of Turn:
Destination:
ETA:

The latitude at which the AIS target is situated


The longitude at which the AIS target is situated
Bearing from own ship to the AIS target
Distance between own ship and the AIS target
Bearing of the AIS target
Speed of the AIS target
Length of the AIS target
Beam of the AIS target
Draft of the AIS target
Heading of the AIS target
Turning speed of the AIS target
Destination of the AIS target
ETA of AIS target

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-44

Note:
The AIS system equipped on own ship also has the own ship's AIS data to transmit for another
ship. Own ships AIS data can be confirmed according to the following menu.
Select [MENU][(1)AIS/TT][(9)Own Ships AIS Data] in that order.(Ex.:normal menu

ECDIS

3-45

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.3.9.3 Target Track


Maximum of 200 Target Track are displayed. When more than 200, it is erased from old Target Track.
Even if it changes [Target Memory Interval], the point which was displayed by the first setting is
displayed just as it is
When setting [Target Memory Interval] in the distance interval, it is displayed when moving the
distance that a movement except the straight line was specified.
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) AIS/TT]-[(8) Target Track]-[(1) Target Track Setting] in that order..
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU]-[(3) AIS/TT]-[(8) Target Track]-[(1) Target Track Setting] in that order. [Target
Track Setting] panel is displayed.
Target Track can be displayed in a maximum of 200.
Check ONTarget Track is displayed.
Check OFFTarget Track is not displayed.

[Target Track Color & Display] panel is


displayed.
Target Track is displayed every [3sec] [5sec]
[10sec] [30sec] [1min] [3min] [5mim] [10min]
[30min] [60min] [1NM] [3NM] [5NM] [10NM].

[OFF] : Target Track is not cleared.


[All] : Clear all.
[(Color)] : Clear Target Track of selected color.

[OFF] Target Track is not cleared.


[All] : Clear all.
[Target Track No. xx] : Clear Target Track of selected number.
[Other] : Clear to No11 from No20.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-46

2) Property Mode
Right-click on the chart and it selects [TGT Property] from the shortcut menu in the normal menu.
Then move the cursor on the target and left-click. The following screen is displayed.

TT

ID of Target Track is displayed

It is possible to change into the specified


color.
In this regard, however, already allocated
Target Track Number isn't displayed.

AIS

ID of AIS is displayed

It is possible to change into the specified


color.
In this regard, however, already allocated
AIS Target Number isn't displayed.

3-47

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

ECDIS

3) Target Track Setting [Color] tab


[Target Track Color & Display] panel from left-click [Target Track Color & Display].
The color of TT can be changed and be displayed.
[Individual]: All Target Tracks are valid
[(Color)]:

All Target Tracks are valid with selected


color.
[Olive][Blue][Cyan][Green][Yellow][Orange]
[Brown][Red][Pink][Magenta][White]

[OFF]:
When selecting [OFF], Target Track of selected
number isn't displayed.
[Target Track No.1] - [Target Track No10]:
Each number is changed to the color which the
color of selected Target Track select.
[Other]:
[Other] is changed to the color which the color of
Target Track No11 - No20 selects.
4) Target Track Setting [Display] tab
In the normal menu
Select [MENU]-[(1) AIS/TT]-[(8) Target Track]-[(1) Target Track Setting] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU]-[(3) AIS/TT]-[(8) Target Track]-[(1) Target Track Setting] in that order.
[Target Track Color & Display] panel from [Display] tab is displayed from left-click [Target Track
Color & Display]. The valid or invalid of the display of Target Track can be selected.

[Individual]: Each of Target Track can be individually selected.


[OFF]:

All Target Track are not displayed.

[ON]:

All Target Track are displayed.

[Target Track No.1] - [Target Track No.10]:


Each display or hide can be selected.
[Other]: Display or hide of Targets Track No.11 - No.22 can be
selected.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-48

3.3.9.4 File operation


Select [MENU] - [(1) AIS/TT] - [Target Track] - [File operation] in that order.
[File Operations] panel is displayed.
Save, Erase, Load and so on of Target Track. can be operated.
Saved file name and date are displayed.

[Save Target Track File] panel is displayed.


It is possible to input of file name and save at this
panel.
The file name is to the alphanumeric 10 character.
When there is same file name, message to confirm
overwrite is displayed.

File of list can be loaded when clicking [Load]


button.
When the Target Track has loaded, "Current Target
Track is deleted, is that OK?" message is
displayed.

Selected file is displayed in [Target Track Display]


box when clicking [Select] button.

File in list can be deleted when clicking [Erase]


button.
The file can not be recovered when erasing, is that
OK? message is displayed and can selected [Yes]
or [No].
Target Track which is selected by [Target Track Display]
box can be displayed when putting a check.
* [Erase] button, [Load] button, [Select] button doesn't work when not choosing a file.
* The file can save in 9999. When saving any more, the error message is displayed and can not save.
* During select In [Target Track Display] box, that file isn't changed.

3-49

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

ECDIS

3.3.9.5 Display Received Message


It displays the message which was sent from AIS.
Addressed Message (Displays the sent message from AIS to the own ship)
Select [MENU]-[(1)AIS/TT]-[(1)Message]-[(1)Addressed Messages] in that order.
Broadcast Message (Displays the message which was sent without specifying an address from AIS)
Select [MENU]-[(1)AIS/TT]-[(1)Message]-[(2)Broadcast Messages] in that order.

3.3.9.6 AIS sentence


The sentence form that receives AIS is selected. Please confirm the specification of the AIS
device of the ship, and select an appropriate sentence.
Select [MENU]-[(1)AIS/TT]-[(0) AIS Message] and the following sentences in that order.
(1)VDM
(2)TTD1
(3)TTD2

3.3.9.7 Activating and Deactivating AIS Targets


The default for AIS targets is display in the inactive state. The procedures below are used for
activating and deactivating AIS targets.
Activating:
1) Or right-click on the chart, then select [Activate AIS] from the context menu.
The cross cursor will change to a box cursor.
2) Move the cursor with the track ball to an AIS target that is not active, then left-click on it. The
AIS target will become active, the status will be changed to active, and the vector will be
displayed.
When the cursor move the target, MMSI (the ships name) and CPA/TCPA are displayed.
Deactivating:
1) Or right-click on the chart, then select [Deactivate AIS] from the shortcut menu.
The cross cursor will change to a box cursor.
2) Move the cursor with the track ball to an AIS target that is active, then left-click on it. The AIS
target will become inactive, and the vector will not be displayed.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-50

Inactive

Active

Deactivating all:
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) AIS/TT] - [(5) Deactivate All AIS] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(3) AIS/TT] - [(5) Deactivate All AIS] in that order.
All AIS targets will be deactivated, and the vectors will not be displayed.

3-51

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

ECDIS

3.3.9.8 Panel Display of AIS/TT Target


Left-click on the AIS/TT target displayed on the screen so that AIS/TT information will be on the
Select List panel on the display panel.
1) Or right-click on the chart, then select [TGT Data] from the context menu.
The cross cursor becomes the box cursor.
2) Use the trackball to move the cursor to the AIS/TT target, and then left-click.
The Select List panel will open and AIS/TT target information will be displayed.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) AIS/TT] - [(7) Select List] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(3) AIS/TT] - [(7) Select List] in that order.
If you wish to have the Select List panel open in advance,
- Up to 3 targets can be simultaneously displayed on the Select List panel. The target that was
selected first is displayed in the top panel. As new targets are selected and displayed, previous targets
move down by one. When the fourth target is selected, the bottom target display panel will no longer
display the first target selection.
- To delete a panel display, left-click on the [Release] provided in each panel. As other way, select
[Cancel TGT Data] on the context menu and left-click the target. If there is a target below the deleted
target, it moves up by one.
Bearing:
Bearing towards the AIS/TT target

Target ID:
ID of the TT/AIS target

CPA:
Closest point of approach to the AIS
target

Range:
Range to the TT/AIS target

TCPA:
Time to closest point of approach
to the AIS target

COG:
Course to the TT/AIS target
SOG:
Speed of the TT/AIS target

[Additional] tab

[Common] tab

Name:
Name of the AIS target (not
displayed for TT targets)
[Release] button:
Release the selected target.

Position:
Current position of the AIS/TT target
Status:
Current status of the AIS/TT target

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-52

3.3.10 MOB (Man OverBoard)


This function is a monitoring function so as not to lose sight of the man overboard point when person
falls from ship.
1) Start MOB mode
In the Display panel
Left-click [MOB] .
ECDIS

In the operation panel


Push [MOB] key.
Then, the point where the mode started is marked as MOB point, and the MOB information
panel is displayed.

MOB Point symbol

Bearing and range from own ship

MOB information panel


POSN (Position):
Coordinates of MOB point
BRG (Bearing):
Bearing from own ship to
MOB
RNG (Range):
Range from own ship to
MOB
NM/km/sm:
Each time this button is

Own ship symbol

pushed, the unit of range


changes
NM: nautical mile
Km: kilometer
sm: statute mile
TTG (Time to go):
Time until arriving at MOB
2) End MOB mode
In the Display panel
It keeps pressing the [MOB] for three seconds or more.
In the operation panel
It keeps pressing the [MOB] key for three seconds or more.
Then, the MOB panel close, and the MOB point symbol display on the chart disappears.

3-53

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

Note

The following information can change by the administrator setting.


Display/Non-display of [MOB] button on the Display Panel
Display/Non-display of MOB information panel.
Switch of MOB Time(TTG or Time)

[MOB] button is non-displays it.

State of Time display (Display after MOB mode starts at elapsed time)

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-54

3.3.11 Using the DVD Drive and Floppy Disk


Drive and DVD
Opening the panel on the front of the main unit will allow you to use the floppy disk drive and the DVD
drive .

ECDIS

Eject button:
Use to eject a floppy disk.

Eject button:
Use to open and close the tray.

Floppy disk drive

Access lamp:
Will light green when the writing to
or reading from a floppy disk

DVD drive
Access lamp:
Will light green when information is
being read from the CD/DVD.

Note:
Do not remove a floppy disk from the floppy disk drive when the access lamp is on.

3-55

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.4 Shifting the Chart


The chart can be shifted by the following methods:
[HOME] button
Using the cross cursor (Left-click at any position on the chart)
Gripping the chart with the hand cursor (While left-clicking, move the hand cursor.)
[Port List] button
Using the position entry panel

3.4.1 Shifting the Chart with the [HOME] button


At any time, you can shift the chart where your ship to a position in the chart area with plenty of room to
advance. This function will be helpful, if you have lost your ship on the chart.
Key operation:
1) On the operation panel
Press the [HOME] key.
Menu operation:
1) On the display panel
Left-click the [HOME] button.
- You can also perform the operation from the menu.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(2) Home] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(2) Home] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(2) Home] in that order.

Your ship will return to a


position in the chart area with
plenty of room to advance.

Own ship symbol

[Screen Display of Home Position]

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-56

3.4.2 Shifting the Chart with the Cross Cursor


You can shift the chart using the cross cursor by simply left-clicking at any position on the chart. Then,
the position becomes the center of the chart.
For the detailed explanation of Motion mode, see 3.7 Selecting Motion/Azimuth Mode.

True Motion:
1) Rotate the trackball and move the cross cursor to the position you want to set it at the center of
the chart.
ECDIS

2) Left-click at that position.

Cross cursor intersecting point

[Moving to the Center of the Screen]

Relative Motion:
You can shift the location of ship display within the chart view.
1) Rotate the trackball and move the cross cursor to the location you want to set it the ship display.
2) Left-click at that position.

[Moving the location of ship display]

3-57

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.4.3 Shifting the Chart with the Hand Cursor


You can grip the chart and move it freely.
1) Rotate the trackball and move the cursor to the position you want to grip the chart.
2) While keeping left-clicked, rotate the trackball to move the chart. At this time the cursor
changes to the hand cursor

Hand cursor

Note:
If the ship is out of chart view, motion mode change to free automatically.

3.4.4 Shifting the Chart with the [Port List]


If a port is already registered, you can switch to that chart. The registered chart is displayed with the
registered scale.
To return to the original chart where the ship is there, press the [HOME] .
Note:
Before using this function, you should register a desired position as a port. See 3.8.1 Adding to My
Port List.

(1) Button operation to jump to the port


1) On the display panel
Left-click the [Port List] .
The drop-down list for ports opens.
2) Left-click a port name you want to jump there.
The position registered as the port will be displayed at the center of the screen.
Registered position as a port

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-58

(2) Menu operation to jump to the port


In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(3)User Setting] - [(2) My Port List] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Chart] - [(3)User Setting] - [(2) My Port List] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(3)User Setting] - [(2) My Port List] in that order.
The My Port List panel opens, where position and scale column are shown.
ECDIS

- To jump to the port, left-click a port name then the [Jump] button.
- To delete the registered port, left-click a port name then the [Delete] .
- To close the panel, left-click the [Close] .

3.4.5 Displaying
Position

the

Chart

by

Entering

the

You can see the chart to the position you want by entering the position in the position entry panel.
You can operate from the menu only.
To return to the original chart where your ship is, press the [HOME] .
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(1) Enter Position] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(1) Enter Position] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(1) Enter Position] in that order.
The Enter Position panel opens.
2) Enter the position (latitude and longitude), and left-click the
[OK] .
The panel closes and the chart will be displayed to the
designated position.

3-59

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.5 Zooming In/Out the Chart


(S-57/C-MAP Only)
The chart can be zoomed in or out by the following methods:
Zoom area function using the rubber band ([Zoom Area])
Zoom in/out ([Range +/-]/[Zoom In]/[Zoom Out]/Menu/ context menu)
Range selection (Range drop-down list)
Scale selection (Scale drop-down list)

3.5.1 Zooming Area Using the Rubber Band


(S-57/C-MAP Only)
You can enlarge the area surrounded by the rubber band full in the display. You can operate using the
operation panel, display panel , or menu.
1) Select the function by performing one of the following methods:
On the display panel
Left-click the [Zoom Area] button.
Right-click on the chart, then select [Zoom Area] from the context menu.
The cross cursor changes to the lens cursor.

2) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor to the top left of the area A you want to enlarge, and
left-click there.
3) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor to the bottom right of the area B you want to enlarge,
and left-click there.
The rubber band surrounds the specified area to be enlarged.
After enlarged, the lens cursor returns to the cross cursor.

Selected area

[Zooming area using the rubber band]

Switching charts:
Usually, charts with different scales are displayed in the same area.
Due to the zoom in/zoom out functions, charts with a matching scale are selected and displayed.
When a displayable scale range is assigned to an original scale of a chart and when this original scale
is beyond the range, the chart will not be displayed unless there are other displayable charts.
This equipment shows in background a chart that looks like a world map as a reference. When there is
not a chart which can be displayed, a background chart is displayed.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-60

3.5.2 Zooming In/Out (S-57/C-MAP Only)


You can zoom in or out using the [RANGE +/-] key, [Zoom In]/[Zoom Out] button, or [Scale]/[Range]
drop-down list button.

(1) Zooming in/out using the operation panel


1) On the operation panel
Press the [RANGE +] or [RANGE -] key.
Each time the key is pressed, the chart is zoomed in or out by the amount or
ECDIS

the scale set by the system.


- Select range or scale for the zooming method.
- For switchable ranges, see 3.5.3 Switching the Range (S-57/C-MAP Only). For scales, see
3.5.4 Switching the Scale (S-57/C-MAP Only).

(2) Zooming in/out using the display panel


1) On the display panel
Left-click the [Zoom In] or [Zoom Out] .
Each time you press the key, the chart is zoomed in or out by the amount
set by the system.

Over-scale alarm:
When the ship enters a different chart, an over-scale occurs
if the displayed chart is more than double in size than the
original data. The vertical lines as seen in the figure on the
right will be displayed on the chart and will appear to notify
lower chart accuracy and clarity.
The vertical lines will not display if the size has been made
larger (double or more) through proper operation.

3-61

Warning lines for overscaling

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.5.3 Switching the Range (S-57/C-MAP Only)


You can switch the range of the chart using the drop-down list on the display panel.

(1) Switching the range using the display panel


1) On the display panel
Left-click the range switching drop-down list .
2) Left-click the range in the list. The color of indicator left side of range switching drop-down list
changes green.
The chart is zoomed in or out according to the range you have selected.
Range drop-down list
Zoomed out

This indicator lights up


when Range is valid.
Zoomed in

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-62

3.5.4 Switching the Scale (S-57/C-MAP Only)


You can switch the scale of the chart using the drop-down list on the display panel.

(1) Switching the scale using the display panel


1) On the display panel
Left-click the scale switching drop-down list.
2) Left-click the scale in the list.

ECDIS

The chart is zoomed in or out according to the scale you have selected.
Scale drop-down list
Zoomed out

This indicator lights up


when Scale is valid.
Table editing
Graphical editing
Create alternate
route
Zoomed in

3-63

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.6 Changing the Object Category


(S-57/C-MAP Only)
SENC (System Electronic Navigation Chart) information available for display is subdivided into three
object categories, base display, standard display, and all information(other). You can change the object
category using the display panel.
Base Display:
Standard Display:
Other Display:

Important objects that cannot be deleted from the charts, such as coastline and own ships
safety contour.
Objects less important than base display, such as drying line, indication of fixed and
floating aids to navigation and boundaries of fairways, channels, etc.
Other objects, such as spot soundings, submarine cables and pipelines, ferry routes and
details of all isolated dangers.

Note:
The initial chart screen status is Standard Display. For safety for sailing, use the standard display
or Other display, and not the base display.
You can change the object category by left-clicking the [Base], [Standard], or [Other] on the display
panel.
1) Left-click Object Category drop-down list.

Category drop-down list

You can also use the menu to select an object category. Also, in the [Standard] and [Other]
display methods, you can specify how objects belonging to these categories should be
displayed.
will display all objects that belong to standard display and that have been
set for display.

will display all objects that belong to standard display.

For selection of object display, see 3.28.1 Setting S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Options.


About the display in the chart area:

You will see all layers being selected.

For better understanding, you can think that various layers are
used to make up the chart display. For example, standard display
consists of the base display and information (objects) for
standard display. This means that the base display is the basic
one layer and the information for standard display is another
layer, and the standard display is made up by overlapping both
layers.
Another additional layers may be own ship, user chart, event
mark, EBL/VRM, radar image, etc.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-64

Layer
Layer
Layer
Layer

EVENT mark, etc..


Objects of "Other"
Objects of "Standard"
Objects of "Base"

[Base display example]

ECDIS

[Standard display example]

[Other display example]

Note:
The display will be in gray without displaying a chart when a corresponding chart does not exist in
the display area, when a chart exists with only a part of data, or when the display scale does not
match the chart scale. In this case, change the scale to check for a chart.

3-65

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.7 Selecting Motion/Azimuth Mode


You can select the motion of your ship on the chart and the azimuth of your ship relative to the chart
using the display panel buttons or the menu. Note that the selectable mode differs depending on the
chart type, either S-57/C-MAP Ed.2/C-MAP Ed.3/ARCS.

S-57/C-MAP Ed.2/C-MAP Ed.3 Chart:


[Possible combination between Motion and Azimuth modes]
Azimuth

For [Rotation] mode

Motion
True
Relative
Free

North Up

Course Up

WPT Up

Rotation

Yes
Yes
Yes

No
Yes
No

No
Yes
No

Yes
Yes
Yes

Motion drop-down
list button

Azimuth drop-down
list button

ARCS Chart:
Motion drop-down
list button

(1)

Explanation of each mode:

For selectable modes, see the above explanation. For example, on the S-57/C-MAP chart, you cannot
use the combination of [True] or [Free] mode and [Course Up] and [WPT Up] mode. Also, on the ARCS
chart, you cannot select Azimuth mode.
1) Motion mode (True/Relative/Free):
True

Land and other fixed objects are fixed on the display and only own ship moves on the display.
When own ship reaches the predetermined limit, the chart is automatically shifted so that
own ship always remains on the screen.

Relative Own ship is fixed at the center of the screen and the fixed objects such as land move
relatively.
Free

You can freely rotate the chart on the display regardless of the own ships direction of travel.
Also, as the ship goes, it move and will disappear from the screen.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-66

[True Mode]
Fixed

[Relative Mode]

Heading line

[Free Mode]

Heading line

Fixed

Heading line

Own ship

Own ship

Own ship

Own ship

Fixed
ECDIS

Note:
While in Relative mode, Chart Portfolio cannot be started.

2) Azimuth mode (North Up/Course Up/Rotation) (S-57/C-MAP Ed.2/C-MAP Ed.3 Only):


North Up The chart is displayed so that the chart always orients the north. Fixed objects do not
flicker and are easily identified on the chart, and the true bearing of the objects can readily
be read out.
Course Up The chart automatically rotates so that the own ship always faces up on the display.
WPT Up The chart automatically rotates so that To WPT up on the display.
Rotation

You can rotate the chart by the specified degrees by 1-degree step.
This function is used to point the route heading up, etc.
[North Up Mode]

[Course Up Mode]
Heading line

Heading line

Own ship

Own ship

[Rotation Mode] e.g. turned 10 degrees


Heading line

[WPT Up Mode]
To WPT

Heading line

Own ship
Own ship

3-67

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3) Mode change caused by the operation:


In the following cases, the motion/azimuth mode will be automatically changed from the current mode to
another one.
From [True] mode to [Free] mode:
- When the own ship goes exceeding the display limit of the screen.
- When a chart where the ship does not exist is displayed by loading a new chart, including by means
of the [Port List] on the display panel.
From [Relative] mode to [Free] mode:
- When the chart is scrolled.
- When a chart is loaded, including by means of the [Port List] on the display panel.
From [Free] mode to [True] mode:
- When the [Home] is left-clicked.
The [Rotation] made in [Free] mode is retained if the mode is changed over to [True].
Note:
[Course Up/WPT Up/Rotation] is valid only the chart scale is not lower than 1/5,000,000.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-68

3.7.1 Selecting Motion Mode


You can select Motion mode using the display panel.
Note:
While [Chart Portfolio] is running, Motion mode [Relative] cannot be selected.

(1) Selecting Motion mode using the display panel


1) On the display panel

ECDIS

Left-click the Motion drop-down list.


Motion drop-down
list button

2) Select one of items (True, Relative, Free) by left-clicking it.

3.7.2 Selecting Azimuth Mode


You can select Azimuth mode using the display panel.

(1) Selecting Azimuth mode using the display panel


1) Left-click the Azimuth drop-down list on the display panel.
Azimuth drop-down
list button
For [Rotation] mode

2) Select one of items (North Up, Course Up, WPT Up) by left-clicking it.
Then, the display changes according to your selection.
If you select [Rotation], enter its rotational angle in degrees. (000.0 359.9 degrees).
If [True] or [Free] is selected in Motion mode, Course Up and WPT Up cannot be selected.

3-69

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.7.3 Setting Chart Fix Mode


Regardless of Motion mode or Azimuth mode, the currently displayed chart will be fixed and no other
charts will be loaded.
Note:
For C-MAP Ed.3, Chart Fix mode is not available.

(1) Setting Fix mode using the menu


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(5) Fix View] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Chart] - [(5) Fix View] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(5) Fix View] in that order.
The chart display becomes fixed.
2) Select [Fix View] in that order again to cancel Fix mode.
Example use of Chart Fix mode:
If the chart (JP440JBE) is zoomed out while Chart Fix mode is turned off, the wide area chart
(JP24NC9G) will be loaded to replace the chart automatically.

1:30,000
JP44OJBE

1:250,000
JP24NC9G

If the chart (JP440JBE) is zoomed out while Chart Fix mode is turned on, it is fixed in the display, and
no other chart will be loaded to replace it.

1:30,000
JP44OJBE

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

1:250,000
JP44OJBE

3-70

3.8 My Port List


3.8.1 Adding to My Port List
You can register any position on the chart to the My Port List. After registration, you can directly access
to that position by selecting a port name from the My Port List.
The general registration procedure is as follows:
Select a chart and scale.

Register the position to the My

Shift the position you want approximately

Port List using the menu.

at the center of the chart.


1) Display the position you want to register to the My Port List.
S-57/C-MAP:
The current position will be registered as it is to the My Port List with the current scale. So,
center the position you want before you register it to the My Port List.
When you want to select another position, shift the chart area (see 3.4 Shifting the Chart)
and zoom in/out the chart (see 3.5 Zooming In/Out the Chart
(S-57/C-MAP Only)) as required.
ARCS:
The current chart position will be registered as it is to the My Port List with the current size. So,
center the position you want before you register it to the My Port List.
When you want to select another chart:
Select right-click-[Select Chart under Cursor] or [Select Chart] on Display panel in that order.
For details, see 3.10.2 Selecting Chart under Cursor
(ARCS Only) or 3.10.3 Selecting Chart from All (ARCS Only).
2) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(3) User Setting] - [(1) Save My Port List] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu,
Select [MENU] - [(5) Chart] - [(3) User Setting] - [(1) Save My Port List] in that order.
In the Table User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(3) User Setting] - [(1) Save My Port List] in that order.
The Add to my Port List panel opens.
3) Enter a name you want to register and left-click the [OK] to close the panel.
Up to 15 characters can be input.

3-71

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

ECDIS

To display the chart registered as My Port List:


Left-click the [Port List] button on the display panel and select the port name you have entered.
(You can also select from the menu.) For details, see 3.4.4 Shifting the Chart with the [Port List]

3.8.2 Deleting My Port List


You can delete the registered port name from the My Port List as follows:
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(3)User Setting] - [(2) My Port List] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Chart] - [(3)User Setting] - [(2) My Port List] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(3)User Setting] - [(2) My Port List] in that order.
The My Port List panel opens, where the registered port names are shown.
2) Left-click the port name you want to delete, and then the [Delete] button.
The selected port name will be deleted.
3) Left-click the [Close] to close the panel.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-72

3.9 Selecting a S-57 Chart (S-57


Only)
After power ON, the chart on which your ship exists is automatically called up so that the voyage can be
monitored at all times. When you want to display other chart, perform the following operation.
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(4) Select S-57 Chart] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Chart] - [(4) Select S-57 Chart] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(4) Select S-57 Chart] in that order.
The Select Chart panel opens.
2) Left-click the chart name you want and then left-click the [OK] .
The Select Chart panel closes and the selected chart is displayed on the screen.

By pressing the [HOME] on the display, you can display the chart on which your ship is.

3-73

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

ECDIS

3.10 ARCS Chart Display Options


(ARCS Only)
The following display options are explained here.
High resolution area selection with the cross cursor
Larger chart/smaller chart selection (using [Larger Chart]/[Smaller Chart] on the display panel, [Zoom
In]/[Zoom Out] in the context menu)
Various options accessible from the menu

3.10.1 Selecting

Larger/Smaller
Only)

Chart

(ARCS

In the ARCS chart, you can select a larger or smaller chart using the display panel, menu, or the
[RANGE+/-] key on the operation panel.
On the operation panel
Press the [RANGE +] or [RANGE -] key.
On the display panel
Left-click the [Large Chart] or [Small Chart]
Each time you left-click the button, the larger chart or smaller chart will be displayed.

Note:
An error message may be displayed when you switch a larger or smaller chart. For details of
error messages, see 9.2.1 Alarm Information of ARCS Chart.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-74

3.10.2 Selecting Chart under Cursor


(ARCS Only)
1) Or right-click on the chart, then select [Select Chart under Cursor] from the context menu.
Move the cursor to the desired chart with the track ball, then left-click to open the [Select Chart]
panel.
2) Left-click the chart No. you want and then left-click the [OK].
The panel closes and the selected chart is displayed on the screen.
ECDIS

If Preview is turned on, a low resolution chart of the temporarily chosen chart will be displayed.

Note:
When a chart is not displayed but a corresponding chart is displayed in the display area, the area
where a chart exists will be displayed in blue and the area where a chart does not exist will be
displayed in gray.

3-75

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.10.3 Selecting Chart from All (ARCS Only)


You can select a chart from all the charts loaded in the hard disk.
1) Left-clicking [Select Chart] button on the display panel.
The Select Chart panel opens.
2) Left-click the chart No. you want, and then left-click the [OK].
The panel closes and the selected chart is displayed on the screen.
If Preview is turned on, a low resolution chart of the temporarily chosen chart will be displayed.
You can open the Select Chart panel by left-clicking [Select Chart] on the
display panel.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-76

3.10.4 Changing Active Panels (ARCS Only)


A panel is displayed as a blue square for each chart. A selected chart will be displayed.
1) Right-click on the chart, then select [Change Active Panel] from the context menu.
An available chart will be displayed as a blue square.
2) Left-click on the blue rectangular so that the selected chart will be displayed.

ECDIS

Blue square

[Selected chart]

3-77

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.10.5 Loading a Low Resolution Chart


(ARCS Only)
You can select the low resolution chart.
1) Right-click on the chart, then select [Load Low Resolution] from the context menu.
Then, the low resolution chart is displayed on the screen.

3.10.6 To Select the High Resolution Chart


(ARCS Only)
1) Right-click the cursor on the chart and select the High Resolution Area from the context menu
by left-clicking it. Then, the orange square frame with the lens cursor appears. The area
surrounded by the orange frame shows are to be magnified.
2) Move the cursor (orange frame) to specify the area to be magnified and left-click the cursor.

Orange frame

[Magnified chart: High resolution chart]

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-78

3.10.7 Displaying the Note and Diagram (ARCS Only)


You can display the note and diagram list defined by the current chart.
1) Right-click on the chart, then select [Note and Diagram] from the context menu.
The Note and Diagram panel opens.

ECDIS

2) When the desired items are selected, the notes and diagrams for the corresponding chart are
displayed. The panel can be closed with the [Close] , and the chart will return to the original
display position.
Note:
The note and diagram information is included in the ARCS chart. If the chart used does not
include such information, the notes and diagrams will not be displayed.

3-79

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.10.8 Displaying Temporary and Preliminary


Notice (ARCS Only)
You can display the temporary and preliminary notice list of the current chart.
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(4) ARCS] - [(1) Temporary and Preliminary] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Chart] - [(4) ARCS] - [(1) Temporary and Preliminary] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(4) ARCS] - [(1) Temporary and Preliminary] in that order.
The Temporary and Preliminary panel opens.

Depending on the chart used, the items may not be displayed on the panel.
2) Select the item you want to display, and then left-click the [OK].
Then, the Information panel of the temporary and preliminary notice list for the current chart is
displayed as shown in the picture.

Temporary and Preliminary Notices can be displayed only when the chart has been
updated.
Note:
The temporary and preliminary notices are included in the ARCS chart. If the chart used does not
include such notices, they will not be displayed.
3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-80

3.10.9 Adjusting Datum (ARCS Only)


(1) Entering offset
You can shift the chart position by entering offset values (latitude/longitude) or by using the cursor.

Note:
Do not adjust datum offset unless you need it. This adjustment will be required only when the
geodetic system of the chart is the local one and its display position is misaligned.
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(4) ARCS] - [(2) Adjust Datum Offset] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Chart] - [(4) ARCS] - [(2) Adjust Datum Offset] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(4) ARCS] - [(2) Adjust Datum Offset] in that order.
The Chart Shift panel opens.
2) Enter the offset value and left-click the [OK]
3) When the dialogue is opened, the current offset value specified by the user is displayed.
The offset value can be cleared with the [Clear]

If an offset value is already input or an offset value for WGS-84 is set in the chart data, then that
value will be displayed in the [Chart Shift] panel.
When an offset value for WGS-84 is set in the chart data, pressing the [Clear] will return the
display to that value.

3-81

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

ECDIS

Using the Cursor:


1) In the Chart Shift panel, left-click the [by Cursor].
The cursor type changes.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the first position. Then, move the cursor to draw the orange
line to determine the amount of offset, and left-click the cursor at the second position.
Then, the offset values thus obtained are displayed on the Chart Shift panel. (You can edit the
value.)
Note that the cursor position is always displayed at the bottom of the display panel.
3) Left-click the [OK] to close the panel.

Orange Line

Cursor

The chart will move the specified offset value. The chart offset value display section will be
displayed in blue, and Chart Shift will be displayed in Panel of the screen.
Also, the shift amount will be displayed in the display panel.

Shift amount

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-82

(2) Transforming the datum


You can convert the geodetic datum of a position or the own ships position to the WGS-84 system.
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(4) ARCS] - [(3) Datum Transformation] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Chart] - [(4) ARCS] - [(3) Datum Transformation] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(4) ARCS] - [(3) Datum Transformation] in that order.
The Datum Transformation panel opens.

2) Enter the reference position using one of the following methods:


Enter the position into the value entry boxes.
Left-click the [Ship Position] to enter the own ships position.
Left-click the [by Cursor] and left-click the cursor at the position you want. Then, the position
is entered.
3) Left-click the Geodetic Datum From drop-down list, then select the geodetic system of the
conversion source from the list.
The geodetic system will be converted, and the position after shifting and offset value will be
displayed.
4) After confirming the position after shifting and the offset displayed in the [Chart Shift] box,
left-click the [OK] to close the panel.
The chart will move by the offset value, and the offset display section of the chart will be
displayed in blue. Chart will be displayed in the message display area of the screen.

3-83

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

ECDIS

Note:
Chart position for the WGS-84 system

Chart position for the local


geodetic system

X, Y: Offset value for WGS-84


When X and Y are contained in the chart data, the geodetic system is converted automatically,
and the chart is displayed inclusive of these offset values. At this time, the chart position for the
primary geodetic system is displayed in blue on the display panel, and Chart Shift To WGS-84 is
displayed in the screen message area.
In such a case, the geodetic system conversion function will be deactivated even if offset values
are set in the Datum Transformation panel and the [OK] is left-clicked, and the message The
Datum is already WGS-84 will be displayed on the panel.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-84

3.11 Displaying Chart in Various Ways


(Multi View/Wide Range View)
This equipment has multi view and wide view functions. You can divide the chart screen into two
sections in which the same charts or different chart (not different geodetic system) can be displayed in
various ways. Also, with the wide view function, you can see the additional wide view screen in the
display panel area.

ECDIS

Active screen
Own ship's symbol
View 1 screen
Multi view
screen example
View 2 screen

View 1 screen
View 2 screen

View 2

Inactive screen

Wide view screen

[Multi View and Wide View]

3-85

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.11.1 Multi View Screen


You can display two screens, View 1 and View 2 simultaneously. The selected screen has active title
bar as shown in the above figure. The other side screen is inactive.
To change a screen actively, it left-clicks the screen to want to choose. At this time, off-center will be
used to place the cursor in the center of the screen for that view. If off-center is not desired, move the
cursor to the title bar of the view, then left-click.
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Multiview] in that order.
2) Left-click one of the submenus to select the multi view type.
Then, the selected multi view is displayed.
- Single View
When displaying Multi Window, the screen will return to the normal screen (single view).
- Top Bottom
Chart is displayed dividing top and bottom.
View1 is displayed in upper end title bar of chart and View2 is displayed in lower end title
bar.
- Right Left
Chart is displayed dividing right and left.
View1 is displayed in right end title bar of chart and View2 is displayed in left end title
bar.
- Right Top View
View2 is displayed in the upper right of View1.
View1 title bar is displayed in lower end of View1 and View2 title bar is displayed in
upper end of View2.
- Left Top View
View2 is displayed in the upper left of View1.
View1 title bar is displayed in lower end of View1 and View2 title bar is displayed in
upper end of View2.
- Right Bottom View
View2 is displayed in the lower right of View1.
View1 title bar is displayed in upper end of View1 and View2 title bar is displayed in
lower end of View2.
- Left Bottom View
View2 is displayed in the lower left of View1.
View1 title bar is displayed in upper end of View1 and View2 title bar is displayed in
lower end of View2.
- Select Area
A selected area will be displayed as view 2.
(Refer to 3.11.2 Selecting an Area for more information)
- Wide Range View
[Wide Range View] is displayed in the display panel.
(Refer to 3.11.3 Wide Range View Screen (S-57/C-MAP Only) for more information)

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-86

(Single view)

(Top Bottom view)

(Right Left view)

(Right Top view)


View 2

View 1
View 1

View 2

View 1

View 2

(Left Top view)

(Right Bottom view)

(Left Bottom view)


ECDIS

View 1

View 2

View 1
View 1
View 2

View 2

Scale, Range, Motion mode, Azimuth mode can be set to each of View1 and View2.
The following is displayed only in View1. It isn't displayed in View2.
Own ships track, Plan route
Event mark, Information mark, Tide mark, Highlighting, Reference Point, Clearing Line, Cross
Bearing, LOP, AIS, TT, Radar overlay, User map
It is canceled when changing View1/View2 during the following operation.
During EBL maneuver creating
During Make AZ
Multi-view display is canceled when doing the following operation.
Starts the Route Planning
Starts the User Map Editor
Select Single View
Manual Update is reflected in View1 and View2 both.
As for the display panel one of the following, the value of active View in View1/View2 is displayed.
Range
Scale
Motion mode
Azimuth mode
Note:
In View 2, the radar overlay, route, AIS/TT target ship symbols, own ships track, user chart objects
and manual updates are not displayed.

3.11.2 Selecting an Area


A selected area will be displayed as view 2.
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Multiview] - [(8) Select Area] in that order.
The cursor becomes the lens cursor.
2) If previous view mode was single view, the area selected with the lens cursor will be displayed
in the upper right of View1. If previous view mode was multi view, selected area in view1 is
displayed in view2.

3-87

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.11.3 Wide Range View Screen (S-57/C-MAP Only)


You can display the wide view screen on the display panel. The buttons that were the wide view screen
section move to the upper part of the screen.
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Multiview] - [(9) Wide Range View] in that order.
The wide range view screen appears in the display panel area.
In the wide range view screen, the currently displayed area is surrounded by the blue line.
If the same chart is displayed in multi view, the view 1 chart area will be surrounded by a blue
line and the view 2 chart areas will be surrounded with a red line.

Wide view

Area currently displayed (Blue line)

To close the wide view screen:


Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Multiview] - [(9) Wide Range View] in that order.
Then, the wide view screen disappears from the display panel and the buttons return to the original
place.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-88

3.12 Selecting Route and To WPT


When you start sailing, select the Route and To WPT as follows: Note that the route file extension shows
the route type. More specifically, the extension .rtn is used for Normal type and .rta is used for TOS
type.

3.12.1 Selecting Route and To WPT Using the


Display Panel
(1) Selecting the route using the display panel
1) Left-click the drop-down list button to open the Route list.
2) Left-click the route name you want in the drop-down list.
When you select the route name, it is read from hard disk and the route image is displayed on
the chart.
The initial route status is UNLOAD.

Deleting the route:


To delete the route being selected from the chart, left-click the drop-down list button to open the
Route list, and then left-click UNLOAD.
The selected route is deleted from the screen.

Note:
If the scheduled route is on floppy /CD/DVD disk, you can copy it to hard disk using the File
Manager. See 7.1 File Manager.

(2) Selecting waypoint using the display panel


As you sail, the waypoint number that the ship is currently heading to is displayed.
There are two ways, automatic and manual, for selecting the waypoint number.

Automatic selection (Auto Select):


The waypoint nearest the current position becomes the next waypoint. When your ship passes this
waypoint, the waypoint is automatically updated to the next waypoint.
1) Left-click the drop-down list button to open the To WPT list.
2) Left-click the Auto Select.

3-89

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

ECDIS

Manual selection:
To select any waypoint, manually select the waypoint.
1) Left-click the drop-down list button to open the To WPT list.
2) Left-click any waypoint number.
For example, when you start from the beginning of the
selected route, left-click 1 in the To WPT drop-down
list.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-90

3.12.2 Distance Measurement


You can calculate the distance between WPTs or between own ship and a WPT with the calculator
(Distance Measurement panel).
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(3) Distance Measurement] in the order.
Then, the Distance Measurement panel opens.
Distance Measurement panel isn't displayed when not loading a route. Load a route.
2) Left-click the drop-down list button in the [From] area, and select [Way Point], [Picked Point], or
[Own Ship]. If you have selected [Way Point] or [Own Ship], select the WPT number you want
from the [WPT No.] drop-down list. If you have selected [Picked Point], specify coordinates by
left-clicking an arbitrary point on the route.
3) Left-click the drop-down list button in the [To] area, and select [Way Point] or [Picked Point]. If
you have selected [Way Point], select the WPT number you want from the [WPT No.]
drop-down list. If you have selected [Picked Point], specify coordinates by left-clicking an
arbitrary point on the route.
4) The distance from the start point to the end point is automatically calculated, and the
calculation result is displayed in the [Distance] box.

Left-click the [Close] button.

[Select Way point/Picked Point/Own Ship.]

[Select WPT No.]

[Resultant]

3-91

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

ECDIS

Example use of [Distance Measurement] panel:


When selecting [Way Point]

Select [Way Point] and an arbitrary WPT No.

The calculation result is displayed.


The route between the selected WPTs is shown in green.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-92

When selecting [Picked Point]


Select [Picked Point], and left-click an arbitrary

Own ship position

point on the route.

ECDIS

The calculation result is displayed.


The route from the arbitrary point to WPT No. 02 you have selected is shown in green.
When selecting [Own Ship]
Own ship position

Select [Own Ship].

Select WPT to go
through.

The calculation result is displayed.


The route from the own ship position to WPT No. 03 via selected WPT is shown in green.

3-93

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.12.3 Use XTD Alarm


XTD (Cross Track Distance) Alarm occurs when course off the plan route when XTD alarm is ON.
With the following menu, the effectively of the XTD alarm can be changed.
1) In normal menu
Select [(2) Route] - [(4) Use XTD Alarm] in that order.
The check in the menu switches over. When a check is displayed, the XTD alarm becomes ON.
The XTD alarm occurs when course off the plan route when XTD alarm is ON.
The XTD alarm doesnt occur when course off the plan route when XTD alarm is OFF.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-94

3.13 Displaying a User Map


You can display a user chart you have made.
Note:
Before use of this function, you need to make a user chart beforehand. See chapter 5 Chart
Editing.
ECDIS

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(5) User Map] - [(1) select User Map] in that order.
The Open Chart File panel opens.

2) Left-click the user chart name you want and then left-click the [OK] button.
The Open Chart File panel closes and the selected user chart is displayed on the screen.

To clear the displayed user chart from the screen:


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) User Map] - [(2) Unselect User Map] in that order.
Then, the user chart is cleared from the screen.

3-95

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.14 Reading Out Information on the


Object
Each of the objects on the chart has its own information (e.g. lighthouse, buoy, depth contour, land, river).
For example, if an object is a lighthouse, information such as lighting color and frequency can be readout.
If the object is depth contour, the water depth can be read out. The chart will be the original chart
(S-57/C-MAP/ARCS).

(1) Reading out the object on the S-57/C-MAP/ARCS chart using the menu
1) Right-click on the chart, then select [S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information] from the context menu.
Then, the cross cursor changes to the box cursor (
).
2) Rotate the trackball, point the cursor to the object on the chart, and left-click the cursor.
Then, the Information panel opens according to the selected object.
To close the panel, left-click the [Close] button.
[Example: When [S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information] is selected]

[S-57/C-MAP Chat Information]

[ARCS Chat Information]

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-96

(2) Displaying additional chart information:


When an object has additional information, the name of the additional information will be displayed in the
combo box under the Information panel.
1)

Select the information name to be displayed, then left-click the [Show].

2)

The additional information will be displayed.

To close the additional information, left-click the [Close].


ECDIS

3-97

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

(3) Reading out the event/tidal stream/highlight mark/user data information and clearing
line
1) Right-click on the chart, then select [Other Information] from the context menu.
Then, the cross cursor changes to the box cursor (
).
2) Rotate the trackball, point the cursor to the object on the chart, and left-click the cursor.
Then, the Location/Attributes panel opens according to the selected object.
The Location/Attributes panel used when inputting the mark, mentioned earlier is opened.
To delete the object, left-click the [Delete].
To close the panel, left-click the [Close].
[Example for the Event mark:]

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-98

3.15 Displaying the AIO


You can display an AIO (Admiralty Information Overlay) that is additional information published by United

Kingdom Hydrographic Office (UKHO). (But in some software version, the AIO function is not
available.)
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(4) View AIO] in that order.
ECDIS

AIO is displayed when checkmark is ON. AIO is displayed by a red pattern as below.
(Change the object category to the [Other] on the display panel Refer to3.6 Changing the
Object Category (S-57/C-MAP Only))

Un-tick the [View AIO] menu not to display the AIO.

3-99

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

2) Right-click on the chart to confirm the detail of AIO, then select [S-57/C-MAP/ARCS
Information] from the context menu.
Then, the cross cursor changes to the box cursor (

).

3) Rotate the trackball, point the cursor to the object on the chart, and left-click the cursor.
Then, the Information panel opens according to the selected object.

To close the panel, left-click the [Close] button.


4) When an object has additional information, the name of the additional information will be
displayed in the combo box under the Information panel.
5) Select the information name to be displayed, then left-click the [Show]. The additional
information will be displayed.

To close the additional information, left-click the [Close].

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-100

3.16 Operating EBL/VRM


There are two ways to draw the EBL (Electronic Bearing Line)/VRM (Variable Range Maker) on the
chart.
Using the [EBL1/2] and [VRM1/2] keys and EBL/VRM dials on the operation panel
Using the context menu ([Dropped EBL/VRM][CCRP EBL/VRM],1 step or 2 step operation selectable)
Using the [EBL1/2] and [VRM1/2] buttons on the display panel

3.16.1 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Operation Panel


On the operation panel, two sets of EBL/VRMs can be used for measuring bearing and distance. You
can also set your ships position or any position as the center (base point) of the EBL/VRM.

(1) Displaying and clearing the EBL1/VRM1 marker


If you press the [EBL1] or [VRM1] key, the EBL1 or VRM1 marker with your ship as the base point,
and the EBL1/VRM1 information panel are displayed. These markers are displayed as a dashed
line. Each of these markers are controlled by turning the EBL or VRM dial.
Direction and distance from
Center point to crossing point

Push EBL1 to
display EBL1 line

Push VRM1 to
display VRM1 line

EBL1

VRM1

EBL

VRM

Turn EBL dial to


control EBL1

Turn VRM dial to


control VRM1

Own ship

Crossing point

[EBL1/VRM1 line display on the chart]


Azimuth of EBL1

Distance of VRM1

Displaying position of cross point


on EBL1 and VRM1

[Display panel (EBL1/VRM1 displayed)]


To clear the EBL1 marker or VRM1 marker:
Press the [EBL1] or [VRM1] key again.

3-101

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

ECDIS

(2) Displaying and clearing the EBL2/VRM2 marker


If you press the [EBL2] or [VRM2] key, the EBL2 or VRM2 marker with your ship as the base point,
and the EBL2/VRM2 information panel are displayed. These markers are displayed as a dash
dotted line to distinguish them from EBL1/VRM1. Each of these markers is controlled by turning
the EBL or VRM dial.
To clear the EBL2 marker or VRM2 marker:
Press the [EBL2] or [VRM2] key again.

(3) Switching EBL1/VRM1 marker and EBL2/VRM2 marker operations


The following describes how to switch operation when the EBL1 and EBL2, or VRM1 and VRM2
markers are simultaneously displayed. For example, lets assume that EBL1 and EBL2 are
displayed on the screen, and that EBL2 can be operated by the EBL dial. In this case, press the
[EBL1] key so that the EBL1 can be operated by the EBL dial. (See the next page)
These can be moved independently, such as EBL1 and VRM2 or EBL2 and VRM1.
The intersecting point positions in these cases will be displayed by combinations of the previously
displayed EBL1/VRM1 and EBL2/VRM2. When EBL and VRM are displayed independently, only
their bearing and distance will be displayed.

EBL
Turn EBL dial to
control EBL1

VRM
Turn VRM dial to
control VRM2

[Display panel and chart (Operating EBL1 and VRM2)]

Note:
For VRM1 and VRM2, use [VRM1] and [VRM2] key in the same way as for EBL1 and EBL2.
They will be displayed as floating EBL/VRM while operating turning the EBL or VRM dial.
3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-102

[Switching of EBL1 Marker and EBL2 Marker -- Ship-centered EBL/VRM]

ECDIS

No displaying EBL

EBL1

EBL2
EBL2

EBL1

EBL

EBL

Displaying EBL1
EBL2

Displaying EBL2

EBL2

EBL1

EBL

EBL1

EBL

EBL2

EBL1

Displaying EBL1 and EBL2

Displaying EBL1 and EBL2

(EBL dial operate to EBL2)

(EBL dial operate to EBL1)


3-103

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

(4) Changing the EBL/VRM marker base point


The following example describes how to change the base point for EBL1 from your ships position
to another position.
VRM1, EBL2 and VRM2 are operated in the same way as EBL1.
1) With the EBL1 push EBL dial Then, the EBL/VRM base point displayed in the own ship
position.
2) Move the cursor with EBL/VRM to the new base point position by rotating the trackball.
3) Left-click at the position you want. The base point is fixed at that position

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-104

The following operation should be carried out to set the base point of floating EBL/VRM at the
ships center:
1) Make sure that the base point of the displayed EBL1 is not fixed and floating.
The base point moves on the ship..

ECDIS

[Resetting the Base Point at the Ship's Position]

3-105

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.16.2 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Context Menu


You can draw CCRP (the base position is ship-centered) EBL/VRM or Dropped (the base position is
floating) EBL/VRM with context menu.

[Context Menu Dropped EBL/VRM]

[Context Menu CCRP EBL/VRM]

3.16.2.1 Selecting 1-step/2-step Option


When both EBL and VRM drawing, you can draw either 1-step method or 2-step (step-by-step) method.
In the 1-step method, EBL and VRM appear at the same time. In the 2-step method, EBL appears and,
after fixing EBL, VRM appears.
1) In the normal menu
Select [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(4) Marker Setting] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [(6) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(4) Marker Setting] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [(5) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(4) Marker Setting] in that order.
The Marker Setting panel opens.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-106

2) Left-click either 1 Step or 2 Step and then press the [OK] button to close the panel.
1 Step: Quicker operation (Both EBL and VRM appear on the chart.)
2 Step: Step-by-step operation (First EBL and then VRM)

ECDIS

Tips: Useful context Abort


During EBL/VRM operation, for example, you can cancel the current operation step by the following
procedure.
Right-click at any position on the
chart to open the context menu.
Abort context menu will open.

Rotate the trackball to move


the cursor on the Abort.

3-107

Left-click Abort to abort


the current operation step.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.16.2.2 Dropped EBL/VRM EBL1/VRM1 (EBL2/VRM2)


The following description is an operation to draw EBL1/VRM1. Drawing EBL2/VRM2 becomes a
similar operation.
(1) 1-Step Operation
1) Right-Click on the chart and select [Dropped EBL/VRM] - [EBL1/VRM1] from context menu.
Then, EBL1 is displayed and its base point is displayed on the cursor.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the position you want. Then, the base point is fixed.
At the same time, VRM1 is displayed with EBl1, and the cross point on EBL1 and VRM1 is
displayed on the cursor.
3) Move the cursor and left-click at the position of cross point you want. Then, the cross point is fixed
along with EBL1 bearing and VRM1 distance.

Select
[Dropped EBL/VRM]

Left-Click

- [EBL1/VRM1]

Left-Click

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-108

(2) 2-Step Operation


1) Right-Click on the chart and select [Dropped EBL/VRM] - [EBL1/VRM1] from context menu.
Then, EBL1 is displayed and its base point is displayed on the cursor.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the position you want. Then, the base point is fixed.
At the same time, EBL1 bearing is changed with the cursor.
3) Move the cursor and left-click at the bearing you want. Then, EBL1 bearing is fixed.
At the same time, VRM1 is displayed and VRM1 distance is changed with the cursor.
4) Move the cursor and left-click at the distance you want. Then, VRM1 distance is fixed.
ECDIS

Select
[Dropped EBL/VRM]

Left-Click

- [EBL1/VRM1]

Left-Click

Left-Click

3.16.2.3 Dropped EBL/VRM EBL1 (EBL2)


The following description is an operation to draw EBL1. Drawing EBL2 becomes a similar operation.
1) Right-Click on the chart and select [Dropped EBL/VRM] - [EBL1] from context menu.
Then, EBL1 is displayed and its base point is displayed on the cursor.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the position you want. Then, the base point is fixed.
At the same time, EBL1 bearing is changed with the cursor.
3) Move the cursor and left-click at the bearing you want. Then, EBL1 bearing is fixed.

3.16.2.4 Dropped EBL/VRM VRM1 (VRM2)


The following description is an operation to draw VRM1. Drawing VRM2 becomes a similar operation.
1) Right-Click on the chart and select [Dropped EBL/VRM] - [VRM1] from context menu.
Then, VRM1 is displayed and its base point is displayed on the cursor.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the position you want. Then, the base point is fixed.
At the same time, VRM1 distance is changed with the cursor.
3) Move the cursor and left-click at the distance you want. Then, VRM1 distance is fixed.

3-109

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.16.2.5 Dropped EBL/VRM Move Origin1 (Move Origin2)


The following description is an operation to move Origin1 (the base point of EBL1/VRM1).
Moving Origin2 (the base point of EBL2/VRM2) becomes a similar operation.
1) Right-Click on the chart and select [Dropped EBL/VRM] - [Move Origin1] from context menu.
Then, EBL1 and VRM1 are displayed and its base point is displayed on the cursor.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the position you want. Then, the base point is fixed.

3.16.2.6 CCRP EBL/VRM EBL1/VRM1 (EBL2/VRM2)


The following description is an operation to draw EBL1/VRM1. Drawing EBL2/VRM2 becomes a
similar operation.
(1) 1-Step Operation
1) Right-Click on the chart and select [CCRP EBL/VRM] - [EBL1/VRM1] from context menu.
Then, EBL1 and VRM1 are displayed and there base point is displayed on the ship.
At the same time, the cross point on EBL1 and VRM1 is displayed on the cursor.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the position of cross point you want. Then, the cross point is fixed
along with EBL1 bearing and VRM1 distance.
Select
[CCRP EBL/VRM] -

Left-Click

[EBL1/VRM1]

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-110

(2) 2-Step Operation


1) Right-Click on the chart and select [CCRP EBL/VRM] - [EBL1/VRM1] from context menu.
Then, EBL1 is displayed and its base point is displayed on the ship.
At the same time, EBL1 bearing is changed with the cursor.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the bearing you want. Then, EBL1 bearing is fixed.
At the same time, VRM1 is displayed and VRM1 distance is changed with the cursor.
3) Move the cursor and left-click at the distance you want. Then, VRM1 distance is fixed.
Select

ECDIS

[CCRP EBL/VRM] [EBL1/VRM1]

Left-Click

Left-Click

3.16.2.7 CCRP EBL/VRM EBL1 (EBL2)


The following description is an operation to draw EBL1. Drawing EBL2 becomes a similar operation.
1) Right-Click on the chart and select [CCRP EBL/VRM] - [EBL1] from context menu.
Then, EBL1 is displayed and its base point is displayed on the ship.
At the same time, EBL1 bearing is changed with the cursor.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the bearing you want. Then, EBL1 bearing is fixed.

3.16.2.8 CCRP EBL/VRM VRM1 (VRM2)


The following description is an operation to draw VRM1. Drawing VRM2 becomes a similar operation.
1) Right-Click on the chart and select [Dropped EBL/VRM] - [VRM1] from context menu.
Then, VRM1 is displayed and its base point is displayed on the ship.
At the same time, VRM1 distance is changed with the cursor.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the distance you want. Then, VRM1 distance is fixed.

3-111

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.16.3 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Display panel


On the display panel, you can operate and display value of EBL and VRM from Tools panel.

Azimuth of EBL button


T: True North mode
R: Bearing Reference mode

Units of distance button


When left-click, units of VRM distance is changed.
[NM] -> [km] -> [sm] -> [NM] ->
switching"Tools""Brilliance"
Displaying position of cross point
on EBL1 and VRM1
Displaying position of cross point
on EBL2 and VRM2
Base point button
[Blank]: CCRP
D: Dropped point
Active/Inactive of EBL1/EBL2 button
Active: Displaying EBL line on chart display area
and displaying EBL azimuth
Inactive: Displaying OFF
Active/Inactive of VRM1/VRM2 button
Active: Displaying VRM line on chart display area
and displaying VRM distance
Inactive: Displaying OFF

EBL1/EBL2 edit button


Active: Displaying EBL line and having the right to operate by EBL dial.
Inactive: Displaying OFF
VRM1/VRM2 edit button
Active: Displaying VRM line and having the right to operate by VRM dial.
Inactive: Displaying OFF

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-112

3.16.3.1 Drawing and deletion EBL by the Display panel


The following description is an operation of EBL1. EBL2 becomes a similar operation.
(1) Drawing EBL1 and setting the bearing
1) When EBL1 edit button is inactive, left-click to this button.
Then, EBL1 edit button is changed active and EBL1 is displayed.
At the same time, EBL1 bearing is changed with the cursor.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the bearing you want. Then, EBL1 bearing is fixed.
ECDIS

(2) Deletion EBL1


1) When EBL1 edit button is active, left-click to this button.
Then, EBL1 edit button is changed inactive and EBL1 disappears.

Lift-click to the EBL1 edit button

3.16.3.2 Drawing and deletion VRM by the Display panel


The following description is an operation of VRM1. VRM2 becomes a similar operation.
(1) Drawing VRM1 and setting the distance
1) When VRM1 edit button is inactive, left-click to this button.
Then, VRM1 edit button is changed active and VRM1 is displayed.
At the same time, VRM1 distance is changed with the cursor.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the distance you want. Then, VRM1 distance is fixed.
(2) Deletion VRM1
1) When VRM1 edit button is active, left-click to this button.
Then, VRM1 edit button is changed inactive and VRM1 disappears
Lift-click to the VRM1 edit button

3-113

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.16.3.3 Changing the base point of EBL/VRM


The following description is an operation to change the base of EBL1/VRM1.
EBL2/VRM2 becomes a similar operation.
(1) Changing Dropped (the base position is floating).
1) When Base point button is displayed blank, left-click to this button.
Then, Base point button is changed to display D and EBL1 is displayed.
At the same time, the base point of EBL1 is displayed on the cursor.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the position you want. Then, the base point is fixed.
(2) Changing CCRP (the base position is ship-centered).
1) When Base point button is displayed D, left-click to this button.
Then, Base point button is changed to display blank and EBL1 is displayed.
At the same time, the base point of EBL1 is displayed on the ship.

Lift-click to the Base point button

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-114

3.16.4 Marker Setting


In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(4) Marker Setting] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(4) Marker Setting] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(4) Marker Setting] in that order.
The Marker Setting panel opens.

1) Display Unit Simultaneity:


[VRM1 distance unit], [VRM2 distance unit] button of cursor synchronize when making [Display Unit
Simultaneity] valid.

Distance unit synchronize .

2)EBL/VRM Step :
See 3.15.1.1 Selecting 1-step/2-step
3) Cursor Read Out:
Latitude/Longitude: When [Latitude/Longitude] is selected, latitude and longitude is displayed in the
cursor information pop up.

Bearing/Range: When [Bearing/Range] is selected, bearing and range is displayed in the cursor
information pop up.

3-115

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

ECDIS

3.17 Running Fix


the running fix function, own ship and the position to be fixed are connected with the EBL and VRM.
This connection is kept regardless of the ships movement. So, you can see the EBL and VRM of own
ship against the fixed position at all times.
1) Or right-click on the chart, then select [Running Fix] from the context menu.
The EBL and VRM are displayed on the chart.

Fixed position

Your ship
Bearing

Position

Distance

2) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor and left-click at the position to be fixed.
The bearing and distance are displayed at the fixed place on the chart. As the ship moves,
the bearing and distance displayed change accordingly.
[Relation between your ships position and fixed position when the ship moves]

Fixed position

Your ship

The bearing and distance are displayed here.

To delete the running fix:


Or right-click on the chart, then select [Remove Running Fix] from the context menu.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-116

3.18 Monitoring Dragging Anchor


A circle can be drawn to monitor a dragging anchor at the user-specified position. When the own ship
moves and part of outline of the own ship goes out of this circle, a Dragging anchor alarm occurs.
A dragging anchor monitoring circle can be created with the own ship as the center or with the position at
which you left-click on the chart as the center.

Occurrence of Dragging anchor alarm

The dragging anchor monitoring circle

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(2) Anchor Watch] - [(1) Create Monitoring Circle] in
that order.
The Monitoring Dragging Anchor panel opens.
By default, the heading forward position is displayed as the center of the circle. Left-clicking
on the chart can also set the position as the center of the dragging anchor monitoring circle.
2) Enter the radius of the dragging anchor monitoring circle (10 to 999 m).
3) Left-click the [OK] to close the panel.
The dragging anchor monitoring circle is displayed.
To re-set a dragging anchor monitoring circle, cancel the monitoring circle beforehand.

How to close the dragging anchor monitoring circle:


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(2) Anchor Watch] - [(2) Clear Monitoring Circle] in
that order.
The dragging anchor monitoring circle is cleared.

3-117

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

ECDIS

Dragging anchor alarm:


When the Alarm list panel opens if a dragging anchor alarm occurs, the [Dragging anchor] Icon
blinks in red.

Red Icon: Dragging Anchor

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-118

3.19 User-Marking/Highlighting
can input the following marks on the chart.
Event Mark :

During voyage, you can put an Event Mark at the ship position.

Information Mark: You can put an Information Mark at any position.


Tidal Stream Mark: You can put an Tidal Mark at any position. The speed (knot) and time can be input.
Highlight:

You can put a highlight area at any position for your reference.
ECDIS

Highlighing

Own ship
Tidal Stream Mark

Event Mark
Information Mark

3.19.1 Marking the Event Mark


(1) Event Marking using the display panel
During voyage, you can put an Event Mark ( ) at the point where your ship is located.
1) On the display panel
Left-click the [Event ].Location/Attributes - Event Mark panel opens.

- To check the Information on the Event Mark ,see 3.14 Reading Out Information on the
Objects.

(2) Event Marking using the menu


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(1) Event Mark] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(1) Event Mark] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(1) Event Mark] in that order.
The Location/Attributes - Event Mark panel opens.

3-119

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

2) In the Location/Attributes - Event Mark panel, perform the following editing operation.
Enter time if you want to correct the displayed time.
Enter comment on the event.
You can edit the minimum scale and maximum scale that limit the display of the Event Mark.
To fix the contents and close the panel, left-click the [OK] .
You will see that the Event Mark ( ) is put on the chart.
Position of the Event Mark

Event Mark

[Apply] : It is possible to do setting in the valid without closing a panel.

(3) How to delete the Event Mark


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(5) Delete Event Mark] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(5) Delete Event Mark] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(5) Delete Event Mark] in that order.
The Delete Event Mark panel opens.
2) Left-click the [No.] you want and then left-click the [Delete].
The panel closes and the selected Event Mark is deleted from the chart
3) Left-click [Close] , Delete Event Mark panel is close.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-120

3.19.2 Marking the Information Mark


You can put an Information Mark (

) at any point on the chart.

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(2) Information Mark] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(2) Information Mark] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(2) Information Mark] in that order.
The Location/Attributes - Information panel opens and the cross cursor changes to the
cursor.
2) Rotate the trackball and move the cursor to the point you want and left-click at that position.
The left-clicked position is displayed in the position box of the panel.
3) In the Location/Attributes - Information panel, perform the following editing operation.
Enter the comment on the Information Mark.
You can edit the minimum scale and maximum scale that limit the display of the Information
Mark.
To edit the Information Mark position, left-click each column of LAT/LON.
The latitude and longitude entry panel opens.
Enter the value and left-click the [OK] .
To fix the contents and close the panel, left-click the [OK] .
You will see that the Information Mark (

) is put on the screen.

Position of the Information

Information Mark

[Apply]: It is possible to do setting in the valid without closing a panel.


For viewing the Information on the Information Mark or editing/deleting the Information Mark,
see 3.14Reading Out Information on the Objects.

3-121

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

ECDIS

3.19.3 Marking the Tidal Stream Mark


You can put a Tidal Stream Mark at any point on the chart. The Tidal Stream Mark has the bearing and
Stream speed in knot. You can edit them after putting the Tidal Stream Mark on the chart.
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(3) Tidal Stream Mark] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(3) Tidal Stream Mark] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(3) Tidal Stream Mark] in that order.
The Location/Attributes - Tidal Stream panel opens and the cross cursor changes to the
cursor.
2) Rotate the trackball and move the cursor to the point you want and left-click at that position.
The left-clicked position is displayed in the position box of the panel.
3) In the Location/Attributes - Tidal Stream panel, perform the following editing operation.
Set/Drift/Time setting
- Left-click either Actual or Predicted.
- Enter the bearing and speed.
- Enter time if you want to correct the displayed time
Enter comment on the Tidal Stream Mark.
You can edit the minimum scale and maximum scale that limit the display of the Tidal Stream
Mark.
To edit the Tidal Mark position, left-click each column of LAT/LON.
The latitude and longitude entry panel opens.
Enter the value and left-click the [OK].
To fix the contents and close the panel, left-click the [OK].
You will see that the Tidal Stream Mark is put on the screen.
Position of the Tidal Stream Mark

Time

Knot

Tidal Stream Mark

[Apply]: It is possible to do setting in the valid without closing a panel.


For viewing the Information on the Tidal Stream Mark or editing/deleting the Tidal Stream
Mark, see 3.14 Reading Out Information on the Objects.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-122

3.19.4 Highlight
You can use a polygon to highlight any parts of a chart. This function can be used when you wish to
make notations.
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(4) Highlight] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(4) Highlight] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(4) Highlight] in that order.
The Location/Attributes - Highlight panel opens and the cross cursor changes to the
cursor.
2) Use the trackball to move the cursor to the part to be highlighted.

Then, click on the

coordinates of a point which will be the starting point of the area to be highlighted.
3) In the Location/Attributes - Highlight panel, perform the following editing operation.
Enter comment on the Highlight.
You can edit the minimum scale and maximum scale that limit the display of the Highlight.
To edit the Highlight position, left-click each column of LAT/LON.
The latitude and longitude entry panel opens. Enter the value and left-click the [OK].
To fix the contents and close the panel, left-click the [OK].
You will see that the Highlight is put on the screen.
Diagram is canceled when doing the left double-click when creating two points.
Diagram is canceled when clicking the [OK] when creating two points.
Diagram is canceled when clicking [Abort] from the context menu of the right-click when
creating two points.
Diagram is fixed when doing the left double-click when creating more than three points and
the Location/Attributes - Highlight panel closes.
Diagram is fixed when clicking the [OK] when creating more than three points and the panel
closes.
Diagram is fixed when clicking [Abort] from the context menu of the right-click when creating
more than three points and the panel closes. Equal to or less than two point are canceled.
When doing the following operation without ever clicking [Apply], diagram is canceled and
transitions to each mode.
Chooses [S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information] from the context menu of right-click.
Chooses [Other Information] from the context menu of right-click.
Chooses [Auto Mode] from the context menu of right-click.
Chooses [Zoom Area] from the context menu of right-click.
Chooses [Dropped EBL/VRM] - [EBL1/VRM1 (or EBL2/VRM2)] from the context menu of
right-click.
Chooses [Dropped EBL/VRM] - [EBL1(or EBL2)] from the context menu of right-click.
Chooses [Dropped EBL/VRM] - [VRM1 (or VRM2)] from the context menu of right-click.
Chooses [CCRP EBL/VRM] - [EBL1/VRM1 (or EBL2/VRM2)] from the context menu of
right-click.
Chooses [CCRP EBL/VRM] - [EBL1 (or EBL2)] from the context menu of right-click.
Chooses [CCRP EBL/VRM] - [VRM1(or VRM2)] from the context menu of right-click.
Diagram is fixed when clicking [Apply] once and doing the following operation and transitions
to each mode.

3-123

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

ECDIS

Top of a highlighted area

Highlight

[Apply]: It is possible to do setting in the valid without closing a panel.


For viewing the information on the Highlight or editing/deleting the Highlight, see 3.14
Reading Out Information on the Object.
Note:
When entering data that requires detailed editing, use the user chart (See chapter 5 Chart
Editing).

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-124

3.20 EBL Maneuver


Maneuver curve display function displays the predictable track when you turn the steering in a certain
conditions. By displaying a maneuver curve that has been drawn safely, the maneuver curve can be
used as a target when turning.
Supplemental line

Heading line
Planned route

REACH

Maneuver curve

WOL (Wheel Over Line)


WOL line
Own ship's position

WOL:

Wheel Over Line

Reach:

Distance between when the wheel is steered and when the ship begins to turn

R:

Turning radius

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(1) EBL Maneuver ] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(1) EBL Maneuver] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Main] - [(1) EBL Maneuver] in that order.
The EBL Maneuver Setting panel opens and cross cursor changes to the arrow(EBL) cursor.

3-125

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

ECDIS

2) Set or select each item.


Reach

Enter the Reach (m).


Setting range is 0-2000.

Turn Mode Left-click either Radius or Rate.


Radius: Enter the constant turn radius (NM)
Rate:

Enter the constant turn speed (deg/min.)

3) Turn the trackball to determine the start point of the supplemental line.
The position of WOL (Wheel Over Line) will change depending upon the Wheel Over Line of
the supplemental line.
4) Set the bearing of the supplemental line with [EBL] dial on the operation panel.
Moving the [EBL] dial to the left and right will change the bearing of the supplemental line.
The bearing of the supplemental line will be the bearing in which own ship will finally move. The
position of WOL will change depending upon the bearing of the supplemental line.
5) Left-click on the chart.
The setting will be established.
Note:
Be sure to input the value correctly. If the heading of the maneuver curve is the same as
that of your own ship, the maneuver curve will not be created.
To delete EBL maneuver curve from the chart:
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(1) Remove EBL Maneuver] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(1) EBL Maneuver] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Main] - [(1) EBL Maneuver] in that order.
The EBL Maneuver Setting panel closed.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-126

3.21 Cross Bearing


This function displays cross bearings.

An angle for calculating the own ships position from the

reference point can be obtained. If a position fixing sensor such as a GPS navigation system has
encountered an error causing the own ships position to be obscure, the own ships position can be
obtained by drawing a visually observed fixed targets bearing on the chart using the cross bearing
function.
ECDIS

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(2) Cross Bearing] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(2) Cross Bearing] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Main] - [(2) Cross Bearing] in that order.
The Cross Bearingdialog box opens and the mouse cursor changes.

Reference coordinates of the cross bearing


line
Reciprocal bearing from the reference point
Bearing from the reference point
Length of the cross bearing line
Selection of bearing display on the chart
(True/Reverse)

2) Sets the reference point


By the trackball operation
Rotate the trackball to move the cursor to the reference coordinates of the cross bearing line,
and left-click.

Alternatively, enter the reference position values in the Latitude and

Longitude fields in the [Cross Bearing] dialog box.


By the [Cross Bearing] panel operation
It inputs value to the [LAT] and [LON] numerical box.

3-127

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3) Determine the angle of the cross bearing line by turning the [EBL] dial or entering the reciprocal
bearing viewed from the reference point.
Bearing from the reference point is displayed in the 180 degree reciprocal bearing with typing in
value.
4) Determine the distance of the cross bearing line by turning the [VRM] dial or entering the
distance.
Setting range is 0.0NM - 99.9NM.
5) The drawing of the cross bearing line is determine by left-clicking the [Set], and the bearing is
displayed beside the cross bearing line.
6) The cross bearing display is switched by left-clicking the [True] radio button or the [Reverse]
radio button.
[True] display

[Reverse] display

7) To display more than one bearing line, repeat steps 1) to 4). Up to ten bearing lines can be
displayed at the same time.
8) To clear all the displayed cross bearings, left-clicking [Clear].
9) To close theCross Bearing panel, left-click the [Close].
3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-128

3.22 Inputting Clearing Lines


Clearing lines can be displayed by using EBL/VRM.
1) When EBL/VRM is operating (see3.16 Operating EBL/VRM), the start point and end point of
clearing lines should be determined from the base point and cross point of EBL/VRM, and then
the right button on the track ball should be clicked.
2)

In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(3)Create Clearing Line] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(3)Create Clearing Line] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Main] -[(3)Create Clearing Line] in that order..
menu to display Not Less Than and Not More Than, and left-click on either of them.

3) Clearing lines from the center of ERL/VRM to their intersecting points will be drawn.

NLT:

Not Less Than


NLT116 means Not less than 116 (degree).

NMT: Not More Than


NMT152 means Not more than 152(degree).

For viewing the information on clearing lines or editing/deleting clearing lines, see 3.14

Reading Out Information on the Objects.


3-129

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

ECDIS

3.23 LOP(Line Of Position)


This function displays LOP. This function can correct the position of the ship by using the distance or
the angle from the reference point.
1) Display "Create LOP" panel
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(4) LOP] - [(1) Create LOP] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(4) LOP] - [(1) Create LOP] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Main] - [(4) LOP] - [(1) Create LOP] in that order.
"Create LOP" panel opens and the cross cursor changes to the

cursor.

Latitude, Longitude:
The starting position of LOP is specified. Default is
own ship position of point that displays the dialog.
The specification of the value is a left-click on the chart
screen. Or, value is input left-clicking a column of
Latitude/Longitude.
Type:
Type of LOP is selected and the value is input.
Bearing Azimuth and distance are specified turns
the [EBL] dial and changes the value.
Range Distance is specified turns the VRM dial
and changes the value..
value is input left-clicking a column of Bearing/Range.
Time:
Time is specified. Default is time. Value is input
left-clicking a column of Time.
Set LOP:
LOP is fixed by set value. This button is invalid when LOP is over 3 lines.
Select Cross Point:
When two LOP (or TLP) or more is set, cross point position is displayed. Select
Cross Point panel is displayed when you left-click this button.
Create TPL (Transferred Line Of Position):
LOP being displayed now is made, and it moves parallel and TPL is made the ship
movement. see 3-120122 Example of ship position correction that uses TPL.
Close:
Close"Create LOP" panel.Made LOP doesn't disappear.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-130

2) Delete LOP
Select [(7)Main]-[(4)LOP]-[(2)Delete All LOP]. Then All LOP line is deleted.
3) Select Cross Point
When two LOP (or TPL) or more is set, cross point position is displayed. Select Cross Point
panel is displayed when you left-click this button. When LOP ( or TPL) is set 3 lines and more,
information message is displayed and cross point is displayed by select 2 lines.
Latitude, Longuitude:
Display the position cross point.
When there are two points or more, left-click
the position list and select crossed LOP point.
Reference Point
Adjust own ships position to selected cross
point.
Close
Close Select Cross Point panel.

3-131

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

ECDIS

1. Select Cross Point by 2lines LOP


Displayed Select Cross Point panel and marked
Cross Point chosen LOP becomes a red line

Adjusted own ship's position

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-132

2. Select Cross Point by 3lines LOP


Displayed information message

Click [OK] button


ECDIS

Displayed Select Cross Point panel


and no marked Cross Point

Marked Cross Point chosen LOP red line.

Select 2 lines

Adjusted own ship's position

3-133

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

4) Create TPL (Transferred Position Line)


After the own ship adjusts by Cross Point, TPL can be displayed according to the progress of
the ship.
Example of ship position correction that uses TPL:
1. Display "Create LOP" panel. The direction from the ship to the target is measured, and LOP is set.
Moreover, the distance to the ship and the target is measured, and LOP is set.

Two LOP is set.


2. Select "Select Cross Point" button to display the cross point.

Displaying the cross point.


3. Select "Reference Point" button to adjust the position of the ship. (Temporary Position)

Adjusting the position of the ship.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-134

4. The ship is at some time.

ECDIS

5. Display "Create LOP" panel. The direction from the ship to the target is measured again, and the third
LOP is set.

Third LOP is set.


6. Select [Create TPL] . Then, TPL is displayed according to the progress of the ship.

Displaying TPL

3-135

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

7. Select "Select Cross Point" . And, set the cross point of TPL and the third LOP.

Information message displayed when there are three LOP or more.


Select [OK] .

Select the third LOP and TPL.

Displaying cross point.


8. [Reference Point] button is selected, and the position of the ship is adjusted.

Adjusting the position of the ship.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-136

Note:
When the own ship is adjusted by LOP, the operation is recorded in Logbook. When
"Event-Reference Point" is selected from the list and [View REF Point] button is pushed, the
[Information] panel is displayed. The [Information] panel displays [Information] of associated LOP.
Select [MENU] [(7)Main] [(7)Logbook] in that order.

ECDIS

Select Event-Reference Point and left-click [View REF Point]

3-137

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.24 Acquisition Zone


Acquisition Zone is used to automatically monitor AIS target in vicinity of own ship.
When AIS target enters Acquisition Zone, status of AIS is automatically changed to Activate state.
1)In the MENU
Select [MENU] [(7)Main] [(1)Make AZ] in that order
When [AZ Function] of Make AZ panel is valid., Acquisition Zone 1(or 2) is displayed on the chart
screen. When [AZ Function] of Make AZ panel is invalid, Acquisition Zone 1(or 2) is disappeared.
It changes to edit mode when left-click onto the Acquisition Zone line.
Acquisition Zone 1
Setting of Acquisition Zone 1 is changed
AZ Function
Display of Acquisition Zone 1 is switched
ON Acquisition Zone 1 is displayed
OFFAcquisition Zone 1 is disappeared
Make AZ 1
Setting of Acquisition Zone 1 is changed
AZ Function is valid after fixing the input.
[Start Side], [End Side], [Far Edge, Width]
Display setting of Acquisition
(Refer to figure below)
Setting is changed by [Make AZ] 1 is
clicked
Acquisition Zone 2 setting area
Setting of Acquisition Zone 2 is changed
Item is the same as Acquisition Zone 1.
Acquisition Zone 1 Setting area
Close Make AZ panel is closed

Acquisition Zone 2 Setting area

Start Side
End Side
Far Edge
Width

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-138

2) Change setting method of Acquisition Zone


The procedure for changing the setting is shown about the range of the area of Acquisition
Zone.
Change setting method of Acquisition Zone 1 Setting area *the procedure is same as for Acquisition
Zone 2 Setting area.
1. Select [Make AZ 1] button. Then [Make AZ 1] button is changed color.
ECDIS

2. [EBL] dial of the operation panel is turned and the angle of "Start Side" is changed. Similarly, [VRM]
dial of the operation panel is turned, and the distance of "Far Edge" is changed.
Start Side
Change by [EBL] Dial of the
operation panel.
Setting range is 000.0 359.9.
Far Edge
Change by [VRM] Dial of the
operation panel.
Width is not change.
Setting range is 0.50NM
31.50NM.
3. [EBL] dial of the operation panel is pushed short.
4. [EBL] dial of the operation panel is turned and the angle of "End Side" is changed. Similarly, [VRM]
dial of the operation panel is turned, and the distance of "Width" is changed.
End Side
Change by [EBL] Dial of the operation
panel.
Setting range is 000.0- 359.9.
Width
Change by [VRM] Dial of the operation
panel.
Value of Far Edge changes according
to changing Width.
Setting range is 0.50NM - 31.50NM.

5. [EBL] dial of the operation panel is pushed short.


The display of "Make AZ 1" returns to the origin, and "AZ Function of Acquisition Zone 1" is valid.
3-139

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.25 Multi Window


3.25.1 Using the Analog Meter
During voyage, you can display the analog meter panelon the display panel. You can see the HDG,
COG, set/Drift, CTS on the analog meter panel. Also, you can select the Display Panel Setting
panel to be displayed on the analog meter panel.
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(8) Multi Window] - [(2) Analog Meter panel] in that order.
The following analog meter panel is displayed.
On the analog meter panel, items with the arrow mark (e.g. COG) are represented by the
indicators of the analog meter panel. The color of the item and that of the indicator match
each other. So, you can easily identify each indicator from the color.

The white arrow corresponds to the white


triangle.
(Color matches each other in it supports items)

Ships heading.
Log speed (speed through water)

Course and speed (The vector of the vessels motion over


the ground and the course of the route selected)
Course to Steer
Note: It is displayed during Automatic Sailing only.
Current direction calculated by the difference between the
COG and HDG vector.
Current speed calculated by the difference between the COG
and HDG vector.
Set /Drift(Blue arrow)
HDIG (Gray arrow)
COG (Gray arrow)
CTS (Red arrow)

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-140

To the close the analong mater panel:


In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(8)Multi Window]-[(2)Analog meter] in that order.
Then, the Display Panel Setting panel is closed.

Changing the items to be displayed on the analog meter panel:


1) In the normal menu

ECDIS

Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(7) Display Panel Setting] in that order.
Then, the Display Panel Setting panel opens.
2) Left-click to turn ON/OFF the items you want to display and left-click the [OK] button. It reflects
setting and it closes a panel.
It cancels setting and it closes a panel when clicking [Cancel] button.
CTS label, CTS value are displayed in the display panel when making valid.
Depth label, Depth sensor name, Depth value are displayed in the display
panel when making valid.
HDG is displayed at the Analog meter panel when making valid.
COG is displayed at the Ana log meter panel when making valid.
Set / Drift is displayed at the Analog meter panel when making valid.
CTS is displayed at the Analog meter panel when making valid.
Triangle is displayed in the left side of each of HDG, COG, Set, CTS of the
display panel.

3.25.2 Other Multi Window display


The window of the following contents can be displayed at the thing except the analog meter.
Because the contents which can be displayed by the establishment environment are different, for the
details, refer to the instruction manual of each of the facilities.
1) To open multi window
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(8) Multi Window] and select to want to display more than the
menu, the supporting menu has a check mark and the panel is displayed.

3-141

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

The menu where a window is displayed:


(2)Analog Meter (See3.25.1 )
(3)Climate
(4)Draft
(5)Current Wind
(6)Gyro Rudder Graph
(7)Course Bar
(8)Ship
(9)Engine Graph
(1)Depth Graph
(2)Current
2) To close multi window
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(8) Multi Window] and select to want to close more than the
menu, the supporting menu disappears a check mark and a panel is close.
3) Preset the multi window display condition
The condition of the multi window can be saved and preseted. (either valid or invalid, and the
position to display, and so on )
Save the multi window condition:
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(8) Multi Window] [(7) PreSet Save] in that order.
It maintains the display condition and the display position of the present multi window. When
doing the same operation once again from the menu, the display condition and the display
position maintain new one.
Preset the multi window condition:
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(8) Multi Window] [(1) PreSet] in that order.
It presets the display condition and the display position of the multi window to have maintained.
4) Setting to the multi window display
It changes the setting of each multi window. for the details of the setting, refer to the instruction
manual of each of the facilities.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(8) Multi Window] [(0) Setup] in that order.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-142

3.26 Cursor Auto Mode


The auto mode is the mode that the display of the contents and the change of the setting can be
implemented by repeating a cursor in the specific object and the line.
The cursor becomes a crosshair cursor.
Navigation & Planning The initial condition in case of start-up becomes an auto mode about the sailing
executive-state.
When choosing [AUTO mode] from the context menu when a cursor is displayed at the thing except the
crosshair cursor in [Zoom Area] etc, the cursor mode changes to the auto mode.
Also, it returns to the auto mode automatically when not clicking for 1 minute when a cursor is displayed
at the thing except the crosshair cursor and leaving.
The selectable object and the displayed information
When adjusting a cursor to each object for 1 second, the following information is displayed.
Priority *1

Object

Operation which is

Information which is displayed

possible when

when adjusting a cursor

left-clicking
1

AIS

AIS

Non-active: actived AIS target.

Ships name(number)

Active:Select List display and

CPA

being hidden.

TCPA
2

TT

TT

Select List display and being

Target number

hidden.

CPA
TCPA
3

BUOY

LIGHT

BUOY
Comment
LIGHT
Comment

Cross point of EBL1 or

EBL1(EBL2)

Changing the EBL1(EBL2) or

VRM1

VRM1(VRM2)

VRM1

(EBL1 or VRM1)

(VRM2);1-step operation.

EBL1(EBL2)

EBL1(EBL2)

Changing the EBL1(EBL2)

VRM1(VRM2)

VRM1(VRM2)

Changing the VRM1(VRM2)

AZ1(AZ2)

AZ1(AZ2)

Changing the AZ1(AZ2)


The item to change by the place to
click is different.
Start Side
End Side
Far Side
Width

3-143

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

ECDIS

The selectable object and the displayed information --continued-When adjusting a cursor to each object for 1 second, the following information is displayed.
Priority *1

Object

Operation which is

Information which is displayed

possible when

when adjusting a cursor

left-clicking
9

User Map Object

MAP

(Symbol/Line/Area/Text)

Comment

Event Mark

EVENT
Comment

Information Mark

INFO
Comment

Tidal Stream Mark

TIDE
Comment

Highlight

HIGHLIGHT
Comment

10

AIS Ring filter


AIS Sector filter

AIS

Changing to the value AIS Ring

Ring

filter.

AIS

Changing to the value AIS Sector

Sector

filter.

*1 Operation is done about the object with the priority which is high when adjusting a cursor when an
object overlaps and is displayed

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-144

3.27 Logbook
You can display the logbook where various voyage information is written. The recorded items and the
items shown on the logbook table are selectable with the logbook Settingpanel . How to display the
logbook and how to select the items to be saved are explained here.

3.27.1 Displaying the Logbook


The items displayed in the logbook are selectable. For the selection, see the next 3.27.2 Logbook
Setting .
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(7) Logbook] in that order.
The Logbook panel opens. Contents of the logbook are as follows:
(Note that, to see all the contents, scroll the panel.)
No.
Date
Time
Event (kind of alarm, Event Mark Navtex, etc. -- depends on the
Logbook setting panel settings.),
POSN1
POSN2
Latitude
Longitude
COG
SOG
HDG
STW
Av. Speed 4h
Av. Speed 24h (average speed recent 4/24 hours)
Voyage DIST. (G )
Voyage DIST. (W) (Voyage distance (Ground)/(Water))
Charts
Set
Drift
Wind Dir. (direction)
Wind Speed
Wave Dir. (direction)
Wave Height
Air Press (pressure)
Air Temperature.
Water Temperature.
Engine Rev. (revolution)
Comments

3-145

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

ECDIS

Note:
The voyage distance can be reset to 0.0nm. (See 7.9 Clear Voyage Distance.)
The voyage distance is available only if the interface with the ship speed sensor is in a log pulse
format.
Some of the items of Logbook may not be available depending on the hardware and system
configuration used.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-146

Button Operation (left-click the button):


[Filter]:

The Logbook Setting panel opens. You can set the filtering conditions. For
logbook option settings, see the next 3.26.2 Logbook Setting.

[Column Setting]:

You can select any item in the list. Left-click the item to turn it ON or OFF.
The check mark () shows that the selected item is set to ON. Selected
column and [Up] or [Down], The column changes the order in table of
Logbook panel
Column list is as follows:
Date
Time
Event
POSN1
POSN2
Latitude
Longitude
COG()
SOG(kn)
Heading()
Log(kn)
Av. Speed 4h(kn)
Av. Speed 24h(kn)
Voyage DIST.(G)(NM)
Voyage DIST.(W)(NM)
Charts, Set(), Drift(kn)
Wind Dir. ()
Wind Speed(m/sec)
Wave Dir. (kn)
Wave Height(m)
Air Press Temp.(hPa)
Temp(), Water Temp.()
Engine Rev.(rpm)
Comments
Wave Height(m)
Air Press .(hPa)
Air Temperature ()
Water Temperature.()
Engine Rev.(rpm)
Comment
Following column can not move:
Date
Time
[OK] : It saves setting contents.
[Cancel] : It cancels setting contents.

3-147

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

ECDIS

[View Navtex]:

Left-click the log that is including "Event-Navtex" , and then left-click to open
the Letter panel that shows the detailed information on the Navtex
messages.
You can mark it if you select [Marking on the Chart]. You can set expiration
date then. When [Expire Date] is off, a marking is deleted after the reception
15 days later.
It changes to the data which the information on the "Letter" panel selected
when selecting another Navtex in "Logbook" panel as it opened a panel
and clicking
[Letter].

[Marking on the Chart]: It displays Navtex symbol on the chart when making valid.
[Expire Date]:

[Expire Date] entry field and the note become valid when making valid.
Navtex symbol becomes hidden when passing an [Expire Date]
In case of invalid, the symbol becomes hidden when passing on the 15
days from the date of receive.
In the date of reception, the date in front can not be entered.
Also, more than 15 days after date, too, can not be entered from the date
of reception.

[Edit]:

Navtex "Location" panel is displayed.

[Print]:

When setting a printer, the Navtex information can be printed.

[Close]:

Letter panel is closes.

[View REF Point]:

Left-click the log that is including Event-Reference Point , and then


left-click this button to open the Information panel that shows the
detailed information on the Reference Point messages.The following
contents are displayed when selecting Event-Reference Point and
clicking

[View REF Point].


LAT
LON
Min Scale
Max Scale
Plot Type
Source
Time
Comment

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-148

The following contents are displayed when there is LOP cross point information.
LOP1(or LOP2)
Latitude
Longitude
BRG()
RNG(NM)
Data
TPL(Yes / No)
The panel closes when clicking [Close] .
[Delete Navtex]:

ECDIS

Left-click the log that is including "Event-Navtex", and then left-click this
button to open the Delete panel.
Select either of the following to delete desired log number that includes
Navtex.

Selected Message: When the [OK] is left-clicked, the selected log No. in the
Logbook panel is deleted.
Before:

Enter the [date/time] you want delete the Navtex messages


before the entered [date/time].
When the [OK] is left-clicked, the Navtex messages before the
set [date/time] are deleted.

All Message:

When the [OK] is left-clicked, All Message in the Logbook


panel is deleted.

[Export]:

Logbook content is saved as a CSV file. The saved file can be opened with a
spreadsheet program and edited with a personal computer. Select one of the
following items in the Export panel:
Selected Message: The selected record data will be exported.
From/To:

Logs saved during the term specified in the entry boxes will be
exported.

The Save As panel will be displayed after you left-click on the [OK] in the
Export panel. Input the name of the file in the [File name] column, select
the folder in which the file is to be saved, then left-click the [OK] .

3-149

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

For the data format of the logbook to be exported, see 10.5 Data Formats
of Files that ECDIS can Import/Export.
[Cancel]:

[Save As] panel closes without changing setting.

[Jump]:

Left-click the record data, and then left-click this . Then, the position of recorded
data is displayed at the center of the screen.

[Print]:

The Print panel will open. You can print out the Logbook data after setting the
printing conditions.
(This is only valid when a printer is connected.)
Selected Message: The selected recorded data is printed.
From/To:

The data in the date range entered in the input box will be
printed. (The item which is printed is decided.)

[Print] panel closes when clicking [Cancel] .

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-150

[Input]:

You can manually enter the following values and comment as required. When the
[OK] is left-clicked, the entered values are displayed in the Logbook panel. (The
No. in this panel corresponds to the No. in the Logbook panel.)

ECDIS

When clicking [Cancel], input value are canceled and the Input panel closes.
[Close]:

Closes the panel.

3-151

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.27.2 Logbook Setting


You can filter the trigger conditions to record the log data in the logbook. Also, you can filter the trigger
conditions to save the log data which will only be used to display in the Logbook panel explained in
3.27.1 Displaying the Logbook .
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(5) Logbook Setting] in that order.
The Logbook Setting panel opens.
2) Left-click the option items you want to select in the Logging and View panels, and left-click
the [OK] .
Note:
Some of the items of Logbook may not be available depending on the hardware and system
configuration used.
Log data is automatically saved according to the settings on the Logging area.
Also, log data will be saved for displaying in the Logbook panel,
For example, if you left-click and select At Noon. The log data is saved At noon.
Contents of the logbook items are as follows:
At Noon:
Data will be saved at
12:00 (LTM) when this
item is valid.
Every X minutes:
Data will be saved after
set duration of time.
Route Alarm:
Data will be saved
when an alarm related
to Route Monitoring
Alarm.
Chart Alarm:
Data will be saved
when an alarm related
to Safety counter
Alarm Dangerous
Alarm LAT.Limit Over
Alarm Chart Alarm
Area Alarm,
Navtex:
Data will be saved when data from Navtex are received.
When press

Data will be saved when the [Event] button is held down.


AUTO Sail/Sensors:
Data will be saved when an alarm related to Alarm System States tab.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-152

Others:
Data will be saved when any other kind of alarm (Startup, Offset Reference Point,etc)
occurs.
Latest display days:
It displays of the number of days of setting,setting log days.
[Navtex Setting]:
The Navtex Setting panel opens.
Set the Navtex message filtering conditions by selecting each item on the Station,
Month/Year and Message area. Then, left-click the [OK] to close the panel.
The Navtex messages received from the selected Station will be filtered by the condition set
by the Month/Year and Message, and then they will be saved as the Navtex information for
displaying on the chart.
The following Navtex mark will be displayed on the chart according to
the Navtex information.

Station:

You can filter the stations by specifying the first letter of the station name.
For example, if you select the letter A, the station name that begins with A
will be accepted. If you do not select Filtering, Messages of all the stations
will be not accepted

Month/Year:

You can filter the Navtex messages by specifying the month/year.

Message:

You can filter the Navtex messages by specifying the kind of the message.
If you do not select Filtering, the navigational warnings will be not accepted.

Note:
The above Navtex filtering function is provided for message display in Logbook.
The function is not for receiving or recording Navtex messages.

The Navtex messages to be received vary depending on the filter setting of the Navtex receiver.
For details, see the Navtex receiver instruction manual

3-153

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

ECDIS

3.28 Own Ships Setting


The following settings on own ship are explained here.
Primary position (of own ship) and secondary position settings
Vector display and heading line at the primary position
Danger detection vector and sector
Primary position track and time label, etc.
Each item is shown in the following figure.

COG vector

HDG vector
Danger detection sector

Danger detection vector


Own ship

Heading line
Own ship

Beam line
Tracking past position dots

Time labels

Tracking period

[Own Ships Setting Items]


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
The Own Ship Setting panel is displayed.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-154

3.28.1 Own Ship Symbol


You can select your ships shape, either symbol (a) or outline (b). Either (a) or (b) will be displayed at the
primary position on the chart.
Shape of the outline (b) depends on the scale of the chart and the width and length of the ship setting at
installation.
Even though you choose the outline (b), the symbol (a) will be displayed unless enlarged chart is
selected. When the chart is enlarged, the outline (b) will be displayed.
Width of ship according to scale
Length of ship according to scale

(a)

(b)

[Your Ship Symbol]


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
The Own Ship Setting panel is displayed.
2) In the Own Ship Symbol area, left-click either Symbol (a) or Out Line (b).
Then, left-click the [OK] to close the panel.

Ships Name: Own ship name can be set.


Receive value is displayed when receiving from AIS.

3-155

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

ECDIS

3.28.2 Vector Display at POSN1


The COG vector (vector of the vessels motion over the ground), HDG vector (vector of the vessels
motion through the water) can be displayed for your ships symbol.
The COG and HDG vectors can be displayed at lengths proportional to the ships current speed in
minutes. For example, if the vector length is set as 10 minutes, the tip of the vector is the expected
position in 10 minutes assuming that the ship sails at the current speed.

Vector length

Vector length

Vector time mark

Vector time mark

HDG vector

COG vector

[Vector Display and Heading line]


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
The Own Ship Setting panel is displayed.
2) Set each item on the Vector area.
To display the heading line ON/OFF, left-click the [Display Ground-Referenced Velocity] on the
[Display Ground-Water-Referenced Velocity]. Then, left-click the [OK] on the Own Ship
Setting panel. Then, the panel will close.
Turns ON/OFF the COG vector display.
Turns ON/OFF the HDG vector display.
COG/HDG vector time until the ship reaches
the expected position. (Min.1min,Max. 60 min.)

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

Turns ON/OFF the Vector Time Mark display.


(Min.1min,Max.6min)

3-156

3.28.3 Danger Detection Vector and Sector


You can set the danger detection vector and sector for your safety. The danger detection vector can be
set the monitoring area of the cross line of the safety contour and the danger area etc. While, the
sector can be set to monitor dangerous objects around your ship. The danger detection vector is
shown in the rectangular shape and the tip of the vector is the expected time assuming that the ship sails
at the current speed. The sector and its radius can be set as required.

Danger Detection Sector radius


(1.0min to 30.0min
or 0.1NM to 5.0NM)

Danger Detection Sector angle


(0.0deg to 359.9deg)

Danger Detection Vector length


(1.0min to 30.0min
or 0.1NM to 5.0NM)

Danger Detection Vector width


(30m to 250m)

[Danger Detection Vector and Sector]

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
The Own Ship Setting panel is displayed.
2) Left-click each item on the Danger Detection panel.
Danger detection vector display ON/OFF

Danger detection sector display ON/OFF

[When left-clicking,the[Alarm Limit Setting]


panel opens].

3-157

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

ECDIS

3) Left-click the [Set Alarm Limit] , the Alarm Limit Option panel opens.
Vector:
Turns ON/OFF to affect danger detection
vector.
Length:
Set 0.1 to 5.0 NM or set 1.0 to 30.0 min
NM / min:
Change to unit of Length.
NM: distance from ship
min: time until arriving
Width:
Set 30.0 to 250.0m.
Sector:
Turns ON/OFF to affect danger detection
sector.
NM / min :
Change to unit of Radius.
NM: distance from ship
min: time until arriving
Radius:
Set 0.1 to 5.0 NM or set 1.0 to 30.0 min
Width:
Set 0.0 to 359.9deg.
4) Left-click the [Vector] and [Sector] and enter the value

Vector: It left-clicks a Dangerous Detection Vector [length] and [width] colum and it
enters a value.

Sector: It left-clicks a Dangerous Detection Vector [radius] and [width] colum and it
enters a value.

5) Left-click the [OK] on the Alarm Limit Setting panel, and then the [OK] on the Own Ship
Setting panel to close all panels,setting becomes valid.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-158

3.28.4 Track and Time Label Display


The primary position of own ship is memorized to hard disk every second, and up to 24 hours of
information is displayed on the chart as the track as follows:

Own ship (Primary position)

Time labels
Every 10 to 60 min.

ECDIS

Tracking period (1 to 24 hours)

Tracking past position dots


(Every 3sec to 60min
or every 0.1NM to 10NM)

[Primary Position Track and Time Label]


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
The Own Ship Setting panel is displayed.
2) In the "Track" area, left-click [Display Past Track] and [Display Time Label] to select them.
3) It enters value with the following item.[color][Track Period][Past POSN][Interval].
Then, left-click the [OK] on the Own Ship Setting panel to close it.

Color of ships track (Red, Green, Blue,


Magenta, Orange, Brown, or Black)
1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 24 hour
OFF.
3, 5, 10, 30 sec.
1, 3, 5, 10,30,60 min.
0.1,0.2,0.3,0.5,1,3,5,10 NM

10, 30, 60 min.

3-159

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.28.5 Heading Line and Beam Line


You can set the Heading Line and Beam Line for display ships direction.
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
The Own Ship Setting panel is displayed.
2) Left-click the item to select it.
Heading line
Left-click to turn it ON/OFF.

Heading line
Beam line
When [Display Heading Line] is ON setting, Left-click to turn it ON/OFF.

Heading Line and Beam line

3) Left-click the [OK] on the Own Ship Option panel to close it.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-160

3.29 Chart Setting


You can set the various Chart Settings.

3.29.1 Chart Setting S-57/C-MAP/ARCS


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS ] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu

ECDIS

Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS ] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS ] in that order.
The Chart Setting panel opens. This panel consists of three tabs View Common, View1
and View2, each of which can be selected by left-clicking the tab.
[View Common tab]

Note:
You can select CMAP Version setting when the [View Common] tab is selected from the normal
menu but you cannot select a chart when the [View Common] tab is selected from the Table Editing
menu, Graphic Editing menu, or User Chart Editing menu.

3-161

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.29.1.1 Setting the "View Common" tab


The settings made here apply to View1 and View2 tabs for single/multi-view.
1) Left-click the item to Select.[OK] on the panel to close it.
a) Display Category (S-57/C-MAP Only)
Base/Standard/Other
Selection is the same as when the [Base], [Standard] and [Other] on the display panel are
used. For detailed function, see 3.6 Changing the Object Category (S-57/C-MAP Only)
Changing the Object Category (S-57/C-MAP Only).
b) Area Boundary (S-57/C-MAP Only)
Plane : Plane boundary (The boundary of the area is drawn by the dotted lines)

Boundary of the area

Symbolized : Symbolized boundary (The boundary of the area is drawn by the symbolized
line)

Boundary of the area

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-162

c) Redraw
Border range:

Sets the border range to shift the chart when ship reaches it. (Effective
only when motion True is selected.) Border range can set from 30%
to 80%.

Margin (Chart Rotation):

This function is effective only when the mode Course up is


selected. (See 3.7.2 Selecting Azimuth Mode.)

The chart

will be turned step-by-step by the angle set here. Namely, if


the [Margin (Chart Rotation)] is set to 10 degrees, the chart
will be rotated each time the ship turns more than 10 degrees.

[Ex. The boarder range feature]

When set border range is 80%, When your ship reaches the border range,
the chart automatically shifts as follow:

3-163

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

ECDIS

d) Chart Symbol (S-57/C-MAP Only)


Paper Chart:

Lighthouses and other symbols are shown as indicated on the paper


charts.

Simplified:

Simplified: A simple-ized symbol is displayed.

Full Light Line: The range of lighthouse light is displayed in circle. When the [Full Light
Line] is set to ON, the size of the circle changes according to the chart
scale. When the chart is enlarged, the circle becomes large accordingly.
Consider Scale Minimum: When this item is selected, if the chart is reduced exceeding the
minimum scale set in a symbol, the symbol will not be displayed.
The minimum scale of a symbol differs among symbols. Also,
note that this item will not work when the chart (symbol) contains
no information.

[When [Paper Chart]is selected]


marks displayed on Electronic
Chart Display indicate that there are
rocks or other dangerous obstacles
in the water area where the vessel is
sailing.
Display of

marks depends on

the settings of Depth Alarm. For the


method of setting Depth Alarm, see
e) Depth Alarm (S-57/C-MAP Only).

[When [Simplified] is selected]

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-164

[Full Light Line setting]


When [Full Light Line] is OFF

ECDIS

Range of lighthouse light

When [Full Light Line] is ON

Range of lighthouse light


The size of the circle changes
according to the chart scale.

3-165

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

[Consider Scale Minimum setting]


When the minimum scale of spot depth is 1:40000 and a chart display scale is 1:50000:
When [Consider Scale Minimum] is ON

When [Consider Scale Minimum] is OFF

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-166

e) Depth Alarm (S-57/C-MAP Only)


Shallow Contour:

The color of the sea indicated on the chart for the preset depth can be
changed.

Safety Contour:

Depth smaller (or shallower) than the preset value are displayed
enhanced.
If there is no safety depth line on the chart, a deeper safety depth line
than you set is displayed.

Safety Depth:

Spot soundings smaller than the preset value are displayed enhanced
displayed only at the value.

Deep Contour:

ECDIS

The color of the sea indicated on the chart for the preset depth can be
changed.

Two Color Depth:

Generally, the sea is displayed on charts with sea depths divided into
four colors. However, when [Two Color Depth] is selected, the sea
depths are displayed in two colors, with Line of "Shallow Contour" and
"Safety Contour" displayed as one color, and

and Line of "Deep

Contour" displayed as another color.("Safety Depth" is displayed at the


value). This feature is used to clearly indicate and divide the sea into
safe areas and dangerous areas where care must be taken during the
voyage, just like Shallow Pattern described earlier.
Shallow Pattern:

The [Shallow Pattern] check mark adds grid lines to shallow sea set at
Shallow Contour and Safety Contour in the four selectable depths. This
function is for highlighting areas that require special care during the
voyage.

Show Isolated Danger In Shallow WaterWhenShow Isolated Danger In Shallow Water


is selected, display isolated danger in shallower water than safety
contour as mark .
Value:
Min:0m
Max:200m

[Shallow Contour/Safety Contour/Deep Contour settings]


Shallow Contour

Deep Contour

Land

Land
shallow water
safety water
deep water

Safety Contour

3-167

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

[Two Color Depth setting]


When [Two Color Depth] is OFF (The sea is indicated in four colors.)

Deep Contour

Shallow Contour
Land

Safety Depth(only the value)

Safety Contour

When [Two Color Depth] is ON (The sea is indicated in two colors.)

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-168

[Shallow Pattern setting]


When [Shallow Pattern] is ON (Shallow Pattern is displayed.)

Shallow Pattern
ECDIS

When [Shallow Pattern] is OFF (Shallow Pattern disappears.)

3-169

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

Show Isolated Danger In Shallow Water Shallow Pattern


When Show Isolated Danger In Shallow Water Shallow Patternis ON (Isolated Danger
in shallower water than safety contour display as mark

Dangerous object

Safety Contour

When Show Isolated Danger In Shallow Water Shallow Patternis OFF (Isolated Danger
in shallower water than safety contour does not display as mark

Dangerous object

Safety Contour

f) C-MAP Ed.3 Database


The chart that C-MAP Ed 3 was imported can be chosen from.
The list of the C-MAP Ed.3 chart which
was imported in Chart Portfolio is
displayed.

When setting a truns ON/OFF in the


validity, a chart is displayed.
When choosing more than one, it rises
one above another and it is displayed.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-170

g) Chart Graphic Performance

FastPriority is given to drawing Speed.


Hi QualityPriority is given to drawing Accuracy.
ECDIS

3-171

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.29.1.2 Setting the "View1" tab


The View1 tab setting is used for the [View 1] screen. Namely, this settings apply to the single
view screen (normal screen), or the "View 1" screen when you select multi view function to display
"View 1" and "View 2" screens. (For multi view function, see 3.11 Displaying Chart in Various
Ways (Multi View/Wide View).)
1) Left-click the setting items to set them ON /OFF.
Left-click the [OK] to close the panel.
[Cancel]: It closes a panel without saving contents when clicking the [Cancel].
[Apply]:

Contents can be saved without closing a panel when clicking the [Apply]

[View1 tab]

Multi screen view statuses:


The top right square on the view panel shows how view is divided. The blue area is the display area for
the current view.
(For multi screen display, see 3.11.1 Multi View Screen)

Single view

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

Top Bottom view

Right Left view

3-172

Right Top view

a) Type (Type of chart)


S-57:

S-57 chart is displayed.

C-MAP Ed.2: S-57 can be selected for simultaneous display.


C-MAP Ed.3: C-MAP Ed.3 chart is displayed.
ARCS:

ARCS chart is displayed.

Note:
ARCS can be selected only if the ARCS chart has already been installed and the [ARCS
PIN] is correctly inputted when the "Navigation & Planning" is started.
ECDIS

ARCS and other S-57 or C-MAP cannot be selected at the same time.
b) Text Size (S-57/C-MAP only)
Expands characters.
Reduces characters.

The character size in the text to which the

mark is attached can be changed.

Example: Land region

Small

Large

Small

Large

Large

Small

Smalld

Large

Large

Small

Large

Small

3-173

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

c) Layer (S-57/C-MAP only)


Layers displayed on the chart are listed below. There are [-] layer, [S] layer, and [O] layer.
[-]: Items that can be set when the chart object display is in [Base], [Standard], and [Other]
mode
[S]: Items that can be set when the chart object display is in [Standard] or [Other] mode.
[O]: Items that can be set when the chart object display is in [Other] mode.
(For chart object display, see 3.6 Changing the Object Category (S-57/C-MAP Only)
Display of each layer listed below can be turned ON/OFF:
Layers in S-57
[S] objects:
unknown object
Land region, Sea area/named water area
Causeway, Dam, Dyke, Gate
Dyke, Slope topline, Airport, Building, single, Crane, Landmark, Built-up area
Swept area
Sand wave, Tunnel, Cable, Submarine
Navigation line
Recommended track
Ferry route
Radar range, Radar line
Restricted area
Ferry route, Military practice area, Offshore production area
Caution area, Fairway
Fishing ground, Marine farm/culture
Anchorage area, Anchor berth
Cable area, Pipeline area
Dumping ground, Cargo transshipment area, Incineration area
Daymark
Navigational system mark
topmarks
light
Fog signal, Retro-reflector, Radar transponder beacon, Radar reflector
Pilot boarding place, Signal station, Traffic, Signal station, Warning
[O] objects:
Quality of data,Low accuracy data
Nautical publication information
Coverage, Compilation scale of data
Local magnetic anomaly, Magnetic variation
Sloping ground, Land elevation, Slope topline
Vegetation, Lake, Rapids, River, Water fall, Tideway
Building, Fortified structure, Land mark, Silo/Tank, Airport, Road, Railway
Check point, Harbour facility
Distance mark
3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-174

Berch, Crane, Drydock, Mooring/Warping facility, Gate


Sounding
Depth area, Depth counter,Label for contour
Water turbulence, Tide..., Current-non-gravitational
Seabed area, Weed/Kelp, Spring
Fishing-facility
Obstruction, Wreck, Underwater/Awash rock
Cable, Submarine, Pipeline, Submarine/on land
Continental shelf area

ECDIS

Custom zone, Free port area, Harbour area


Fishery zone
Administration area, Contiguous zone, Exclusive economic zone
Radar station, Radio station, Coastguard station, Rescue station
Layers in C-MAP Ed.3
[S] objects:
Land region, Sea area/named water area
Causeway, Dam, Dyke, Gate
Dyke, Slope topline, Airport, Building, single, Crane, Landmark, Built-up area
Swept area
Sand wave, Tunnel, Cable, Submarine
Navigation line
Recommended track
Ferry route
Radar range, Radar line
Restricted area
Ferry route, Military practice area, Offshore production area
Caution area, Fairway
Fishing ground, Marine farm/culture
Anchorage area, Anchor berth
Cable area, Pipeline area
Dumping ground, Cargo transshipment area, Incineration area
Daymark

3-175

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

Navigational system mark


Fog signal, Retro-reflector, Radar transponder beacon, Radar reflector
Pilot boarding place, Signal station, Traffic, Signal station, Warning
[O] objects:
Quality of data,Low accuracy data
Nautical publication information
Coverage, Compilation scale of data
Local magnetic anomaly, Magnetic variation
Sloping ground, Land elevation, Slope topline
Vegetation, Lake, Rapids, River, Water fall, Tideway
Building, Fortified structure, Land mark, Silo/Tank, Airport, Road, Railway
Check point, Harbour facility
Distance mark
Berch, Crane, Drydock, Mooring/Warping facility, Gate
Sounding
Depth area, Depth counter,Label for contour
Water turbulence, Tide..., Current-non-gravitational
Seabed area, Weed/Kelp, Spring
Fishing-facility
Obstruction, Wreck, Underwater/Awash rock
Cable, Submarine, Pipeline, Submarine/on land
Continental shelf area
Custom zone, Free port area, Harbour area
Fishery zone
Administration area, Contiguous zone, Exclusive economic zone
Radar station, Radio station, Coastguard station, Rescue station
d) Text (S-57/C-MAP Only)
The texts that will be displayed on the chart. You can turn the display of the following texts
ON and OFF.
Text in S-57
Important text (Vertical Clearance bridge, overhead cable, so on)
Name/Number of: buoys, beacons, so on
Light description
Note on chart data or nautical publication
Nature of seabed
Geographic names
Value of: magnetic variation, swept depth
Height of islet or land feature
Berth number
National language

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-176

Text in C-MAP Ed.3


Important text(Vertical Clearance bridge, overhead cable, so on)
Other text (Name of building so on)
Light description
Note on chart data or nautical publication
Geographic names
National language
Note: When setting "National Language" in the validity, it overlap with the other displaying
information specified in English. Therefore, when setting "National Language" in the validity, set
the other Text check item in the invalid resemblance.

3-177

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

ECDIS

3.29.1.3 Setting the "View2" tab


The [View2] tab setting is used for the View 2 screen. This settings apply to the view 2 screen
(the second screen) which will be displayed when multi view function is used. The view 2 screen
will not be displayed if you use a Single View screen (normal screen). (For multi view function,
see 3.11 Displaying Chart in Various Ways (Multi View/Wide Range View) .
1) Left-click the setting items to set them ON/OFF.
Left-click the [OK] on the panel to close the panel.
[Cancel]:

It closes a panel without saving contents when clicking the [Cancel].

[Apply]:

Contents can be saved without closing a panel when clicking the [Apply].

The setting contents are the same as for [View 1] panel mentioned earlier.
The setting items are as follows:
Type (Type of chart)

Layer

Text

Text Size

Note:
[View2-Type] doesn't change with [View1-Type] and it functions.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-178

Multi screen view statuses:


The top right square on the view panel shows how view is divided. The blue area is the display area
for the current view.
(For multi screen display, see 3.11.1 Multi View Screen)

ECDIS

Single view

Top Bottom view

Right Left view Right Top view

3.29.2 Other Chart Setting


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(0) Setting] - [(2) Other Charts] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Chart] - [(0) Setting] - [(2) Other Charts] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(0) Setting] - [(2) Other Charts] in that order.
The Other Chart Setting panel opens.
2) Left-click the setting items to set them ON/OFF.
Then, left-click the [OK] to close the panel.

The item which removed a check become hidden.

3-179

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.29.3 Save Chart Setting


This function can save the setting contents of [Chart Setting].
1. In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(3) User Setting] - [(3) Save Chart Setting].
2. [Save Chart Setting] panel is displayed.
Name can be entered to 15 characters.
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(3) User Setting] - [(4) Chart Setting List].
the saving setting can be loaded.
see 3.29.4 Chart Setting List.

The following set value is saved.


[View Common] tab
Display Category
Area Boundary
Depth Alarm
Redraw
Chart Symbol
[View1/View2] tab
Type
Text Size
Layer
Text

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-180

3.29.4 Chart Setting List


This feature can load the set value which saved in[Menu]-[(6)Chart]-[(0)Setting]-[(1)S-57/C-MAP/ARCS].
1. In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(3) User Setting] - [(4) Chart Setting List].
2. Chart panel and a saving setting list are displayed.
[Load]:

Selected setting can be loaded.

[Delete]:

Selected setting can be deleted.

[Close]:

[Chart Setting List] is closes.

ECDIS

3-181

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.30 Chart Abbreviations


Displays a table of the meanings of the chart abbreviations.
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(3) Chart Abbreviation] in that order.
An Information panel with a table of the meanings of the chart abbreviations is displayed.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-182

3.31 Accepting the S-57 Updating Chart


You can merge the S-57 updating charts with the original charts. Whether you merge the updating chart
here in "Navigation & Planning" screen or you merge it when importing with the "Chart Portfolio" is
selectable in the setting. (For Chart Portfolio operation, see attached Chart Portfolio.
1) Be sure that the SENC information level is set to [Standard] or [Other].( A part is displayed in
[Base].)
ECDIS

[Standard] or [Other] is selected.

2) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(6) Accept S-57 Updates] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Chart] - [(6) Accept S-57 Updates] in that order. I
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(6) Accept S-57 Updates] in that order.
The Accept Updates panel opens.

3-183

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3) Left-click one of the S-57 updating charts in the table.


If you want to display and check the updating objects, select chart to left-click the [Show].
Then, the S-57 updating chart will be displayed on the chart.
The objects of the updating chart will be superimposed on the original chart and show in red.
Accept updating objects
by left-clicking the [OK]
on the Accept
Updatespanel.

Updating objects will be


displayed in red.

The updating objects are merged


with the original chart and its color is
changed from red to normal one.

4) Left-click the [OK] .


The panel closes and the updating objects are merged with the original chart.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-184

3.32 Graphical Index


Graphical Index is a function to display the index of SENC stored by the system.
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] and then [(6) Chart] [(7) Graphical Index] in that order.
Then chart index is displayed on the chart and Graphical Index panel is displayed.
2) Left-click on the chart, the "Graphical Index Information"panel of the clicked place is displayed.
ECDIS

Graphical Index
"Graphical Index Information"panel of
the clicked place

3-185

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3) To want to change display function, select turns ON/OFF and select [Apply].
Display ENC Data:
Switch Display ENC Data in Graphical Index.
Display Chart Name:
Switch Display the Chart Name. If this function is
effective, Chart Name is displayed upper right in
the chart index.
Chart Boundary:
Select display index in either resolution level.
The boundary of the chart to have made valid is
displayed.
Overview

Low Resolution

General
Coastal
Approach
Harbour
Berthing

High Resolition

2) To ending graphical index mode, Left-click on the [Close]. Then, the chart display returns to
original condition.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-186

3.33 Date-dependant View


Date-dependant View is a function to display S57/63 chart at the time of specified date. For example,
you can display chart of arrival area depended on ETA when planning voyage,
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU]-[(6)Chart]-[(9)Date-dependant View] in that order.
Date-dependent View Setting panel opens.
ECDIS

2) Enter the date/time you want to display S57/63 charts. And Left-click the Apply button.
UTC/LMT
Change UTC/LMT of specified date.
Data
Enter the date you want to see the chart.
Time
Enter the time you want to see the chart.
TimeZone (only LMT)
Enter the time zone you want to see the chart.

3) The chart is displayed based on entered date/time.

3) If Left-click "Apply" button and close panel, the chart is displayed based on now time.

3-187

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.34 Setting Radar Options


3.34.1 Setting of RADAR
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(9) Radar Overlay] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(9) Radar Overlay] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
In the TUser Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Main] - [(9) Radar Overlay] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
The Radar Option panel opens.
2) After setting the items as required, left-click the [Close] button on the panel to close it.
Note:
For details on each setting item, refer to the INSTRUCTION MANUAL for Radar being used.
The Rader Option panel will not be displayed if an optional radar board is not installed.

IR (Interference Rejection):
This function is used to remove unnecessary signals from
other radars when they are superimposed over the
selected radar signal.

Gain Adjust/Sea Adjust/Rain Adjust/Video


You can adjust these items using the dials on the operation
panel other than using the dialog box

To Adjust the Radar Image Using the Radar Option Panel:


1)

Select value with the scroll bar.

2)

Left-click the [Close] button to close the Radar Option


panel.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-188

3.35 AIS/TT Setting


3.35.1 AIS/Target Track Setting
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) AIS/TT] - [(0) AIS/TT Setting] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(3) AIS/TT] - [(0) AIS/TT Setting] in that order.
The AIS/Tracking Target Setting Option panel opens.

ECDIS

2) Left-click the setting items to set them ON/OFF, and, for the items that require value entry, enter
the value. Left-click the [OK] to close the panel.
Note:
For details on each setting item, refer to the INSTRUCTION MANUAL for TT/AIS to be used.
AIS/TT Past Position:

CPA/TCPA Limit:

AIS/TT past position can be displayed

It becomes valid when setting [AIS CPA/TCPA Alarm] to

in the set interval.

[ACT]. Alarm is occurred when the target enters in each

[0.5min] [1min] [2min] [3min] [4min]


[0.1NM] [0.2NM] [0.5NM] [1NM]: It

setting range.
CPA (Closest Point of Approach) is distance between

displays in the set interval.

own ship and target. CPA Limit setting range: 0.1 - 9.9NM
TCPA (Time to Closest Point of Approach) is time to own
ship and CPA of target. TCPA Limit setting range: 1

Display TT Vector:

99min

It displays TT Vector
when putting check.

AIS Lost Alarm


[OFF]: "Lost Alarm" not effect
[ACT&Danger]:
Active target and Danger target
[Danger]:
Danger target only

AIS CPA/TCPA Alarm:


[ACT]: Active target only
[ACT & Sleep]:
Active target and Sleep target

AIS Filter:
Target Number:

Refer to 3) AIS Filter

<AIS>
[OFF]:

Label is not displayed

[ON]:

Display only label of Activated AIS Target

[AIS Track]: Display only label of target to which route is displayed


[ships Name]:AIS Target name is display
<TT>
[OFF]:

Label is not displayed

[ON]:

Displays a label.

[TT Track]: Display only label of target to which route is displayed


3-189

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

Note:

Tracking spots of AIS/TT are cleared by changing screen, e.g. Zooming In/Out.

* In case of built-in Target Track processing co-processor.


Acquisition relation menu of Target Track becomes able to be selected when making [Internal Target
Tracking function] ON.
Acquisition relation menu of Target Track becomes invalid when making [Internal Target Tracking
function] ON.

3) AIS Filter
High Priority filter for display:
Ring:

The AIS targets within the specified distance are displayed.


It changes to edit mode when left-click onto the "Ring" line.

Sector: The AIS targets within the specified bearing with the heading as the center are
displayed.
It changes to edit mode when left-click onto the "Sector" line.
Heading line

Sector area
Ring area

Own ship

120nm

Note:
Maximum number of visible targets are 300. For over 300 targets, at first the targets
attributed danger have priority to show. And secondary the targets without danger are
shown the nearest from own ship one by one.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-190

It sets the range of Ring.

It sets the range of Sector.

Minimum: 0.0 NM

Minimum: 0.0

Maximum: 120.0 NM(MAX)

Maximum: 359.9

It becomes valid when check is ON.

It becomes valid when check is ON.

Filter Mode:
[OFF]:

Regardless of the setting range,


AIS Target is displayed.

[Display]: Only AIS in the setting range is


displayed.
[Priority]: When AIS Target is displayed
above the maximum, AIS Target
which is the farthest from the
own ship is not displayed in turn.
Range which was set in Ring and Sector is
displayed when putting a check.

The priority of display is as follows when AIS Target is more than maximum.
Numerical display Target
CPA/TCPA Target
Target in AZ
Association Target
Activated Target
In CPA Limit setting range 1.TCPA sequence 2.CPA sequence 3.Number sequence
Out of CPA Limit setting range 1.Range sequence 2.Number sequence

3-191

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

ECDIS

TT symbols:
Item

Symbol

Color

Tracked target

(Selectable)

Dangerous target

Red (blink)
Object: (Selectable)

Lost target

Cross Line: Red (blink)


(Selectable)

Initial acquisition mark

AIS symbols:
Item

Symbol

Color

Sleeping target

(Selectable)

Activated target

(Selectable)

Selected target

(Selectable)

Dangerous target

Red (blink)

Object: (Selectable)

Lost target

Cross Line: Red (blink)

COG (variable length)


ROT (fixed length)
HDG (fixed length)

HDG

[Sleeping target]

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

[Activated target]

3-192

Conditions for AIS lost targets:


When the data of an AIS target cannot be received for a specified time, the target data is
considered to be lost. As shown in the table below, a time period for judging a target as lost
varies depending on the class of receive data and the target status.
[SOLAS-compliant ship] (Class A)
Time until judgment

Target status

of lost target

Vessel below 3 knots and it is now at anchor or on the moored

18 min

Vessel of 3 knots or more and it is now at anchor or on the moored

60 sec

Vessel of 0 to less than 14 knots

60 sec

Vessel of 0 to less than 14 knots and it is now changing the course

60 sec

Vessel of 14 to less than 23 knots

36 sec

Vessel of 14 to less than 23 knots and it is now changing the course

36 sec

Vessel of 23 knots or more

30 sec

Vessel of 23 knots or more and it is now changing the course

30 sec

[SOLAS-incompliant ship] (Class B)


Time until judgment

Target status

of lost target

Vessel below 2 knots

18 min

Vessel of 2 to less than 14 knots

180 sec

Vessel of 14 to less than 23 knots

180 sec

Vessel of 23 knots or more

180 sec

When an AIS dangerous target is lost and the target data cannot be received for 1 minute, the
target and target data are deleted.
Dangerous Target cam be showed ,only when ARPA is received.

3-193

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

ECDIS

3.35.2 Association Setting


When the ship that transmits AIS information is displayed with the AIS device,
both of the TT symbol received AIS target symbol and radar are plotted. Setting for ECDIS to treat as the
same target is set on this "Association Setting"panel because information on originally the same ship is
shown.

Association Setting to the Association


target on the chart.

Association symbol

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(1) AIS/TT] - [(0) Association Setting] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(3) AIS/TT] - [(0) Association Setting] in that order.
The Association Setting panel opens.
2) Left-click the setting items to set them ON/OFF, and, for the items that require value entry, enter
the value. To close the panel, Left-click the [OK] on the panel.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-194

Association Target can be set in valid or invalid.


It becomes valid when putting a check.
It is connected with the [Association] of the display
panel.
[Synchronized with TTD] is valid only the AIS data
receive from the Radar

ECDIS

It preference which of AIS or TT and it can be set.

It sets [Bearing][Range][Course][Speed].

The setting range is as the following:


[Bearing]: 0.0- 9.9
[Range]: 0m - 999m
[Course]: 0- 99
[Speed]: 0kn - 99kn
Association is valid to 125 % of the set value.

3.36 Shifting Own Ship Position


During voyage, you can shift own ships position on the chart using one of the following methods:
Shifts to the position designated by left-clicking the cursor(Select to [Cursor])
Shifts by entering the latitude/longitude(Select to [Cursor])
Shifts by entering the offset value (Select to [Enter Offset])

Shifted own ship

When shifting the own ship position with an offset, a reference point mark can be displayed in the
position after the offset. A panel for setting the reference point will be displayed.

3-195

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

Please set the following items:

Position to display the reference point:


The position can be modified by left-clicking the select each column of [LAT] or [LON].
MIN Scale:
MAX Scale:

Sets the minimum scale in which the reference point mark is displayed.
Sets the maximum scale in which the reference point mark is displayed.

Comment: Comments for a reference point mark


can be input.
OK: Reference Point Mark will be displayed in the
specified location, and close this panel.
Cancel: Reference Point Mark will be not displayed.
Apply: Reference Point Mark will be displayed in
the specified location, and keep this panel
displayed.

Plot Type: Select EP/DR.


Source:
Selects the type of reference positioning data that is to be displayed
for Reference Point Mark.
Delete: Delete in selected
Reference Point

GPS/DGPS/Decca/Loran/Radar/Astronomical/MFDF/Transit/GNSS/
Line of Position/Visual Bearing LOPS/Visual Range LOPS

Mark
Time: Displays the time to be displayed for reference point marks.

Reference Point Mark

Type of reference positioning

For viewing the information on"Reference Point Mark" or editing/deleting "Reference Point Mark",
see 3.14 Reading Out Information on the Objects.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-196

Do not use the offset function during navigation.


If the equipment is used with the offset value entered as the own ship
position, the position of your ship displayed on the screen is shifted from the
real one, and accidents may result.
When the offset values are entered, the background color of the position
panel on the display panel is colored in sky blue, and the message Position
Shift alarm is displayed in the message display area. Check these
indications, and cancel the offset function if necessary.

3.36.1 Shifting Using the Cursor


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(1) Adjust] - [(1) Cursor] in that order.
The Confirmation panel opens.

2) Left-click the [OK] .


appears.
The ship offset cursor
3) Rotate the trackball and move the cursor to the position
you want, and then left-click there.
4) The "Location/Attributes-Reference Point" panel is
displayed.
5) Own ship will shift to that position.

Clear Offset:
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(1) Adjust] - [(4) Clear Offset] in that order

3-197

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

ECDIS

3.36.2 Shifting by Entering the Position


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(1) Adjust] - [(2) Enter Position] in that order.
The Enter Position panel opens.

2) Enter the position and left-click the [OK] .


3) The "Location/Attributes-Reference Point" panel is displayed.
4) Own ship will shift to that position.
5) It does not off center when clicking [Cancel] .
To clear the offset:
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(1) Adjust] - [(4) Clear Offset] in that order.

3.36.3 Shifting by Entering the Offset Value


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(1) Adjust] - [(3) Enter Offset] in that order.
The Enter Offset panel opens.

2) Enter the amount of offset to be shift and left-click the [OK] .


3) The "Location/Attributes-Reference Point" panel is displayed.
4) Own ship will shift by the amount of offset entered.
5) It does not off center when clicking [Cancel].

3.36.4 Canceling the Ship Offset


In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(1) Adjust] - [(4) Clear Offset] in that order.
The offset applied to own ship can be canceled. As the offset is canceled, the color of the position
display on the panel changes from sky blue to gray.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-198

3.37 Printing Display


(Only when Connected to a Printer)
By using a printer connected to the workstation, you can print out dialog boxes, such as logbooks, or
panels displayed on the screen.
1) In the normal menu

ECDIS

Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(5) Print ] in that order.


In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(5) Print] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Main] - [(5) Print] in that order.
The Print panel opens.
2) According to following figures, select the printer, and set for printing and left-click the [OK] on
the panel to close the panel.
Printing will starts.

HP Officejet K5400dn

HP Officejet 8000

HP Officejet 8100
3-199

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.38 Saving the Screen


An image of the displayed screen can be saved on the hard disk as a 256-color bit map file.
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(6) Save Screen] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(6) Save Screen] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Main] - [(6) Save Screen] in that order.
The image file of the screen will be saved with a file name in the following format:
* When the Lost target, Danger TT Target, Danger AIS Target is in the blink condition, it isn't
captured.
* Radar echo is captured in the contained condition.
Drive_YY MM DD _ HH MM SS.bmp
Year

Minute

Date

Month

Hour

Second

(Example) If the file was created at 10:50:15 on 6 June 2008, If the file was created at 10:50:15 on 6
June

2008,it preserves at the E drive. the file name would beE_080606105015.bmp

3.39 Displaying the Startup Menu


(Exit the navigation & Planning)
After the Navigation & Planning is exited, the Startup Menu panel will be displayed.
For the Startup Menu panel, see 3.3.2 Selecting the Startup Menu.
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU][(0) Exit]in that order.
The Confirmation panel will be displayed.
2) Left-click on the [OK] .
Navigation & Planning is exited, and the Startup Menu will be displayed.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3-200

Route
Planning

4-1

In this Chapter, how to make a route is explained in 4.1. In addition, how to create alternate route during
voyage is explained in 4.2.
For selecting the route you have made in this chapter, see 3.12 Selecting ROUTE and To WPT.
To set route options, see 4.1.1 Setting the Route Options.
Note:
If you make a Track line more than limit longitude distance, track line can not displayed and Not
Allowed message is indicated.

If you make a Track line more than 80 degree latitude distance, track line can not displayed

4.1 Route Planning


You can make a route by using one of the following methods. After you have made a route, you can edit it.
Edition is possible by using either method.
Route planning using the Table Editor
You can make a route by entering each WPT value in the WPT entry table. Using the [View Sync]
button, the current WPT can always be displayed on the chart during editing.
Route planning using the Graphic Editor
You can make a route by graphically drawing each WPT on the chart.

Editing Screen and Editing Menu:


When you enter the Table Editing mode or Graphic Editing mode from the normal menu, the editing
screen is displayed.
On the editing screen, editing buttons are displayed. Further, special editing menu is provided and it
opens by rotate the trackball to move the cursor on upper part of screen in the same way as for normal
menu.
The editing button functions are included in this special menu, though some names of buttons are slightly
different from those of menus.
Note:
The special editing menu has the same menus as for normal menu. Explanation of these menus is
omitted in this Chapter.

Route Name and Extension of File:


Route Name: You can enter up to 8 characters. For example: Route-01
(Note) Characters such as . and that cannot generally be used in file names cannot
be used as route names.
Extension of File: The extension (3 additional letters) is automatically attached to the route name as
follows.
Route-01.rtn

4 Route Planning

4-2

Route shown on the Screen:


W000

Planned course

W001

ECDIS

Planned speed [kt]


Leg

Port side (in red line)


and port side width

Arrival radius

Starboard side (in green line)


and starboard side width

WPT : Way Point

Note:
For each default value, see 4.1.1 Setting the Route Options.

4-3

4 Route Planning

4.1.1 Setting the Route Options


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Route] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
Then, the Route Plan Setting panel opens.

2) Select an item, and enter the value in the numeric input box as needed.
Then, left-click the [OK] button to close the dialog box.
a) Date/Time for monitoring
Select UTC/LMT for arrival time display during route monitoring.
UTC display

4 Route Planning

LMT display

4-4

b) Select Route
When the checkbox of Estimated Time of Arrival is on (with a checkmark), the arrival time is
displayed at WPT during route monitoring.
When Estimated Time of Arrival is off (no checkmark):

ECDIS

When Estimated Time of Arrival is on (with a checkmark) and UTC is


selected for Route Monitoring Time:

When Estimated Time of Arrival is on (with a checkmark) and LMT is


selected for Route Monitoring Time:

4-5

4 Route Planning

c) Default
Set the default of the route to be created during route planning.
XTL PORT: Port side width
XTL STBD: Starboard side width
Arrival Radius:

Arrival radius

Speed:

Planned ships speed

Sail:

RL (Rhumb line)/GC (Great circle)

ROT:

Turn rate

Turn Radius: Turn radius


Time Zone: Time zone
d) Max. Latitude
Waypoints cannot be set in latitudes higher than the set latitude. If a GC leg is higher than
the set latitude, waypoints are added for limiting the GC leg to the maximum latitude.

When the GC leg between W002 and W003


exceeds the maximum latitude (60N)
60N

When the maximum latitude is 60 or more, a GC leg exceeding 60 can be input.

W003 and W004 are added for limiting the


GC leg to the maximum latitude (60N).
(RL leg between W003 and W004)
60N

Waypoints are added at intersections between the GC leg and 60, so a leg exceeding 60 is
not input.
e) Check Safety in Editing
During editing the route, safety check is automatically conducted.
(You can manually conduct safety check with the [Safety Check] button.)
If an error is detected during the safety check, the route will have to be reset.
(The error part is drown in black color after safety check.)
Note:
The route cannot be created if the GC leg extends over 120 and more in longitudinal direction.

4 Route Planning

4-6

f) Route Type
Select a route type when making a route file.
TCS route

Normal route

ECDIS

WOP
WOL

Note:
In editing the route, "View Ship's Parameter" can be displayed.
"View Ship's Parameter" dialog is only a display.

In Route Editing menu (Table / Graphic)


Select [(4) Route] - [(5) View Ships Parameter] in that order.
Then, the View Ships Parameter panel opens.

4-7

4 Route Planning

4.1.2 Route Planning Using the Table Editor


The order of explanation here is as follows:
About the Table Editing mode
Table editing menu and button functions
Operation flowchart
Detailed operation
The route you have made with the Table Editor can be edited with the Graphic Editor.

Edit routes in accordance with the world geodetic system (WGS-84).


Use of routes edited with any other geodetic systems may cause accidents.

4.1.2.1 Table Editing Mode


On the operation panel
Press the [ROUTE PLAN] key.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(1) Route Planning] - [(1) Table Editor] in that order.
The Table Editing screen as shown below will open.
On this screen you can make or edit the route.
[Table Editing Screen]

How to open the Table Editing Menu:


Left-clicking the [MENU] button on the display panel in the Table Editing mode will open the special menu
for Table Editor.

4 Route Planning

4-8

How to exit the table editing mode:


Left-click the [Close] button. Alternatively, in the Table Editing menu, select [(1) File] - [(0) Exit from
Route Planning] in that order.

How to print the WPT table contents (only when a printer is connected):
Open the route file (WPT table) to be printed, and left-click the [Print] button.

Alternatively, in the Table

Editing menu, select [(1) File] - [(7) Print WPT] in that order.

4.1.2.2 Table Editing Menu and Button Functions (Table Editor)


(1) Table editing menu
The following shows each menu in the Table Editing mode:

ECDIS

Table 4.1 Table Editing Menu Tree


Main Menu
(1) File

Submenu

Submenu/Option

Reference

(1) New

4.1.2.4

(2) Open

4.1.2.5

(3) Import

(1) Normal

4.1.2.6

(2) TCS

4.1.2.6

(3) 2G TCS

4.1.2.6

(4) Save

4.1.2.4

(5) Save as

4.1.2.5

(6) Export

4.1.2.7

(7) Print WPT

4.1.2.1

(0) Exit from Route Planning

4.1.2.4

(2) Edit

(4) Sort Reversely

4.1.2.4

(3) AIS/TT

(1) TT1

3.3.9.1

(2) TT2

3.3.9.1

(3) AIS

3.3.9.1

(4) All

3.3.9.1

(5) Deactive All AIS

3.3.9.7

(6) All List

3.3.9.2

(7) Select List

3.3.9.8

(8) Target Track

(1) Target Track Setting

3.3.9.3

(2) File Operation

3.3.9.4

(9) Own Ships AIS Data

3.3.9.2

(1) Message
(0) AIS Sentence

(4) Route

(1) Addressed Message

3.3.9.5

(2) Broadcast Message

3.3.9.5

(1) VDM

3.3.9.6

(2) TTD1

3.3.9.6

(3) TTD2

3.3.9.6

(0) AIS/TT Setting

3.34.1

(0) Association Setting

3.34.2

(5) View Ships Parameter

4.1.1

(0) Setting

4.1.1

4-9

4 Route Planning

Table 4.1 Table Editing Menu Tree (Continued


Main Menu
(5) Chart

Submenu
(1) Marking/Highlighting

(2) Off Center


(3) User Setting

Reference

(1) Event Mark

3.19.1

(2) Information Mark

3.19.2

(3) Tidal Stream Mark

3.19.3

(4) Highlight

3.19.4

(5) Delete Event Mark

3.19.1

(1) Enter Position

3.4.5

(2) Home

3.4.1

(1) Save My Port List

3.8.1

(2) My Port List

3.8.2

(3) Save Chart Setting

3.29.3

(4) Chart Setting List

3.29.4

(4) Select S-57 Chart

3.9

(5) Fix View

3.7.3

(6) Accept S-57 Updates

3.31

(4) ARCS

(0) Setting
(6) Main

Submenu/Option

(1) Temporary and Preliminary

3.10.8

(2) Adjust Datum Offset

3.10.9

(3) Datum Transformation

3.10.9

(1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS

3.29.1

(2) Other Chart

3.29.2

(1) Maneuver Curve

3.20

/Remove Maneuver Curve


(2) Cross Bearing
(3) Create Clearing Line
(4) LOP

3.21
(1) Not Less Than

3.22

(2) Not More Than

3.22

(1) Create LOP

3.23

(2) Delete All LOP

3.23

(5) Print

3.37

(6) Save Screen

3.38

(9) Radar Overlay

(1) Radar1

3.3.8

(2) Radar2

3.3.8

(3) Range Rings

3.3.8

(4) Bearing Scale


(3) Test

(0) Setting

4 Route Planning

(0) Setting

7.11

(1) Alarm Log

3.3.7

(2) System Information

7.2

(3) Operating Time

7.3

(1) Color and Brilliance Setting

7.6

(2) Option Key Setting

7.7

(3) Date/Time Setting

7.8

(4) Marker Setting

3.16.2.1

(6) Voyage Distance Clear

7.9

(7) Display Panel Setting

3.25

(8) Alarm Setting

7.10

(0) Buzzer Volume

3.3.5

4-10

Context Menu (Right Click on the chart display area)


Main Menu

Submenu

Reference

Abort

3.1.1.3

S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information

3.14

Other Information

3.14

Zoom Area

3.5.1

Dropped EBL/VRM

CCRP EBL/VRM

EBL1/VRM1

3.16.2.2

EBL2/VRM2

3.16.2.2

EBL1

3.16.2.3

EBL2

3.16.2.3

VRM1

3.16.2.4

VRM2

3.16.2.4

Move Origin1

3.16.2.5

Move Origin2

3.16.2.5

EBL1/VRM1

3.16.2.6

EBL2/VRM2

3.16.2.6

EBL1

3.16.2.7

EBL2

3.16.2.7

VRM1

3.16.2.8

VRM2

3.16.2.8

Running Fix / Remove Running Fix

3.17

High Resolution Area

3.10.1

Load Low Resolution

3.10.6

Select Chart Under Cursor

3.10.3

Change Active Panel

3.10.5

Note and Diagram

3.10.8

4-11

4 Route Planning

ECDIS

(2) Button functions


Left-click to close the route file and exit the Table Editing mode.
Left-click when making a new route file.
Left-click to select a route file previously made.
Left-click when saving the route file currently made.
Left-click when printing the WPT contents. (Only when connected to a printer)
Left-click when inserting a new WPT.
Left-click when deleting a WPT.
Left-click to divide the leg.
Left-click to set default value on following columns.
PORT/STBD/ARR RAD/ SPD/Sail/Turn RAD/Time Zone.
Left-click when checking the safety of the route. As a result of the checking,
warning dialog box will appear if the route is not safety.

Left-click to check if the route exceeds the limit (leg length, etc.).
This button is available for TCS mode only.

Left-click when you want to display the WPT during editing.

Left-click the drop-down list button to left-click one of the items. The Name
column contents in the editing table change according to the selected item.
Name :

You can enter name in the Name column.

WPT to WPT :

WPT

to

WPT

information

displayed.
Total :

W000 to WPTn information is displayed.

It shifts to Graphic Editor.


When editing a route, the editing can be continued on Graphic Editor.

4 Route Planning

4-12

is

(3) Context Menu on Table


When right-clicking on the table, a context menu is displayed. Operation is applied to the line which
displayed a menu.

Context Menu
ECDIS

Left-click when inserting a new WPT.


Left-click when deleting a WPT.
Left-click to divide the leg.
Left-click to set default value on following columns.
PORT/STBD/ARR RAD/ SPD/Sail/Turn RAD/Time Zone.

4-13

4 Route Planning

4.1.2.3 Operation Flowchart for Table Editor


The following shows the general flowchart for planning a route using the Table Editor.
File opening and saving operation differs depending on whether you make a new route file or you select a
route file previously made, though the table editing operation is the same.

(1) Making a new route file (Table Editor)


Start

Clear any route if


displayed.

Enter the Table


Editing mode.

Left-click [New].
.

Left-click to select [UNLOAD].

In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(1) RoutePlanning] - [(1) Table
Editor] in that order.
Open a new route file.

Table editing operation

W000 entry
Position (Lat./Lon.)

W000 entry screen

Left-click the next


WPT No.

W001 entry
Position (Lat./Lon.)

Repeat WPT entry


until the final WPT.

The following items are automatically


displayed. Change, if necessary.
XTL(PORT/STBD)
ARR RAD
SPD[kn]
Sail (RL/GC)
Time Zone
Name

Left-click [Save]

Enter the file name.

Left-click [Close]

Exit the Table Editing mode.

End

4 Route Planning

4-14

(2) Editing the route file (Table Editor)


Start

Clear any route if


displayed.

Enter the Table


Editing mode.

Left-click [Open].

Left-click [UNLOAD].

In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(1) RoutePlanning] - [(1)
Table Editor] in that order.
Select a route file you want to edit.

ECDIS

Select route type.

Table editing operation

Edit the WPT table.

When you want to change the file name.

Left-click [Save]

To save without changing the file name.

Left-click [Save as]


in the menu.
Enter the new file
name.

Left-click [Close]

Exits the Table Editing mode.

End

4-15

4 Route Planning

4.1.2.4 Making a New Route File (Table Editor)


This explanation is made according to (1) Making a new route file (Table Editor) in 4.1.2.3 Operation
Flowchart for Table Editor.

(1) Unloading the selected route before starting


Before starting, left-click the ROUTE drop-down button on the
display panel, and then left-click the [UNLOAD] to clear any
route on the screen.

(2) Entering the Table Editing mode


1) On the operation panel
Press the [ROUTE PLAN] key.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(1) Route Planning] - [(1) Table Editor] in that order.
Then, the Table Editing screen opens.

[MENU] Button

When you open the Table Editing menu, rotate the trackball to move the cursor on upper part
of screen.
Then, the Table Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, left-click any position on the chart.
[Table Editing Menu]

(3) Opening a new route file


1) To make a new route file, left-click the [New] button.
In the Table editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(1) New] in that order.

4 Route Planning

4-16

(4) Making a route


1) Left-click the LATatitude and LONongitude in the position column, and enter the position for
W000.

2) Left-click the next WPT No. (i.e., W001).

ECDIS

Then, the same position as the previous WPT (i.e. W000) is automatically set in the position
column. Also, default values are displayed in the other columns.
WPT can be made up to 511.
Position:

Latitude/Longitude

XTL PORT: Port side width


XTL STBD: Starboard side width
ARR RAD:

Arrival radius (This item isn't displayed in the TCS setting.)

SPD [kn]:

Ships speed

Sail RL/GC: Sail RL (Rhumb line)/GC (Great circle)


ROT [/min]: The ship's rotation over every 1 minute (This item is automatically computed.)
Turn RAD:

The turning radius

Time Zone: Time zone


Name:

Comment entry column.


The contents of column are changed by left-clicking the [Name] drop-down list
button and then [Name], [WPT to WPT], or [Total].

Name:

You can enter a comment.

WPT to WPT: The Name column changes as follows:


CRS: Course to the next WPT
DIST: Distance from waypoint to
waypoint
TTG: Estimated time required from
waypoint to waypoint

Total:

The Name column changes as follows:


CRS: Course to the next WPT
DIST: Total distance from waypoint 0
to the specified waypoint
ETA: Total time from waypoint 0 to
the specified waypoint

4-17

4 Route Planning

[Entry example: The route displayed on the chart corresponds to the list data.]

(5) Saving the route file


1) Left-click the [Save] button.
The Save as Route File panel opens.

2) Enter the route file name and comment. Left-click the [OK] button.
3) Left-click the [Close] button.
Close the file. Then, the system exit the Table Editing mode and the list and table editing buttons
are cleared from the screen.
The route file can be edited even after it is saved.
Note:
The route cannot be created if the GC leg extends over 120 and more in longitudinal
direction.

4 Route Planning

4-18

How to edit in the Table Editing Menu:


Left-click WPT No. 2, for example, and then left-click the [Insert] button.
In the context menu
Right-click on the table and it selected [Insert WPT] from the context menu for
Table Editor.
* Even if it right-clicks on the chart, a context menu for Table Editor isn't displayed.

Then, the new WPT will be added to the WPT No. 2, and the W002 and later
WPTs will move by one line downwardly.

ECDIS

WPT can be made up to 511.


Left-click W002, for example, and then left-click the [Delete] button.
In the context menu
Right-click on the table and it selected [Delete WPT] from the context menu for
Table Editor.
* Even if it right-clicks on the chart, a context menu for Table Editor isn't displayed.

Then, the W002 is deleted and W003 and later WPTs will move by one line
upwardly.

4-19

4 Route Planning

How to edit in the Table Editing Menu: -- Continued:

After entering WPT(s), left-click the [Safety Check] button to check the safety.
The Route Warning Check panel opens.
Left-click Select Leg or All Leg and left click the
[OK] button. (When you use Select Leg, you
should select a WPT to be checked beforehand.)
The Safety Check function checks not only the
displayed chart but also all-scale S-57/C-MAP
charts that cross the route to be checked.
If there are no safety issues, the following messages are displayed in the [Route
Check] result display box.
[For Select Leg ]

[For All Leg ]

Note:
In case of C-Map(Dynamic License), credit decrease for access charts under
the route when Safety Check.

4 Route Planning

4-20

How to edit in the Table Editing Menu -- Continued:


If the following message is displayed, you should modify the route.
The leg warned is displayed in red in the table. The leg is displayed in red on the
chart.
And dangerous objected is emphasized in black color.

ECDIS

Shown in red

Shown in red

You can make a route while watching the WPT on the chart. For example, above
chart is made with the [View SYNC] button left-clicked to set it ON.
Left-click to check if the route exceeds the limit (leg length, etc.).
This button is available
for TCS mode only.

4-21

4 Route Planning

How to edit in the Table Editing Menu -- Continued:


1) Left-click the WPT with GC leg you want to divide in the WPT table.
In the Table Editing Button
Select [Divide] Button in that order.
In the context menu
Right-click on the table and it selected [Divide] from the context menu
for Table Editor.
* Even if it right-clicks on the chart, a context menu for Table Editor isn't
displayed.

(When you want to divide the leg between W002 and W003, select
W003.)
Then, the Divide Route W002 to W003 panel will open.

Every (Lon): Divides the GC leg every specified longitude value.


Every:

Divides the GC leg every specified distance.

2) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.


Then, the leg is divided according to the setting. (Note that the divided leg
type is changed from GC to RL.)
WPT can be made up to 511.

4 Route Planning

4-22

How to edit in the Table Editing Menu -- Continued:


[Before dividing]

ECDIS

[After dividing]

4-23

4 Route Planning

How to edit in the Table Editing Menu -- Continued:


[Before dividing RL leg]

After dividing]

4 Route Planning

4-24

How to edit in the Table Editing Menu -- Continued:


[Editing the Course and Distance in the WPT to WPT display mode]
In the Table Editing mode, left-click the following drop-down list button and select
[WPT to WPT]. You can edit the values of CRS (Course to the next WPT) and
DIST (Distance to the next WPT) columns.

ECDIS

Example:
In the following example, the Cse and Dist for the W001 are modified. As a
result, the position of the W002 changes according to this modification. Since the
position of the W002 changes, the Cse and Dist values of W002 for W003 also
change.
W002 (After modification)
W003

W001
W002 (Before modification)

[Editing the ETA in the Total display mode]


In the Table Editing mode, left-click the following drop-down list button and select
[Total]. You can edit the value of ETA (Estimated time of arrival to the WPT from
W000) column.

When you edit the WPTns ETA, the ETA and ETD of W000 to WPTn-1 are
calculated based on the WPTns ETA, and the calculated ETA values are
displayed in the table.

4-25

4 Route Planning

How to edit in the Table Editing Menu -- Continued:


[Sort Reversely]

In the Table Editing mode


Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(4) Sort Reversely] in that order.
Then, the WPTs in the list and chart are displayed in the reverse order.

Before reverse sorting

After reverse sorting

4 Route Planning

4-26

How to edit in the Table Editing Menu -- Continued:


It changes to Graphic Editor from Table Editor when clicking this button.
In the following cases, the route is continued after change to Graphic Editor
mode.
When editing the route.
When opening the created route.
Editorial contents and a file name and so on are taken over to "Graphic Editor".

ECDIS

4-27

4 Route Planning

4.1.2.5 Editing a Previous Route File (Table Editor)


This explanation is made according to (2) Editing the route file (Table Editor) in 4.1.2.3 Operation
Flowchart for Table Editor.

(1) Unloading the selected route before starting


Before starting, left-click the ROUTE drop-down button on the
display panel, and then left-click the [UNLOAD] to clear any
route on the screen.
You can also unload the selected route by the following menu operation.

(2) Entering the Table Editing mode


1) On the operation panel
Press the [ROUTE PLAN] key.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(1) Route Planning] - [(1) Table Editor] in that order.
- When you open the Table Editing menu, rotate the trackball to move the cursor on upper part of
screen.
Then, the Table Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, left-click any position on the chart.
[Table Editing Menu]

(3) Selecting the route file


1) To select the route file, left-click the [Open] button.
In the Table Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(2) Open] in that order.
The Open Route File panel opens.

2) Select a route file you want to edit, and left-click the [OK] button.
Then, the selected file opens on the screen.
Now you can edit the file in the same way as when you make a new route file.

4 Route Planning

4-28

(4) Saving the route file


When saving without changing the file name:
1) Left-click the [Save] button.
In the Table Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(4) Save] in that order.
2) Left-click the [Close] button to exit the Table Editing mode.
When saving as the new file:
1) In the Table Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(5) Save As] in the order.
The Save as Route File panel opens.
2) Enter the new file name and comment, left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
If you want to change the route type, change it to another one. For detailed description, see
(5) Saving the route file in 4.1.2.4 Making a New Route File (Table Editor).
3) Left-click the [Close] button to close the file.

4.1.2.6 Importing Route Files


(1) Importing Normal Route Files
Import normal route files that were exported from this equipment.
In the Table Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] - [(1) Normal] in that order.
Then, use the Open panel to select the name of a file to be imported. Only routes having a file
name starting with rot_ can be selected. The name of the file to be opened will be displayed in
the file name box after selecting the file. Left-click on the [OK] button to start file import (for route
export, see 4.1.2.7 Exporting Route Files).

CSV format:
For each WPT of a route, a file containing a data row is created. Data are divided by a comma in this
file. You can use Microsoft EXCEL to edit this file.

4-29

4 Route Planning

ECDIS

(2) Importing Route Files Created with Other ECDIS Models (2G TCS)
Import CSV format route files created with other models ECDIS (JAN-3598), Total Navigator
(JAN-1290, JAN-1397), Chart Display Unit (JAN-1100) we offer.
To convert route files into CSV format, conversion software should be procured separately.
In the Table Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] - [(3) 2G TCS] in that order.
Then, use the Open panel to select the name of a file to be imported. The name of the file to be
opened will be displayed in the file name box after selecting the file. Left-click on the [OK] button
to start file import.

Note:
Use routes based on the world geodesic system (WGS-84).

4.1.2.7 Exporting Route Files


Save newly created route files or already opened route files in CSV format.
In the Table Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(6) Export] in that order.
Then, use the Save As panel to select the name of a file to be exported. If a route file to be
exported already has a name, save it as rot_[date and time].csv. If you wish to change the file name,
follow the naming rules such as rot_[date and time].csv (normal route). Left-click on the [OK] button
to save the route file under the name displayed in the file name box.

Example:
When exporting a file test.rtn, its
name will be set to rot_[date and
time].csv.

4 Route Planning

4-30

Note:

Do not use exported routes in systems other than the world geodesic system (WGS-84).
In the following case, Export becomes invalid.
When not creating more than two WPT by New
In case of not opening a route

ECDIS

4-31

4 Route Planning

4.1.3 Route Planning Using the Graphic Editor


The order of explanation here is as follows:
About the Graphic Editing mode
Graphic editing menu and button functions
Operation flowchart
Detailed operation
The route you have made with the Graphic Editor can be edited with the Table Editor.

Edit routes in accordance with the world geodetic system (WGS-84).


Use of routes edited with any other geodetic systems may cause accidents.

The file operation using [New], [Open], [Save] and [Close] button is the same as for Table Editor. In the
Graphic Editor, you can make a route graphically by positioning the WPTs. The position
(latitude/longitude) of the cursor is shown on the bottom of the display panel for your reference. After you
have entered the WPT, you can move the WPT with the [Move] button or edit the WPT position with the
[Info] button. Also, the route you have made can be edited with the Table Editor.
For positioning the WPTs, you can also use the EBL/VRM keys and dials on the operation panel.

4.1.3.1 Graphic Editing Mode


In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(1) Route Planning] - [(2) Graphic Editor] in that order.
The Graphic Editing screen as shown below will open.
On this screen you can make or edit the route graphically.
[Graphic Editing Screen]

How to open the Graphic Editing Menu:


Rotate the trackball to move the cursor on upper part of screen in the Graphic Editing mode will open the
special menu for Graphic Editor.

4 Route Planning

4-32

How to exit the graphic editing mode:


Left-click the [Close] button. Alternatively, in the Graphic Editing menu, select [(1) File] - [(0) Exit from
Route Planning] in that order.

How to print the WPT table contents (only when a printer is connected):
Open the route file (WPT table) to be printed, and left-click the [Print] button. Alternatively, in the
Graphic Editing menu, select [(1) File] - [(7) Print WPT] in that order.

4.1.3.2 Graphic Editing Menu and Button Functions (Graphic


Editor)
(1) Graphic editing menu

ECDIS

The following shows each menu in the Graphic Editing mode:


Table 4.2 Graphic Editing Menu Tree
Main Menu
(1) File

Submenu

Submenu/Option

(1) New
(2) Open
(3) Import

(2) Edit

Reference
4.1.3.4
4.1.3.5

(1) Normal

4.1.3.6

(2) TCS

4.1.3.6

(3) 2G TCS

4.1.3.6

(4) Save

4.1.3.5

(5) Save as

4.1.3.5

(6) Export

4.1.3.7

(7) Print WPT

4.1.3.1

(0) Exit from Route Planning

4.1.3.1

(1) Use EBL/VRM

4.1.3.8

(2) Use Assistant-Circle

4.1.3.4

(3) Divide Leg


(3) AIS/TT

(4) Sort Reversely

4.1.3.4

(1) TT1

3.3.9.1

(2) TT2

3.3.9.1

(3) AIS

3.3.9.1

(4) All

3.3.9.1

(5) Deactive All AIS

3.3.9.7

(6) All List

3.3.9.2

(7) Select List


(8) Target Track

3.3.9.8
(1) Target Track Setting

3.3.9.3

(2) File Operation

3.3.9.4

(1) Addressed Message

3.3.9.5

(9) Own Ships AIS Data


(1) Message
(0) AIS Sentence

3.3.9.2
(2) Broadcast Message

3.3.9.5

(1) VDM

3.3.9.6

(2) TTD1

3.3.9.6

(3) TTD2

(4) Route

3.3.9.6

(0) AIS/TT Setting

3.34.1

(0) Association Setting

3.34.2

(3) Distance Measurement

3.12.2

(5) View Ships Parameter

4.1.1

(0) Setting

4.1.1

4-33

4 Route Planning

Table 4.2 Graphic Editing Menu Tree -- Continued


Main Menu
(5) Chart

Submenu
(1) Marking/Highlighting

(2) Off Center


(3) User Setting

(2) Information Mark

3.19.2

(3) Tidal Stream Mark

3.19.3

(4) Highlight

3.19.4

(5) Delete Event Mark

3.19.1

(1) Enter Position

3.4.5

(2) Home

3.4.1

(1) Save My Port List

3.8.1

(2) My Port List

3.8.2

(3) Save Chart Setting

3.29.3

(4) Chart Setting List

3.29.4
3.9

(5) Fix View

3.7.3

(6) Accept S-57 Updates

3.31

(0) Setting

(1) Temporary and Preliminary

3.10.8

(2) Adjust Datum Offset

3.10.9

(3) Datum Transformation

3.10.9

(1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS

3.29.1

(2) Other Chart

3.29.2

(1) Maneuver Curve

3.20

/Remove Maneuver Curve


(2) Cross Bearing
(3) Create Clearing Line

3.21
(1) Not Less Than

3.22

(2) Not More Than

3.22

(4) LOP

3.23

(5) Print

3.37

(6) Save Screen


(9) Radar Overlay

(3) Test

(0) Setting

4 Route Planning

Reference
3.19.1

(4) Select S-57 Chart

(4) ARCS

(6) Main

Submenu/Option
(1) Event Mark

3.38
(1) Radar1

3.3.8

(2) Radar2

3.3.8

(3) Range Rings

3.3.8

(4) Bearing Scale

3.3.8

(0) Setting

7.11

(1) Alarm Log

3.3.7

(2) System Information

7.2

(3) Operating Time

7.3

(1) Color and Brilliance Setting

7.6

(2) Option Key Setting

7.7

(3) Date/Time Setting

7.8

(4) Marker Setting

3.16.2.1

(6) Voyage Distance Clear

7.9

(7) Display Panel Setting

3.25

(8) Alarm Setting

7.10

(0) Buzzer Volume

3.3.5

4-34

Context Menu
Right-clicking when editing a graphic will display a shortcut menu. One of the menus below will
be displayed, depending on the operation state when right clicking.

ECDIS

(It is set to some cursor mode.)

(A cursor mode is not set.)

Context Menu (The item which is common with the other operation)
Main Menu

Submenu

Reference

Abort

3.1.1.3

S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information

3.13

Other Information

3.13

Zoom Area

3.5.1

Dropped EBL/VRM

CCRP EBL/VRM

EBL1/VRM1

3.16.2.2

EBL2/VRM2

3.16.2.2

EBL1

3.16.2.3

EBL2

3.16.2.3

VRM1

3.16.2.4

VRM2

3.16.2.4

Move Origin1

3.16.2.5

Move Origin2

3.16.2.5

EBL1/VRM1

3.16.2.6

EBL2/VRM2

3.16.2.6

EBL1

3.16.2.7

EBL2

3.16.2.7

VRM1

3.16.2.8

VRM2

3.16.2.8

Running Fix / Remove Running Fix

3.17

High Resolution Area

3.10.1

Load Low Resolution

3.10.6

Select Chart Under Cursor

3.10.3

Change Active Panel

3.10.5

Note and Diagram

3.10.8

4-35

4 Route Planning

(2) Button functions


Left-click to exit the Graphic Editing mode.
Left-click when making a new route file.
Left-click to select a route file previously made.
Left-click when saving the route file currently made.
Left-click when printing the WPT contents. (Only when connected to a
printer)
Left-click when adding a WPT to the W000 or the to the last WPT.
Left-click when inserting a WPT in the course of the route.
Left-click when moving a WPT.
Left-click when deleting a WPT.
Left-click when opening the information panel of the selected WPT or leg.

Left-click to check if the route exceeds the limit (leg length, etc.).
This button is available for TCS mode only.

It shifts to Table Editor.


When editing a route, the editing can be continued on Table Editor.

4 Route Planning

4-36

4.1.3.3 Operation Flowchart for Graphic Editor (Graphic Editing)


The following shows the general flowchart for planning a route using the Graphic Editor.
File opening and saving operation differs depending on whether you make a new route file or you select a
route file previously made, though the graphic editing operation is the same.
The file opening and saving operation is the same as when using the Table Editor.

(1) Making a new route file (Graphic Editor)


: The same procedure as for the Table Editor.

Start

ECDIS

Clear any route if


displayed.

Enter the Graphic


Editing mode.

Left-click [New].

Left-click to select [UNLOAD].

In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(1) Route Planning] [(2) Graphic Editor] in that order.

Open a new route file.

Graphic editing operation


W000 entry
(using the cursor)
Next WPT entry
(using the cursor)

Repeat WPT entry


until the final WPT.

Left-click [Save]

Enter the file name.

Left-click [Close]

Exits the Graphic Editing mode.

End

4-37

4 Route Planning

(2) Editing the route file (Graphic Editor)


Start

: The same procedure as for the Table Editor.

Clear any route if


displayed.

Left-click [UNLOAD].

Enter the Graphic


Editing mode.

In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(1) Route Planning] [(2) Graphic Editor] in that order.

Left-click [Open].

Select a route file you want to edit.

Select route type.

Graphic editing operation

Edit the WPT.

When you want to change the file name.

Left-click [Save]

To save without changing the file name.

Left-click [Save as]


in the menu.
Enter the new file
name.

Left-click [Close]

Exits the Graphic Editing mode.

End

4 Route Planning

4-38

4.1.3.4 Making a New Route File (Graphic Editing)


This explanation is made according to (1) Making a new route file (Graphic Editor) in 4.1.3.3 Operation
Flowchart for Graphic Editor (Graphic Editing).

(1) Unloading the selected route before starting


Before starting, left-click the ROUTE drop-down button on the
display panel, and then left-click the [UNLOAD] to clear any
route on the screen.

(2) Entering the Graphic Editing mode


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(1) Route Planning] - [(2) Graphic Editor] in that order.

When you open the Graphic Editing menu, rotate the trackball to move the cursor on upper part
of screen.
Then, the Graphic Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, left-click any position on the chart.
[Graphic Editing Menu]

(3) Opening a new route file


1) To make a new route file, left-click the [New] button.
In the Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(1) New] in that order.
How to save the route:
The route file saving operation is exactly the same as for Table Editor.
See (5) Saving the route file in 4.1.2.4 Making a New Route File (Table Editor).

4-39

4 Route Planning

ECDIS

(4) Making a route


Making a route using buttons on the screen:
The following shows the way how to make a route using the buttons on the screens. (You can mix
the EBL/VRM operation with this button operation. See 4.1.3.8 Creating a Route Using EBL/VRM
Keys and Dials.) Operate while watching the cursor position displayed at the bottom of the display
panel.
Note:
If [(1) Use EBL/VRM] is on (with a checkmark), operation using EBL/VRM is to be performed.
If [(2) Use Assistant Circle] is on, operation using supplemental lines is to be performed. To
turn on/off each item, select the menu. Operation using EBL/VRM and operation using
supplemental lines cannot be turned on at the same time.
While [(1) Use EBL/VRM] is on, turning on [(2) Use Assistant Circle] turns on operation using
supplemental lines. Conversely, while [(2) Use Assistant Circle] is on, turning on [(1) Use
EBL/VRM] turns on operation using EBL/VRM.

4 Route Planning

4-40

1) Entering WPTs:
Left-click at the WPT (W000) position and rotate the trackball to move the cursor to the next
WPT (W001).
Then, left-click there.
[W000fixing/W000 to W001]

[W001 fixing]

ECDIS

[W001 to W002]

[W002 fixing]

4-41

4 Route Planning

How to shift the chart during entering WPTs:


Left-click on the chart and hold the button down, and then move the cursor to scroll the chart
while entering WPTs.
2) Terminating WPT entry:
Left-click twice quickly to terminate WPT entry. (You can also terminate the operation by
selecting [Abort] in the shortcut menu after right-clicking.)
[Left-clicking twice quickly to stop entry]

[The route you have entered]

Note:
If a waypoint is located in a position other than an active chart when using ARCS and if another
panel exists at that position, then the panel display will change automatically.

Creating routes using EBL/VRM:


In the Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(1) Use EBL/VRM] in that order.
The EBL/VRM intersection becomes an entering position instead of a cursor.
Entering position

Line drawn from


the previous WPT
Then, decide where the EBL/VRM
intersection will be and left-click on it.

First, left-click on the center of


EBL/VRM.

4 Route Planning

4-42

Creating routes using Assistant Circle:


In the Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(2) Use Assistant Circle] in that order.
WPT input using a supplemental line is enabled.
1) W000 input
Move the cursor to an arbitrary position, and left-click. A supplemental line from the own
ships position will be displayed. Move the trackball to move the intersection between the
circles radius and supplemental line to W000, and left-click.

ECDIS

Supplemental line

Cursor

Supplemental line

W000

W000

This circle is not displayed in actual operation.

4-43

4 Route Planning

2) Specify the center of the circle, and left-click.

W000

Supplemental line

This circle is not displayed in actual operation.

3) Move the trackball to specify the contact with the circles radius, and left-click.
intersection between the circle and supplemental line will be entered as a WPT.

W000

Supplemental line

W001

This circle is not displayed in actual operation.

4 Route Planning

4-44

The

How to edit in the Graphic Editing Menu:


Deleting the WPT:
1) Left-click the [Delete WPT] button.
2) Left-click a WPT you want to delete. Then, the selected WPT is deleted.
[Select W003.]

[W003 is deleted.]

ECDIS

Adding a WPT to the W000 or to the last WPT:


1) Left-click the [Add] button
2) Left-click the W000 or the last WPT. and rotate the trackball to move the
cursor for additional WPT. Then, left-click the cursor to fix the WPT.
[Select W002 (the last WPT).]

4-45

[W003 is added.]

4 Route Planning

How to edit in the Graphic Editing Menu -- Continued:


Moving a WPT (other than W000 and the last WPT):
1) Left-click the [Insert/Move WPT] button.
2) Left-click a WPT you want to move.and rotate the trackball to move the cursor
for moving the WPT. Then, left-click the cursor to fix the WPT.

[Select W002.]

[W002 is moved.]

4 Route Planning

4-46

[Move W002.]

How to edit in the Graphic Editing Menu -- Continued:


Inserting a new WPT between WPTs:
1) Left-click the [Insert/Move WPT] button
2)

Left-click the leg you want to insert a new WPT there. and rotate the
trackball to insert a new WPT. Then, left-click the cursor to fix the WPT. A new
WPT is inserted and the number of the later WPTs is increased by 1.

[Select the leg.]

[Make a new WPT.]


ECDIS

[New WPT is inserted as W002.]

4-47

4 Route Planning

How to edit in the Graphic Editing Menu -- Continued:


Designating coordinates by entering the position or entering the bearing/distance:
Positions can be designated by entering the position or entering the bearing/distance instead of
left-clicking on the chart to designate a coordinate when entering, moving, inserting and adding route.
Designating coordinates by entering position
1) Make sure the system will accept cursor designation of coordinates when entering, moving,
inserting and adding route. (Make sure that the cursor has changed to the

cursor type on

the chart.)
2) Click the right trackball button, then select [Enter Lat/Lon] from the shortcut menu.
The Enter Position panel opens.

3) Enter the position (longitude and latitude), then left-click the [Enter] button the position is
designated..
Left-click the [Close] button the panel is closed.
Designating coordinates by entering bearing/distance
1) Make sure the system will accept cursor designation of coordinates when entering, moving,
inserting and adding route. (Make sure that the cursor has changed to the

cursor type

on the chart.)
2) Click the right trackball button, then select [Enter Bearing/Distance] from the shortcut menu.
The Bearing/Distance panel opens.

3) Enter the bearing and distance from the previous way point, then left-click the [Enter] button.
the position is designated.
Left-click the [Close] button the panel is closed.
Note:
When entering the second way point of a route, the bearing and distance are those from the
previous way point. The shortcut menus cannot be used when designating coordinates that do
not require relative positions, such as the first way point of route.

4 Route Planning

4-48

How to edit in the Graphic Editing Menu -- Continued:


Displaying/Modifying information of WPT or leg:
1) Left-click the [Property] button.
2) Left-click the WPT.
When WPT is selected, [Edit Waypoint] panel opens, while [Edit leg 1] panel
opens when Leg is selected.
Enter the value if you want to change. You can enter a name for the WPT.

If

you want to return each value to the default value, left-click the [Default]
button. (The default value is set in the Route Plan Option panel. See 4.1.1
Setting the Route Options.) After setting, left-click the [OK] button to close
the panel.

ECDIS

[Information for WPT.]

[Information for Leg.]

4-49

4 Route Planning

How to edit in the Graphic Editing Menu -- Continued:

It changes to Graphic Editor from Table Editor when clicking this button.
In the following cases, the route is continued after change to Graphic Editor mode.
When editing the route.
When opening the created route.
[Sort Reversely]
In the Graphic Editing mode
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(4) Sort Reversely] in that order.
Then, the WPT is in the list and chart are displayed in the reverse order.

4 Route Planning

4-50

4.1.3.5 Editing a Previous Route File (Graphic Editor)


This explanation is made according to (2) Editing the route file (Graphic Editor) in 4.1.3.3 Operation
Flowchart for Graphic Editor (Graphic Editing).

(1) Unloading the selected route before starting


Before starting, left-click the ROUTE drop-down button on the
display panel, and then left-click the [UNLOAD] to clear any
route on the screen.

(2) Entering the Graphic Editing mode


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(1) Route Planning] - [(2) Graphic Editor] in that order.
- When you open the Graphic Editing menu, rotate the trackball to move the cursor on upper
part on screen.
Then, the Graphic Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, left-click any position on the chart.
[Graphic Editing Menu]

(3) Selecting the route file


1) To select the route file, left-click the [Open] button.
In the Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(2) Open] in that order.
The Open Route File panel opens.

2) Select a route file you want to edit, and left-click the [OK] button.
Then, the selected file opens on the screen. Now you can edit the file in the same way as when
you make a new route file.

4-51

4 Route Planning

ECDIS

(4) Saving the route file


When saving without changing the file name:
1) Left-click the [Save] button.
2) Left-click the [Close] button to exit the Graphic Editing mode.
When saving as the new file:
1) In the Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(5) Save As] in the order.
The Save as Route File panel opens.
2) Enter the new file name and comment, left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
3) Left-click the [Close] button to close the file.

4.1.3.6 Importing Route Files


(1) Importing Normal Route Files
Import CSV format normal route files that were exported from this equipment.
In the Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] - [(1) Normal] in that order.
Then, use the Open panel to select the name of a file to be imported. Only routes having a file
name starting with rot_ can be selected. The name of the file to be opened will be displayed in
the file name box after selecting the file. Left-click on the [OK] button to start file import (for route
export, see 4.1.3.7 Exporting Route Files).

4 Route Planning

4-52

(2) Importing Route Files Created with Other ECDIS Models (2G TCS)
Import CSV format route files created with other models ECDIS (JAN-3598), Total Navigator
(JAN-1290, JAN-1397), Chart Display Unit (JAN-1100) we offer.
In the Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] - [(3) 2G TCS] in that order
Then, use the Open panel to select the name of a file to be imported. The name of the file to be
opened will be displayed in the file name box after selecting the file. Press the [OK] button to start
file import.

ECDIS

Note:
Use routes based on the world geodesic system (WGS-84).

4.1.3.7 Exporting Route Files


Save newly created route files or already opened route files in CSV format.
In the Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(6) Export] in that order.
Then, use the Save As panel to select the name of a file to be exported. If a route file to be exported
already has a name, save it as rot_[date and time].csv. If you wish to change the file name, follow the
naming rules such as rot_[date and time].csv (normal route). Left-click on the [OK] button to save the
route file under the name displayed in the file name box.

Example:
When exporting a file test.rtn,
its name will be set to rot_[date and
time].csv.

Note:
Do not use exported routes in systems other than the world geodesic system (WGS-84).

4-53

4 Route Planning

4.1.3.8 Creating a Route Using EBL/VRM Keys and


Dials
The following shows the way how to make a route using the EBL/VRM keys and dials on the operation
panel. (You can mix the EBL/VRM operation with the button operation on the screen mentioned earlier.)
Note:
Before starting, be sure that [(1) Use EBL/VRM] is set to ON.
If not,
In the Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(1) Use EBL/VRM] in that order to set it ON.

Be sure that the check mark is attached.

The EBL cursor is displayed on the screen. (The cursor type changes when [(7) Use EBL/VRM] is
set to ON.) Operate while watching the cursor position displayed at the bottom of the display panel.
1) Press the [EBL1], [EBL2], [VRM1], or [VRM2] key on the operation panel.

2) Move the cursor to the voluntary point. (e.g. cape) and left-click there.

Left-click

Line drawn from own ship

4 Route Planning

4-54

3) Turn the EBL/VRM dial to move the point of intersection to the planned W000, and left-click
there.

Left-click

ECDIS

4) Move the cursor to the voluntary point. (e.g. cape) and left-click there.
(A line will be drawn through the W000 and EBL/VRM intersection.)
(This circle is not displayed.)

(This circle is not displayed.)

Left-click

4-55

4 Route Planning

5) Turn the EBL/VRM dial to move the point of intersection to the next WPT (W001), and left-click
there.
(This circle is not displayed.)

Left-click

Green line
(Starboard side)

Red line
(Port side)

6) Follow the steps 4) and 5) until you make the final WPT.

How to Edit the Route:


After pressing the [Add] or [Insert/Move WPT] button on the screen, you can add, move, or insert a
WPT in the same EBL/VRM operation as above.

4 Route Planning

4-56

4.2 Creating an Alternate Route


During voyage only, you can create an alternate route while referring to the current route on the screen.
The alternate route can be saved as a TEMP file, or by naming a new route name.
The alternate route can be created in the same manner as for making a route using the Graphic Editor.
The operation buttons and the special menu for creating an alternate route are exactly the same as those
for the Graphic Editor. So, the same explanation is omitted here. For omitted information, see 4.1.3
Route Planning Using the Graphic Editor. You can use EBL/VRM in the same way as for the Graphic
Editor, though the explanation is omitted here.
Note:

ECDIS

Whether the alternate route is replaced with the original route or not depends the saving methods.
- When you left-click the [Save] button and then [Close] button after you made the alternate route,
the original route is replaced with the alternate route. (In this case, the alternate route file name is
TEMP.)
Normally, you will use this method for alternate route.
- When you saved as a new file using the Save as menu, the alternate route is not replaced with
the original route.

(For details, see (3) Saving the alternate route file in 4.2.2 Creating

Alternate Route.)

4.2.1 Operation Flowchart


Start

During voyage

Be sure that the current route is displayed on the screen.

(Route is displayed.)

Enter Create Alternate


Route mode.

Alternate route
making operation

In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(2) Create Alternate Route]
in that order.

Create the alternate route in the same manner as for the Graphic Editor.
To create an alternative route, you will use the following buttons.

: For [Property] button, see 4.1.3 Route Planning Using


the Graphic Editor.
Left-click the [Save]
button

The original route is replaced with the alternate route.


(If you simply want to save the alternate route file and you are not intending to
replace the route, you should use Save as menu. In this case, the original
route remains as it is. For details, see (3) Saving the alternate route file in
4.2.2 Creating Alternate Route.)

Left-click [Close]
Exits the Alternate Route Creating mode.
End

4-57

4 Route Planning

4.2.2 Creating Alternate Route


The following two charts show the original route and the altered route, respectively. You will see that,
during creating alternate route, the alternate route is displayed together with the original route.
In this example, the following WPTs are altered:
Position of W001 (Moved)
W002 (Inserted. So, the number of the later WPTs is increased by 1.)
W006 (Added one WPT to the last WPT.)
You will learn how to accomplish these alterations.
[Original Route]

[Original Route and Created Alternate Route]

W006:
Added to the last WPT.

Alternate Route

W001:
Position changed.
W002:
Inserted.

4 Route Planning

4-58

(1) Alternate Route Editing mode


In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(2) Create Alternate Route] in that order.
The Alternate Route Editing screen as shown below will open. (This screen is the same as for
Graphic Editor.)
[Alternate Route Editing Screen]

Opening the Alternate Route Editing Menu:

ECDIS

On the display panel in the Alternate Route Editing mode


Rotate the trackball to move the cursor on upper part of screen.
The special menu for Alternate Route Editor will open. (This menu is the same as for Graphic
Editor.)

(2) Creating Alternate Route


The following shows the way how to make an alternate route using the buttons on the screens.
(When you use the EBL/VRM on the operation panel, see 4.1.3.8 Creating a Route Using
EBL/VRM Keys and Dials.
Operate while watching the cursor position displayed at the bottom of the display panel.
Note:
Alternate routes will be displayed in orange so that the modified section can be differentiated from
the original route.

4-59

4 Route Planning

Moving the WPT for Alternate Route:


1) Left-click the [Insert/Move WPT] button.
2) Left-click the WPT and rotate the trackball to move the cursor for moving W001. Then, left-click
to fix the new W001 for the alternate route.
[Select W001.]

[Move W001.]

How to shift the chart during making an


alternate route:
Left-click on the chart and hold the button
down, and then move the cursor to scroll
the chart while creating alternate routes.

[Fix the new W001 for alternate route.]

Alternate route is created. (Orange)

Moved new WPT (W001).

4 Route Planning

4-60

Inserting the WPT for Alternate Route:


1) Left-click the [Insert/Move WPT] button.
2) Left-click the leg between W001 and W002 and rotate the trackball to move the cursor for
inserting a new WPT. Then, left-click to fix the WPT. New W002 is inserted and the number of
the later WPTs is increased by 1.
[Select the leg.]

ECDIS

[Position the new W002.]

[New WPT is inserted as W002.]

Inserted WPT (W002).

4-61

4 Route Planning

Adding the WPT for Alternate Route:


You can add the WPT to the first WPT or to the last WPT.
1) Left-click the [Add] button.
2) Left-click the first WPT or last WPT and rotate the trackball to move the cursor for additional
WPT. Then, left-click to fix the WPT.
[Select the first WPT or last WPT.]

[Position the new first WPT or last WPT.]

[W006 is added as the last

Added WPT (W006).

4 Route Planning

4-62

Deleting the WPT from Alternate Route:


1) Left-click the [Delete WPT] button.
2) Left-click the WPT you want to delete. The selected WPT will be deleted.
(In the example, W002 is deleted. You can also delete any WPT of the alternate route, such as
W003.)
[Select W002.]

[W002 is deleted.]

ECDIS

You can use this button to display and edit the selected WPT and leg.
For details, see [Property] button (page 4-50) of (4) Making a route in
4.1.3.4 Making a New Route File (Graphic Editing).

Sort Reversely of WPTs:


In the Alternate Editing mode
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(4) Sort Reversely] in that order.
Then, the WPTs in the list and chart are displayed in the reverse order.

Safety Check of WPTs:

When checking the safety of the route, click Safety Check button. As a result of the
checking, warning dialog box will appear if the route is not safety.

Limit Check of WPTs:

When checking the Limit of the route, click Limit Check button. As a result of the
checking, warning dialog box will appear when exceeding the demarcation of the sailing
feature of the own ship

4-63

4 Route Planning

(3) Saving the alternate route file


a) When saving without changing the file name ([Save] button):
Note:
In this case, the file is saved as TEMP, and, when you close the file, the alternate route
TEMP becomes the new route. Namely, the original route is replaced with the alternate
route TEMP.
1) Left-click the [Save] button.
Then, the alternate route file is save as TEMP.
2) Left-click the [Close] button to exit the Alternate Route Editing mode.
Then, the original route on the screen is replaced with the alternate route TEMP.
b) When saving as the new file ([(5) Save as] menu):
Note:
In this case, the file is saved as the name you given, and, even when you close the file, the
original route is maintained. Namely, the route is not replaced with the alternate route.
1) In the Alternate Route Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(5) Save as] in the order.
The Save as Route File panel opens.

2) Enter the file name and comment.


3) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
4) Left-click the [Close] button to exit the Alternate Route Editing mode.

4 Route Planning

4-64

5
Chart Editing

5-1

This chapter describes how to create user maps and how to manually update charts.

User Map
User map can be created and displayed on other charts. User map information contains various objects
(symbols, lines, areas, and texts). User map can also be edited and updated. Also, you can merge
multiple maps together to create one user map.
The following figures show how to use user map:
Example 1:

Example 2:

Example 3:

User Map 2
User Map 1

User Map 2

Chart

User Map 1

Chart

You can merge as


one user map.

Chart

How to Display the User Map:


To display the user map, see 3.13 Displaying a User Map.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) User Map] - [(1) Select User Map] in the order.

Manual Update
Objects (symbols, lines, areas, and texts) can be manually updated.

When you save data after

manually updating the objects, there will be a panel for you to enter the issue date of a notice to mariners.
Enter the date. You can check the issue dates of a notice to mariners by using S-57/C-MAP/ARCS
information.
Unlike User Map Edit operation, Manual Update operation links objects directly to the chart. Therefore,
the objects updated manually in the chart cannot be deleted as desired, but can only be hidden from the
chart. For the method of hiding the objects, see 0 .
When all the following conditions are met, objects updated manually are deleted automatically from the
chart.
The chart having objects updated manually has been updated in Chart Portfolio.
3 months or more have passed since the chart was updated manually.
The objects to be deleted are hidden from the chart.
Note:
C-MAP charts cannot be updated manually.
The objects updated manually in S-57, S-63 or ARCS chart can be used commonly in those charts.

5 Chart Editing

5-2

5.1 Chart Edit Mode


There are two modes in this Chart Edit mode: User Map Edit mode and Manual Update mode. Follow
the procedure below to start there modes.
User Map Edit mode:
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) User Map] - [(3) User Map Editor] in that order.
A map edit screen as shown below will be displayed.

Use this screen to create/edit a user map.

[User Map Editing Screen]

ECDIS

Manual Update mode:


In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(8) Manual Update] in that order.
A chart edit screen similar to the above will be displayed (buttons at the top and the object entering
screen on the left are slightly different).

Use this screen to manually update a chart.

How to open the Chart Edit menu:


In User Map Edit mode or Manual Update mode
Rotate the trackball to move the cursor on upper part of screen. The following Chart Edit menu
will be displayed at the top of the screen.

5-3

5 Chart Editing

5.2 Menus and Button Functions


5.2.1 Chart Editing Menu
Menu items available in Chart Edit mode are shown below. The same menu items are displayed in User
Map Edit mode and Manual Update mode, but there will be some special menu items for each mode.
Table 5.1 User Map Editing Menu Tree
Main Menu
(1) File

Submenu

Submenu/Option

Reference

(1) New

5.3.2.1

(2) Open

5.3.2.2

(3) Import

(1) CSV file(WGS84)

5.3.2.4

(2) CSV file(TOKYO)

5.3.2.4

(3) OLD Format

5.3.2.4

(4) Export
(5) Save

5.3.2

(6) Save as

5.3.2

(7) Merge

5.3.2.3

(0) Exit from User Map Editor

5.3.2.1

(2) Edit

(4) Use EBL/VRM

5.3.2

(0) Setting

5.3.2.5

(3) AIS/TT

(1) TT1

3.3.9.1

(2) TT2

3.3.9.1

(3) AIS

3.3.9.1

(4) All

3.3.9.1

(5) Deactive All AIS

3.3.9.7

(6) All List

3.3.9.2

(7) Select List

3.3.9.8

(8) Target Track

(1) Target Track Setting

3.3.9.3

(2) File Operation

3.3.9.4

(1) Addressed Message

3.3.9.5

(2) Broadcast Message

3.3.9.5

(1) VDM

3.3.9.6

(2) TTD1

3.3.9.6

(3) TTD2

3.3.9.6

(9) Own Ships AIS Data


(1) Message

3.3.9.4

(0) AIS Sentence

(4) Chart

(0) AIS/TT Setting

3.35.1

(0) Association Setting

3.35.2

(1) Marking/Highlighting

(2) Off Center


(3) User Setting

5 Chart Editing

5-4

(1) Event Mark

3.19.1

(2) Information Mark

3.19.2

(3) Tidal Stream Mark

3.19.3

(4) Highlight

3.19.4

(5) Delete Event Mark

3.19.1

(1) Enter Position

3.4.5

(2) Home

3.4.1

(1) Save My Port List

3.8.1

Table 5.1 User Map Editing Menu Tree -- Continued


Main Menu
(6) Chart

Submenu

Submenu/Option

(3) User Setting

3.8.2

(3) Save Chart Setting

3.29.3

(4) Chart Setting List

3.29.4

(4) Select S-57 Chart

3.9

(5) Fix View

3.7.3

(6) Accept S-57 Updates

3.31

(4) ARCS

(1) Temporary and Preliminary

(0) Setting
(5) Main

Reference

(2) My Port List

3.10.8

(2) Adjust Datum Offset

3.10.9

(3) Datum Transformation

3.10.9

(1) S-57/ C-MAP / ARCS

3.29.1

(2) Other Chart

3.29.2

(1) Maneuver Curve

3.20

/Remove Maneuver Curve

ECDIS

(2) Cross Bearing

3.21

(3) Create Clearing Line

(1) Not Less Than


(2) Not More Than

3.22
3.22

(4) LOP

3.23

(5) Print

3.37

(6) Save Screen

3.38

(9) Radar Overlay

(3) Test

(0) Setting

(1) Radar1

3.3.8

(2) Radar2

3.3.8

(3) Range Ring

3.3.8

(4) Bearing Scale

3.3.8

(0) Setting

3.34.1

(1) Alarm Log

3.3.7

(2) System Information

7.2

(3) Operating Time

7.3

(1) Color and Brilliance Setting

7.6

(2) Option Key Setting

7.7

(3) Date/Time Setting

7.8

(4) Marker Setting

3.16.2.1

(7) Display Panel Setting

3.25

(8) Alarm Setting

7.10

(0) Buzzer Volume

3.3.5

(0) INS Setting

5-5

5 Chart Editing

Shortcut Menus
Shortcut menus are displayed by right-clicking when editing charts. Depending on the cursor type
when right-clicking, one of the following menus will be displayed. See 5.5 Entering Objects for
details on the various cursor types.

Buttons for the same operations:


Move
Delete
Add Vertex
Insert/Move Vertex
Delete Vertex
Property

When not edit mode (Cursor column is displayed nothing)

Enter an object at the designated longitude and latitude.


Designate the bearing and distance from the previous way
point, and enter an object in that position.

When edit mode (Cursor column is displayed operation)

5 Chart Editing

5-6

. Context Menu (The item which is common with the other operation)
Main Menu

Submenu

Reference

Abort

3.1.1.3

S-57/ C-MAP /ARCS Information

3.14

Other Information

3.14

Zoom Area

3.5.1

Dropped EBL/VRM

CCRP EBL/VRM

EBL1/VRM1

3.16.2.2

EBL2/VRM2

3.16.2.2

EBL1

3.16.2.3

EBL2

3.16.2.3

VRM1

3.16.2.4

VRM2

3.16.2.4

Move Origin1

3.16.2.5

Move Origin2

3.16.2.5

EBL1/VRM1

3.16.2.6

EBL2/VRM2

3.16.2.6

EBL1

3.16.2.7

EBL2

3.16.2.7

VRM1

3.16.2.8

VRM2

3.16.2.8

Running Fix / Remove Running Fix

3.17

High Resolution Area

3.10.6

Load Low Resolution

3.10.5

Select Chart Under Cursor

3.10.2

Change Active Panel

3.10.4

Note and Diagram

3.10.7

5-7

5 Chart Editing

ECDIS

5.2.2 Button Functions


In Chart Edit mode, buttons shown below will be displayed at the top of the screen. The same buttons
are used in User Map Edit mode and Manual Update mode, except for one.
[User Map Edit mode]

Left-click on this button to close the file and to exit Map Edit Mode.

During user map edit:


Left-click on this button to create a new user map file.

Left-click on this button to open a created user map (not available during manual
update).

Left-click on this button to save a created user map.

Left-click when moving an object.

Left-click when deleteing an object.

Left-click when adding a segment to the end of the line or a area surrounding
line to the area.

Left-click when inserting a segment into the line.

It deles the part of the object.

Left-click when opening the information panel of the selected object.

[Manual Update mode]

Left-click on this button to close the file and to exit Chart Edit Mode.

During manual update:


Left-click on this button to manually update the objects.

Left-click on this button to open a created user map (not available during manual
update).

Left-click on this button to save the updating chart.

Left-click when moving an object.

Left-click when deleteing an object.

Left-click when adding a segment to the end of the line or an area surrounding line
to the area.

Left-click when inserting a segment into the line..

It deles the part of the object.

Left-click when opening the information panel of the selected object.

5 Chart Editing

5-8

5.3 User Map Editor Operation


This section describes how to edit user maps. For operations in the manual update process, see 5.4
Manual Update Operation.
Files are opened and saved in different ways when you create a new user map file and when you open a
created file. Open/Save a file following the procedure described in the Table/Graphic Editor section of
chapter 4 Route Planning.

5.3.1 Flow of User Map Edit


(1) Creating a new user map file
Start
ECDIS

Start User Map Edit


mode.
Left-click on the
[New] button.

Select [MENU] - [(5) User Map] - [(3) User Map Editor] in that order.

Open a new user map file.

Map edit operation

Symbols
Lines
Areas
Texts

Left-click on the
[Save] button.

See 5.5 Entering Objects .

Enter a file name and


a comment.

Select a datum in the


Datum Conversion
panel.

Left-click on the
[Close] button.

Exit User Map Edit mode.

End

5-9

5 Chart Editing

(2) Editing a user map file


Start

Start User Map Edit


mode.

Left-click on the
[Open] button.

Select [MENU] - [(5) User Map] - [(3) User Map Editor] in that order.

Open user map file you wish to edit.

Map edit operation

Symbols
Lines
Areas
Texts

See 5.5 Entering Objects.

When overwriting
Left-click on the
[Save] button.

When saving under a new file name


Select [Save as] from
the menu.

Select a datum in the


Datum Conversion
panel.

Left-click on the
[Close] button.

Exit User Map Edit mode.

End

5 Chart Editing

5-10

5.3.2 Operation when Editing User Map


File operations are different when you create a new user map and when you edit an existing user map.
This section describes operations in both cases (descriptions follow 5.3.1 Flow of User Map Edit). This
section also describes how to merge user map and how to import user map files.
Creating a new user map -> See Section 5.3.2.1.
Editing a user map -> See Section 5.3.2.2
Merging user map -> See Section 5.3.2.3
Importing user map -> See Section 5.3.2.4
Note:
The maximum of the object is 20,000. ("Simple Line", "Warning Line", "Polygon", "Warning Area"
counts 1 top as one.) When adding beyond 20000, the "Max Point" notice occurs and it isn't possible
to do the addition of the object.
ECDIS

5.3.2.1 Creating a New User Map


Follow the procedure below to create a new user map.

(1) Entering the Map Editing mode


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) User Map] - [(3) User Map Editor] in the order.
How to exit the user map editing mode:
Left-click the [Close] button. Alternatively, in the User Map Editing menu, select [(1) File] - [(0) Exit
from User Map Editor] in that order.
- When you open the Map Editing menu, rotate the trackball to move the cursor on upper part of
screen.
Then, the Map Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, or left-click any position on the map.
[Map Editing Menu]

(2) Opening a new user map file


1) Left-click the [New] button.
In the User Map Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(1) New] in that order.

5-11

5 Chart Editing

(3) Entering objects


1) When you use EBL/VRM to enter objects, make sure that [(1) Use EBL/VRM] is turned on
(checked). If you do not use EBL/VRM when editing a map,
In the User Map Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(4) Use EBL/VRM] in that order.
[(4) Use EBL/VRM] is turned off (remove a checkmark).
If using EBL/VRM: Check it.
If not using EBL/VRM: Uncheck it.

2) Proceed to 5.5 Entering Objects and enter objects.


After obtaining objects, follow the procedure described in (4) below to save a user map file.

(4) Saving a user map file


1) Left-click the [Save] button.
In the User Map Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(5) Save], [(6) Save as] in that order.
The Save as panel opens.

2) Enter the file name (up to 8 characters) and comment.

5 Chart Editing

5-12

3) Left-click the [SAVE] button to close the panel.


Then, the Datum Conversion panel opens.
Select [Select Datum] or [Enter Offset] to execute datum conversion or offset entering.

Select Datum:
You can convert an object datum from [Source Datum] to [Destination Datum].
Enter Offset:
You can give offset to the object by entering the offset value (latitude/longitude).
4) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
5) Left-click the [Close] button.
Then, the system exit the User Map Editing mode.

(5) Exiting the User Map Editing mode


1) Click the [Close] button to exit the mode.
2) When you are not operating in the editing, this editor is closed and changed to normal mode.
3) When you are operating in the editing, the confirmation dialog is displayed.

It returns to the edit-display.

It changes to the save operation.


(See (4) Saving a user map file)

User Map Editor is closed and


editing contents is canceled.

5-13

5 Chart Editing

ECDIS

5.3.2.2 Editing a User Map


Follow the procedure below to edit an existing user map.

(1) Starting User Map Editing mode


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) User Map] - [(3) User Map Editor] in that order.

(2) Opening a user map file


1) Left-click on the [Open] button.
In the User Map Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(2) Open] in that order.
The Open Chart File panel will be displayed.
2) Select the name of a file you wish to open, and then left-click on the [OK] button.
The selected user map file will be displayed.

(3)

Entering objects
1) When you use EBL/VRM to enter objects, make sure that [(4) Use EBL/VRM] is turned on
(checked). If you do not use EBL/VRM when editing a map,
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(4) Use EBL/VRM] in that order.
[(4) Use EBL/VRM] is turned off (remove a checkmark).

If using EBL/VRM: Check it.


If not using EBL/VRM: Uncheck it.

2) Proceed to 5.5 Entering Objects and enter objects.


After obtaining objects, follow the procedure described in (4) below to save a user map file.

5 Chart Editing

5-14

(4) Saving a user map file


When saving a file without changing its file name (using the [Save] button):
1) Left-click on the [Save] button.
In the User Map Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(5) Save] in that order.
2) Left-click on the [Close] button to exit User Map Edit mode.
When saving a file under a different name (using the [(6) Save As] menu):
1) In the User Map Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(6) Save As] in that order.
The Save as panel will be displayed.

ECDIS

2) Enter a file name (using up to 8 characters) and a comment.


3) Left-click on the [SAVE] button. The panel closes.
The Datum Conversion panel opens.
Select [Select Datum] or [Enter Offset] to execute datum conversion or offset entering.

[Select Datum]:
You can convert an object datum from [Source Datum] to [Destination Datum].
[Enter Offset]:
You can specify offset (latitude/longitude) of the object and move the object.
4) Left-click on the [OK] button. The panel closes.
5) Left-click on the [Close] button
User Map Edit mode ends.

5-15

5 Chart Editing

5.3.2.3 Merging User Maps


You can merge the user maps as follows:
1) Make a new user map file or recall a user map file.
(For example, recall User-01 file.)
2) In the User Map Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(7) Merge] in that order.
The Open Chart File panel opens.
3) Left-click the file you want to merge with the User-01 file (for example, User-02), and then
left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
You will see that both objects of the User-01 and User-02 files are shown on the screen.
4) Left-click the [Save] button to save without changing the file name (User-01).
If you want to save as the new file,
In the User Map Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(6) Save As] in that order.
5) Left-click the [Close] button.
Then, the system exits the User Map Editing mode.

User Map "USER-02"


User Map "USER-01"

You can merge as one


user map.

User Map

5 Chart Editing

5-16

5.3.2.4 Importing User Maps


User map files can be imported and used.
1) In the User Map Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] in that order.
And select a file format to be used at the destination.
- CSV file (WGS-84)
Select this when importing user map data created with the WGS-84 geodetic system.
- CSV file (TOKYO)
Select this when importing user map data, created with the Japanese geodetic system, as
WGS-84 geodetic system data.

ECDIS

The Open panel will be displayed.

2) Select a file you wish to import, and then left-click on the [OK] button.
The selected user map will be displayed on the screen.
Note:
When importing, MIN Scale of import object is set to 1/1000000 and MAX Scale is set to
1/4000000.

5-17

5 Chart Editing

5.3.2.5 User Map Setting


The initial setting when adding an object in editing can be changed.
1) In the User Map Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
The Editor Setting panel will be displayed.

Range of scale to display the object:


Minimum Scale / Maximum Scale
The setting of the color:
Symbol Color / Text Color / Line Color
The kind of the color: Black, Red, Green, Blue,
Amber, Orange, Purple, Yellow.
The thickness of the line: Five kinds
The style of the line:
Solid line, Broken line, Dotted line.
The setting of a filling color in Area:
The kind of the color: Black, Red, Green, Blue,
Amber, Orange, Purple, Yellow.
The kind of transparency: 0%, 25%, 50%, 75%.
The set to size of the font:
Small Font / Large Font
The size of the font: 6pts - 72pts
To fix setting, click this button.
If you want to cancel the operation and close
the dialog, click this button.
To fix setting and close dialog, click this button.
Note:
The following object is always displayed in the red regardless of "Editor Setting".

Symbol - Warning" : Symbol Color


Line - "Warning Line" : Line Color
Area - "Warning Area" : Line Color, Fill Color
"Warning Line" object displays a unique line irrespective of the setting of Line Width and
Line Style.

5 Chart Editing

5-18

5.4 Manual Update Operation


This section describes manual update operations. For operations in the user map edit process, see 5.3
Operation Flowchart When manually updating the objects, there will be a panel for you to enter the
issue date of a notice to mariners. Enter the date. When certain conditions, such as period that
passed since the manual update, are met (see page 5-2), the entered objects are deleted automatically
from the chart.

5.4.1 Flow of Manual Update


Start

Start Manual Update


mode.

In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(8) Manual UpDate] in
that order.

Left-click on the
[Start] button.

Left-click on a chart
you wish to edit.

[Example]

Chart edit operation

Symbols
Lines
Areas
Texts

See 5.5 Entering Objects.

Left-click on the
[Save] button

Select a datum in the


Datum Conversion
panel.

Enter the issue date of


a notice to mariners.

Left-click on the
[Close] button.

Exit Manual Update mode.

End

5-19

5 Chart Editing

ECDIS

5.4.2 Operation when Manually Updating Objects


This section describes operations in the manual update procedure (descriptions follow 5.4.1 Flow of
Manual Update).
Note:
The maximum of the object is 20,000. (On "Polygon" object, "Warning Area" object and Line Object
except for "Arc", it counts 1 top as one.) When adding beyond 20,000, the "Max Point" notice occurs
and it isn't possible to do the addition of the object.

(1) Starting Manual Update mode


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(8) Manual UpDate] in that order.
- Left-click on the [MENU] button on the display panel to open the Chart Edit menu.
The Chart Edit menu will be displayed at the top of the screen. Left-click on the [MENU] button
again or left-click anywhere on the chart to close the menu window.
[Chart Edit menu]

(2) Selecting a chart to be edited


1) Left-click on the [Start] button.
The Information panel will be displayed.

Left-click on the [OK] button so that the panel

closes.

2) Left-click on the chart you wish to edit.


A panel showing the chart name will be displayed. Left-click on the [OK] button so that the
panel closes (as shown below).

Note:
When you click the [Start] button in the editing, the following operation is done.

When not editing, the new operation becomes beginning.


When editing, confirmation dialog "Save Change to ****?" is displayed.
Yes: It shifts to the save operation.
No: It cancels update contents, and new operation
becomes beginning.
Cancel: It closes a dialog and returns to edit operation.

5 Chart Editing

5-20

(3) Entering Objects


1) When you use EBL/VRM to enter objects, make sure that [(4) Use EBL/VRM] is turned on
(checked). If you do not use EBL/VRM when editing a chart, then turn [(4) Use EBL/VRM] off
(remove a checkmark) by selecting [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(4) Use EBL/VRM] in that order.

If using EBL/VRM: Check it.


If not using EBL/VRM: Uncheck it.

2) Proceed to 5.5 Entering Objects and enter objects.


After obtaining objects, follow the procedure described in (4) below to save a Manual Update
file.
ECDIS

(4) Saving a Manual Update


1) Left-click on the [Save] button.
In the Manual Update Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(5) Save] in that order.
The Datum Conversion panel opens.
Select [Select Datum] or [Enter Offset] to execute datum conversion or offset entering.
Normally, conversion of geodesic systems is not necessary.

[Select Datum]:
You can convert an object datum from [Source Datum] to [Destination Datum]. Normally,
conversion of geodesic systems is not necessary.
[Enter Offset]:
You can specify offset (latitude/longitude) of the object and move the object.
2) Left-click on the [OK] button. The panel closes.
The Notices to Mariners panel opens.
Enter the issue date of a notice to mariners.

3) Left-click on the [OK] button. The panel closes.


4) Left-click on the [Close] button.
Manual Update mode ends.
5-21

5 Chart Editing

Tips!

(How to check dates of issue of a notice to mariners for entered objects)

You can use the Object Information panel to check the dates of issue of a notice to mariners for
entered objects.
In the normal menu
It right-clicks a screen and it chooses [S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information] from Context Menu..
The object information will be retrieved. Entered dates of the objects will be displayed.

Display example

5 Chart Editing

5-22

5.4.2.1 Manual Update Setting


The initial setting when adding an object in editing can be changed.
1) In the Manual Update Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
The Editor Setting panel will be displayed.

The setting of the color:


Symbol Color (General Symbol) / Text Color /
Line Color (General Line and area)
The kind of the color: Black, Red, Green, Blue,
Amber, Orange, Purple, Yellow.
The thickness of the line: Five kinds
The style of the line:
Solid line, Broken line, Dotted line.
The setting of a filling color in Area:
The kind of the color: Black, Red, Green, Blue,
Amber, Orange, Purple, Yellow.
The kind of transparency: 0%, 25%, 50%, 75%.
The set to size of the font:
Small Font / Large Font
The size of the font: 6pts - 72pts
To fix setting, click this button.
If you want to cancel the operation and close
the dialog, click this button.
To fix setting and close dialog, click this button.
Note:
Editor Setting is applied to the following item.
Symbol Color: "General" category in "Symbol" tab. (Except for "Warning")
Text Color: All symbol in "Text" tab.
Line Color: "General" category in "Line" tab and All symbol of "Area"tab. (Except for "Warning
Line" and "Warning Area"; displaying red)
Line Width, Line Style: "General" category in "Line" tab and All symbol of "Area" tab. (Except
for "Warning Line" )
Fill Color: All symbol of "Area" tab. (Except for "Warning Area" )
Transparency: All symbol of "Area" tab.
Font Size (Small): "Small Font" in "Text" tab.
Font Size (Large): "Large Font" in "Text" tab.

5-23

5 Chart Editing

ECDIS

5.5 Entering Objects


This section describes how to enter objects. Basic operations are the same in User Map Edit and
Manual Update modes. There are four types of objects (symbols, lines, areas, and texts). User Map
Edit mode and Manual Update mode use different symbols and lines.
Object types available for user map edit
[Symbol] Tab

5 Chart Editing

[Line] Tab

[Area] Tab

5-24

[Text] Tab

Object types available for manual update


[Symbol] Tab

[Line] Tab

[Area] Tab

[Text] Tab

ECDIS

5-25

5 Chart Editing

5.5.1 Selecting Object Types


1) Left-click on a tab for the object type (Symbol, Line, Area, and Text) you wish to select.
2) Select the object you want. See How to Select Objects below.
The selected object may be displayed at the bottom part of the object selection panel.
Now you can enter the object you have selected.

How to Select Objects:


You can see the tree structure of the objects on the object
selection panel. For example, to select Light flare, default
symbol of the Barrel buoy, perform as follows.
1) Left-click Buoys twice quickly to open the items
behind it.
2) Left-click Barrel buoy twice quickly to open the items
behind it. (Keep continue this operation until - mark
disappears.)
3) Left-click Light flare, default.
The symbol will appear at the bottom of this panel.
To close Buoys, left-click it twice quickly.
You can also select the item by left-clicking + and -
mark:
Left-clicking + will open the behind items.
Left-clicking - will close the behind items.

5 Chart Editing

5-26

1)
2)
3)

5.5.2 Entering Objects


See the current cursor position displayed at the bottom when entering objects.

(1) How to enter symbols


Putting symbols:
1) Select one of the objects on the symbol selection panel.
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Make Map.
2) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor, and left-click at the position you want to put the symbol.
Each time you left-click the cursor, the symbol is added on the chart.
3) To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu. Then, the cursor
column is displayed nothing.
Second entry

First entry

ECDIS

Last entry

Deleting symbols [Delete]:


1) Left-click the [Delete] button.
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Delete Map.
2) Left-click the symbol you want to delete.
3) To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu. Then, the cursor
column is displayed nothing.

Selected symbol

Moving symbols [Move]:


1) Left-click the [Move] button,
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Move Map.
2) Left-click the symbol you want to move.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want. Then, the symbol is moved to the new position.
4) To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu. Then, the cursor
column is displayed nothing.

Edit

(When you left-click the cursor.)

(When you left-click the cursor.)

5-27

5 Chart Editing

Designating object coordinates by entering the position or entering the bearing/distance:


Positions can be designated by entering the position or entering the bearing/distance instead of
left-clicking on the chart to designate a coordinate when entering, moving, inserting and adding
symbols, lines, areas and text.
Designating coordinates by entering position
1) Make sure the system will accept cursor designation of coordinates when entering, moving,
inserting and adding symbols, lines and areas.
2) Click the right trackball button, then select [Enter Lat/Lon] from the shortcut menu.
The Enter Position panel opens.

3) Enter the position (longitude and latitude), then left-click the [Enter] button the position is
designated..
Left-click the [Close] button the panel is closed.
Designating coordinates by entering bearing/distance
1) Make sure the system will accept cursor designation of coordinates when entering, moving,
inserting and adding objects, lines, areas and text.
2) Click the right trackball button, then select [Enter Bearing/Distance] from the shortcut menu.
The Enter Bearing/Distance panel opens.

3) Enter the bearing and distance from the previous way point, then left-click the [Enter] button
the position is designated...
Left-click the [Close] button the panel is closed.
Note:
When entering the second point of a line or area, the bearing and distance are those from
the previous point. When moving objects, the bearing and distance are those from the
previous position. The shortcut menus cannot be used when designating coordinates that
do not require relative positions, such as symbol and text entering.

5 Chart Editing

5-28

Getting Information and Editing Information (Symbol):


1) Left-click the [Property] button.
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Property.
2) Left-click the symbol you want to get information.
The Location/Attributes panel opens.
You can edit the latitude and longitude by entering position LAT and LON.
You can rotate the symbol by entering rotational angle to Rotation.
You can set Min Scale and Max Scale that limit the display of this object.
You can enter a comment.
3) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.

ECDIS

Rotated symbol by 90 degrees

Difference in symbol display between User Map Edit mode and Manual Update mode:
Symbols used in the manual update operation will have a mark as shown below. Symbols used in the
user map edit operation will not have this mark.
[Symbols used in the user map edit operation]

[Symbols used in the manual update operation]

This mark will be


added.

5-29

5 Chart Editing

Tips!
You can check the current edit mode at Cursor column of upper part of screen.
For example, When displayed [Move map] in Cursor column. It is Move mode.
Hiding objects (only during the manual update operation)
Saved objects can be hidden from the chart. For details, see 5.5.3 Hiding Objects (Only during the
Manual Update Operation).

Using EBL/VRM on the operation panel:


You can use the EBL/VRM keys and dials on the operation panel when positioning an object or
drawing a line. When using EBL/VRM, see 4.1.3.8 Creating a Route Using EBL/VRM Keys and Dials.
When using EBL/VRM, first make sure that [(4) Use EBL/VRM] is checked.

If using EBL/VRM: Check it.

5 Chart Editing

5-30

(2) How to draw lines


Drawing lines:
1) Select one of the objects on the line selection panel.
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Make Map.
2) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor, and left-click at the position you want to start drawing a
line.
Each time you left-click the cursor, the line is extended on the chart.
3) Left-click twice quickly to stop to extend the line.
4) To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu. Then, the cursor
column is displayed nothing.

ECDIS

Tips!

(Moving the chart)

Click the left trackball button while drawing lines. A hand icon will be shown on the chart.
Move the trackball while holding the left button down to move the chart.

Deleting the line [Delete]:


1) Left-click the [Delete] button.
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Delete Map.
2) Left-click the line you want to delete.
3) To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu. Then, the cursor
column is displayed nothing.

Tips!

(Moving the chart)

When it is difficult to properly click on the segment you wish to delete, press the Chart [Zoom In]
button provided on the right side of the display panel. This will allow you to click on the target
segment easily.

5-31

5 Chart Editing

Inserting the segment [Insert/Move Vertex]:


1) Left-click the [Insert/Move Vertex] button, and rotate the trackball to move the cursor.
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Insert/Move VTX.
2) Left-click the segment you want to insert an additional segment.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want to add the segment.
4) To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu. Then, the cursor
column is displayed nothing.

Edit

(When you left-click the cursor.)

(When you left-click the cursor.)

Moving the Vertex [Insert/Move Vertex]:


1) Left-click the [Insert/Move Vertex] button, and rotate the trackball to move the cursor.
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Insert/Move VTX.
2) Left-click the segment you want to move the vertex.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want to move the vertex.
4) To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu. Then, the cursor
column is displayed nothing.

Adding the segment (to the end of the line) [Add]:


1) Left-click the [Add] button, and rotate the trackball to move the cursor.
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Add VTX.
2) Left-click the last segment of the line.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want to add the segment.
Each time you left-click the cursor, the new segment is added.
4) Left-click twice quickly to stop to add the new segment.
5) To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu. Then, the cursor
column is displayed nothing.

5 Chart Editing

5-32

Moving the line [Move]:


1) Left-click the [Move] button,
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Move Map.
2) Left-click the line you want to move.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want. Then, the line is moved to the new position.
4) To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu. Then, the cursor
column is displayed nothing.
Edit

ECDIS

Getting information and editing information (Line)


1) Left-click the line you want to get information.
2) Left-click the [Property] button.
The Location/Attributes panel opens.
- You can edit the latitude and longitude of each segment by entering position latitude and
longitude.
- You can set Min Scale and Max Scale that limit the display of this object.
- You can change the lines attributes, line color (8 colors), line width (5 widths) and line style

(3

styles).
- You can enter a comment.
3) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.

5-33

5 Chart Editing

(3) How to draw areas -- Area (Polygon) / (Warning Area)


How to draw the Polygon and Warning Area is the same and the drawing method is similar to that
for line. So, for detailed operation, refer to (2) How to draw lines mentioned earlier.
Drawing area (Polygon) / (Warning Area):
1) Select Polygon or Warning Area on the area selection panel.
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Make Map.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the position you want to draw the area.
Each time you left-click the cursor, the line (side) is extended on the chart.
3) Left-click twice quickly to stop to extend the line and area is created.
4) To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu. Then, the cursor
column is displayed nothing.
(Draw sides)

(Left-click twice quickly)

Getting information and edit area (line):


1) Left-click the [Property] button.
2) Left-click the inside of the area to select it.
Then, the Location/Attributes panel opens.
- You can edit the latitude and longitude of each side of the area by entering position latitude and
longitude.
- You can set Min Scale and Max Scale that limit the display of this object.
- You can change the attributes, line color (8 colors), line width (5 widths) and line style (3
styles).
- You can change the color to be filled in the area (8 colors) and the transparency of the color
(0%, 25%, 50%, 75%).
- You can enter a comment.
3) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
Then, the location/attributes set with the panel apply to the selected area.

(Same color but transparency differs.)

5 Chart Editing

5-34

Moving the area [Move]:


1) Left-click the [Move] button.
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Move Map.
2) Left-click the area you want to move.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want. Then, the area is moved to the new position.
4) To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu. Then, the cursor
column is displayed nothing.

Edit

ECDIS

Deleting the area [Delete]:


1) Left-click the [Delete] button.
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Delete Map.
2) Left-click the area you want to delete.
3) To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu. Then, the cursor
column is displayed nothing.

Adding a side to the area [Insert/Move Vertex]:


1) Left-click the [Insert/Move Vertex] button, and rotate the trackball to move the cursor.
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Insert/Move VTX.
2) Left-click the segment you want to insert an additional side.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want to add the side. Then, area is created.
4) To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu. Then, the cursor
column is displayed nothing.

Edit

5-35

5 Chart Editing

(4) How to draw areas -- Circle and Ellipse


1) Select Circle or Ellipse on the area selection panel.
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Make Map.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the center position of the circle/ellipse.
3) To draw a circle, move the cursor to determine the radius of the circle and left-click the cursor.
To draw an ellipse, move the cursor and left-click the cursor.
4) To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu. Then, the cursor
column is displayed nothing.
5) To change the location/attributes of the circle or ellipse, Left-click the [Property] button, and
Left-click the inside of the area to select it.
Then, the Location/Attributes panel opens.
(Ellipse)

(Left-click the cursor.)

(Draw Circle)

(Same color but Transparency differs)

0%

50%

[Location/Attributes panel for Circle/Ellipse]


You can edit the latitude and longitude of each object by entering position latitude and
longitude.
You can edit the Horizontal/Vertical of the ellipse. (Not for the circle but for the ellipse only)
You can set Min Scale and Max Scale that limit the display of this object.
You can change the attributes, line color (8 colors), line width (5 widths) and line style (3
styles).
You can change the color to be filled in the area (8 colors) and the transparency of the color
(0%, 25%, 50%, 75%).
You can enter a comment.
6) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
Then, the object changes according to the location/attribute settings.

5 Chart Editing

5-36

(5) How to draw areas -- Fan


1) Select Fan on the area selection panel.
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Make Map.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the center position of the fan.
3) Move the cursor to determine the radius and beginning angle of the fan and left-click the cursor.
4) Move the cursor to determine the ending angle and left-click the cursor. Then, area is created.
5) To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu. Then, the cursor
column is displayed nothing.
6) To change the location/attributes of the fan, Left-click the [Property] button, and Left-click the
inside of the area to select it.
Then, the Location/Attributes panel opens.
Case 1
ECDIS

Case 2

[Location/Attributes panel for Fan]


You can edit the latitude and longitude of each object by entering position latitude and
longitude.
You can edit the Horizontal/Vertical and angle of the fan.
You can set Min Scale and Max Scale that limit the display of this object.
You can change the attributes, line color (8 colors), line width (5 widths) and line style (3
styles).
You can change the color to be filled in the area (8 colors) and the transparency of the color
(0%, 25%, 50%, 75%).
You can enter a comment.
7) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
Then, the object changes according to the location/attribute settings.
5-37

5 Chart Editing

(6) How to enter text (small/large font)


1) Select Small font or Large font on the text selection panel.
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Make Map.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the position you want to enter the text.
Then, the Location/Attributes panel opens. You can specify the location and select attributes
by using this panel.
(When you select Small Font)

(When you select Large Font)

[Location/Attributes panel for text]


You can edit the latitude and longitude of each object by entering position latitude and
longitude.
You can edit the rotational angle of the text.
You can set Min Scale and Max Scale that limit the display of this object.
You can change the color (8 colors) and font size (6 to 72 points).
You can enter the text that will be displayed on the chart and comment.
3) Left-click on the [OK] button to close the panel.
The settings made in the Location/Attributes panel will be applied.
Repeat above steps to enter text at desired locations.

5 Chart Editing

5-38

4) Editing entered text


Left-click the [Property] button, and Left-click on the lower left part of the text you wish to edit
(Text, for example).

Then, the Location/Attributes panel opens. By referring to step 2) above, edit the position
and attributes of the selected text.
Left-click on the [OK] button when you finish editing. The panel closes.
The new settings will be applied to the selected text.
ECDIS

5-39

5 Chart Editing

5.5.3 Hiding Objects (Only during the Manual


Update Operation)
Objects that have been saved in Manual Update mode cannot be edited, but it is possible to hide them
from the chart. This function is available only in Manual Update mode.

(1) Hiding objects


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(8) Manual Update] in that order.
And start Manual Update mode (if you are editing objects in Manual Update mode, first exit the
mode and then restart it).
2) In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(2) Hide Object] in that order..
3) Select an object you wish to hide by left-clicking on it.In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(2) Hide Object] in that order.
The selected object disappears from the chart.
4) Repeat the same procedure to hide objects one by one.

(2) Restoring hidden objects


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(8) Manual Update] in that order.
And start Manual Update mode (if you are editing objects in Manual Update mode, first exit the
mode and then restart it).
2) In the User Chart Editing Menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(2) Hide All] in that order.
Manually updated objects are all hidden for five seconds, and then they will be displayed again.
The objects that were hidden by the method in 5.5.3-(1) are not displayed.

(3) Re-hide Restored hidden objects


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(8) Manual Update] in that order.
And start Manual Update mode (if you are editing objects in Manual Update mode, first exit the
mode and then restart it).
2) In the User Chart Editing Menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(3) Reset Hide] in that order.
Hidden objects are all displayed collectively for five seconds, and then they will be hidden again.

Note:
The object which operated "Hiding Object" maintains a hiding condition to 90 days.
When passing more than 91 days, an object is deleted.

5 Chart Editing

5-40

Automatic
Sailing

6-1

Before starting automatic sailing, be sure to check the safety of the route
and crossing safety contour.
Otherwise, accidents may result.
When this system is connected to an autopilot, a set course is calculated from the scheduled route and
ships position. By outputting the set course to the autopilot, automatic sailing along the scheduled route
is possible.
Note:
Automatic sailing is not permitted while charts are displayed in multi view mode.
And exiting Navigation & Planning is not permitted during automatic sailing.

6.1 Automatic Sailing System


6.1.1 Change of Course (Turning) of Normal Route
When the ship arrived at the boundary of the WPT, you need to perform the following operation for turning
the ship.
On the operation panel, press the [TURN] key.
[Turing Operation]

Next Leg

Arrival alarm

Boundary of WPT

Cross track distance (XTD)

6 Automatic Sailing

6-2

6.1.2 Change of Course (Turning) of TCS Route


When the ship arrived at the WOL, you need to perform the following operation for turning the ship.

Category B
Actual Course Change alarm is occurred 30 seconds before arrived at WOL, and press the [TURN]
key on the operation panel.

Category C
Turns automatically when arriving at WOL.
[Turing Operation]

ECDIS

Next Leg

Actual Course Change alarm


is occurred 30 seconds before
arrived at WOL.

WOL

6-3

6 Automatic Sailing

6.1.3 Route Monitoring and System Alarm


Warning and Alarm
Warning/alarm
Arrived at WPT

Condition of warning/
alarm occurrence
The ship has arrived at the

Operating status of
automatic sailing

Remarks

Can be continued.

Turn becomes possible.

Only TCS

Can be continued.

Can be continued.

boundary of the set WPT.


Actual Course

30 seconds before arrived

Change

at WOL

Off Course

The difference between


heading and leg bearing
has exceeded the limit.

XTD

The ship has gone beyond the set route width.

Arrived at LAST

On the sailing final leg, the

Stop automatic sailing after

WPT

time has reached 1-5

passing through the final

minute(s) before the

destination.

estimated arrival time at

Change the steering mode of the autopilot to


Auto or Hand. Otherwise, the autopilot
retains the rudder angle set last. (For details,
see the instruction manual for autopilot.)

the destination.
Automatic sailing

Automatic sailing cant be

failed

continued by one of the

mode of the autopilot to Auto or Hand.

following cause:

Otherwise, the autopilot retains the rudder

Should be stopped.

Stop automatic sailing. Change the steering

POSN1 error

angle set last. (For details, see the instruction

GYRO error

manual for autopilot.)

Route error
Calling back

Arrived at WPT alarm or

navigator

Route alarm does not

mode of the autopilot to Auto or Hand.

acknowledge for 30

Otherwise, the autopilot retains the rudder

seconds or more.

angle set last. (For details, see the instruction

Should be stopped.

Stop automatic sailing. Change the steering

manual for autopilot.)


Low Speed

Ship speed through water

Can be continued.

has lowered to less than


the set value.
POSN1(Data)

The system position 1 has

In case of DNV-classed

some errors.

vessels holding NAUT- OC

Change the steering mode of the autopilot to

notation, use dead-

Auto or Hand. Otherwise, the autopilot

reckoning for 10 minutes,

retains the rudder angle set last. (For details,

and then, stop automatic

see the instruction manual for autopilot.)

sailing.
POSN1 shifted

The system position shifts

Can be continued.

Should be stopped.

Change the steering mode of the autopilot to

beyond the limit.


Heading(Data)

Gyrocompass has got out


of order.

Auto or Hand. Otherwise, the autopilot


retains the rudder angle set last. (For details,
see the instruction manual for autopilot.)

Log(Data)

Sensor for speed through

Should be stopped.

water has got out of order.

Stop automatic sailing. Change the steering


mode of the autopilot to Auto or Hand.
Otherwise, the autopilot retains the rudder
angle set last. (For details, see the instruction
manual for autopilot.)

Autopilot(Data)

The autopilot has got out of

Should be stopped.

order.

Stop automatic sailing. Change the steering


mode of the autopilot to Auto or Hand.
Otherwise, the autopilot retains the rudder
angle set last. (For details, see the instruction
manual for autopilot.)

6 Automatic Sailing

6-4

6.2 Setting the Automatic Sailing


Automatic sailing can be set.
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(3) AUTO Sail] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
Then, the AUTO Sail Setting panel opens.
2) Select items and enter values as required.
Then, left-click the [OK] to close the panel.

ECDIS

a) Tracking Gain
When the ship leaves the route, this setting determines how tightly the course is maintained.
There are three settings: [Low] [Mid] [High]. An example of the difference between the own
ship cross track distance (XTD) and strength with which the ship returns to the route
depending on the tracking gain setting is shown below. The set heading when deviating to
the port side when the ships heading is 0 degrees and the route heading is also 0 degrees is
shown.

High

Mid

Low

Note:
The graph above is only one example. The actual values will differ from those in the graph
depending on the constant of the ship and its equipment.

6-5

6 Automatic Sailing

b) Drift Correction
When the ships speed is more than 5 knots, then control according to [None], [High], [Mid]
and [Low] setting will take drift into consideration.

Set heading

Drift

Actual route that is expected

c) Dead Band
When dead band is set, a stable course is maintained. Therefore, within the specified
range centered on the route, the set heading is the same as the route heading.
Dead band can be set within the range from 0.001 NM to 0.999 NM.
Next waypoint

Dead band

Previous waypoint

Set heading
(parallel to the route)

d) AUTO Stop (Only TCS category B)


Time until automatic sailing stop automatically when turning operation is not done even if
WOL is passed is set.
AUTO Stop can be set within the range from 0 min to 4 min.
This item is not displayed when using Normal type or TCS category C of A/P type.

6 Automatic Sailing

6-6

6.3 Automatic Sailing Operation


The following shows the outline of the operation of ECDIS and autopilot during automatic sailing.
ECDIS

Autopilot

1) Select the [Route], and [Start] automatic


2) Set the mode of the autopilot to NAVI for

sailing.
(See the descriptions below for the

the autopilot made by YOKOGAWA.

details of this procedure.)

(Set it to RC for the autopilot made by


TOKIMEC.)

3) Monitor the route.


4) After ending voyage, change the mode of
the autopilot from the NAVI to HAND.
5) Select [UNLOAD] for [Route] to clear the
route from the screen.
ECDIS

If the own ship has arrived at the boundary of a WPT during automatic
sailing, be sure to check the safety and perform turning manually (press the
[TURN] key.).
Otherwise, the ship keeps the course with the leg bearing, and accidents
may result.

During sailing, be sure to check own ships position and bearing as often as
necessary, regardless of whether the automatic sailing is in operation or
not.
Otherwise, accidents may result.

Note:
For operation of the autopilot, see its instruction manual.

6-7

6 Automatic Sailing

6.3.1 Selecting the Route and the WPT


To select the route, use the [Route] on the display panel.
When using A/P that is not TCS type
Selecting Normal route (extension .rtn).
When using A/P that is TCS type
Selecting TCS route (extension .rta).
The route where the Limit Check and Safety Check by Route Planning was done is displayed in the
left of route name, "OK>".

Normal Route
TCS route that doesn't Limit check and Safety
check by Route Planning
TCS route that does Limit check and Safety
check by Route Planning

To select the WPT, use the [To WPT] on the display panel.

6 Automatic Sailing

6-8

6.3.2 Start Automatic Sailing of Normal Route


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(3) AUTO Sail] - [(1) Start] in that order.
Then, the Select WPT panel opens.
Displays the [Route] file selecting on the display
panel.
Choose "To Waypoint" number displaying
alternative which was set in the [Route] file.
If you want to cancel the operation and close
the panel, click [Cancel].
To fix setting, click [OK].
If the following warning is displayed, confirm whether to have selected Normal Route.

ECDIS

2) Left-click the [OK] to close the panel.


Then, the "Confirmation" panel will appear.

Click the [OK] if confirming that there is not a problem in the setting.
When there is a problem in the setting and close the "Confirmation" panel, click the [Cancel].
3) Left-click the [OK] to continue automatic sailing procedure.
Then, the automatic sailing starts and route monitoring is carried out by the system.
During automatic sailing, you should turn the ship with the [TURN] key as follows:

When the ship arrived at the boundary of the WPT, Arrived at WPT alarm is issued.
Press the [TURN] key on the operation panel.
Then, the ship will start to turn.
Note:
During automatic sailing, the following menu changes invalidly.

[Menu] - [(9)Exit]
[Menu] - [(3)AUTO Sail] [(1)Start]
By terminating automatic sailing, it returns in the validity.

6-9

6 Automatic Sailing

6.3.3 Start Automatic Sailing of TCS Route


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(3) AUTO Sail] - [(1) Start] in that order.
Then, the Select WPT panel opens.
Displays the [Route] file
selecting on the display panel.
Choose "To Waypoint" number
displaying alternative which
was set in the [Route] file.
Please do not change the
setting as follows:
Pre Run Speed
Pre Run Time
Enter Angle
Turn Radius
Pre Run Distance
XTD MAX
To fix setting, click [OK].

If you want to cancel the operation and close the dialog,


click [Cancel].

If the following warning is displayed, confirm whether to have selected TCS route.

If the following warning is displayed, check the Limit and Safety check by Route Planning.

2) Left-click the [OK] to close the panel.


Then, the "Confirmation" panel will appear.

Click the [OK] if confirming that there is not a problem in the setting.
When there is a problem in the setting and close the "Confirmation" panel, click the [Cancel].

6 Automatic Sailing

6-10

3) Left-click the [OK] to close the panel.


If there is no problem in the setting, the "Confirmation" panel will appear.

Click the [OK] if confirming that there is not a problem in the setting.
When there is a problem in the setting and close the "Confirmation" panel, click the [Cancel].
4) Left-click the [OK] to continue automatic sailing procedure.
Then, the automatic sailing starts and route monitoring is carried out by the system.
During automatic sailing, you should turn the ship with the [TURN] key as follows:

When Actual Course Change alarm is occurred 30 seconds before arrived at WOL.
Press the [TURN] key on the operation panel.
Then, the ship will start to turn.

ECDIS

Note:
During automatic sailing, the following menu changes invalidly.

[Menu] - [(9)Exit]
[Menu] - [(3)AUTO Sail] [(1)Start]
By terminating automatic sailing, it returns in the validity.

6.3.4 Terminating the Automatic Sailing


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(3) AUTO Sail] - [(2) Stop] in that order.
Then, the "Confirmation" panel will appear.

2) Left-click the [OK] to stop the automatic sailing.


When [Cancel] is clicked, Auto Sail is continued.

6-11

6 Automatic Sailing

6.3.5 Disconnect Automatic Sailing


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(3) AUTO Sail] - [(3) Disconnect] in that order.
Then, the "Confirmation" panel will appear.

2) Left-click the [OK] to disconnect AUTO Sail.


[Cancel] is left-click when canceling Disconnect AUTO Sail.
Note:
When execute disconnect, the following menu changes invalidly.

[Menu] - [(3) AUTO Sail] - [(1)Start]


[Menu] - [(3)AUTO Sail] - [(3)Disconnect]
By exit to Navigation & Planning and start again, it returns in the validity.

6 Automatic Sailing

6-12

7
Tools and Setting/
Serviceman Menu

7-1

7.1 File Manager

Before reading and writing of the file by using the USB storage, confirm that
there is not a computer virus in the USB storage.
Otherwise they may affect other equipments and may cause a malfunction.

Do not leave the USB Storage in the USB port after use.
Malfunctions may result.
Do not leave the floppy disk in the floppy disk drive after use.
Also, do not leave the CDDVD in the DVD drive.
Malfunctions of the drives may result.

Route files and user chart files can be copied from the hard disk to floppy disks and vice versa. Route
files and user chart files can also be deleted.
In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(2) File Manager] in that order.

Example of Copying:

Copying a route file from the hard disk to a floppy disk.

1) Left-click the drop-down button a, then select Route File from the box. When route files are
selected, all files with the extensions .rtn and .rta are displayed.
2) Select Local Disk from box b. The route files saved on the hard disk will be displayed in box
c.
3) Left-click the drop-down button d, then select Floppy Disk from the box.
4) Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive, left-click the file to be copied from box c, then
left-click the [Copy] button (f) to start copying. The selected file will be copied to the floppy
disk. When a file is selected from the box e, and the button g is clicked, then a file on the
floppy disk can be copied to the hard disk.
In order to copy a user chart, User Map should be selected from the box a. (Files with the
extension .uch are displayed.)

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu

7-2

a)

b)

d)

e)

c)

f)

g)

ECDIS

* [COPY>>] and [<<COPY] can not be selected when setting the same drive to both of box
b and box d.
*

[Device is not ready.] message is displayed when selecting a [DVD Drive] or [Floppy
Disk] in box b or box d without inserting it.
* [During file operating Data Backup/Restore is not opened] message is displayed when
the following operation is done and it cannot continue while copying Voyage Log.
Select [Serviceman]-[Data Backup/Restore]-[Backup]
Select [Serviceman]-[Data Backup/Restore]-[Restore]

Deleting Files:
1) With files displayed in box c, select a file or left-click the [Select All] button to select all files.
2) Left-click the [Delete] button under box c. The delete confirmation panel will be displayed, so
press the [OK] button to delete the file(s). The same process can be used for box e to delete
files in box e with the [Delete] button under it.
* Following file can not be deleted.
Loaded Route file ([This file is using. Cannot copy.] message is displayed.)
Current date Own ship Track or Voyage Log file
([The process cannot access the file because it is being used by another process.]
message is displayed.)

7-3

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu

Files that can be handled with File Manager:


Type

Route File

Local

DVD

Floppy

USB

Ship

Disk

Drive

Disk

Device

LAN

Normal route files (extension .rtn)


TCS route files (extension .rta)
(Created with chapter 4 Route Planning)

User Map

User chart files (extension .uch)


(Created with chapter 5 Chart Editing)

Own Track

Own ship track files (extension .own)


(Refer to chapter 3 Own ships setting)

Target Track

Target track files (extension .atr)

Screen

Saved screen (by manual) files (extension .bmp)

Shot(MANU)

(Refer to chapter 3 Saving the Screen)

Screen

Saved screen (by auto) files(extension .bmp)

Shot(AUTO)
Voyage Log

Voyage log files

(1)

: available, : not available


1 Cannot copy from [USB device] to [Local].

Copying and Deleting Files on Backup Devices:


When a backup device is connected to the ECDIS through a network, Backup will be added to
boxes c and d. By selecting Backup, files can be copied and moved to the backup device, or
they can be copied from the backup device.

Overwriting Files:
When overwrite copying more than one file, "Over Write?" confirmation is displayed every file.
It is overwritten when clicking [OK] by the Over Write? screen.
It is not overwritten when clicking [Cancel] by the Over Write? screen.
* Following file can not be overwritten.
Loaded Route file ([This file is using. Cannot copy.] message is displayed.)

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu

7-4

7.2 System Information


The system information can be confirmed.
1) In the normal menu:
Select [Menu] - [(7)Main] - [(3)Test] - [(2)System Information] in that order.
[System Information] panel is displayed.
[Type]: Type of system is displayed.
It displays each version
[Process Manager]
[ECDIS App]
[Chartportfolio]
[TCS]: TCS is displayed.
[Maintenance No.]:
Maintenance number of 8 digits is displayed.
ECDIS

2) How to close the [System Information] panel:


The panel closes when clicking [Close] button.

7-5

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu

7.3 Operating Time


Operating time of Display, HDD1 and HDD2 can be confirmed.
1) In the normal menu:
Select [Menu] - [(7)Main] - [(3)Test] - [(3)Operating Time] in that order.
[Operating Time] panel is displayed.
[Display]: Operating time of display
[HDD1]: Operating time of HDD1
[HDD2]: Operating time of HDD2
2) [Operating Time] panel closes when clicking [Close] button.

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu

7-6

7.4 Color Test (ARCS Only)


The color test pattern for the ARCS charts will be displayed.
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(3) Test] - [(4) ARCS Color Test] in that order.
The color pattern for the ARCS color test will be displayed.
You can check a display state of the display unit from the color pattern.

ECDIS

2) Left-click on the [Close] button to close the color pattern.

7-7

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu

7.5 Sensor
The external input sensor such as GPS, etc. in which the own ships position is entered is set up.
The external sensor options are as follows:
Primary position and secondary position of own ship
Bearing and speed
Date data source
Time zone data source
Note:
The options available for each sensor differ depending on the system configuration used.

7.5.1 Primary Position and Secondary Position


On this equipment, you can select one of the navigation methods (e.g., GPS navigation, LORAN or
dead-reckoning). This is called the primary position (POSN1) or system position. A secondary position
(POSN2) can also be selected independent of the primary position. This system constantly checks how
far the primary and secondary positions are apart to monitor their mutual positions.
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(4) Sensor] in that order.
The Sensor Connection panel opens.
2) Set each item and left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.

Position fixing system for the primary position


POSN1 (Select from (D)GPS1, (D)GPS2and DR.)

Position fixing system for the secondary position


POSN2 (Select from (none), (D)GPS1,
(D)GPS2, DR and DR-Reset.)

Turning ON/OFF of the secondary position display

Use LAN: This item selects when input a data from LAN Board.
Use Local Port: This item selects when input a data from Local Port.
(D)GPS1: No.1-GPS or No.1-DGPS is used as the sensor to enter the own ships position.
(D)GPS2: No.2-GPS or No.2-DGPS is used as the sensor to enter the own ships position.
LORAN-C: LORAN-C is used as the sensor to enter the own ships position
GPS-Compass: GPS-Compass is used as the sensor to enter the own ships position
DR (normally, not used): The own ships position is estimated on the basis of heading, ship
speed, SDME, etc.
none: The secondary position is not used.
DR-Reset: To correct the errors that occur while DR is used, GPS data of POSN1 is used as
the reference position of DR. The GPS data obtained when OK in Sensor
Connection panel is left-clicked after DR-Reset is selected will be used as the
reference position.
7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu

7-8

The secondary position symbol is displayed as regardless of the scale. The track information for
the past six minutes is displayed in green. Other information cannot be displayed. The symbol and
track can also be turned ON and OFF.

7.5.2 Bearing Setting


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(4) Sensor] in that order.
The Sensor Connection panel opens.
2) Left-click the item to select it, and enter value to the value entry box.
a) Use LAN / Use Local Port
Select this item if the gyro sensor is used for the heading sensor. Gyro sensors information
is used to determine the heading of the ship. If the sensor being used detects the synchro/
step gyro, the initial value must be entered. After entering the value, left-click the [Set]
button to fix it.
Use LAN: This item selects when input a data from LAN Board.
Use Local Port: This item selects when input a data from Local Port.
GYRO I/F: GYRO i/F out put type gyro is used for the heading sensor.
GYRO(NMEA): GYRO(NMEA) out put type gyro is used for the heading sensor.
GYRO-Compass: Synchro/step gyro is used for the heading sensor.
GYRO Setting: This item uses when setting to GYRO I/F or GYRO-Compass.
In the following case, GYRO Setting becomes invalid
When selecting GYRO(NMEA) in [Source].
It sets [GYRO I/F] and [GYRO(NMEA)] to [Not Use] by the device setting.
When setting to [Use LAN] or [Use Local Port], it is displayed with "HDG(GYRO)" in the
display panel.
b) Manual (not used usually)
Enter the value when you apply any value as the bearing of the ship.
When setting to [Manual], it is displayed with "HDG(GYRO)" in the display panel.

Selects a heading sensor


GYRO I/F
GYRO(NMEA)
GPS-Compass

7-9

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu

ECDIS

7.5.3 Speed Setting


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(4) Sensor] in that order.
The Sensor Connection panel opens.
a) Use LAN / Use Local Port
Select the log sensor. Log sensors information is used to determine the speed of the ship.
Use LAN: This item selects when input a data from LAN Board.
Use Local Port: This item selects when input a data from Local Port.
GYRO I/F: GYRO I/F out put type log is used for the ship speed sensor.
NMEA LOG: NMEA LOG out put type log is used for the ship sensor.
GYRO(NMEA): GYRO(NMEA) out put type log is used for the ship sensor.
When setting to [Use LAN] or [Use Local Port], it is displayed with "STW(LOG)" in the display
panel.
b) Manual (not used usually)
Enter the value when you apply any value as the speed of the ship.
The maximum speed that can be set is 99.9 kn.
When setting to [Manual], it is displayed with "STW(MAN)" in the display panel.

Selects a ship speed sensor


LAN : GYRO I/F, NMEA LOG,
Local Port : GYRO I/F, GYRO(NMEA)

7.5.4 Date Data Source Setting


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(4) Sensor] in that order.
The Sensor Connection panel opens.
2) Left-click the item to select it, and enter the value to the value entry box.

Date/time setting data (GPS1, GPS2, MANUAL)

GPS1:

No.1-GPS or No.1-DGPS is used as the data source of date/time setting.

GPS2:

No.2-GPS or No.2-DGPS is used as the data source of date/time setting.

MANUAL: Date/time setting is made manually.

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu

7-10

7.5.5 Time Zone Data Source Setting


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(4) Sensor] in that order.
The Sensor Connection panel opens.
2) Left-click the item to select it, and enter the value to the value entry box.

Time zone setting data (GPS1, GPS2, MANUAL)

GPS1:

No.1-GPS or No.1-DGPS is used as the data source of time zone setting.

GPS2:

No.2-GPS or No.2-DGPS is used as the data source of time zone setting.

MANUAL: Time zone setting is made manually.

ECDIS

7-11

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu

7.6 Color and Brilliance Setting


Color and brilliance of Screen, Dialog, Character, and Keyboard can be changed.
1) In the normal menu
Select [Menu] - [(7)Main] - [(0)Setting] - [(1)Color and Brilliance Setting] in that order.
[Color and Brilliance Setting] panel will be displayed.
2) Selects each items and it clicks [OK] button.
Setting reflects and color and brilliance are changed.
[Apply] button:

Setting can be reflected without closing [Color and Brilliance Setting Panel].

[Cancel] button: Closes [Color and Brilliance Setting] panel without reflecting setting.
[Day/Night]
Each color and brilliance can be changed collectively
by selecting the following column.
[Day Bright] (DAY1)
[Day Whiteback] (DAY2)
[Day Blackback] (DAY3)
[Dusk]
[Night]
[Color]
User Dialog: Color of dialog can be changed by selecting
from 4 colors.
Character:

Color of character can be changed by selecting


from 4 colors.

Target Symbol: Color of Target Symbol can be changed by


selecting from 6 colors.
Radar Video: Color of Radar Video can be changed by
selecting from 5 colors.

[Brilliance]
Character: Brilliance of character can be changed among
Level4 from Level1.
Keyboard: Brilliance of key of operation panel can be
changed among Level4 from Level0.
Target Symbol: Brilliance of Target Symbol can be
changed among Level4 from Level0.
Radar Video: Brilliance of Radar Video panel can be
changed among Level4 from Level1.

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu

7-12

7.7 Setting the User Key


Register [Option1], [Option2] and [USER] key functions.
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(2) Option Key Setting] in that order.
The [Option Key] dialog box will be displayed.
2) Left-click in the function display box. The selectable functions will be listed.
Left-click the function that is to be assigned to the user key.
3) Left-click the [OK] button to close the dialog box.

ECDIS

Selectable functions list:


Function name
Graphic Editor

Function
Starts up Graphic Editor of Route Planning.
Exit from Graphic Editor when pushing allocated user key
again.

Chart Editor

Starts up User Map Editor.


Exit User Map Editor when pushing allocated user key
again.

Chart Setting

[Chart Setting] panel opens.

Ownship/Track Setting

[Own Ship Setting] panel opens.

Save My Port List

[Save my Port List] panel opens.

My Port List

[My Port List] panel opens.

Change Active Panel (ARCS only)

Boundary of the chart is displayed.

Load Low Resolution(ARCS only)

Changes to low resolution.

Logbook

[Logbook] panel opens.

Print Display

[Print] panel opens.

Save Screen

Saves a screen.

Save Chart Setting

[Save Chart Setting] panel opens.

Chart Setting List

[Chart Setting List] panel opens.

Display Base Temporarily

Changes SENC information level to Base temporarily.

(S-57/C-MAP only)

Returns to previous level when pushing allocated user


key again.
Also, returns to previous level when moving a cursor to
menu bar or display panel and so on, too.

7-13

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu

7.8 Setting Date/Time


When your ship is in the same time zone as the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), Time Zone is 0:00,
and UTC and ships local mean time (LMT) are the same.
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(3) Date/Time Setting] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(3) Date/Time Setting] in that order.
The Date/Time panel opens.
2) It chooses each clause eyes and it inputs value to the value entrybox..
Left-click the [OK] button on the panel to close the panel.
It closes a panel without changing contents when clicking the [Cancel] button.
It saves contents without closing a panel when clicking [Apply] button.

The following items can be set:

a) LMT Date/LMT Time


Set the date/time when MANUAL has been selected in the date/time data source setting.
For details, see 7.5.4 Date Data Source Setting.
Enter date/month/year/ hour:minite:second numerals in the numeric input box.
b) Time Zone
Set the time difference when MANUAL has been selected in the time zone data source
setting. For details, see 7.5.5 Time Zone Data Source Setting.
You can also use [+30min] and [-30min] button to set time.
(E=+, W=-)
The LMT and the time zone are displayed at the top of the display panel as follows:
Time zone

LMT

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu

7-14

3) [UTC/LMT] and [Display style] can be selected from the following item.

c) UTC/LMT
It does UTC/LMT change in the display time of the display panel.
It synchronizes with the time difference button display on the display panel.
d) Display Style
Date and time display on the display panel changes to the set format.
Y = Year, M = Month, D = Day

Note:
When an item other than MANUAL has been set in the date/time data source setting,
date/time setting procedure is not necessary.

7.9 Clear Voyage Distance


Voyage Distance can be cleared by this function.
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(6) Voyage Distance Clear] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(6)Voyage Distance Clear] in that order.
The Question panel opens.
2) Left-click the [OK] button, voyage distance of logbook is cleared.

Voyage Distance isn't cleared when clicking the [Cancel] button.

7-15

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu

ECDIS

7.10 Setting the Alarm Options


You can set the various alarm options.
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(8) Alarm Setting] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(8) Alarm Setting] in that order.
The Alarm List Setting panel opens.
2) Left-click the setting items to set them ON and OFF, and, for the items that require value entry,
enter the value.
Then, left-click the [OK] button on the panel to close the panel.

a) Limit
Difference between POSN1 and POSN2:
Displays an alarm on the screen when the POSN1 and POSN2 have deviated by more than
the distance preset here.
Shift of POSN1
Displays an alarm on the screen when the movement distance per unit hour (1 second) of
the ship is larger than the distance preset here. This is useful for detecting when something
influences your ships position in such a way that it is displayed at a wrong position on the
chart. (This does not apply when Dead-Reckoning (DR) is used.)
Off Course
Displays an alarm on the screen when your ship has veered off the current course more
than the preset angle.
Early Course Change Indication
It is displayed only when setting TCS type in Auto Pilot.
ECC indication popup occurs when the time to the WOL arrival reaches a set value when
making setting valid.
Arrival Last WPT
Displays an alarm on the screen when the time required to arrive at the final destination is
reduced to the amount you have set.

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu

7-16

Timer:
An alarm sounds at the time preset here.
Vector:
Danger detection vector in minute
The min and NM can be changed when clicking a Vector Length unit button.
Last input value for the unit is displayed when changing a unit.
Sector:
Sector radius in nm and the angle width in degree (up to 359.9 degrees)
*: For vector and angle width, see 3.27.3 Danger Detection Vector and Sector.
The min and NM can be changed when clicking a Sector Radius unit button.
Last input value for the unit is displayed when changing a unit.
Low Speed Alarm
It is displayed only when setting TCS TOKIMEC category B in Auto Pilot.
When making valid, the alarm occurs when through-the-water speed declines from the set
value.
b) Area (S-57/C-MAP Only)
You can set whether or not to display an alarm on the screen when a symbol on the chart
contacts a danger detection vector by setting each of the items ON and OFF.
Subjects of the items are as follows:
Traffic separation zone
Traffic crossing

ECDIS

Traffic roundabout
Traffic precautionary
Two Way traffic
Deeper water route
Recommended traffic lane
Inshore traffic zone
Fairway
Restricted area
Caution area
Offshore production area
Military practice area
Seaplane landing area
Submarine transit area
Ice area
Channel
Fishing ground
Fishing prohibited
Pipeline area
Cable area
Anchorage area
Anchorage prohibited
Spoil ground
Dumping ground
Dredge area
Cargo transshipment area
Incineration area
Specially protected area
7-17

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu

7.11 Radar Process Setting


It sets [Video Latitude], [Video Noise Rejection], [Auto DR Control], [Process Switch], [2cd Process Mode],
[Process Switch Range], [First Target Detection] about the radar.
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [Main] - [Setting] - [Radar Process Setting] in the order.
Radar Process Setting screen is displayed.
Video Latitude:
Video Latitude can be set by selecting it from [Normal], [Wide], [Narrow], [Super Wide].
Video Noise Rejection:
The level of Video Noise Rejection can be set by choosing it from [Off], [Level 1], [Level 2].
Auto DR Control:
ON/OFF of Auto DR Control can be changed.
Process Switch:
Process Switch can be set to [Distance Fix] or [Auto].
2nd Process Mode:
2nd Process Mode can be set by selecting it from [Off], [PROC1], [PROC2], [PROC3],
[PROC4], [PROC5].
Process Switch Range:
Process Range can be changed every 0.1 at up or down of the spin button.
First Target Detection:
ON/OFF of First Target Detection can be changed.
This setting becomes invalid when setting 2nd Process Mode to [PROC1] or [PROC2].
This setting becomes valid when setting 2nd Process Mode to [PROC3], [PROC4], [PROC5].

7.12 Language
The language to display can be selected from Japanese or English.
1) In case of making Japanese display in the normal menu.
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [Setting] [Language] [Japanese] in that order.
The display language becomes Japanese.
2) In case of making English display in the normal menu.
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [Setting] [Language] [English] in that order.
The display language becomes English
* In English OS, [Language] in [MENU] - [Main] isn't displayed..

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu

7-18

7.13 Code Input


By inputting a regulated code on Code Input panel, the enhanced menu is displayed. As other functions,
"Navigation and Planning" can be ended.
1) In the normal menu
Select [(7) Main] - [(5) Code Input] in that order.
The [Code Input] dialog box will be displayed.

2) Input the regulated code to the input column, and push [OK] button. Then, Code Input panel is
closed, and operation corresponding to a regulated code is done. When inputting the
deregulated code, Code Input panel is closed with nothing done.
* A typing in character is displayed with "*"
Regulated code and the operation
Input Code

Function

Serviceman menu (for engineer) is displayed on Menu Title Bar.


(Original menu is disappeared on this operation. To display original menu, select
[Serviceman]-[Exit Serviceman Menu].)
* Please do not operate the serviceman menu excluding JRC serviceman.
The device might not work correctly when the setting is changed.
3) To close Code Input panel, select Cancel button.

7-19

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu

ECDIS

7.14 Analog Correct Value


This function revises the Analog Correct Value, for example Engine RPM.
1) Select [MENU] - [(1) Serviceman] - [(3) Installation] - [(3) Analog Correct Value] in that order.
The [Correct Value] dialog box will be displayed.

2) Select the sensor, input a correct value to each parameter column.

M/E RPM STBDRevolution per minute of Main EngineStarboard


M/E RPM PORTRevolution per minute of Main EnginePort
Propeller RPM STBDRevolution per minute of PropellerStarboard
Propeller Pitch PORTPropeller PitchPort
After inputting all the parameter, push the Set button to determine that, push the OK button.
Then, [Correct Value] dialog box will be closed.

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu

7-20

7.15 Own ships Parameter Setting

Input the parameter accurately according to the specification of the ship.


Otherwise, accidents may result.

After changing the setting, execute to exit Navigation & Planning.


Otherwise, accidents may result because ECDIS is not affected by the set
parameter.

7.15.1 Ships Parameter


This function sets the parameter of a ship necessary for operating ECDIS.
ECDIS

1) In the normal menu


After Serviceman menu is displayed by Code Input panel,
Select [(1) Serviceman]-[(4) Ships Parameter] in that order.
The [Ships Parameter] dialog box will be displayed.
2) Input an accurate value to each parameter column.

3) After inputting all the parameter, push the OK button. Then, Information message is displayed.

4) Exit to Navigation & Planning and start again.

7-21

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu

7.15.2 CCRP Setting


This function sets the parameter of the position of CCRP (Consistent Common Reference Point) and the
position of each sensor.
1) In the normal menu
After Serviceman menu is displayed by Code Input panel,
Select [(1) Serviceman]-[(3) Installation]-[(2) CCRP Setting] in that order.
The [CCRP Setting] dialog box will be displayed.
2) Input an accurate value to each parameter column.

GPS / Radar Antenna:


Input the position according
to the installed environment,
and change to ON the check
box in using the sensor.

CCRP:
Set the position of CCRP.
Set the radio button of the
item used effectively though
four places can be set.

3) After inputting all the parameter, push the OK button. Then,


Information message is displayed.

4) Exit to Navigation & Planning and start again.

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu

7-22

7.16 Line Monitor


Communications between the ECDIS and external devices connected to the ECDIS can be checked.
1) After Serviceman menu is displayed by Code Input panel,
Select [(1) Serviceman] - [(1) Line Monitor] in that order.
The Line Monitor panel will be displayed.
2) From the Device Selection field, select a device connected to the ECDIS.
3) Left-click on the [Start] button. Information entered from the selected external device will be
displayed in the entry data display box in real time. Also, information outputted to the selected
external device will be displayed in the output data display box in real time.

Left-click on the

[Stop] button to stop information from being updated. Left-click on the [Clear] button to clear
the currently displayed information. If there is no inputting/outputting of data between the
ECDIS and the selected external device, then nothing will be displayed in the data display box.

ECDIS

7-23

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu

7.17 Adjust Radar Bearing, Range


and Antenna Height
This function adjusts [Bearing], [Range] and [Antenna height].

1) After Serviceman menu is displayed by Code Input panel,


Select [(1)Serviceman menu]-[(2)Adjust].The Adjust panel opens.
2) Input or select a value to each item, or adjust that with

Bearing Adjustment:
The value is input and bearing is
adjusted.
Range Adjustment:
The value is input and range is
adjusted.
Antenna Height:
Selects from the drop-down list
and antenna height is adjusted.

3) After setting all items, push the [Close] button.

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu

7-24

Tip of RADAR Range and Bearing

Adjusting Bearing
Expand the screen display. Then, adjust Heading echo to Bearing.

Heading echo

ECDIS

Adjusting Range
Expand the screen display. If there is the hole of own ships echo,
adjust Range smaller until the hole disappears.

Hole of own
ships echo

7-25

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu

7.18 Installation Information


This function sets the installation information.
1) After Serviceman menu is displayed by Code Input panel,
Select [(1) Serviceman] - [(3) Installation] - [(1) Installation Information] in that order.
The Installation Information panel will be displayed.
2) Input a value to each column.

Date: Input an installed date.


Name:
Input an administrator name.
Company:
Input the company name.

3) After setting all columns, push the [OK] button.


It closes a panel without changing contents when clicking the [Cancel] button.

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu

7-26

7.19 TCS Maintenance


This function sets [Reach Offset], [Safety / Limit Check] setting and [Time / Distance to WPT] setting
about the TCS.
1) After Serviceman menu is displayed by Code Input panel,
Select [(1) Serviceman] - [(5) TCS Maintenance] in that order.
The TCS Maintenance panel will be displayed.
2) Input or select setting to each item.
Reach Offset:
Input a reach offset of TCS.
Safety / Limit Check:
On: Whether [Safety / Limit Check] of the route
is completed when starting to auto sail is
checked.
Off: Whether [Safety / Limit Check] of the route
is completed when starting to auto sail is
not checked.
ECDIS

Time / Distance to WPT


From center point of WOL:
The distance / time from own ship to WPT is calculated between own ship and center
point of WOL.
From cross point of WOL and heading:
The distance / time from own ship to WPT is calculated between center point of heading
of own ship and WOL.
3) After setting all columns, push the [OK] button.
It closes a panel without changing contents when clicking the [Cancel] button.

7-27

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu

7.20 Radar Initial Setup


This function sets [Echo Noise Level] of [Signal Processing], [MBS Level] and [MBS Area] about the
radar.
1) Select [Menu] - [(7)Main] - [(5)Code Input] in that order.
2) The Code Input panel opens. After inputting [0], left-click [OK] button.
3) Select [Menu] - [(1)Serviceman menu]-[(6)Radar Initial Setup]
4) The Radar Initial Setup panel opens.
.
5) Input a value to each item or adjust that with
Signal Processing: Setting the echo noise level of Signal Processing.
MBS: Setting the level and area of Main Bang Suppression.
Echo Noise Level:
Echo Noise Level can be set between
from 0 to 255.
Setting Mode:
On/Off of Setting Mode can be changed.
MBS Level:
MBS Level can be set between from 0 to
255.
MBS Area:
MBS area can be set between from 0 to
255.
6) Left-click the [OK] on the panel to close the panel.
It closes a panel without changing contents when clicking the [Cancel] button.
It saves contents without closing a panel when clicking [Apply] button.

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu

7-28

7.21 Data Backup/Restore

Before reading and writing of the file by using the USB storage, confirm that
there is not a computer virus in the USB storage.
Otherwise they may affect other equipments and may cause a malfunction.

Do not leave the USB Storage in the USB port after use.
Malfunctions may result.
Do not leave the floppy disk in the floppy disk drive after use.
Also, do not leave the CDDVD in the DVD drive.
Malfunctions of the drives may result.

This function is backup and restore of setting data.


Data can be backed up to the following devices.
Backup Drive(DVD Drive)
Floppy Disk
USB Device

7-29

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu

ECDIS

7.21.1 How to backup the data


It explains the data backup procedure as follows.
1) After Serviceman menu is displayed by Code Input panel, Select [(1) Serviceman] - [(7) Data
Backup/Restore] - [(1) Backup] in that order.
The Data Backup/Restore panel will be displayed.
2) Select destination device from drop-down button a.
3) Select file that wants to be copied from box b, and left-click the [COPY>>] button (c) to
start backup.
Left-click [Select All] button (d) when you select all files.
4) Copied file is displayed that copy is completed in the box e.
a)

f)
g)

b)

c)
e)

d)

* [Type (f)] and [Source drive (g)] cant be changed.

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu

7-30

7.21.2 How to restore the data


It explains the data restore procedure as follows.
1) After Serviceman menu is displayed by Code Input panel, Select [(1) Serviceman] - [(7) Data
Backup/Restore] - [(2) Restore] in that order.
The Data Backup/Restore panel will be displayed.
2) Select source device from drop-down button a.
3) Select file that wants to be copied from box b, and left-click the [<<COPY] button (c) to
start restore.
Left-click [Select All] button (d) when you select all files.
4) Copied file is displayed that copy is completed in the box e.
e)
a)

f)

b)

e)

c)
d)

* [Type (f)] and [Destination drive (g)] cant be changed.

7-31

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu

ECDIS

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu

7-32

Playback

8-1

In the Playback, you can play back the logging data. The Playback screen is almost the same as for
Navigation & Planning. Also, the menu bar on the screen is the same as for the Navigation & Planning
screen except for the [(9) Playback] menu. Though the other menus are the same, there are some
submenus you cannot use in the Playback.

8.1 Entering/Exiting the Playback


(1) Entering the Playback
1) Turn ON the power by pressing the [POWER] key on the operation panel.
The startup menu appear on the display.
[Startup Menu]

2) Move the cursor with the trackball and left-click the

in the startup menu.

Almost the same screen as for Navigation & Planning will open and the Staring Date/Time
panel is displayed.
Note:
The mode selected last ([Navigation & Planning] in case of ECDIS, [Conning Display] in case
of Conning Display) will be automatically displayed if no operation is conducted for 10
seconds.

8 Playback

8-2

Display panels for playback operation


[For S-57/C-MAP]

[For ARCS]

ECDIS

8-3

8 Playback

Special menu for playback:


In the Navigation & Planning screen, [(9) Maintenance] is used. However, in the Playback, [(8)
Playback] is used, instead.

Displays the Starting Date/Time panel.


Starts/Restarts the playback.
Pauses the playback.
Stops the playback.
Turns ON/OFF the Playback panel.

Table 9 Playback Menu Tree


Main Menu
(1) AIS/TT

Submenu

Submenu/Option

Reference

(1) TT1

3.3.9.1

(2) TT2

3.3.9.1

(3) AIS

3.3.9.1

(4) All

3.3.9.1

(6) All List

3.3.9.2

(7) Select List

3.3.9.8

(2) Route

(0) Setting

4.1.1

(4) Ownship/Track

(0) Setting

3.28

(5) User Map

(1) Select User Map

3.13

(2) Unselect User Map

3.13

(6) Chart

(2) Off Center


(3) User Setting

(1) Enter Position

3.4.5

(2) Home

3.4.1

(1) Save My Port List

3.8.1

(2) My Port List

3.8.2

(3) Save Chart Setting

3.29.3

(4) Chart Setting List

3.29.4

(4) Select S-57 Chart

3.9

(5) Fix View

3.7.3

(6) Accept S-57 Updates

3.31

(3) Chart Abbreviation

3.30

(4) ARCS

(0) Setting
(7) Main

(1) EBL Maneuver/

3.10.9

(2) Adjust Datum Offset

3.10.10

(3) Datum Transformation

3.10.10

(1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS

3.29.1

(2) Other Chart

3.29.2
3.20

Remove EBL Maneuver

8 Playback

(1) Temporary and Preliminary

(2) Cross Bearing

3.21

(5) Print

3.37

(6) Save Screen

3.38

(2) File Manager

7.1

8-4

Table 9 Playback Menu Tree -- Continued


Main Menu
(7) Main

Submenu
(3) Test

(0) Setting

Submenu/Option
(1) Alarm Log

3.3.7

(2) System Information

7.2

(3) Operating Time

7.3

(1) Color and Brilliance Setting

7.6

(2) Option Key Setting

7.7

(4) Marker Setting

(8) Playback

Reference

3.16.2.1

(7) Display Panel Setting

3.25

(0) Buzzer Volume

3.3.5

(1) Starting Date/Time

8.2

(2) Start

8.2

(3) Pause

8.2

(4) Stop

8.2

(5) Playback Panel

8.2

(0) Exit

8.1

(2) Exiting the Playback


1) Left-click the [(0) Exit] menu and terminate the system in the same way as for Navigation &
Planning screen.

ECDIS

8-5

8 Playback

8.2 Playing Back the Logging Data


(1) Setting the starting date/time to be played back
1) Select [MENU] - [(8) Playback] - [(1) Starting Date/Time] in that order.
Then, the Starting Date/Time panel opens. (Initially, this screen is displayed.)
Logging data drop-down list*1
Date and time of recording end
Date and time of recording start

Selection of date and time to be played


2
back*
(You can select date and time by sliding
the scroll bar or entering the values.)

*1 (Logging data): A series of logging files in which the logging date is continuing.
*2: Used to designate playback start time. During playback, the date and time that were
recorded are displayed.
2) Specify the above items to select the logging data to be played back, and then left-click the [OK]
button.

(2) Displaying the Playback Panel


1) Select [MENU] - [(8) Playback] - [(5) Playback Panel] in that order.
Each time you select this menu, the Playback panel panel is turned ON and OFF. When it is
ON, the panel appears in the display panel.
Note that, depending on the playback status, some buttons are inactive.
[Pause] Button

[Start] Button

[Stop] Button

[Date/Time] Button
Left-clicking this button will open the
Start Date/Time panel as shown above.
[Playback Speed Select] Button
Left-click this drop-down list button and then
select the playback speed you want by left-clicking it.
Even if the Playback Panel panel is closed, you can start, pause, or stop the playback from
the menu.

8 Playback

8-6

(3) Start and stop of playback


1) Left-click the [Start] button.
Then, playback starts at the speed you have selected in the Playback Panel.
Notes on Playback:
The time, date, and other information are not the current ones but the recorded ones as the logging
data.
Playback Statues:
Stop:

During playback:

When paused:

2) To terminate the playback operation, left-click the [Stop] button.


To pause the playback, left-click the [Pause] button.
To cancel the pause, left-click the [Start] button again.

ECDIS

8-7

8 Playback

8 Playback

8-8

Reference

9-1

9.1 Alarm Function


(1) No Alarm
Category*1
No Alarm

Message*2
No Alarm

Alarm Type*3

Alarm
Colour*3

Buzzer Type*4

Normal State

Green

Silent

Meaning*5

Condition*6

No Alarm

(2) System Alarm


Category*1

Message*2

Alarm Type*3

Alarm
Colour*3

Buzzer Type*4

Meaning*5

Condition*6

POSN1 (primary) is defective or


communication line is cut.
POSN1 is not fixed.
Geodetic system between chart and
measured position information being
received differs.
POSN2 (secondary) is defective or
communication line is cut.
POSN2 is not fixed.
Geodetic system between chart and
measured position information being
received differs.
The shift amount of the primary
position exceeds the limit being set.

Position measuring
instrument is
connected
(including DR).

No.1
Position
Data Alarm

POSN 1(Data)

Alarm

Red

System Alarm

POSN1 not fix


POSN1(NON-WGS84)

Alarm
Alarm

Red
Red

System Alarm
System Alarm

No.2
Position
Data Alarm

POSN 2(Data)

Alarm

Red

System Alarm

POSN2 not fix


POSN2(NON-WGS84)

Alarm
Alarm

Red
Red

System Alarm
System Alarm

No.1
POSN1 shifted
Position Shift
Alarm
Position
Position difference
Difference
exceed
Alarm

Alarm

Red

System Alarm

Alarm

Red

System Alarm

The difference between the primary


and second positions exceeds the
limit being set.

User setting.
Position measuring
instrument is
connected to
POSN2
(including DR).

Radar Data
Alarm

PROC(AZI)

Alarm

Red

System Alarm

During radar
display

PROC(HL)

Alarm

Red

System Alarm

PROC(Trigger)

Alarm

Red

System Alarm

PROC(Video)
RIB(Data)

Alarm
Alarm

Red
Red

System Alarm
System Alarm

PROC(Reverse)

Alarm

Red

System Alarm

PROC(INT)

Alarm

Red

System Alarm

ASIC1 to Radar

Alarm

Red

System Alarm

TT(Data)

Alarm

Red

System Alarm

SRB(Data)

Alarm

Red

System Alarm

Gyro I/F(Gyro)

Alarm

Red

System Alarm

Rotation signal (BP) is out of


specifications.
Rotation signal (BZ) is out of
specifications.
Trigger signal is out of specifications
or signal line is cut.
Video signal is out of specifications.
Error occurred in the radar interface
board.
Error by reverse-rotation in the signal
processing part.
Error in interrupting of stun in the
signal processing part.
Error in interrupting from ASIC1 to
radar DSP
Target Track is defective or signal
line is cut.
Error occurred in the serial relay
board
Gyro is defective.

Heading(Data)

Alarm

Red

System Alarm

Error occurred in the heading data of


gyro interface or its line is cut.

LOG Data
Alarm

Gyro I/F(Log)
Log(Data)

Alarm
Alarm

Red
Red

System Alarm
System Alarm

Log is
connected.

Autopilot
Data Alarm

Autopilot(DATA)

Alarm

Red

System Alarm

Log is defective.
Error occurred in the log data of log
interface or its line is cut.
Autopilot is defective or
communication line is cut.

Hardware
Alarm

Fan(CPU)
CPU High Temperature
Fan(Main PWR)
Fan(ATX PWR)
Fan(LCD)
Disk1 Error
Disk2 Error
AC offline

Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm

Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red

System Alarm
System Alarm
System Alarm
System Alarm
System Alarm
System Alarm
System Alarm
System Alarm

CPU fan is defective.


CPU temperature is rising.
Main power supply fan is defective.
ATX power supply fan is defective.
LCD fan is defective.
Disk1 is defective.
Disk2 is defective.
AC power is offline.

Always

Target Track
Data Alarm
SRB Data
Alarm
GYRO Data
Alarm

Reference

9-2

Position measuring
instrument is
connected
(including DR).

User setting

During TT
display
Always
Gyro is
connected.

Autopilot is
connected.

(3) Nav. Alarm


Message*2

Alarm Type*3

Alarm
Colour*3

Crossing Safety Contour

Alarm

Red

Navigation
Alarm - Mid

[V] Crossing Safety Contour within


set time.

Vector = ON
(User setting)

Approaching Obstruction

Alarm

Red

[S] Approaching obstruction

Sector=ON
(User setting)

Approaching Under
water rock
Approaching Wreck

Alarm

Red

Alarm

Red

Dangerous Symbol

Alarm

Red

Approaching Buoy/Light

Alarm

Red

Arrived at WPT

Alarm

Red

Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid

Actual course change

Alarm

Red

Navigation
Alarm - Mid

Off Course

Alarm

Red

XTD

Alarm

Arrived at LAST WPT

Category*1

Safety
contour
Alarm
Dangerous
Alarm

Route
Monitoring
Alarm

Buzzer Type*4

Meaning*5

Condition*6

[S] Approaching under-water rock


[S] Approaching wreck
[S] Approaching wreck
Approaching Buoy/Light
Arrived at the WPT.

During Normal
route navigation
During TCS route
navigation

Navigation
Alarm - Mid

[A] Necessary to change in the


course. (It occurs before by 30
seconds which arrive at WOL.)
The difference between the course
and bearing exceeds the limit.

Red

Navigation
Alarm - Mid

The amount of the cross track error


exceeds the limit.

Alarm

Red

Navigation
Alarm - Mid

Arrived at the last WPT on the sailing


final leg.

Automatic sailing failed

Alarm

Red

Navigation
Alarm - Mid

Call-back navigator

Alarm

Red

Navigation
Alarm - High

Alarm

Red

Lost

Alarm

Red

LAT. Limit
Over Alarm

LAT. Limit Over

Alarm

Red

Navigation
Alarm - Low
Navigation
Alarm - Low
Navigation
Alarm - Mid

Automatic sailing cannot be


continued.
By one of the following causes:
POSN1 error
GYRO error
Route error
[A] Outputs a callback navigator
alarm.
By one of the following causes:
ARR alarm does not occur even
after 30 seconds.
Route alarm does not occur even
after 30 seconds.
[AIS/TT] CPA(Closet Point of
Approach) or TCPA(Time to CPA)
[AIS/TT] Target is lost.

Anchor
Alarm

Dragging anchor

Alarm

Red

Navigation
Alarm - Mid

Timer Alarm

Timer

Alarm

Red

Navigation
Alarm - Low

Time out

Timer=ON
(User setting)

Chart Alarm

Loaded different datum


chart
Loaded unknown datum
chart
Chart image is Zoom out

Alarm

Red

Different datum chart is loaded.

Always

Alarm

Red
Red

ARCS Alarm Security failed

Alarm

Red

[ARCS] Unknown datum chart is


loaded.
[ARCS] Low-resolution chart is
displayed.
[ARCS] An alarm related to ARCS
security occurred.

Chat type =
ARCS

Alarm

Navigation
Alarm - Low
Navigation
Alarm - Low
Navigation
Alarm - Low
Navigation
Alarm - Low

Not up to date

Alarm

Red

Traffic separation zone

Alarm

Red

Traffic Crossing

Alarm

Red

Traffic roundabout

Alarm

Red

Traffic precautionary

Alarm

Red

Two way traffic

Alarm

Red

Navigation
Alarm - Low
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid

[ARCS] An alarm related to ARCS


updated.
[V] Crossing Traffic Separation Zone
within set time.
[V] Crossing Traffic Crossing within
set time.
[V] Crossing Traffic Roundabout
within set time.
[V] Crossing Traffic Precautionary
within set time.
[V] Crossing Two Way Traffic within
set time.

Target Alarm CPA/TCPA

Area Alarm

9-3

During route
navigation and
Alarm Setting =
ON
(User setting)

During automatic
sailing

AIS/TT display =
ON

Limit Over Latitude on own ship.


83 00.000'N
83 00.000S
Crossing anchor circle

Always

Anchor
circle=ON

See 10.2.1
Alarm Information of ARCS
Chart.
Vector=ON
(User setting)
Alarm item=ON
(User setting)

Reference

ECDIS

(3) Nav. Alarm - Continued


Alarm Type*3

Alarm
Colour*3

Deeper water route

Alarm

Red

Recommended traffic
lane
Inshore traffic zone

Alarm

Red

Alarm

Red

Fairway

Alarm

Red

Restricted area

Alarm

Red

Caution area

Alarm

Red

Offshore production
area
Military practice area

Alarm

Red

Alarm

Red

Seaplane landing area

Alarm

Red

Submarine transit area

Alarm

Red

Ice area

Alarm

Red

Channel

Alarm

Red

Fishing ground

Alarm

Red

Fishing prohibited

Alarm

Red

Pipeline area

Alarm

Red

Cable area

Alarm

Red

Anchorage area

Alarm

Red

Anchorage prohibited

Alarm

Red

Spoil ground

Alarm

Red

Dumping ground

Alarm

Red

Dredge area

Alarm

Red

Cargo transshipment
area
Incineration area

Alarm

Red

Alarm

Red

Specially protected area

Alarm

Red

Dangerous line

Alarm

Red

Dangerous Area

Alarm

Red

Category*1

Area Alarm

Message*2

Buzzer Type*4

Meaning*5

Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid

[V] Crossing Deeper Water Route


within set time.
[V] Crossing Recommended Traffic
Lane within set time.
[V] Crossing Inshore Traffic Zone
within set time.
[V] Crossing Fairway within set time.

Condition*6

Vector=ON
(User setting)
Alarm item=ON
(User setting)

[V] Crossing Restricted Area within


set time.
[V] Crossing Caution Area within set
time.
[V] Crossing Shore Production Area
within set time.
[V] Crossing Military Practice Area
within set time.
[V] Crossing Seaplane Landing Area
within set time.
[V] Crossing Submarine transit Area
within set time.
[V] Crossing Ice Area within set time.
[V] Crossing Channel within set time.
[V] Crossing Fishing Ground within
set time.
[V] Crossing Fishing Prohibited
within set time.
[V] Crossing Pipeline Area within set
time.
[V] Crossing Cable Area within set
time.
[V] Crossing Anchorage Area within
set time.
[V] Crossing Anchorage Prohibited
within set time.
[V] Crossing Spoil Ground within set
time.
[V] Crossing Dumping Ground within
set time.
[V] Crossing Dredge Area within set
time.
[V] Crossing Cargo Transshipment
Area within set
[V] Crossing Incineration Area within
set time.
[V] Crossing Specially Protected
Areas within set time.
[V] Crossing Dangerous Line within
set time.
[V] Crossing Dangerous Area within
set time.

(4) INFO/Warning
Category*1

Information

Message*2

Set Gyro
POSN1 not select
Safety contour not set
Shallow contour not set
Deep contour not set
Safety depth not set

Reference

Alarm Type*3

Invalid
Information
Invalid
Information
Invalid
Information
Invalid
Information
Invalid
Information
Invalid
Information

Alarm
Colour*3

Buzzer Type*4

Meaning*5

Operation Miss Setting up is not completed.


By one of the following causes:
Setting Alarm Initial course for step/synchronize
gyro is not set.
Setting Alarm POSN1 is unsetting.
Safety contour value is not set
(default value unchanged).
Setting Alarm
Shallow contour value is not set
(default value unchanged).
Setting Alarm Deep contour value is not set
(default value unchanged).
Setting Alarm Safety depth value is not set
(default value unchanged).

Blue
Blue
Blue
Blue
Blue
Blue

9-4

Condition*6

Always

(5) INFO/Warning - continued


Category*1
Information

Warning

Alarm Type*3

Alarm
Colour*3

AIS Max Target

Information

Blue

AIS 95% Capacity

Information

Blue

AIS ACT Max

Information

Blue

AIS ACT 95% Capacity

Information

Blue

POSN1(HDOP)

Warning

Yellow

POSN2(HDOP)

Warning

Yellow

Loading Non-HO chart.

Warning

Yellow

Over scale.

Warning

Yellow

Larger scale available.


ENC data are available.
Position shift.

Warning
Warning
Warning

Yellow
Yellow
Yellow

Chart shift.
Chart shift to WGS84.

Warning
Warning

Yellow
Yellow

POSN1 not differential.

Warning

Yellow

POSN2 not differential.

Warning

Yellow

Fix View.
No ENC available

Warning
Warning

Yellow
Yellow

Customized display

Warning

Yellow

Alarm Type*3

Alarm
Colour*3

Invalid Data

Operation Miss

Blue

No Object

Operation Miss

None

Echo OFF

Operation Miss

None

Not Allowed
Max Point

Operation Miss
Operation Miss

None
None

Message*2

Buzzer Type*4

Meaning*5

Condition*6

Operation Miss [AIS] All AIS target is displayed


maximum number.
Operation Miss [AIS] All AIS target is displayed to
95% or more of maximum number.
Operation Miss [AIS] Activated AIS target is
displayed maximum number.
Operation Miss [AIS] Activated AIS target is
displayed to 95% or more of
maximum number.
Silent
HDOP increase in primary GPS
(GPS accuracy decrease)
Silent
HDOP increase in secondary GPS
(GPS accuracy decrease)
Silent
[ENC]Selecting Chart that is not
Official. (ex. C-MAP)
Silent
[ENC]Two expansion displays were
multiplied from the reduced scale of
the chart when the ship moves to
another chart.
Silent
Larger scale available.
Silent
ENC data are available.
Silent
Ships position is shifted by Offset
function.
Silent
[ARCS]Chart shift.
Silent
[ARCS] Selecting Chart that is not
datum on WGS84.
Silent
The quality indicator of POSN1 is
things except 1".
Silent
The quality indicator of POSN2 is
things except 1".
Silent
[ENC]Selecting Fix View
Silent
[ENC] The chart at the ship position
is No ENC
Silent
At lease I Standard Category
checkbox in S57/C-MAP
Ed.2/C-MAP Ed.3 is not checked

AIS/TT display =
ON

(6) Operation Miss


Category*1

Operation
Miss

Message*2

Buzzer Type*4

Meaning*5

Condition*6
ECDIS

Operation Miss The operation for which data was


necessary was done with there no
position data.
Operation Miss The spot without the object was
selected.
Operation Miss Echo is off because offset limit of
Radar echo was over.
Operation Miss Invalid operation
Operation Miss Entered information beyond the
specification

Note:
Some of the alarms may not be available depending on the system configuration used.

9-5

Reference

Remarks:
*1: Category
*2: Message (detailed description of alarm)
When an alarm occurs, the alarm button blinks in red. At the same time, the detailed description
of the alarm is displayed in the message box at the bottom of the chart display area. When the
Alarm button on the operation panel is pressed to acknowledge the alarm, the blinking alarm
stops and stays lit.
The following table shows the alarm display on the button, in the message box and the Alarm
List panel. The Alarm List panel opens when the [Alarm List] button is left-clicked.
Alarm button

[Alarm List] button

Alarm display
[Alarm buttons on the display panel]
Button/Panel
/Buzzer

Alarm button

Attribution

Alarm

Icon on Status

Icon on Log

display

of Alarm List panel

of Alarm List Panel

Buzzer

Not acknowledged

Red blinking

Stay red

Red blinking

Red blinking

Generated

Acknowledged

Not indicate

Stay red

Stay red

Stay red

Silent

Invalid Information

Blue blinking

Stay blue

Stay blue

Stay blue

Generated

Information with low integrity/ Warning

Not indicate

Stay yellow

Stay yellow

Stay yellow

Silent

Normal State

Stay green

Stay green

Silent

Alarm

*3: An alarm shown in the Alarm List panel.


*4: Audible sound from the dedicated keyboard. The sounding pattern varies with the type of alarm.
Volume of the alarm is changeable every type. ([(7)Main] [(0)Setting] [(0) Buzzer Setting])
*5: [A]: Alarm used for TCS only, [V]: Alarm detected by the danger detection vector (vector area),
[S]: Alarm detected by the guard ring (sector area)
*6: Condition to detect an alarm may depend on the hardware to be used.

Reference

9-6

9.2 Chart-Related Alarm Information


9.2.1 Alarm Information of ARCS Chart
When ARCS chart is displayed on ECDIS, chart-related alarms may occur frequently. It is obligated to
display these alarms on ECDIS, and such frequent occurrence of the alarms is not the result of a
malfunction of ECDIS. JRCs ECDIS is designed to read the chart and permit information of ARCS and
display such alarm information.
Alarm Information of ARCS chart
Measures to take

Timing and place of


displaying error message

No.

Error message

ARCS01 The contents of the GB.LCN file


have been altered. You may be in breach
of the licensing arrangements that relate
to the use of the chart.
License is invalid. Please contact your
ARCS agent/ distributor to correct this
error.

Ask your ARCS agent/distributor for the


authorized license (Chart Permit). Your
license has been falsified, so it is invalid.

Displayed in Chart Portfolio


when Navigation & Planning is
started, when ARCS Information of User Maintenance
Menu is checked, and when
the chart is imported.

ARCS02 Chart Chart#. Chart Permit


corrupted. Please reload original media.

Register Chart Permit again. Chart


Permit is in abnormal state. If the
re-registration of Chart Permit does not
restore the system to normal operation,
ask your ARCS agent/distributor for the
authorized license (Chart Permit).

Displayed in Chart Portfolio


when the chart is imported

ARCS03 Chart Chart#. Update


information relates to a newer version of
the chart. Please load the chart CD that
contain Chart# with an issue date of
RCID.

Import data from the latest chart CD and


update CD. The chart version of the
update CD does not match the imported
chart version.

Displayed in Chart Portfolio


when the chart is imported

ARCS04 Chart Chart#. The chart data


already incorporates this update information. Please load the latest update CD.

Import data from the latest chart CD and


update CD. The data on the current
update CD is already imported.

Displayed in Chart Portfolio


when the chart is imported

ARCS05 Chart Chart#. License expired updating is not permitted. Please contact
your agent to re-new license.

Ask your ARCS agent for a new license.


Your license has already expired, so
updating is not permitted.

Displayed in Chart Portfolio


when the chart is imported
(only for Navigator Service
Edition)

ARCS08 Warning - License expired in


less than one month. Please contact your
ARCS agent for a license renewal.

Ask your ARCS agent for a new license.


Your license (Chart Permit) will expire in
less than a month.

Displayed in the panel when


the chart is displayed (only for
Navigator Service Edition)

ARCS09 Chart Chart#. Warning - License


expired. The displayed chart may not be
up to date. Contact your Agent to arrange
for a license renewal.

Ask your ARCS agent for a new license.


One month has not passed yet since the
expiry date of your license (Chart Permit).

Displayed in the panel when


the chart is displayed (only for
Navigator Service Edition)

ARCS10 Chart Chart#. License expired.


ARCS charts can not be displayed.
Contact your ARCS agent for a license
renewal.

Ask your ARCS agent for a new license.


One month or more has passed since the
expiry date of your license (Chart Permit).
The chart is not displayed.

Displayed in the panel when


the chart is displayed (only for
Navigator Service Edition)

ARCS11 Chart Chart#. The loaded


version of this chart is too old to be used
with the license. Please load a more
recent version of the chart. Chart version
is Enc#, Permit version is Penc#.

Import the latest license and chart CD.


The chart encryption version number does
not match the encryption version number
of your license (Chart Permit). The chart
is not displayed.

Displayed in the panel when


the chart is displayed (only for
Navigator Service Edition)

9-7

Reference

ECDIS

Alarm Information of ARCS chart (continued)


Timing and place of
displaying error message

No.

Error message

Measures to take

10

ARCS12 Chart Chart#. The license is too


old to be used with this version of the
chart. Please contact your agent to obtain
a new license.

Ask your ARCS agent for a new license.


The chart encryption version number does
not match the encryption version number
of your license (Chart Permit). The chart
is not displayed.

Displayed in the panel when


the chart is displayed (only for
Navigator Service Edition)

11

Larger Scale available

More detailed charts than the currently


displayed chart can be displayed.
Larger-scale charts than the currently
displayed chart exist.

Displayed in the message area


when the chart is displayed

12

Chart Shift

Note that the currently displayed chart


position is shifted. The display position
of the current chart is shifted in
accordance with user-defined setting.

Displayed in the message area


when the chart is displayed

13

Chart Shift To WGS84

Note that the currently displayed chart


position is shifted. The displayed chart is
not of the WGS-84 geodetic system, but it
is displayed in accordance with WGS-84
while the offset value of chart data is used
as reference.

Displayed in the message area


when the chart is displayed

14

WGS84 position cannot be related


accurately to chart Chart#.

Note that the geodetic system of the


currently displayed chart does not
conform to WGS-84. An offset value is
not set to WGS-84, so the chart cannot be
shifted to WGS-84.

Displayed in the message area


when the chart is displayed

15

Loading different datum chart

Note that the geodetic system of the


currently displayed chart is not WGS-84.
A chart of a non-WGS-84 geodetic system
is displayed.

Displayed in the message area


when the chart is displayed

16

Loaded unknown datum chart

Note that the currently displayed chart is


of an unknown geodetic system. A chart
whose geodetic system is not set in chart
data is displayed.

Displayed in the message area


when the chart is displayed

17

PIN Error

Check for the Personal Identification


Number (PIN). The entered PIN is not
correct.

Displayed in the panel when a


PIN is entered at start of
Navigation & Planning

18

Data error(0xFFFFFF79):Chart Permit


corrupted. Please reload original media.

Register Chart Permit again. Chart


Permit is in abnormal state. If the
re-registration of Chart Permit does not
restore the system to normal operation,
ask your ARCS agent/distributor for the
authorized license (Chart Permit).

Displayed in Chart Portfolio


when the chart is imported

Note 1 : # in the error message column denotes a name, ID or number.


Note 2 : Two types of ARCS are available, Skipper Service and Navigator Service. Update support is
provided for the latter but not for the former. ARCS06, 07, and 13-18 pertain to Skipper Service
only.

Reference

9-8

9.2.2 Alarm Information of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart


This section explains the details of the alarm information that may appear while C-MAP Ed.3 chart is
displayed on ECDIS.
No.

Error message

Measures to take

C-MAP Ed.3 : No license installed.

License has not yet been installed. Register the license in Chart
Portfolio.

C-MAP Ed.3 : One or more licenses expired. Please


contact your C-MAP agent for a license renewal.

The license is invalid. The chart is displayed only for 15 minute


after it is started. Contact your C-MAP agent to request license
renewal.

C-MAP Ed.3 : One or more licenses will expire at


DD/MM/YYYY. Please contact your C-MAP agent
for a license renewal.

The license will expire on DD/MM/YYYY. It will expire in less than


2 months. Contact your C-MAP agent to request license renewal.

C-MAP Ed.3 : Key device (e-Token) not found.

C-MAP security device (eToken) cannot be recognized. Press


[POWER] to exit the software and OS, and then, press [POWER]
again to start the equipment.

C-MAP Ed.3 : COM error

Com port error was detected. Press [POWER] to exit the


software and OS, and then, press [POWER] again to start the
equipment.

C-MAP Ed.3 : Unknown error

An unknown error was detected. Press [POWER] to exit the


software and OS, and then, press [POWER] again to start the
equipment.

ECDIS

9-9

Reference

9.2.3 Alarm Information of S-57/S-63 Chart


This section explains the details of the alarm information that may appear inside the log window of Chart
Portfolio while S-57/S-63 chart is imported/updated on ECDIS.
When Base CD is used
No.

Error message

Cause

Procedure

error(0x00000001)
error: File not found

A chart defined in the catalog


file on the chart CD is not
found.

This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The


chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

error(0x00000002)
error: File Length

A catalog file on the chart CD


contains a data length error.

This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The


chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

error(0x00000003)
error: File extention

The chart CD contains a file


extension error.

This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The


chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

error(0x00000004)
error: File count

A chart file is found on the


chart CD.

This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The


chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

error(0x00000005)
error: Data not found

Specified data is not found on


the chart CD.

This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The


chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

error(0x00000006)
error: Data error

The chart CD contains a file


data error.

This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The


chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

error(0x00000007)
error: CRC

A chart file on the chart CD


contains a CRC value error.

This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The


chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

error(0x00000008)
error: Exchange

The chart CD contains an


exchange target data error.

This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The


chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

error(0x00000009)
error: Data structure

The chart CD contains a file


structure error.

This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The


chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

Reference

9-10

When Base CD is used (continued)


No.

Error message

Cause

Procedure

10

error(0x0000000A)
error: Attribute

The attribute value of an


object defined in a chart file
on the chart CD is incorrect.

This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The


chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

11

error(0x0000000B)
error: Instruction
Address

Internal memory address


error (instruction section)

Contact selling agency of chart.

12

error(0x0000000C)
error: Instruction offset

Internal memory offset error


(instruction section)

Contact selling agency of chart.

13

error(0x0000000D)
error: PL Rule Memory

Memory allocation error (PL


rule section)

Contact selling agency of chart.

14

error(0x0000000E)
error: PL Rule
Information

Data acquisition error (PL


rule section)

Contact selling agency of chart.

15

error(0x0000000F)
error: Attribute
Information

Chart-object attribute
acquisition error

Contact selling agency of chart.

16

error(0x00000010)
error: Enc File write

SENC file write error

Contact selling agency of chart.

17

error(0x00000011)
error: Object Class get

Chart-object information
acquisition error

Contact selling agency of chart.

18

error(0x00000012)
error: Directory create

File path error

Contact selling agency of chart.

19

error(0x00000013)
error: Topology

A chart object on the chart


CD contains a topology error.

This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The


chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

20

error(0x00000014)
error: Area Object Link

A chart area object on the


chart CD contains a link error.

This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The


chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

21

error(0x00000015)
error: Line Object Link

A line object on the chart CD


contains a link error.

This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The


chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

22

error(0x00000016)
error: Object outside
range

A chart object on the chart


CD is beyond the boundary.

This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The


chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

9-11

Reference

ECDIS

When Update CD is used


No.

Error message

Cause

Procedure

error(0x00000001)
error: Memory get

Memory allocation error

Contact selling agency of chart.

error(0x00000002)
error: Index get

Chart index acquisition error

An index needs to be created again. Index creation may


take several hours.
Contact your JRC sales representative.

error(0x00000003)
error: File not found

SENC file is not found.

An index needs to be created again. Index creation may


take several hours.
Contact your JRC sales representative.

error(0x00000004)
error: CRC

A chart file on the chart CD


contains a CRC value error.

This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This


chart cannot be updated.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

error(0x00000005)
error: Exchange

The update CD contains an


exchange target data error.

This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This


chart cannot be updated.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

error(0x00000006)
error: Data structure

The update CD contains a file


structure error.

This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This


chart cannot be updated.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

error(0x00000007)
error: Data not found

A chart defined in a catalog


file on the update CD is not
found.

This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This


chart cannot be updated.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

error(0x00000008)
error: Object not found

A SENC chart object name is


not found.

This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This


chart cannot be updated.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

error(0x00000009)
error: Chart Cell size

SENC chart-file size


acquisition error

Contact selling agency of chart.

10

error(0x0000000A)
error: Chart Cell data

SENC chart file acquisition


error

Contact selling agency of chart.

11

error(0x0000000B)
error: Warning Cell size

SENC warning-file size


acquisition error

Contact selling agency of chart.

12

error(0x0000000C)
error: Warning Cell data

SENC warning file


acquisition error

Contact selling agency of chart.

13

error(0x0000000D)
error: Sequential
number error

The update CD contains an


update number sequence
error.

This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This


chart cannot be updated.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

Reference

9-12

When Update CD is used (continued)


No.

Error message

Cause

Procedure

14

error(0x0000000E)
error: Object index

An update chart on the


update CD contains an object
index error.

This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This


chart cannot be updated.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

15

error(0x0000000F)
error: Attribute
information

An update chart on the


update CD contains an
attribute information error.

This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This


chart cannot be updated.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

16

error(0x00000010)
error: Attribute

An update chart on the


update CD contains an
attribute value error.

This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This


chart cannot be updated.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

17

error(0x00000011)
error: Instruction
Address

Internal memory address


error (instruction section)

Contact selling agency of chart.

18

error(0x00000012)
error: Instruction Offset

Internal memory offset error


(instruction section)

Contact selling agency of chart.

19

error(0x00000013)
error: PL Rule Memory

Memory allocation error (PL


rule section)

Contact selling agency of chart.

20

error(0x00000014)
error: PL Rule
Information

Data acquisition error (PL


rule section)

Contact selling agency of chart.

21

error(0x00000015)
error: Enc File write

SENC file write error

Contact selling agency of chart.

22

error(0x00000016)
error: Object Class get

Chart-object information
acquisition error

Contact selling agency of chart.

23

error(0x00000017)
error: Data structure

The update CD contains a


data structure error.

This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This


chart cannot be updated.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

24

error(0x00000018)
error: FFPC delete

The update CD contains a


data structure error (FFPC
field deletion).

This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This


chart cannot be updated.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

25

error(0x00000019)
error: FFPC edit

The update CD contains a


data structure error (FFPC
field change).

This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This


chart cannot be updated.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

26

error(0x0000001A)
error: FSPC delete

The update CD contains a


data structure error (FSPC
field deletion).

This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This


chart cannot be updated.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

9-13

Reference

ECDIS

When Update CD is used (continued)


No.

Error message

Cause

Procedure

27

error(0x0000001B)
error: FSPC edit

The update CD contains a


data structure error (FSPC
field change).

This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This


chart cannot be updated.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

28

error(0x0000001C)
error: VRPC delete

The update CD contains a


data structure error (VRPC
field deletion).

This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This


chart cannot be updated.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

29

error(0x0000001D)
error: VRPC edit

The update CD contains a


data structure error (VRPC
field change).

This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This


chart cannot be updated.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

30

error(0x0000001E)
error: SGCC delete

The update CD contains a


data structure error (SGCC
field deletion).

This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This


chart cannot be updated.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

31

error(0x0000001F)
error: SGCC edit

The update CD contains a


data structure error (SGCC
field change).

This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This


chart cannot be updated.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

32

error(0x00000020)
error: Coordinate Type

The update CD contains a


data structure error
(coordinate type).

This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This


chart cannot be updated.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

33

error(0x00000021)
error: Directory create

File path error

Contact selling agency of chart.

34

error(0x00000022)
error: Topology

A chart object on the update


CD contains a topology error.

This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This


chart cannot be updated.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

35

error(0x00000023)
Area Object Link

A chart area object on the


update CD contains a link
error.

This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This


chart cannot be updated.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

36

error(0x00000024)
error: Line Object Link

A chart line object on the


update CD contains a link
error.

This error is not fatal.


Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

Reference

9-14

When Update CD is used (continued)


No.

Error message

Cause

Procedure

37

error(0x00000025)
error: Object outside
range

A chart object on the update


CD is beyond the boundary.

This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This


chart cannot be updated.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

38

error(0x00000026)
error: point

The update CD contains a


chart point object error.

This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This


chart cannot be updated.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

39

error(0x00000027)
error: Edition number

Chart CD Edition number


error

This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This


chart cannot be updated.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

ECDIS

9-15

Reference

9.3 Abbreviation for Geodetic System


No.
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
37
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56

Abbreviation
WGS-72
WGS-84
EUR
ADI
AFG
AIN
ANO
AIA
ARF
ARS
ASC
ATF
SHB
TRN
ASQ
AUA
AUG
PHA
IBE
BER
BID
BOO
BUR
CAZ
CAI
CAO
CAP
CAC
CGE
CHI
CHU
COA
DAL
BAT
GIZ
EAS
EUS
FOT
GAA
GEO
GRA
GUA
GSE
DOB
HEN
HJO
HKD
HTN
IND
INF
INH
TRL
ISG
IST
JOH

Reference

Des cription
World Geodetic Sys tem 1972
World Geodetic Sys tem 1984
European 1950
Adindan
Afgooye
Ain el Abd 1970
Anna 1 As tro 1965
Antigua Is land As tro 1943
Arc 1950
Arc 1960
As cens ion Is land 1958
As tro beacon "E" 1945
As tro DOS 71/4
As tro Tern Is land (FRIG) 1961
As tronom ical Station 1952
Aus tralian Geodetic 1966
Aus tralian Geodetic 1984
Ayabelle Lighthous e
Bellevue (IGN)
Berm uda 1957
Bis s au
Bogota Obs ervatory
Bukit Rim pah
Cam p Area As tro
Cam po Inchaus pe 1969
Canton As tro 1966
Cape
Cape Canaveral
Carthage
Chatam Is land As tro 1971
Chua As tro
Corrego Alegre
Dabola
Djakarta (Batavia)
DOS 1968
Eas ter Is land 1967
European 1979
Fort Thom as 1955
Gan 1970
Geodetic Datum 1949
Gracios a Bas e SW 1948
Guam 1963
Gunung Segara
GUX 1 As tro
Herat North
Hjors ey 1955
Hong Kong 1963
Hu-Tzu-Shan
Indian Indian 1954
Indian 1975
Ireland 1965
ISTS 061
As tro 1968
ISTS 073 As tro 1969
Johns ton Is land 1961

No.
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80

Abbreviation
KAN
KEG
KEA
KUS
LCF
LEH
LIB
LUZ
MIK
MAS
MER
MID
MIN
ASM
MPO
NAH
NAP
NAS
NAR
FLO
OEG
OHA
FAH
OGB

81
82
83
84
85
86
87

PLN
PIT
PTB
PTN
POS
PRP
HIT

88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
114
115

PUR
QAT
QUO
REU
MOD
SAE
SAO
SAP
SCK
SGM
SAN
SOA
TAN
TIL
TOY
TDC
MVS
ENW
WAK
YAC
ZAN
PUK
SPK

9-16

Des cription
Kandawala
Kerguelen Is land 1949
Kertau 1948
Kus aie As tro 1951
L. C. 5 As tro 1961
Leigon
Liberia 1964
Luzon
Mahe 1971
Mas s awa
Merchich
Midway As tro 1961
Minna
Monts errat Is land As tro 1958
M'Poraloko
Nahrwan
Naparim a, BWI
North Am erican 1927
North Am erican 1983
Obs ervatorio Meteorologico 1939
Old Egyptian 1907
Old Hawaiian
Om an
Ordnance Survey of Great Britain
1936
Pico de las Nieves
Pitcairn As tro 1967
Point 58
Pointe Noire 1948
Porto Santo 1936
Provis ional South Am erican 1956
Provis ional South Chilean 1963
(als o known as Hito XVIII 1963)
Puerto Rico
Qatar national
Qornoq
Reunion
Rom e 1940
Santo (DOS) 1965
Sao Braz
Sapper Hill 1943
Schwarzeck
Selvagem Grande 1938
South Am erican 1969
South As ia
Tananarive Obs ervatory 1925
Tim balai 1948
Tokyo
Tris tan As tro 1968
Viti Levu 1916
Wake-Eniwetok 1960
Wake Is land As tro 1952
Yacare
Zanderij
Pulkovo 1942
S-42 (Pulkovo 1942)

9.4

List of standard terms, units and abbreviations


Term

Acknowledge
Acquire, Acquisition
Acquisition Zone
Adjust, Adjustment

Abbreviation
ACK
ACQ
AZ
ADJ

Aft

AFT

Alarm

ALARM

Altitude

ALT

Amplitude Modulation
Anchor Watch
Antenna
Anti Clutter Rain
Anti Clutter Sea
April
Audible
August
Automatic
Automatic Frequency Control
Automatic Gain Control
Automatic Identification
System
Automatic Radar Plotting Aid
Autopilot

AP

Auxiliary System/Function
Available
Azimuth Indicator
Background
Bearing
Bearing Waypoint To Waypoint
Bow Crossing Range
Bow Crossing Time
Brilliance
Built in Test Equipment
Calibrate
Cancel
Carried (for example, carried
EBL origin)
Central Processing Unit
Centre

Term

Abbreviation
CHG
CP
CLR
CPA

AM
ANCH
ANT
RAIN
SEA
APR
AUD
AUG
AUTO
AFC
AGC

Change
Circularly Polarised
Clear
Closest Point of Approach
Compact Disk Read Only
Memory
Consistent Common Reference
Point
Consistent Common Reference
System
Contrast
Coordinated Universal Time
Correction
Course
Course Over the Ground
Course Through the Water
Course To Steer
Course Up
Cross Track Distance
Cursor
Dangerous Goods

CONT
UTC
CORR
CRS
COG
CTW
CTS
C UP
XTD
CURS
DG

AIS

Date

DATE

ARPA

DAY

AUX
AVAIL
AZI
BKGND
BRG
BWW
BCR
BCT
BRILL
BITE
CAL
CNCL

Day
Dead Reckoning, Dead Reckoned
Position
December
Decrease
Delay
Delete
Departure
Depth
Destination
Deviation
Differential GLONASS
Differential GNSS
Differential GPS
Digital Selective Calling

DEC
DECR
DELAY
DEL
DEP
DPTH
DEST
DEV
DGLONASS
DGNSS
DGPS
DSC

Display

DISP

CPU
CENT

Distance
Distance Root Mean Square

DIST
DRMS

9-17

CDROM
CCRP
CCRS

DR
ECDIS

Reference

List of standard terms, units and abbreviations (continued)

Term

Abbreviation

E
REF
EBL

Term
Global Maritime Distress and
Safety System
Global Navigation Satellite
System
Global Orbiting Navigation
Satellite System
Global Positioning System
Great Circle
Grid

GPS
GC
GRID

ECDIS

Ground

GND

ECS
ENC
EPFS
ERBL

Grounding Avoidance System


Group Repetition Interval
Guard Zone
Gyro
Harmful Substances(applies
to AIS)
Head Up
Heading
Heading Control System
Heading Line
High Frequency
High Speed Craft
Horizontal Dilution Of
Precision

GAS
GRI
GZ
GYRO

Distance To Go

DTG

Drift

DRIFT

Dropped(for example, dropped EBL


origin)
East
Echo Reference
Electronic Bearing Line
Electronic Chart Display and
Information System
Electronic Chart System
Electronic Navigational Chart
Electronic Position Fixing System
Electronic Range and Bearing Line
Emergency Position Indicating Radio
Beacon
Enhance
Enter
Equipment
Error
Estimated Position
Estimated Time of Arrival
Estimated Time of Departure

EPIRB
ENH
ENT
EQUIP
ERR
EP
ETA
ETD

Abbreviation
GMDSS
GNSS
GLONASS

HS
H UP
HDG
HCS
HL
HF
HSC
HDOP

European Geo-Stationary
Navigational Overlay System
Event
Exclusion Zone
External
F - Band (applies to Radar)
February
Foreword
Fishing Vessel
Fix
Forward
Frequency
Frequency Modulation

EGNOS

I - Band

I-Band

EVENT
EZ
EXT
F-Band
FEB
FWD
FISH
FIX
FWD
FREQ
FM

ID
IN
INCR
IND
INFO
INF RED
INIT
INP
I/O
IBS
INS

Full

FULL

Gain
Geographics
Geometric Dilution Of Precision

GAIN
GEOG
GDOP

Identification
In
Increase
Indication
Information
Infrared
Initialization
Input
Input/Output
Integrated Bridge System
Integrated Navigation System
Integrated Radio
Communication System
Interference Rejection
Interswitch
Interval

Reference

9-18

IRCS
IR
ISW
INT

List of standard terms, units and abbreviations (continued)

Term
January
July
June
Label
Latitude
Latitude/Longitude
Leeway
Limit
Line Of Position
Log
Long Pulse
Long Range
Longitude
Loran
Lost Target LOST

Abbreviation
JAN
JUL
JUN
LBL
LAT
L/L
LWY
LIM
LOP
LOG
LP
LR
LON
LORAN
LOST TGT

North
North Up
Not Less Than
Not More Than
Not Under Command
November
October
Off
Officer On Watch
Offset
On
Out/Output
Own Ship
Panel Illumination
Parallel Index Line

Low Frequency

LF

Past Positions

Magnetic
Man Overboard
Manoeuvre
Manual

MAG
MOB
MVR
MAN

Map(s)

MAP

March
Maritime Mobile Services Identity
number
Maritime Pollutant (applies to AIS)

MAR

Passenger Vessel
Performance Monitor
Permanent
Person Overboard
Personal Identification
Number
Pilot Vessel

MMSI

Port/Portside

PORT

MP

POSN

Maritime Safety Information

MSI

Marker
Master
Maximum

MKR
MSTR
MAX

May

MAY

Medium Frequency
Medium Pulse

MF
MP

Menu

MENU

Minimum
Missing
Mute
Navigation
Night
Normal

MIN
MISSING
MUTE
NAV
NT
NORM

Position
Positional Dilution Of
Precision
Power
Predicted
Predicted Area of Danger
Predicted Point of
Collision
Pulse Length
Pulse Modulation
Pulse Repetition
Frequency
Pulse Repetition Rate
Pulses Per Revolution
Racon
Radar
Radar Plotting
Radius

9-19

Term

Abbreviation
N
N UP
NLT
NMT
NUC
NOV
OCT
OFF
OOW
OFFSET
ON
OUT
OS
PANEL
PI
PAST
POSN
PASSV
MON
PERM
POB
PIN
PILOT

ECDIS

PDOP
PWR
PRED
PAD
PPC
PL
PM
PRF
PRR
PPR
RACON
RADAR
RP
RAD

Reference

List of standard terms, units and abbreviations (continued)

Term
Rain
Range
Range Rings
Raster Chart Display System
Raster Navigational Chart
Rate Of Turn
Real-time Kinemetic
Receive
Receiver
Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring
Reference
Relative
Relative Motion
Revolutions per Minute
Rhumb Line
Roll On/Roll Off Vessel
Root Mean Square
Route
Safety Contour
Sailing Vessel
Satellite
S-Band
Scan to Scan
Search And Rescue
Search And Rescue Transponder

Abbreviation
RAIN
RNG
RR
RCDS
RNC
ROT
RTK
Rx RX
RCDR

Term
Speed Over the Ground
Speed Through the Water
Stabilized
Standby
Starboard/Starboard Side
Station
Symbol(s)
Synchronized/Synchronous
Target

Abbreviation
SOG
STW
STAB
STBY
STBD
STN
SYM
SYNC
TGT

RAIM

Target Tracking

TT

REF
REL
RM
RPM
RL
RoRo
RMS
ROUTE
SF CNT
SAIL
SAT
S-BAND
SC/SC
SAR
SART

Test
Time
Time Difference
Time Dilution Of Precision
Time Of Arrival
Time Of Departure
Time to CPA
Time To Go
Time to Wheel Over Line
Track
Track Control System
Tracking
Trail(s)
Transmit and Receive
Transceiver
Transferred Line Of
Position
Transmit
Transmitter
Transmitting Heading
Device

TEST
TIME
TD
TDOP
TOA
TOD
TCPA
TTG
TWOL
TRK
TCS
TRKG
TRAIL
TXRX
TCVR

Search And Rescue Vessel

SARV

Select
September

SEL
SEP

Sequence

SEQ

TPL
TX
TMTR
THD

Set (i.e., set and drift, or setting a


value)
Ships Time
Short Pulse
Signal to Noise Ratio
Simulation
Slave
South

SET

Transponder

TPR

TIME
SP
SNR
SIM
SLAVE
S

TRAIL
TRIG
T
TM
TUNE
UHF

Speed

SPD

Speed and Distance Measuring


Equipment

SDME

Trial
Trigger Pulse
True
True Motion
Tune
Ultrahigh Frequency
Uninterruptible Power
Supply
Universal Time,
Coordinated

Reference

9-20

UPS
UTC

List of standard terms, units and abbreviations (continued)

Term
Universal Transverse Mercator

Abbreviation
UTM

VRM
VAR
VECT
VHF
VLF
GRND
ANCH
VCD
DIVE

Unit
Cable Length
Cycles Per
Second
Degree(s)
Fathom(s)
Feet/Foot
Gigahertz
Hectopascal
Hertz
Hour(s)
Kilohertz
Kilometre

Unstabilised

UNSTAB

Variable Range Marker


Variation
Vector
Very High Frequency
Very Low Frequency
Vessel Aground
Vessel at Anchor
Vessel Constrained by Draught
Vessel Engaged in Diving Operations
Vessel Engaged in Dredging or Underwater
Operations
Vessel Engaged in Towing Operations
Vessel Not Under Command
Vessel Restricted in Manoeuvrability
Vessel Traffic Service
Vessel Underway Using Engine
Video
Visual Display Unit
Voyage
Voyage Data Recorder
Warning
Water
Waypoint
Waypoint Closure Velocity
West
Wheel Over Line
Wheel Over Point
Wheel Over Time
World Geodetic System
X-Band

deg
fm
ft
GHz
hPa
Hz
hr(s)
kHz
km

DRG

Kilopascal

kPa

TOW
NUC
RIM
VTS
UWE
VID
VDU
VOY
VDR
WARNING
WAT
WPT
WCV
W
WOL
WOP
WOT
WGS
X-BAND

Knot(s)
Megahertz
Minute(s)
Nautical Mile(s)
Second(s)

kn
MHz
min
NM
sec

9-21

Abbreviation
cbl
cps

ECDIS

Reference

9.5 Data Formats of Files that ECDIS


can Import/Export
9.5.1

File Types

Route files
User chart files
Logbook files

9.5.2

File Names

File type

Import source file name

Route files

Default export target file name

.csv, .

rtn_ (binary file name) .csv

TCS

.csv, .

rta_ (binary file name) .csv

2G TCS

.csv, .

User chart files

.csv, .

Logbooks

lgb_ (specified starting date_ending date) .csv

Normal

Example: lgb_020312_020313.csv

Specified period
Selected log

lgb_ (selected log date_UTC time) .csv

Example: lgb_020312_132445.csv

9.5.3

CSV File Data Structure

When importing files, character strings that come after // and until the end of the line are
handled as comments.
Commas (,) are used as delimiters.
Example:
// SYMBOL,InstName,,,,,,
// Comment,,,,,,,
// Lat,,,Lon,,
SYMBOL,BOYSHP01,,,,
User comment,,,,,
30,6.433,N,129,35.583,E

Reference

9-22

9.5.3.1 Route Files


(1) Normal Routes
Line
1*3

Contents

Examples, etc.

Import*1

Export*2

// (Space)

Fixed character string

ROUTE SHEET exported by JRC

Fixed character string

// (Space)

Fixed character string

<<NOTE>>This strings // indicate

Variable length character

comment column/cells. You can

string

ECDIS.
2

edit freely.
3

// (Space)

Fixed character string

Route name

Route name of source file

Fixed character

<Normal>

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Route comments

Comments from the

source file
4

// (Space)

Fixed character string

WP No.

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Lat

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Fixed character

Fixed character

Lon

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Fixed character

Fixed character

Prt [nm]

Fixed character

Fixed character

Stb [nm]

Fixed character

Fixed character

Arr Rad [nm]

Fixed character

Fixed character

Speed [nm]

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Sail (RL/GC)

Fixed character string

Fixed character

*1 Information acquired when importing. (Same for all below)


*2 Information to be exported. (Same for all below)
*3 Lines with gray backgrounds indicate that those lines are comment lines. (Same for all below)

9-23

Reference

ECDIS

(1) Normal Routes - continued


Line

Contents

Examples, etc.

Import

Export

Time Zone

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Fixed character

Name

Fixed character string

WP number

000

Fixed character

Latitude degree value

35

Fixed character

Latitude minute value

35.123

Fixed character

Latitude code (N/S)

Fixed character

Longitude degree value

139

Fixed character

Longitude minute value

48.234

Fixed character

Longitude code (E/W)

Fixed character

Port side route width

0.50

Fixed character

Starboard side route width

0.50

Fixed character

Arrival circle radius

0.50

Fixed character

Planned speed

12.30

Fixed character

Navigation method (RL/GC)

RL

Fixed character

Time zone

09:00

Fixed character

Time zone code (E/W)

Fixed character

Name

Yokohama

Repeat from line five for each


waypoint.

In the WP000 line, all fields other than latitude and longitude (degree value, minute value and code)
are filled with .

Reference

9-24

(2) TCS Routes


Line
1

Contents

Examples, etc.

Import

Export

// (Space)

Fixed character string

ROUTE SHEET exported by JRC

Fixed character string

// (Space)

Fixed character string

<<NOTE>>This strings // indicate

Variable length character

comment column/cells. You can

string

ECDIS.
2

edit freely.
3

// (Space)

Fixed character string

Route name

Route name of source file

Fixed character

<ANTS>

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Route comments

Comments from the

source file
4

// (Space)

Fixed character string

WP No.

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Lat

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Fixed character

Fixed character

Lon

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Fixed character

Fixed character

Prt [nm]

Fixed character

Fixed character

Stb [nm]

Fixed character

Fixed character

Speed [nm]

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Sail (RL/GC)

Fixed character string

Fixed character

ROT [deg/min]

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Turn Rad [nm]

Fixed character string

Fixed character

9-25

Reference

ECDIS

(2) TCS Routes - continued


Line

Contents

Examples, etc.

Import

Export

Time Zone

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Fixed character

Name

Fixed character string

WP number

000

Fixed character

Latitude degree value

35

Fixed character

Latitude minute value

35.123

Fixed character

Latitude code (N/S)

Fixed character

Longitude degree value

139

Fixed character

Longitude minute value

48.234

Fixed character

Longitude code (E/W)

Fixed character

Port side route width

0.50

Fixed character

Starboard side route width

0.50

Fixed character

Planned speed

12.30

Fixed character

Navigation method (RL/GC)

RL

Fixed character

Turning rate

10.00

Fixed character

Turn circle radius

0.50

Fixed character

Time zone

09:00

Fixed character

Time zone code (E/W)

Fixed character

Name

Yokohama

Repeat from line five for each


waypoint.

In the WP000 line, all fields other than latitude and longitude (degree value, minute value and code)
are filled with .

Reference

9-26

(3) 2G TCS Routes


Line
1
2

Contents
;

Examples, etc.

Import

Fixed character

(Space) x 63 characters

Fixed character string

WP number

000

Fixed character

Latitude degree value

3535.123

Fixed character

Latitude code (N/S)

Fixed character

Longitude degree value

13948.234

Fixed character

Longitude code (E/W)

Fixed character

Port side route width

0.50

Fixed character

Starboard side route width

0.50

Fixed character

Arrival circle radius

0.50

Fixed character

Planned speed

12.30

Fixed character

Navigation method (RL/GC)

RL

Fixed character

Turning rate

010.0

Fixed character

Turning circle radius

0.50

Fixed character

Time zone

09:00

Fixed character

Time zone code (E/W)

Fixed character

Name

Yokohama

Repeat from line second for each

ECDIS

waypoint.
In the WP000 line, all fields other than latitude and longitude (numeric values and codes) are ignored.

9-27

Reference

9.5.3.2 User Chart Files


(1) Header Records
Line
1

Contents

Examples, etc.

// (Space)

Fixed character string

USER CHART SHEET exported

Fixed character string

by JRC ECDIS.
2

// (Space)

Fixed character string

<<NOTE>>This strings // indicate

Variable length character

comment column/cells. You can

string

edit freely.
3

// (Space)

Fixed character string

User chart name

File name of the source file

Fixed character

Fixed character

User chart comments

Comments from the


source file

Reference

9-28

Import

(2) Object Records


a) Symbols
Line
m

Contents

Examples, etc.

Import

// (Space)

Fixed character string

SYMBOL

Fixed character string

Fixed character

InstName

Fixed character string

// (Space)

Fixed character string

Comment

Fixed character string

// (Space)

Fixed character string

Lat

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Fixed character

Fixed character

Lon

Fixed character string

SYMBOL

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Instruction name - 1

Instruction name

Fixed character

Instruction name - 2

Instruction name

Fixed character

Instruction name - 3

Instruction name

+4

Comments

Comments

+5

Latitude degree value

35

Fixed character

Latitude minute value

35.123

Fixed character

Latitude code (N/S)

Fixed character

Longitude degree value

139

Fixed character

Longitude minute value

48.234

Fixed character

Longitude code (E/W)

+1
+2

+3

ECDIS

Unused instruction name fields are filled with .

9-29

Reference

b) (Poly) Lines
Line
m

Contents

Examples, etc.

Import

// (Space)

Fixed character string

LINE

Fixed character string

Fixed character

InstName

Fixed character string

// (Space)

Fixed character string

Comment

Fixed character string

// (Space)

Fixed character string

Lat

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Fixed character

Fixed character

Lon

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Add END to the end of vertex.

Fixed character string

LINE

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Instruction name

Instruction name

+4

Comments

Comments

+5

Latitude degree value of the apex

35

Fixed character

Latitude minute value of the apex

35.123

Fixed character

Latitude code of the apex (N/S)

Fixed character

Longitude degree value of the

139

Fixed character

Longitude minute value of the

48.234

Fixed character

Longitude code of the apex (E/W)

+1
+2

+3

apex

apex

+n

Repeat for the number of apexes

plus five lines


END

Fixed character string

(position end)
For lines without instructions, fill in the instruction name field with .
When importing, attributes that are not specified here are imported with specific attributes.

Reference

9-30

c) Arc
Line
m

Contents

Examples, etc.

Import

// (Space)

Fixed character string

ARC

Fixed character string

// (Space)

Fixed character string

Comment

Fixed character string

// (Space)

Fixed character string

Base Point-Lat

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Fixed character

Fixed character

Base Point-Lon

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Fixed character

Fixed character

Radius [nm]

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Start Angle [deg]

Fixed character string

Fixed character

End Angle [deg]

Fixed character string

+3

ARC

Fixed character string

+4

Comments

Comments

+5

Latitude degree value of the

35

Fixed character

Latitude minute value of the

35.123

Fixed character

Latitude code of the reference

Fixed character

Longitude degree value of the

139

Fixed character

Longitude minute value of the

48.234

Fixed character

Longitude code of the reference

Fixed character

Radius

2.0

Fixed character

+1
+2

reference position

reference position
ECDIS

position (N/S)

reference position

reference position

position (E/W)

9-31

Reference

c) Arc -continued
Line

Contents

Examples, etc.

Import

Starting angle

120.0

Fixed character

Ending angle

180.0

When importing, attributes that are not specified here are imported with specific attributes.

d) User Danger Lines


Line
m

Contents

Examples, etc.

Import

// (Space)

Fixed character string

DANGER_LINE

Fixed character string

// (Space)

Fixed character string

Comment

Fixed character string

Lat

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Fixed character

Fixed character

Lon

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Add END to the end of vertex.

Fixed character string

+3

DANGER_LINE

Fixed character string

+4

Comments

Comments

+5

Latitude degree value of the apex

35

+1
+2

Fixed character

Latitude minute value of the apex

35.123

Fixed character

Latitude code of the apex (N/S)

Fixed character

Longitude degree value of the

139

Fixed character

Longitude minute value of the

48.234

Fixed character

Longitude code of the apex (E/W)

apex

apex

+n

Repeat for the number of apexes

plus two lines


END

Fixed character string

(position end)
When importing, attributes that are not specified here are imported with specific attributes.

Reference

9-32

e) Polygons
Line
m

Contents

Examples, etc.

Import

// (Space)

Fixed character string

POLYGON

Fixed character string

// (Space)

Fixed character string

Comment

Fixed character string

Lat

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Fixed character

Fixed character

Lon

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Add END to the end of vertex.

Fixed character string

+3

POLYGON

Fixed character string

+4

Comments

Comments

+5

Latitude degree value of the

35

Fixed character

Latitude minute value of the

35.123

Fixed character

Latitude code of the apex (N/S)

Fixed character

Longitude degree value of the

139

Fixed character

Longitude minute value of the

48.234

+1
+2

apex

apex

apex

apex

ECDIS

Fixed character

Longitude code of the apex

(E/W)
+n

Repeat for the number of

apexes plus two lines


END

Fixed character string

(position end)
When importing, attributes that are not specified here are imported with specific attributes.

9-33

Reference

f) Circles
Line
m

Contents

Examples, etc.

Import

// (Space)

Fixed character string

CIRCLE

Fixed character string

// (Space)

Fixed character string

Comment

Fixed character string

// (Space)

Fixed character string

Base Point-Lat

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Fixed character

Fixed character

Base Point-Lon

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Fixed character

Fixed character

Radius [nm]

Fixed character string

+3

CIRCLE

Fixed character string

+4

Comments

Comments

+5

Latitude degree value of the

35

Fixed character

Latitude minute value of the

35.123

Fixed character

Latitude code of the reference

Fixed character

Longitude degree value of the

139

Fixed character

Longitude minute value of the

48.234

Fixed character

Longitude code of the reference

Fixed character

Radius

2.0

+1
+2

reference position

reference position

position (N/S)

reference position

reference position

position (E/W)

Reference

9-34

g) Ellipses
Line
m

Contents

Examples, etc.

Import

// (Space)

Fixed character string

ELLIPSE

Fixed character string

// (Space)

Fixed character string

Comment

Fixed character string

// (Space)

Fixed character string

Base Point-Lat

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Fixed character

Fixed character

Base Point-Lon

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Fixed character

Fixed character

Horizontal Radius [nm]

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Vertical Radius [nm]

Fixed character string

+3

ELLIPSE

Fixed character string

+4

Comments

Comments

+5

Latitude degree value of the

35

Fixed character

Latitude minute value of the

35.123

Fixed character

Latitude code of the reference

+1
+2

reference position

reference position

ECDIS

position (N/S)
,

Fixed character

Longitude degree value of the

139

Fixed character

Longitude minute value of the

48.234

Fixed character

Longitude code of the reference

Fixed character

Horizontal radius

2.00

Fixed character

Vertical radius

1.50

reference position

reference position

position (E/W)

9-35

Reference

h) Fans
Line
m

Contents

Examples, etc.

Import

// (Space)

Fixed character string

FAN

Fixed character string

// (Space)

Fixed character string

Comment

Fixed character string

// (Space)

Fixed character string

Base Point-Lat

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Fixed character

Fixed character

Base Point-Lon

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Fixed character

Fixed character

Radius [nm]

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Start Angle [deg]

Fixed character string

Fixed character

End Angle [deg]

Fixed character string

+3

FAN

Fixed character string

+4

Comments

Comments

+5

Latitude degree value of the

35

Fixed character

Latitude minute value of the

35.123

Fixed character

Latitude code of the reference

Fixed character

Longitude degree value of the

139

Fixed character

Longitude minute value of the

48.234

Fixed character

Longitude code of the reference

Fixed character

Radius

2.0

Fixed character

Starting angle

120.0

Fixed character

Ending angle

180.0

+1
+2

reference position

reference position

position (N/S)

reference position

reference position

position (E/W)

Reference

9-36

i) User Danger Areas


Line
m

Contents

Examples, etc.

Import

// (Space)

Fixed character string

DANGER_AREA

Fixed character string

// (Space)

Fixed character string

Comment

Fixed character string

Lat

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Fixed character

Fixed character

Lon

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Add END to the end of vertex.

Fixed character string

+3

DANGER_AREA

Fixed character string

+4

Comments

Comments

+5

Latitude degree value of the

35

Fixed character

Latitude minute value of the

35.123

Fixed character

Latitude code of the apex (N/S)

Fixed character

Longitude degree value of the

139

Fixed character

Longitude minute value of the

48.234

+1
+2

apex

apex

apex

apex

ECDIS

Fixed character

Longitude code of the apex

(E/W)
+n

Repeat for the number of

apexes plus two lines


END

Fixed character string

(position end)
When importing, attributes that are not specified here are imported with specific attributes.

9-37

Reference

j) Text
Line
m
+1
+2

+3

Contents

Examples, etc.

Import

// (Space)

Fixed character string

TEXT

Fixed character string

// (Space)

Fixed character string

Comment

Fixed character string

Lat

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Fixed character

Fixed character

Lon

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Rotation

Fixed character string

TEXT

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Text

Fast current. Caution.

+4

Comments

Comments

+5

Latitude degree value of the

35

Fixed character

Latitude minute value of the

35.123

apex

apex
,

Fixed character

Latitude code of the apex (N/S)

Fixed character

Longitude degree value of the

139

Fixed character

Longitude minute value of the

48.234

Fixed character

Longitude code of the apex

Fixed character

Rotation angle

123

Fixed character

Font size

14

apex

apex

(E/W)

When importing, attributes that are not specified here are imported with specific attributes.

Reference

9-38

9.5.3.3 Logbook File


Line
1

Contents

Examples, etc.

Import

// (Space)

Fixed character string

LOGBOOK SHEET exported by

Fixed character string

// (Space)

Fixed character string

<<NOTE>>This strings //

Variable length character

indicate comment column/cells.

string

JRC ECDIS.
2

You can edit freely.


3

No

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Date

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Time

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Fixed character

Fixed character

Event

Fixed character string

Fixed character

POS1

Fixed character string

Fixed character

POS2

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Lat

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Fixed character

Fixed character

Lon

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Fixed character

Fixed character

COG ()

Fixed character string

Fixed character

SOG (kt)

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Heading ()

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Log (kt)

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Av.Speed 4h (kt)

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Av.Speed 24h (kt)

Fixed character string

Fixed character

9-39

ECDIS

Reference

Logbook File (continued)


Line

Contents

Examples, etc.

Voyage Dist. (G)(nm)

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Voyage Dist. (W)(nm)

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Charts

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Set ()

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Drift (kt),

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Wind Dir. (),

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Wind Speed (m/sec)

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Wave Height (m)

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Air Press (hPa)

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Temp. (C)

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Water Temp. (C)

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Engine Rev. (r/min)

Fixed character string

Fixed character

Comment

Fixed character string

Number

0001

,
Date (LMT)

2002/04/09

Time (LMT)

08:45:24

Fixed character

Time zone

09:00

Fixed character

Time zone code (E/W)

,
Event type

Specified time

,
POS1 name
POS2 name

GPS1

GPS2

Reference

Import

9-40

Logbook File (continued)


Line

Contents
Latitude degree value for POS1

Examples, etc.
35

,
Latitude minute value for POS1

35.123

,
Latitude code for POS1 (N/S)

Longitude degree value for


POS1
,

139

Longitude minute value for


POS1
,

48.234

Longitude code for POS1 (E/W)

123.4

12.3

,
Bow heading

123.5

,
Ship speed relative to water

12.4

Average ship speed for last four


hours
,

12.0

Average ship speed for last 24


hours
,

13.2

Total distance relative to land

12345.5

,
Total distance relative to water

12300.6
JP34OBJ

Set

123.4

12.4

234.5

10.3

,
Wave height

Wind speed

Chart name that caused the


event
,

Wind direction

ECDIS

Drift

Ship speed relative to land

Course relative to land

Import

2.0

9-41

Reference

Logbook File (continued)


Line

Contents
Atmospheric pressure

Examples, etc.
1003

,
Air temperature

23.4

,
Water temperature

20.3

,
Engine revolutions

135.6

,
Comments
n

Comments

Repeat four lines for the number

Reference

of events.

Import

9-42

9.6 Display Symbols


Display Symbols on Manual Update

(1) Symbol Tab


Category

Method

Graphic

Circle

Triangle

Square
General
Diamond

Multiple Mark

Warning

Manual Updates

Delete Symbol

Anchor Point

Anchor Area
Anchor
Anchor Berth

Anchor Prohibited Area

Light flare, default

ECDIS

Light flare, red

Buoys

Barrel buoy

Light flare, green

Light flare, white/yellow

without light

9-43

Reference

(1) Symbol Tab - continued


Category

Method
Light flare, default

Light flare, red

Can buoy

Light flare, green

Light flare, white/yellow

without light

Light flare, default

Light flare, red

Conical buoy

Light flare, green

Light flare, white/yellow

without light
Buoys
Light flare, default

Light flare, red

Installation buoy

Light flare, green

Light flare, white/yellow

without light

Light flare, default

Light flare, red

Mooring buoy, barrel shape

Light flare, green

Light flare, white/yellow

without light

Reference

9-44

Graphic

(1) Symbol Tab - continued


Category

Method

Graphic

Light flare, default

Light flare, red

Mooring buoy, can shape

Light flare, green

Light flare, white/yellow

without light

Light flare, default

Light flare, red

Cone point up

Light flare, green

Light flare, white/yellow

without light
Buoys
Light flare, default

Light flare, red

Pillar buoy

Cone point
down

Light flare, green

Light flare, white/yellow

ECDIS

without light

Light flare, default

Light flare, red


2cones point
upward

Light flare, green

Light flare, white/yellow

without light

9-45

Reference

(1) Symbol Tab - continued


Category

Method
Light flare, default

Light flare, red


2cones point
downward

Light flare, green

Light flare, white/yellow

without light

Light flare, default

Light flare, red


2cones base
to base

Light flare, green

Light flare, white/yellow

without light
Buoys

Pillar buoy
Light flare, default

Light flare, red


2cones point
to point

Light flare, green

Light flare, white/yellow

without light

Light flare, default

Light flare, red

Sphere

Light flare, green

Light flare, white/yellow

without light

Reference

9-46

Graphic

(1) Symbol Tab - continued


Category

Method

Graphic

Light flare, default

Light flare, red

2 sphere

Light flare, green

Light flare, white/yellow

without light

Light flare, default

Light flare, red

Cylinder

Light flare, green

Light flare, white/yellow

without light
Buoys

Pillar buoy
Light flare, default

Light flare, red

Board

Light flare, green

Light flare, white/yellow

ECDIS

without light

Light flare, default

Light flare, red

Cube point up

Light flare, green

Light flare, white/yellow

without light

9-47

Reference

(1) Symbol Tab - continued


Category

Method
Light flare, default

Light flare, red


Flag or other
shape

Light flare, green

Light flare, white/yellow

without light

Light flare, default

Light flare, red

Pillar buoy

T-shape

Light flare, green

Light flare, white/yellow

without light
Buoys
Light flare, default

Light flare, red

X-shape

Light flare, green

Light flare, white/yellow

without light

Light flare, default

Light flare, red

Spherical buoy

Light flare, green

Light flare, white/yellow

without light

Reference

9-48

Graphic

(1) Symbol Tab - continued


Category

Method

Graphic

Light flare, default

Light flare, red

Spar buoy

Light flare, green

Light flare, white/yellow

without light

Light flare, default

Light flare, red

Buoys

Super-buoy

Light flare, green

Light flare, white/yellow

without light

Light flare, default

Light flare, red

LANBY, super-buoy

Light flare, green

Light flare, white/yellow


ECDIS

without light

Light flare, default

Light flare, red

Lights float

Light float

Light flare, green

Light flare, white/yellow

without light

9-49

Reference

(1) Symbol Tab - continued


Category

Method
Light flare, default

Light flare, red

Lights float

Light vessel

Light flare, green

Light flare, white/yellow

without light

Beacon in general

Cone point up

Cone point down

2cones point upward

2cones point downward

2cones base to base

2cones point to point

Sphere

Beacons

Beacon in general

2 sphere

Cylinder

Board

Cube point up

X-shape

Upright cross

Beacon point down

Beacon point up

T-shape

Reference

9-50

Graphic

(1) Symbol Tab - continued


Category

Method

Graphic

Lattice beacon

Lattice beacon

Cone point up

Cone point down

2cones point upward

2cones point downward

2cones base to base


Lattice beacon
2cones point to point

Sphere

2 sphere

Beacon tower

Cone point up
Beacons
Cone point down

2cones point upward

2cones point downward

ECDIS

2cones base to base

Beacon tower

2cones point to point

Sphere

Cylinder

Board

Cube point up

X-shape

Upright cross

9-51

Reference

(1) Symbol Tab - continued


Category

Method
Beacon point down

Beacon point up

T-shape

2 sphere

Cylinder

Board
Beacons

Beacon tower
Cube point up

X-shape

Upright cross

Beacon point down

Beacon point up

T-shape

Berth number
Ferry area
Cable ferry area
Fortified structure

Conspicuous fortified structure

Fish trap, fish weir, tunny net


Fish stakes
Ports and Harbors
Fishing harbor
Fish farm
RoRo terminal
Mooring dolphin

Deviation mooring dolphin

Pile or bollard
Yacht harbor, marina

Reference

9-52

Graphic

(1) Symbol Tab - continued


Category

Method

Graphic

Airport

Opening bridge
Buildings
Built-up area

Non-conspicuous religious building, Christian

Conspicuous religious building, Christian


Non-conspicuous religious building, on-Christian
Conspicuous religious building, non-Christian

Minaret

Conspicuous minaret

Single building

Conspicuous single building

Cairn

Conspicuous cairn

Buildings

Chimney
ECDIS

Conspicuous chimney

Cranes

Dome

Conspicuous dome

Dish aerial

Conspicuous dish aerial

Flagstaff ,flagpole

Flare stack

9-53

Reference

(1) Symbol Tab - continued


Category

Method
Conspicuous flare stack

Hulk

Monument

Conspicuous monument

Mast

Conspicuous mast

Mine, quarry

Quarry

Refinery

Conspicuous refinery

Silo

Buildings

Conspicuous silo

Timber yard

Tank

Conspicuous tank

Tank farm

Conspicuous tank farm

Tower

Conspicuous tower

Water tower

Conspicuous water tower

Radio, television tower

Conspicuous radio, television tower

Reference

9-54

Graphic

(1) Symbol Tab - continued


Category

Method

Graphic

Wind-motor

Conspicuous wind-motor

Wind generator farm


Buildings
Conspicuous wind generator farm

Windmill

Conspicuous windmill

Navigable lock gate

Artificial Feature

Non-navigable lock gate

Offshore platform

Coastguard station

Rescue station
Miscellaneous Station
Pilot station

Signal station

Mariner's information note


Caution

ECDIS

Mariner's caution note

Underwater hazard with a defined depth

Dangerous

Underwater hazard with depth greater than 20


meters
Hazard on the surface
Isolated danger of depth less than the safety
contour
Obstructions, depth not stated

Obstructions

Obstructions in the intertidal area

Obstructions
Obstructions in the water which is always above
water level

9-55

Reference

(1) Symbol Tab - continued


Category

Method
Dangerous underwater rock of uncertain depth
Rock which covers and uncovers or is awash at low
water

Obstructions

Wreck showing any portion of hull or superstructure


at level of chart datum
Non-dangerous wreck, depth unknown

Dangerous wreck, depth unknown

Direction of buoyage
Direction and color of buoyage for approaching
harbor in IALA region A(red to port)
Direction and color of buoyage for approaching
harbor in IALA region B(green to port)
Fairway with one-way traffic in direction indicated

Fairway with two-way traffic

Inshore traffic
Recommended traffic direction between parts of a
traffic separation scheme, or for ships not needing a
deep water route
Recommended two-way track as an area, based on
Routes

fixed marks
Recommended one-way track as an area, based on
fixed marks
Traffic roundabout
Reciprocal traffic directions in a two-way route of a
traffic separation scheme
Single traffic directions in a two-way route of a traffic
separation scheme
Traffic crossing area

Part of deep water route


Reciprocal traffic directions in a two-way part of a
deep-water route
Traffic direction in a one way lane of a traffic
separation scheme

Restricted Area

Reference

Prohibited or restricted area

9-56

Graphic

(1) Symbol Tab - continued


Category

Method

Graphic

Fishing ground

Fishing Ground

Fish haven

Fishing or trawling is prohibited or restricted

Radio calling-in point for traffic in one direction only

Radio calling-in point for traffic in both directions

Radio station
Rader transponder beacon

Radio/Rader

Rader conspicuous

Rader reflector

Rader scanner

Conspicuous radar scanner

Rader reflector

Fog signal

Fog signal

Magnetic anomaly at a point

ECDIS

Magnetic anomaly along a line or over an area


Local Magnetic anomaly
Magnetic variation at a point

Magnetic variation along a line or over an area


Hill or mountain top
Conspicuous hill or mountain top

Cable area
Natural Feature/Seabed

Foul area of seabed safe for navigation but not for


anchoring
Sand waves
Spring
Weed, kelp

Unknown

? Mark

9-57

Reference

(2) Line Tab


Category

Method

Symbol

Simple Line
General

Arc
warning Line

Manual Updates

Deletion by a manual updates


Boundary of an anchorage area

Anchor

Boundary of area where anchoring is prohibited or


restricted
Ferry route

Ferry Routes
Cable ferry route
Ports and Harbors

Fishing stakes

Caution

Boundary of area with a specific caution


Boundary of area to be navigated with caution
Two-way deep water route centerline, based on fixed
marks
One-way deep water route centerline, based on fixed
marks
Boundary of deep water route
Regulated two-way recommended route centerline,

Routes

based on fixed marks


Regulated one-way recommended route centerline,
based on fixed marks
Non-Regulated two-way recommended track, based
on fixed marks
Non-Regulated one-way recommended track, based
on fixed marks
Boundary of an area where enter is prohibited or

Restricted Area

restricted
Boundary of a restricted area

Administrated Area
Fishing Ground

Jurisdiction boundary
Boundary of an area where trawling or fishing is
prohibited or restricted
Boundary of a submarine cable area
Submarine cable

Cable/Pipe
Oil, gas pipeline, submerged or on land
Water pipeline, sewer, etc.

Reference

9-58

(2) Line Tab (continued)


Category

Method

Symbol

Boundary between IALA-A and IALA-B systems of


lateral buoys and beacons
Boundary of a navigation feature such as a fairway,
magnetic anomaly, etc.
Miscellaneous
Boundary

Boundary of a submarine pipeline with potentially


dangerous contents
Boundary of a submarine pipeline with potentially
non-dangerous contents
Change of depth unit line, bounds 'fathom depths'
Change of depth unit line, bounds 'meter depths'

Unknown

? Mark

(3) Area Tab


Category

Method

Symbol

Polygon

Circle

(Area)

ECDIS

Ellipse

Fan

Warning Area

(4) Text Tab


Category

Method

Symbol

Small font
(Text)
Large font

9-59

Reference

9.7 Set value list when starting ECDIS


The following description is list of set when starting Navigation & Planning.
(1) Display Panel
No.
1

Category
Own Ship Information

Contents

Set when starting

HDG

Value input from sensor

STW

Value input from sensor

COG

Value input from sensor

SOG

Value input from sensor

Time

Value input from sensor

Position

Value input from sensor

CTS

Value input from sensor

Vector

Value input from sensor

Depth

Value input from sensor

10

RADAR (Display ON/OFF)

OFF

11

TT1 (Display ON/OFF)

OFF

12

TT2 (Display ON/OFF)

OFF

13

AIS (Display ON/OFF)

OFF

14

Association (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

Ring (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

Sector (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

Auto Sail Mode

NotRDY

18

Course change Mode

(blank)

19

Sailing Status

(blank)

15

Other Ship Information Setting

AIS Filter

16
17

Auto Sail Status

20

Steer mode

(blank)

Route

UNLOAD

22

To WPT

(blank)

23

DIST

****.*

24

BRG

***.*

DEST (WPT)

26

DEST (Distance)

****.*

27

SPD (Actual/CALC)

Actual

28

SPD (Speed)

**.*

29

TTG

*****:**:**

30

ETA

**_** **:**

21

25

Route Watch

Route Information - CALC

Reference

9-60

Set value list when starting ECDIS - Display Panel (continued)


No.
31

Category
Route Information - CALC

Contents
Set

Set when starting


Calculated by the difference between the
COG and HDG vectors

32

Drift

Calculated by the difference between the


COG and HDG vectors

33

Final ETA

**_** **:**

Total DIST

***.*

To/Next

To

36

WPT No.

*******

37

Comment

(blank)

38

LAT

** **.***'*

39

LON

*** **.***'*

Route Information - Route

34
35

Route Information - WPT

40

Chart information

Chart Type

The value when ending last time

41

Chart information

Display Category

The value when ending last time

42

(S-57/C-MAP2/C-MAP3)

Scale/Range

The value when ending last time

43

Scale

The value when ending last time

44

Range

The value when ending last time

45

Motion Mode

The value when ending last time

46

Azimuth Mode

The value when ending last time

47

Rotation degree

The value when ending last time

Select Chart

The value when ending last time

Motion Mode

The value when ending last time

EBL1 (Display ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

51

EBL1 (Active/Inactive

The value when ending last time

52

EBL1 (Azimuth T/R)

The value when ending last time

53

EBL1 (Base Point Mode)

The value when ending last time

54

VRM1 (Display ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

55

VRM1 (Active/Inactive

The value when ending last time

56

VRM1 (Units of Distance)

The value when ending last time

57

EBL2 (Display ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

58

EBL2 (Active/Inactive

The value when ending last time

59

EBL2 (Azimuth T/R)

The value when ending last time

60

EBL2 (Base Point Mode)

The value when ending last time

61

VRM2 (Display ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

62

VRM2 (Active/Inactive

The value when ending last time

63

VRM2 (Units of Distance)

The value when ending last time

48

Chart information (ARCS)

49
50

64

Tools (EBL/VRM)

PANEL

The value when ending last time

65

VID

The value when ending last time

66

TGT

The value when ending last time

67

Day-Night level

The value when ending last time

Azimuth T/R

T (True North mode)

Unit of Distance

NM

68

Brilliance

Cursor position

69
70

TCS Bar

Unit of Distance

The value when ending last time

71

Running Fix (Context Menu)

(Display Running Fix)

Removed

9-61

ECDIS

Reference

(2) Menu setting


No.
1

Category

Contents

Set when starting

TT1

(ON/OFF)

OFF

TT2

(ON/OFF)

OFF

AIS

(ON/OFF)

OFF

All

(ON/OFF)

OFF

Deactive All AIS

All List

Not Display

AIS/TT

Select List

Not Display

Target Track

Target Track Function

The value when ending last time

Target Track Setting

Target Memory Interval

The value when ending last time

10

Clear Track Color

The value when ending last time

11

Clear Track Number

The value when ending last time

Color - All

The value when ending last time

Color - Target Track No.1

The value when ending last time

Color - Target Track No.2

The value when ending last time

15

Color - Target Track No.3

The value when ending last time

16

Color - Target Track No.4

The value when ending last time

17

Color - Target Track No.5

The value when ending last time

18

Color - Target Track No.6

The value when ending last time

19

Color - Target Track No.7

The value when ending last time

20

Color - Target Track No.8

The value when ending last time

21

Color - Target Track No.9

The value when ending last time

22

Color - Target Track No.10

The value when ending last time

23

Color - Other

The value when ending last time

24

Display - All

The value when ending last time

25

Display - Target Track No.1

The value when ending last time

26

Display - Target Track No.2

The value when ending last time

27

Display - Target Track No.3

The value when ending last time

28

Display - Target Track No.4

The value when ending last time

29

Display - Target Track No.5

The value when ending last time

30

Display - Target Track No.6

The value when ending last time

31

Display - Target Track No.7

The value when ending last time

32

Display - Target Track No.8

The value when ending last time

33

Display - Target Track No.9

The value when ending last time

34

Display - Target Track No.10

The value when ending last time

35

Display - Other

The value when ending last time

12

Target Track
Target Track Setting

13

"Target Track Color &

14

Display"

36

Target Track - File Operation

Target Track Display

37

Own Ship's AIS Data

All Contents

38

Message

Addressed Message
39

Message

Broadcast Message

Reference

9-62

Value input from sensor

Set value list when starting ECDIS - Setting Menu (continued)


No.
40

Category
AIS/TT

Contents

Set when starting

AIS Sentence - VDM1

41

AIS Sentence - TTD1

42

AIS Sentence - TTD2

43

AIS/TT Setting

Display TT Vector

The value when ending last time

44

AIS/TT Past Position

The value when ending last time

45

Target Number - AIS

The value when ending last time

46

Target Number - TT

The value when ending last time

47

AIS Filter - Ring (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

48

AIS Filter - Ring (Range)

The value when ending last time

49

AIS Filter - Sector (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

50

AIS Filter - Sector (Angle)

The value when ending last time

51

Filter Mode

The value when ending last time

52

Filter Display

The value when ending last time

53

CPA

The value when ending last time

54

TCPA

The value when ending last time

55

AIS Lost Alarm

The value when ending last time

56

AIS CPA/TCPA Alarm

The value when ending last time

Association

The value when ending last time

Association Setting

57
58

Synchronized with TTD

The value when ending last time

59

Priority

The value when ending last time

60

Bearing

The value when ending last time

61

Range

The value when ending last time

62

Course

The value when ending last time

63

Speed

The value when ending last time

Start (Normal

To Waypoint

The value when ending last time

Start (TCS)

To Waypoint

The value when ending last time

66

Pre Run Speed

Value of STW

67

Pre Run Time

The value when ending last time

68

Enter Angle

The value when ending last time

69

Turn Rate

The value when ending last time

70

Pre Run Distance

The value when ending last time

71

XTD MAX

The value when ending last time

64
65

Auto Sail

ECDIS

72

Setting (Type 1)

Turning Gain

The value when ending last time

73

Setting (Type 2)

XTD MAX

The value when ending last time

74

Drift Correction

The value when ending last time

75

Dead Band ON/OFF

The value when ending last time

76

Dead Band

The value when ending last time

77

Auto Stop

The value when ending last time

78

Setting (Type 3)

Track Gain

The value when ending last time

79

Drift Correction

The value when ending last time

80

Dead Band ON/OFF

The value when ending last time

81

Dead Band

The value when ending last time

9-63

Reference

Set value list when starting ECDIS - Setting Menu (continued)


No.
82

Category
Route

Route Planning

Contents

Set when starting

Table Editor
83

Route Planning
Graphic Editor

84

Create Alternate Route

Cannot be selected

85

Distance Measurement

Cannot be selected

86

From

Way Point

87

From - WPT No.

00

88

To

Way Point

89

To - WPT No.

00

90

Use XTD Alarm

(ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

91

Setting

Date/Time for monitoring

The value when ending last time

Select Route

The value when ending last time

92

ETA (ON/OFF)
93

Default - Width Prt

The value when ending last time

94

Default - Width Stb

The value when ending last time

95

Default - Arr Radius

The value when ending last time

96

Default - Speed

The value when ending last time

97

Default - Sail

The value when ending last time

98

Default - Turn Rate

The value when ending last time

99

Default - Turn Radius

The value when ending last time

100

Default - Time Zone

The value when ending last time

101

Max. Latitude

The value when ending last time

102

Tau Multiplier for Limit Check

The value when ending last time

103

Check Safety

The value when ending last time

in Editing (ON/OFF)
104

Route Type

The value when ending last time

105

Side Sign Color

The value when ending last time

106

Display Side Sign (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

107

Ownship/

Adjust - Cursor

108

Track

Adjust - Enter Position

LAT

Current Position of Own ship

LON

Current Position of Own ship

LAT

The value when ending last time

LON

The value when ending last time

Radius

The value when ending last time

109
110

Adjust - Enter Offset

111
Anchor Watch

112

Create Monitoring Circle

Reference

9-64

Set value list when starting ECDIS - Setting Menu (continued)


No.

Category

113

Ownship/

114

Track

Setting

115

Contents

Set when starting

Ship's Name

The value when ending last time

Own Ship Symbol

The value when ending last time

Display Heading Line

The value when ending last time

(ON/OFF)
116

Display Beam Line (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

117

Vector

The value when ending last time

118

Vector

Display Over the Ground


The value when ending last time

Display Through the water


119

Vector - Vector Time

The value when ending last time

120

Vector - Display Vector Time

The value when ending last time

Mark (ON/OFF)
121

Vector - Display Vector Time

The value when ending last time

Mark (Interval Time)


122

Track - Display Past Track

The value when ending last time

(ON/OFF)
123

Track - Color

The value when ending last time

124

Track - Track Period

The value when ending last time

125

Track - Past POSN

The value when ending last time

126

Track - Display Time Label

The value when ending last time

(ON/OFF)
127

Track - Interval

The value when ending last time

128

Danger Detection - Display

The value when ending last time

Vector Area (ON/OFF)


129

Danger Detection - Display

The value when ending last time

Sector Area (ON/OFF)


Danger Detection

130

Set Alarm Limit


131

User Map

See "Main - Setting

- Alarm
ECDIS

Setting"

Selecting User Map

Unselected

132

Select User Map

133

Unselect User Map

134

User Map Editor

Marking/Highlighting

LAT

Current Position of Own ship

LON

Current Position of Own ship

137

MIN Scale

1:100,000,000

138

MAX Scale

1:1000

139

ID

Automatically set

140

Time

Current Time (UTC)

141

Comment

(blank)

LAT

Current Position of Own ship

LON

Current Position of Own ship

144

MIN Scale

1:100,000,000

145

MAX Scale

1:1000

146

Comment

(blank)

135
136

142
143

Chart

Event Mark

Marking/Highlighting
Information Mark

9-65

Reference

Set value list when starting ECDIS - Setting Menu (continued)


No.
147

Category
Marking/Highlighting

Contents

Set when starting

LAT

Current Position of Own ship

LON

Current Position of Own ship

149

MIN Scale

1:100,000,000

150

MAX Scale

1:1000

151

Set/Drift/Time

Actual

Chart

Tidal Stream Mark

148

(Actual/Redirected)
152

Set/Drift/Time (Direction)

000

153

Set/Drift/Time (Speed)

0.0

154

Set/Drift/Time (Time)

Current Time (UTC)

155

Comment

(blank)

156

Marking/Highlighting

LAT/LON

(blank)

157

Highlight

MIN Scale

1:100,000,000

MAX Scale

1:1000

LAT

Current Position of

158
159

Marking/Highlighting
Delete Event mark
Off Center - Enter Position

160

chart displaying center


LON

161

Current Position of
chart displaying center

162

Off Center - Home

163

User Setting

Name

(blank)

Save My Port List


164

User Setting - My Port List

165

User Setting

Name

(blank)

Save Chart Setting


166

User Setting
Chart Setting List

167

Select S-57 Chart

168

Fix View

(ON/OFF)

OFF

169

Accept S-57 Updates

170

Graphical Index

Display ENC Data (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

Display Chart Name

The value when ending last time

171

(ON/OFF)
172

Chart Boundary - Overview

The value when ending last time

(ON/OFF)
173

Chart Boundary - General

174

Chart Boundary - Coastal

The value when ending last time

(ON/OFF)
The value when ending last time

(ON/OFF)
175

Chart Boundary - Approach

The value when ending last time

(ON/OFF)
176

Chart Boundary - Harbor

177

Chart Boundary - Berthing

The value when ending last time

(ON/OFF)
(ON/OFF)

Reference

9-66

The value when ending last time

Set value list when starting ECDIS - Setting Menu (continued)


No.
178
179

Category
Chart

Contents

Set when starting

Manual Update

Multi View

Single View

Single View

Top Bottom
Right Top View
Left Top View
Right Bottom View
Left Bottom View
180

Select Area

181

Wide Range View (ON/OFF)

OFF

182

Chart Portfolio - Create

183

Chart Portfolio - Top Window

184

Chart Abbreviation

185

ARCS

(Setting Offset)

The value when ending last time

187

LAT

The value when ending last time

188

LON

The value when ending last time

Temporary and Preliminary


186

ARCS - Adjust Datum Offset

189

ARCS

Geodetic Datum - From

(blank)

190

Datum Transformation

Reference Position - LAT

0 00.000N

Reference Position - LON

0 00.000E

Display Category

The value when ending last time

Area Boundary

The value when ending last time

Depth Alarm

The value when ending last time

191
192
193
194

Setting - S-57/C-MAP/ARCS
(View Common)

Shallow Contour
195

Depth Alarm - Safety Contour

The value when ending last time

196

Depth Alarm - Safety Depth

The value when ending last time

197

Depth Alarm - Deep Contour

The value when ending last time

198

Depth Alarm

The value when ending last time

Two color Depth (ON/OFF)


199

Depth Alarm

The value when ending last time

Shallow Pattern (ON/OFF)


200

Depth Alarm - Show Isolated

The value when ending last time

Danger In Shallow Water


(ON/OFF)
201

Redraw - Border Range

The value when ending last time

202

Redraw - Margin

The value when ending last time

203

Chart Symbol

The value when ending last time

204

Chart Symbol - Full Light

The value when ending last time

Line(ON/OFF)
205

Chart Symbol Consider

The value when ending last time

Scale Minimum (ON/OFF)


206

C-MAP Ed.3 Database

The value when ending last time

(Display and ON/OFF setting)

9-67

Reference

ECDIS

Set value list when starting ECDIS - Setting Menu (continued)


No.
207

Category
Chart

Setting - S-57/C-MAP/ARCS
(View 1)

208
209

Setting - S-57/C-MAP/ARCS
(View 1) (Layer)

210

Contents

Set when starting

Type

The value when ending last time

Text Size

The value when ending last time

[S]unknown object

The value when ending last time

(S-57 or C-MAP Ed.2)


[S]Land region,

The value when ending last time

Sea area/named water area


211

[S]Causeway, Dam, Dyke,

The value when ending last time

Gate
212

[S]Dyke, Slope topline,

The value when ending last time

Airport, Bulding, single,


Crane, Landmark,
Built-up area
213

[S]Swept area

The value when ending last time

214

[S]Sand wave, Tunnel, Cable,

The value when ending last time

Submarine
215

[S]Navigation line

The value when ending last time

216

[S]Recommended track

The value when ending last time

217

[S]Ferry route

The value when ending last time

218

[S]Radar range, Radar line

The value when ending last time

219

[S]Restricted area

The value when ending last time

220

[S]Ferry route, Military


practice

area,

The value when ending last time

Offshore

production area
221

[S]Caution area, Fairway

The value when ending last time

222

[S]Fishing ground, Marine

The value when ending last time

farm/culture
223

[S]Anchorage area, Anchor

The value when ending last time

berth
224

[S]Cable area, Pipeline area

The value when ending last time

225

[S]Dumping ground, Cargo

The value when ending last time

transshipment area,
Incineration area
226

[S]Daymark

The value when ending last time

227

[S]Navigational system mark

The value when ending last time

228

[S]topmarks

The value when ending last time

(S-57 or C-MAP Ed.2)


229

[S]light

The value when ending last time

(S-57 or C-MAP Ed.2)


230

[S]Fog signal, Retro-reflector,

The value when ending last time

Radar transponder beacon,


Radar reflector
231

[S]Pilot boarding place, Signal


station, Trafic, Signal
station, Warning

Reference

9-68

The value when ending last time

Set value list when starting ECDIS - Setting Menu (continued)


No.
232
233

Category
Chart

Contents

Set when starting

Setting - S-57/C-MAP/ARCS

[O]Quality of data

The value when ending last time

(View 1) (Layer)

[O]Nautical publication

The value when ending last time

information
234

[O]Coverage, Compilation

The value when ending last time

scale of data
235

[O]Local magnetic anomary,

The value when ending last time

Magnetic variation
236

[O]Sloping ground, Land

The value when ending last time

elevation, Slope topline


237

[O]Vegetation, Lake, Rapids,

The value when ending last time

River, Water fall, Tideway


238

[O]Building, Fortified

The value when ending last time

structure, Land mark,


Silo/Tank, Airport, Road,
Railway
239

[O]Check point, Harbour

The value when ending last time

facility
240

[O]Distance mark

241

[O]Berch,

Crane,

The value when ending last time


Drydock,

The value when ending last time

Mooring/Warping facility, Gate


242

[O]Sounding

The value when ending last time

243

[O]Depth area, Depth counter

The value when ending last time

244

[O]Water turbulance, Tide...,

The value when ending last time

Current-non-gravitational
245

[O]Seabed area, Weed/Kelp,

The value when ending last time

Spring
246

[O]Fishing-facility

The value when ending last time

247

[O]Obstruction, Wreck,

The value when ending last time

Underwater/Awash rock
248

[O]Cable, Submarine,

The value when ending last time

Pipeline, Submarine/on land


249

[O]Continental shelf area

The value when ending last time

250

[O]Custom zone, Free port

The value when ending last time

area, Harbour area


251

[O]Fishery zone

The value when ending last time

252

[O]Administration area,

The value when ending last time

Contiguous zone, Exclusive


economic zone
253

[O]Radar station, Radio

The value when ending last time

station, Coastguard station,


Rescure station
254

[-]Updated Objects

The value when ending last time

(S-57 Only)

9-69

Reference

ECDIS

Set value list when starting ECDIS - Setting Menu (continued)


No.
255

Category
Chart

Contents

Setting - S-57/C-MAP/ARCS

Important text

(View 1)

(Vertical Clearance bridge,

(Text)
256

Set when starting


The value when ending last time

overhead cable, so on)


Other text

The value when ending last time

(Name of building so on)


(C-MAP Ed.3 only)
257

Name/Number of: buoys,

The value when ending last time

beacons, so on
(S-57 or C-MAP Ed.2)
258
259

Light description

The value when ending last time

Note on chart data or nautical

The value when ending last time

publication
260

Nature of seabed

The value when ending last time

(S-57 or C-MAP Ed.2)


261

Geographic names

The value when ending last time

262

Value of: magnetic variation,

The value when ending last time

swept depth
(S-57 or C-MAP Ed.2)
263

Height of islet or land feature

The value when ending last time

(S-57 or C-MAP Ed.2)


264

Berth number

The value when ending last time

(S-57 or C-MAP Ed.2)


265
Setting - S-57/C-MAP/ARCS

266

(View 2)

267

Setting - S-57/C-MAP/ARCS

268

(View 2)
(Layer)

269

National language

The value when ending last time

Type

The value when ending last time

Text Size

The value when ending last time

[S]unknown object

The value when ending last time

(S-57 or C-MAP Ed.2)


[S]Land reagion, Sea

The value when ending last time

area/named water area


270

[S]Causeway, Dam, Dyke,

The value when ending last time

Gate
271

[S]Dyke, Slope topline,

The value when ending last time

Airport, Bulding, single,


Crane, Landmark,
Built-up area
272

[S]Swept area

The value when ending last time

273

[S]Sand wave, Tunnel, Cable,

The value when ending last time

Submarine
274

[S]Navigation line

The value when ending last time

275

[S]Recommended track

The value when ending last time

276

[S]Ferry route

The value when ending last time

277

[S]Radar range, Radar line

The value when ending last time

278

[S]Restricted area

The value when ending last time

Reference

9-70

Set value list when starting ECDIS - Setting Menu (continued)


No.
279

Category
Chart

Setting - S-57/C-MAP/ARCS

Contents
[S]Ferry route, Military

(View 2)

practice area, Offshore

(Layer)

production area

Set when starting


The value when ending last time

280

[S]Caution area, Fairway

The value when ending last time

281

[S]Fishing ground, Marine

The value when ending last time

282

[S]Anchorage area, Anchor

farm/culture
The value when ending last time

berth
283

[S]Cable area, Pipeline area

The value when ending last time

284

[S]Dumping ground, Cargo

The value when ending last time

transshipment area,
Incineration area
285

[S]Daymark

The value when ending last time

286

[S]Navigational system mark

The value when ending last time

287

[S]topmarks

The value when ending last time

(S-57 or C-MAP Ed.2)


288

[S]light

The value when ending last time

(S-57 or C-MAP Ed.2)


289

[S]Fog signal, Retro-reflector,

The value when ending last time

Radar transponder beacon,


Radar reflector
290

[S]Pilot boarding place, Signal

The value when ending last time

station, Trafic, Signal


station, Warning
291

[O]Quality of data

The value when ending last time

292

[O]Nautical publication

The value when ending last time

information
293

[O]Coverage, Compilation

The value when ending last time

scale of data
294

[O]Local magnetic anomary,

295

[O]Sloping ground, Land

The value when ending last time

Magnetic variation
The value when ending last time

elevation, Slope topline


296

[O]Vegetation, Lake, Rapids,

The value when ending last time

River, Water fall, Tideway


297

[O]Building, Fortified

The value when ending last time

structure, Land mark,


Silo/Tank, Airport, Road,
Railway
298

[O]Check point, Harbor

The value when ending last time

facility
299

[O]Distance mark

The value when ending last time

300

[O]Berch, Crane, Drydock,

The value when ending last time

Mooring/Warping facility,
Gate
301

[O]Sounding

9-71

The value when ending last time

Reference

ECDIS

Set value list when starting ECDIS - Setting Menu (continued)


No.
302

Category
Chart

303

Contents

Set when starting

Setting - S-57/C-MAP/ARCS

[O]Depth area, Depth counter

The value when ending last time

(View 2)

[O]Water turbulance, Tide...,

The value when ending last time

(Layer)

Current-non-gravitational

304

[O]Seabed area, Weed/Kelp,

The value when ending last time

Spring
305

[O]Fishing-facility

The value when ending last time

306

[O]Obstruction, Wreck,

The value when ending last time

Underwater/Awash rock
307

[O]Cable, Submarine,

The value when ending last time

Pipeline, Submarine/on land


308

[O]Continental shelf area

The value when ending last time

309

[O]Custom zone, Free port

The value when ending last time

310

[O]Fishery zone

The value when ending last time

311

[O]Administration area,

The value when ending last time

area, Harbour area

Contiguous zone, Exclusive


economic zone
312

[O]Radar station, Radio

The value when ending last time

station, Coastguard station,


Rescure station
[-]Updated Objects

313

The value when ending last time

(S-57 Only)
314

Setting - S-57/C-MAP/ARCS

Important text

(View 2)

(Vertical Clearance bridge,

(Text)
315

The value when ending last time

overhead cable, so on)


Other text

The value when ending last time

(Name of building so on)


(C-MAP Ed.3 only)
316

Name/Number of: buoys,

The value when ending last time

beacons, so on
(S-57 or C-MAP Ed.2)
317

Light description

The value when ending last time

318

Note on chart data or nautical

The value when ending last time

publication
319

Nature of seabed

The value when ending last time

(S-57 or C-MAP Ed.2)


320

Geographic names

The value when ending last time

321

Value of: magnetic variation,

The value when ending last time

swept depth
(S-57 or C-MAP Ed.2)
322

Height of islet or land feature

The value when ending last time

(S-57 or C-MAP Ed.2)


323

Berth number

The value when ending last time

(S-57 or C-MAP Ed.2)


National language

324

Reference

9-72

The value when ending last time

Set value list when starting ECDIS - Setting Menu (continued)


No.
325

Category
Chart

Setting - Other Chart

Contents
Mariner's Mark/Line -

Set when starting


The value when ending last time

Clearing Line (ON/OFF)


326

Mariner's Mark/Line

The value when ending last time

Tidal Stream (ON/OFF)


327

Mariner's Mark/Line

328

Mariner's Mark/Line

The value when ending last time

Highlighting (ON/OFF)
The value when ending last time

Event Mark (ON/OFF)


329

Mariner's Mark/Line

The value when ending last time

Reference Point (ON/OFF)


330

Mariner's Mark/Line

331

Mariner's Mark/Line

The value when ending last time

Information (ON/OFF)
The value when ending last time

Navtex Mark (ON/OFF)


332

User Chart

The value when ending last time

Symbol (ON/OFF)
333

User Chart - Line

The value when ending last time

Simple Line, Warning Line


(ON/OFF)
334

User Chart Line Arc

The value when ending last time

(ON/OFF)
335

User Chart - Area - Polygon,

The value when ending last time

Warning Area (ON/OFF)


336

User Chart - Area

The value when ending last time

Circle (ON/OFF)
337

User Chart - Area

The value when ending last time

Ellipse (ON/OFF)
338

User Chart Area

The value when ending last time

Fan (ON/OFF)
339
340

Main

User Chart - Text (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

(Displaying EBL Maneuver)

Removed

341

Reach

600

342

Turn Mode

Radius

343

Turn Set - Radius

0.5

344

Turn Set - Rate

30.0

(Displaying Cross Bearing)

Removed

346

LAT

Current Position of Own ship

347

LON

Current Position of Own ship

348

Bearing

180

349

Distance

The value depended on the scale

345

EBL Maneuver

Cross Bearing

350
351

Create Clearing Line

True/Reverse

The value when ending last time

(Displaying Clearing Line)

Displaying

(Displaying Clearing Line)

Displaying

Not Less Than


352

Create Clearing Line


Not More Than

9-73

Reference

ECDIS

Set value list when starting ECDIS - Setting Menu (continued)


No.
353

Category
Main

LOP - Create LOP

Contents

Set when starting

(Displaying LOP)

Removed

354

Latitude

Current Position of Own ship

355

Longitude

Current Position of Own ship

356

Type (Select Bearing/Range)

The value when ending last time

357

Type (Angle)

0.0

358

Type (Distance)

The value depended on the scale

359

Time

Current Time (LMT)

LOP - Delete All LOP

361

Print

362

Save Screen

363

Logbook (Filter)

Logbook Setting

See "Main - Setting -

360

Logbook Setting"
364

Date (ON/OFF)

ON (Fixed Display)

365

Time (ON/OFF)

ON (Fixed Display)

366

Event (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

367

POSN1 (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

368

POSN2 (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

369

Latitude (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

370

Longitude (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

371

COG() (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

372

SOG(kn) (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

373

HDG() (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

374

STW(kn) (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

375

Av.Speed 4h(kn) (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

376

Av.Speed 24h(kn) (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

377

Voyage DIST(G)(NM)

The value when ending last time

378

Voyage DIST(W)(NM)

Logbook (Column Setting)

(ON/OFF)
The value when ending last time

(ON/OFF)
379

Charts (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

380

Set() (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

381

Drift(kn) (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

382

Wind Dir() (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

383

Wind Speed(m/sec)

The value when ending last time

(ON/OFF)
384

Wave Dir() (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

385

Wave Height(m) (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

386

Air Press(hPa) (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

387

Temp( C) (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

388

Water Temp( C) (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

389

Engine Rev(rpm) (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

390

Comment (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

391

(The Order of Display)

The value when ending last time

Reference

9-74

Set value list when starting ECDIS - Setting Menu (continued)


No.
392

Category
Main

Logbook (View Navtex)

Contents
Marking on the Chart
(ON/OFF)

393

Expire Date (ON/OFF)

Set when starting


The value when ending last time
(Setting Each Navtex)
The value when ending last time
(Setting Each Navtex)

394

Expire Date (Date)

The value when ending last time

395

(Navtex Position)

The value when ending last time

(Setting Each Navtex)


(Setting Each Navtex)
396

Logbook (Delete Navtex)

Deleted Range

Selected Message

(Selected Message/Before
specified date/All Message)
397

Before specified date (Date)

Current Date (UTC)

398

Logbook (View REF Point)

399

Logbook (Export)

Export Range (Selected

Selected Message

Message/ From - To)


400

From (Date)

Current Date (UTC)

401

To (Date)

Current Date (UTC)

402

Save As - Filename

LOGBOOK.csv

403

Save As - Folder

ECDIS_DATATMP

Print Range (Selected

Selected Message

404

Logbook (Print)

Message/ From - To)


405

From (Date)

Current Date (UTC)

406

To (Date)

Current Date (UTC)

407

Logbook (Jump)

408

Logbook (Input)

Wind Dir.

The value when ending last time


(Setting Each Log)

409

Wind Speed

The value when ending last time


ECDIS

(Setting Each Log)


410

Wave Dir.

The value when ending last time


(Setting Each Log)

411

Wave Height

The value when ending last time


(Setting Each Log)

412

Air Press

The value when ending last time


(Setting Each Log)

413

Air Temp

The value when ending last time


(Setting Each Log)

414

Water Temp

The value when ending last time


(Setting Each Log)

415

Engine Rev.

The value when ending last time


(Setting Each Log)

416

Comment

The value when ending last time


(Setting Each Log)

9-75

Reference

Set value list when starting ECDIS - Setting Menu (continued)


No.
417

Category
Main

Multi Window

Contents

418

Analog Meter

419

Climate

420

Draft

421

Current Wind

422

Course Rudder Graph

423

Course Bar

424

Ship

425

Engine Graph

426

Depth Graph

427

Current

428

DIR/DIST EXP Display

429

Numeric NAV INFO

430

Wind Graph

431

TEMP Graph Setting

432

Preset Save

433

Option

434

Rader Overlay - Radar 1

Set when starting

Preset
-

(ON/OFF)

OFF

435

Rader Overlay - Radar 2

(ON/OFF)

OFF

436

Rader Overlay

(ON/OFF)

OFF

IR(Interference Rejection)

The value when ending last time

439

Gain Adjust

The value when ending last time

440

Sea Adjust

The value when ending last time

441

Semi Auto/Manual

The value when ending last time

442

Rain Adjust

The value when ending last time

443

Auto/Manual

The value when ending last time

444

Video

The value when ending last time

Acquisition Zone 1

OFF

Range Rings
437

Rader Overlay
Bearing Scale

438

Rader Overlay - Option

445

Make AZ

AZ Function (ON/OFF)
446

Acquisition Zone 1 MAKE

447

Acquisition Zone 1

OFF

AZ 1 (Make mode ON/OFF)


The value when ending last time

Start Side:
448

Acquisition Zone 1 - End Side:

The value when ending last time

449

Acquisition Zone 1

The value when ending last time

Far Edge:
450

Acquisition Zone 1 - Width:

The value when ending last time

451

Acquisition Zone 2

OFF

AZ Function (ON/OFF)
452

Acquisition Zone 2 MAKE


AZ 2 (Make mode ON/OFF)

Reference

9-76

OFF

Set value list when starting ECDIS - Setting Menu (continued)


No.
453

Category
Main

Make AZ

Contents
Acquisition Zone 2

Set when starting


The value when ending last time

Start Side:
454

Acquisition Zone 2 - End Side:

The value when ending last time

455

Acquisition Zone 2

The value when ending last time

Far Edge:
456
457

File Manager

Acquisition Zone 2 - Width:

The value when ending last time

Type

Route File

458

Device (Left Side)

Local Disk

459

Device (Right Side)

Local Disk

460

Test - Alarm Log

(Display Tab)

The value when ending last time

461

Test - System Information

Type

Fixed Value

462

Display Unit

Fixed Value

463

Maintenance No.

Fixed Value

464

TCS

Fixed Value

Operating Time - Display

The value depended on the

Operating Time - HDD1

The value depended on the

465

Test - Operating Time

system
466

system
467

Operating Time - HDD2

The value depended on the


system

468

Sensor

Heading - Port (Use SRB/Use

The value when ending last time

Local Port/Manual)
469

Heading - Source

The value when ending last time

470

Heading - GYRO Setting

The value when ending last time

471

Heading - Manual (Heading)

The value when ending last time

472

STW - Port (Use SRB/Use

The value when ending last time

Local Port/Manual)
473

STW - Source

The value when ending last time

474

STW - Manual (STW)

The value when ending last time

475

POSN1 - Port (Use SRB/Use

The value when ending last time

Local Port)
476

POSN1 - Source

The value when ending last time

477

POSN2 - Port (Use SRB/Use

The value when ending last time

Local Port)
478

POSN2 - Source

The value when ending last time

479

Date - Source

The value when ending last time

480

Time Zone - Source

The value when ending last time

481

Date/Time Setting

See "Main - Setting Date/Time Setting"

482

Code Input

9-77

Reference

ECDIS

Set value list when starting ECDIS - Setting Menu (continued)


No.
483

Category
Main

Setting - Color and Brilliance


Setting

484

Contents
Day/Night

Set when starting


The value when ending last time

Color - User Dialog

The value when ending last time

485

Color - Character

The value when ending last time

486

Color - Target Symbol

The value when ending last time

487

Brilliance - User Dialog

The value when ending last time

488

Brilliance - Character

The value when ending last time

489

Brilliance - Target Symbol

The value when ending last time

Option1

The value when ending last time

491

Option2

The value when ending last time

492

User

The value when ending last time

Manual - LMT Date

Current Date (LMT)

Setting - Option Key Setting

490

493

Setting - Date/Time Setting

494

Manual - LMT Time

Current Time (LMT)

495

Manual - Time Zone

The value when ending last time

496

UTC/LMT

The value when ending last time

497

Display Style

The value when ending last time

Distance Unit Simultaneity

The value when ending last time

499

EBL/VRM Step

The value when ending last time

500

Cursor Read Out

The value when ending last time

Logging - At Noon (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

Logging - Every ** minutes

The value when ending last time

Setting - Marker Setting

498

Setting - Logbook Setting

501
502

(ON/OFF)
503

Logging - Every ** minutes

The value when ending last time

(select time)
504

Logging - Route Alarm

The value when ending last time

(ON/OFF)
505

Logging - Chart Alarm

The value when ending last time

(ON/OFF)
506

Logging - Navtex (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

507

Logging - When press

The value when ending last time

(ON/OFF)
508

Logging - AUTO Sail/Sensors

The value when ending last time

(ON/OFF)
509

Logging - Others (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

510

View - At Noon (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

511

View - Specified Period

The value when ending last time

(ON/OFF)
512

View - Route Alarm (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

513

View - Chart Alarm (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

514

View - Navtex (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

515

View - When press

The value when ending last time

(ON/OFF)
516

View - AUTO Sail/Sensors

The value when ending last time

(ON/OFF)
517

View - Others (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

518

View - Latest display days

The value when ending last time

Reference

9-78

Set value list when starting ECDIS - Setting Menu (continued)


No.
519

Category

Contents

Set when starting

Setting - Logbook Setting

Station - Filtering (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

(Navtex Setting)

Station - A (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

521

Station - B (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

522

Station - C (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

523

Station - D (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

524

Station - E (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

525

Station - F (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

526

Station - G (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

527

Station - H (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

528

Station - I (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

529

Station - J (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

530

Station - K (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

531

Station - L (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

532

Station - M (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

533

Station - N (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

534

Station - O (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

535

Station - P (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

536

Station - Q (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

537

Station - R (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

538

Station - S (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

539

Station - T (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

540

Station - U (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

541

Station - V (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

542

Station - W (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

543

Station - X (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

544

Station - Y (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

545

Station - Z (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

546

Message - Filtering (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

547

Message - A (ON/OFF)

ON (Fixed Display)

548

Message - B (ON/OFF)

ON (Fixed Display)

549

Message - C (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

550

Message - D (ON/OFF)

ON (Fixed Display)

551

Message - E (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

552

Message - F (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

553

Message - G (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

554

Message - H (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

555

Message - I (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

556

Message - J (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

557

Message - K (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

558

Message - L (ON/OFF)

ON (Fixed Display)

559

Message - V (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

560

Message - W (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

561

Message - X (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

520

Main

9-79

Reference

ECDIS

Set value list when starting ECDIS - Setting Menu (continued)


No.
562

Category
Main

563

Set when starting

Message - Y (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

(Navtex Setting)

Message - Z (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

Month/Year

The value when ending last time

564
565

Contents

Setting - Logbook Setting

Setting - Voyage Distance


Clear

566

Setting - Display Panel

Display CTS (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

567

Option

Display DEPTH (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

Analog Meter - Display HDG

The value when ending last time

568

(ON/OFF)
569

Analog Meter - Display COG

The value when ending last time

(ON/OFF)
570

Analog Meter - Display Drift

The value when ending last time

(ON/OFF)
571

Analog Meter - Display CTS

The value when ending last time

(ON/OFF)
Analog Meter - Display

572

The value when ending last time

Indicator (ON/OFF)
573

Setting - Alarm Setting

Difference between POSN1

(Limit)

and POSN2 (ON/OFF)

574

Difference between POSN1

The value when ending last time


The value when ending last time

and POSN2 (Distance)


575

Shift of POSN1 (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

576

Shift of POSN1 (Distance)

The value when ending last time

577

Off Course (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

578

Off Course (Bearing)

The value when ending last time

579

Arrival Last WPT (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

580

Arrival Last WPT (Time)

The value when ending last time

581

Timer (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

582

Timer (Time)

The value when ending last time

583

Vector (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

584

Vector (Length)

The value when ending last time

585

Vector (Length - Units)

The value when ending last time

586

Vector (Width)

The value when ending last time

587

Sector (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

588

Sector (Radius)

The value when ending last time

589

Sector (Radius - Units)

The value when ending last time

590

Sector (Width)

The value when ending last time

591

Setting - Alarm Setting

Traffic Separation Zone

The value when ending last time

592

(Area)

Traffic Crossing

The value when ending last time

593

Traffic Roundabout

The value when ending last time

594

Traffic Precautionary

The value when ending last time

595

Two Way Traffic

The value when ending last time

596

Deeper Water Route

The value when ending last time

597

Recommended Traffic Lane

The value when ending last time

Reference

9-80

Set value list when starting ECDIS - Setting Menu (continued)


No.
598

Category

Contents

Set when starting

Setting - Alarm Setting

Inshore Traffic Zone

The value when ending last time

(Area)

Fairway

The value when ending last time

600

Restricted Area

The value when ending last time

601

Caution Area

The value when ending last time

602

Offshore Production Area

The value when ending last time

603

Military Practice Area

The value when ending last time

604

Seaplane Landing Area

The value when ending last time

605

Submarine Transit Area

The value when ending last time

606

Ice Area

The value when ending last time

607

Channel

The value when ending last time

608

Fishing Ground

The value when ending last time

609

Fishing Prohibited

The value when ending last time

610

Pipeline Area

The value when ending last time

611

Cable Area

The value when ending last time

612

Anchorage Area

The value when ending last time

613

Anchorage Prohibited

The value when ending last time

614

Spoil Ground

The value when ending last time

615

Dumping Ground

The value when ending last time

616

Dredge Area

The value when ending last time

617

Cargo Transshipment Area

The value when ending last time

618

Incineration Area

The value when ending last time

619

Specially Protected Area

The value when ending last time

System Alarm

The value when ending last time

621

Operation Miss

The value when ending last time

622

Key Ack

The value when ending last time

623

Setting Alarm

The value when ending last time

624

Navigation Alarm - High

The value when ending last time

625

Navigation Alarm - Mid

The value when ending last time

Navigation Alarm - Low

The value when ending last time

Select Device

(blank)

Select Port

Local

Binary (ON/OFF)

OFF

Main

599

Setting - Buzzer Setting

620

626
627

Servicem

628

an

Line Monitor

629
630

Installation - Installation

Date

The value when ending last time

631

Information

Company

The value when ending last time

Name

The value when ending last time

Length

The value when ending last time

634

Beam

The value when ending last time

635

GPS1 (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

636

GPS1 (X)

The value when ending last time

637

GPS1 (Y)

The value when ending last time

638

GPS2 (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

639

GPS2 (X)

The value when ending last time

640

GPS2 (Y)

The value when ending last time

632
633

Installation - CCRP Setting

9-81

Reference

ECDIS

Set value list when starting ECDIS - Setting Menu (continued)


No.

Category

640

Servicem

641

an

Contents

Set when starting

GPS3 (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

GPS3 (X)

The value when ending last time

642

GPS3 (Y)

The value when ending last time

643

GPS4 (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

644

GPS4 (X)

The value when ending last time

645

GPS4 (Y)

The value when ending last time

646

Radar Anntena1 (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

647

Radar Anntena1 (X)

The value when ending last time

648

Radar Anntena1 (Y)

The value when ending last time

649

Radar Anntena2 (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

650

Radar Anntena2 (X)

The value when ending last time

651

Radar Anntena2 (Y)

The value when ending last time

652

Radar Anntena3 (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

653

Radar Anntena3 (X)

The value when ending last time

654

Radar Anntena3 (Y)

The value when ending last time

655

Radar Anntena4 (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

656

Radar Anntena4 (X)

The value when ending last time

657

Radar Anntena4 (Y)

The value when ending last time

658

Radar Anntena5 (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

659

Radar Anntena5 (X)

The value when ending last time

660

Radar Anntena5 (Y)

The value when ending last time

661

Radar Anntena6 (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

662

Radar Anntena6 (X)

The value when ending last time

663

Radar Anntena6 (Y)

The value when ending last time

664

Radar Anntena7 (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

665

Radar Anntena7 (X)

The value when ending last time

666

Radar Anntena7 (Y)

The value when ending last time

667

Radar Anntena8 (ON/OFF)

The value when ending last time

668

Radar Anntena8 (X)

The value when ending last time

669

Radar Anntena8 (Y)

The value when ending last time

670

CCRP1 (X)

The value when ending last time

671

CCRP1 (Y)

The value when ending last time

672

CCRP2 (X)

The value when ending last time

673

CCRP2 (Y)

The value when ending last time

674

CCRP3 (X)

The value when ending last time

675

CCRP3 (Y)

The value when ending last time

676

CCRP4 (X)

The value when ending last time

677

CCRP4 (Y)

The value when ending last time

678

CCRP (select point)

The value when ending last time

Installation - CCRP Setting

679

Reference

9-82

Set value list when starting ECDIS - Setting Menu (continued)


No.

Category

680

Servicem

681

an

Ship's parameter

Contents

Set when starting

Length

The value when ending last time

Beam

The value when ending last time

682

Maximum Course Change

The value when ending last time

683

Maximum Speed Limit

The value when ending last time

684

Minimum Speed Limit

The value when ending last time

685

Maximum ROT

The value when ending last time

686

Minimum ROT

The value when ending last time

Reach Offset

The value when ending last time

Safety / Limit Check

The value when ending last time

687

TCS Maintenance

688

(ON/OFF)
689
690

Radar Initial Setup

Time / Distance to WPT

The value when ending last time

Signal Processing - Echo

The value when ending last time

Noise Level
691

Signal Processing - Setting

The value when ending last time

Mode
692

MBS - MBS Level

The value when ending last time

693

MBS - MBS Area

The value when ending last time

694

Data Backup/Restore Backup

695

Data Backup/Restore Restore

ECDIS

9-83

Reference

Reference

9-84

10
Maintenance
and
Inspection

10-1

Never attempt to check or repair the inside of the equipment.


Checking or repair by an unqualified person may cause a fire or an electric
shock.
Contact our head office, or a nearby branch or local office to request servicing.

If checking of the equipment is unavoidably necessary, be sure to turn off


the power before starting checking.
Otherwise, a fire or a malfunction may occur.
If a fan alarm or CPU temperature rise alarm has occurred, immediately
turn off the power.
Keeping the equipment in operation may cause a fire or a malfunction.
After turning off the power, contact our head office, or a nearby branch or
local office to request servicing.

Notes:
Do not rub the surface of the LCD strongly with a dry cloth. Do not use benzene, alcohol, gasoline,
thinner, and the like for cleaning the LCD. Use of those items will cause the LCD surface to be
damaged and deteriorated. Be sure to use a soft cloth for wiping dirt off the surface of the tube
lightly.
To clean the surface of the equipment, do not use any organic solvent such as thinner or

benzene, as this may deteriorate the surface coating.


Use a clean, dry cloth to wipe off dirt and dust thoroughly from the surface of the
equipment.

10 Maintenance and Inspection

10-2

10.1 Confirming Alarm


If a HARD alarm occurs, a hardware failure has been detected in this system.
Perform the following confirmation procedure:

The ECDIS Unit:


(1)
Confirmation procedure
1) Display the alarm list and read the detailed
information.
(For how to display the alarm list, see 3.3.7 How to Release the Alarm ([ALARM ACK]).)
2) After reading the detailed information displayed in red, immediately perform the shutdown
process to turn off the power.
3) Ask the JRC sales representative or our local office for repair, reporting the alarm information.

(2) Explanation of hardware alarm messages


Fan(CPU)

: The CPU fan has been stopped. (Repair needed)

CPU High TEMP.

: The CPU temperature has risen too high. (Repair needed)

Fan(Main PWR)

: The power supply unit (CBD-1627) fan has been stopped. (Repair
needed)

Fan(ATX PWR)

: The ATX power supply unit fan has been stopped. (Repair

Fan(LCD)

: The monitor fan of the display panels chassis (CWB-1210) has

needed)
been stopped. (Repair needed)
DISK1 Error

: Hard disk 1 has failed. (Repair needed)

DISK2 Error

: Hard disk 2 has failed. (Repair needed)

ECDIS

10-3

10 Maintenance and Inspection

10.2 Daily Maintenance


The service life of the unit is greatly affected by how well it is maintained and inspected during daily
maintenance. To ensure that the unit is kept in optimum condition, we recommend that you inspect it
daily. This also prevents the unit from malfunctioning.
Inspect the unit according to the items indicated in the table below.

Maintenance and Inspection Method


No.
1

Item
Cleaning

Inspection Item
Wipe off any dirt from the monitor display lightly with a soft, dry cloth.
Wipe off any dirt on the main unit case lightly with a dry cloth.

In

particular, wipe air vents carefully with a brush to improve air circulation.
2

Inspection

Turn the [BRILLIANCE] knob CW on the monitor to make sure that the
brightness of the monitor increases.
Turn the [BRILLIANCE] knob CCW on the monitor to make sure that
the brightness of the monitor increases.
Make sure that the trackball operates smoothly.
Press the [EBL] and [VRM] dials on the operation panel to make sure
that dials operate smoothly.
Press the [PANEL] key on the operation panel to make sure that the
lighting on the panel changes correctly.
Select [Color Pattern] to display the color test pattern, and adjust the
brightness/contrast. Also make sure that the necessary colors come
out on the monitor.
Select [Gray Scale] to display the gray scale pattern, and make sure that
the gray scale is displayed correctly.

10 Maintenance and Inspection

10-4

10.2.1 Color Pattern (S-57)


The color test pattern for the S-57 charts will be displayed.
1) Select the Color Pattern in the startup menu.
The color pattern becomes activated.
[Startup Menu]

[Color Pattern]

The color pattern can be displayed using any of the five color tables.
This color pattern is intended:
(a) For use by the mariner to check and if necessary re-adjust the brilliance and contrast
controls, particularly for use at night.
(b) For use by the mariner to satisfy himself that an again ECDIS CRT remains capable of
providing the necessary color differentiation.
(c) For initial color verification of the day-black-background, dusk and night color table.
2) Right-click to see the context menu.

ECDIS

Day Bright:

A day-time color pattern will be displayed.

Day Whiteback: A relatively bright color pattern will be displayed.


Day Blackback:

A color pattern against a black background will be displayed.

Dusk:

A relatively dark color pattern will be displayed.

Night:

A night-time color pattern will be displayed.

Exit:

Exit the color pattern display and return to the startup menu.

3) Left-click on [Exit] from the context menu to exit the color pattern.

10-5

10 Maintenance and Inspection

10.2.2 Gray Scale


A gray scale pattern is displayed to check the brightness adjustment of the monitor.
Optimum brightness of the monitor can be obtained by adjusting the brightness so that the gray scale
pattern can be viewed clearly. The brightness of the monitor in the nighttime can also be optimally
adjusted in the same way.
1) Select the Gray Scale in the startup menu.
The gray scale becomes activated.
[Startup Menu]

[Gray Scale]

2) Left-click anywhere on the gray scale to exit the gray scale. The startup menu will start up.

10.3 Replacing Consumables


The hard disk, UPS battery and LCD backlight used in this system have a limited service life, so that they
should better be replaced periodically.
The expected service lives of these parts if the system is used constantly are as follows:
Number

Part

Hard disk

UPS battery

Nominal life
Two years
Three years

Remarks
When the power supply is on constantly.
When the power supply is on constantly.

If the

system is not used for long periods and battery


charging/discharging is repeated, then the nominal life
may be shorter.
3

LCD backlight

Five years

Lithium battery

Five years

CPU fan

Four years

When the power supply is on constantly.


When the power supply is on constantly.

Please consult with the store, sales agent or our branch office, sales offices or outlets for replacing the
above parts.

10 Maintenance and Inspection

10-6

10.4

The PWR FAIL Lamp and Power Supply Input

When AC power supply is stopped due to a blackout or the like, nothing is displayed on the monitor, but
the display information is backed up for one minute. If AC power is not supplied when one minute has
passed, the system will automatically start the shutdown process to terminate all the functions.
The following table shows the relations between the PWR FAIL lamp states and alarm sound while AC
power is not being supplied:
Inboard Backup Power Supply (24 VDC)

PWR FAIL Lamp

Alarm Sound

Connected

Blinking *1

Yes *2

Not connected

No change

No

*1: Pressing the [PWR ACK] key changes the lamp state to lighted. The lamp goes off when AC
power is supplied.
*2: Pressing the [PWR ACK] key stops the alarm.

ECDIS

10-7

10 Maintenance and Inspection

10.5 User Maintenance Menu


When you left-click the [

] button on the startup menu and the following message is displayed, change

the setting of the user maintenance menu.

10.5.1 Displaying/Hiding the User Maintenance


Menu
(1) Method of Displaying the User Maintenance Menu
1) Move the cursor onto the startup menu. And right-click.

2) Password is required.

3) Input 0000 as the password. And left-click the [OK].

10 Maintenance and Inspection

10-8

4) The startup menu is expanded, and the user maintenance menu is displayed.

[<< Hide]
User maintenance menu is hidden.
[Disk Information/Backup]
Confirmation of Disk Information and
data can be backup.
[Hardware Key Information]
Hardware Key Information can be
confirmed.
[CD Cleaner]
DVD Drive can be cleaned with an
attached Cleaning CD.

(2) Method of Hiding the User Maintenance Menu


1) Left-click the [<< Hide].

ECDIS

2) The user maintenance menu is hidden.

10-9

10 Maintenance and Inspection

10.5.2 Disk Information


In this function, drive information and file information can be confirmed.

10.5.2.1 Drive Information


Total capacity and free space of System, Master and Backup disk are displayed.
1) Left-click the [Disk Information/Backup] in user maintenance menu.

Then, the "Disk Information" panel will appear.


2) Left-click the [Disk Information/Backup] tab.
3) Left-click the radio button of [Drive Information].
Then, the Drive Information is display.

System(C:)
Total: Total capacity of system
drive.
Free: Free space of system
drive.

Master(D:)
Total: Total capacity of master
drive.
Free: Free space of master
drive.

Backup(E:)
Total: Total capacity of Backup drive.
Free: Free space of Backup drive.

4) Left-click the [Cancel] to close the Disk Information panel.

10 Maintenance and Inspection

10-10

10.5.2.2 File Information


Volumes of Chart, Logging Data, and User files saved in the system are displayed.
1) Left-click the [Disk Information/Backup] in User Maintenance menu.

Then, the "Disk Information" panel will appear.


2) After left-clicking the [Disk Information] tab, Disk Information is display.

Chart:
Used space of each Chart

Logging Data:
Used space of each Logging Data

User Files:
Used space of each User Files

Master [MB]:

Backup [MB]:

Each used space of Master drive.

Each used space of Backup drive.


ECDIS

4) Left-click the [Cancel] to close the Disk Information panel.

10-11

10 Maintenance and Inspection

10.5.3 Setting HDD organization


In this function, HDD organization can be set.
1) Left-click [Disk Information/Backup] in User Maintenance menu.

2) After selecting Drive Organization" tab, HDD organization can be set.

Dual drive: Chart installed path is set


both D and E. The according chart path
is set D.
Master drive: Chart installed path and
according chart path is set D.
Chart installed path and
chart path is set E.

10 Maintenance and Inspection

10-12

according

10.5.4 Hardware Key Information


This function is useful for confirming User Permit No. and PIN No. And, information can be saved on the
floppy disk.
These information will be needed as purchasing ARCS chart and S-63 chart.

How to Confirming / Saving Hardware Key Information


1) Left-click [Hardware Key Information] in User Maintenance menu.

Then, the Hardware Key Information panel is display.

Each information is displayed


here.

[Close]
Close this panel.

[Save to FD]
Hardware key information can
be saved on the floppy disk.

ECDIS

2) Insert an empty disk into the floppy disk drive.


3) Left-click the [Save to FD]
Then, save to floppy disk is started.
Note:
Do not remove a floppy disk from the floppy disk drive when the access lamp is on.
4) When save is completed, left-click the [Close] to close the Hardware Key Information panel.

10-13

10 Maintenance and Inspection

10.5.5 CD Cleaner
This function is DVD drive can be cleaned with an attached Cleaning CD.
Note:
We recommend cleaning DVD Drive every month at least, otherwise system might be unable to
read Chart CD correctly, and fail to import/Update charts.

How to Cleaning the DVD Drive


1) Cleaning CD is set in the DVD Drive.
2) Left-click [CD Cleaner] in User Maintenance menu.

When be displayed the following message, try to set Cleaning CD.

3) The following message is displayed, and the cleaning starts.


The cleaning stops when the message is close.

4) Left-click the [OK] to close the message and stop cleaning.

10 Maintenance and Inspection

10-14

10.6 Recovery by Image File

Execute the system restoration by Recovery Boot CD after understanding


working of reading Recovery Boot CD enough well.
When abnormality continues operating to the disk configuration, it might
cause the breakdown.
Do not restore the system with tools other than attached Recovery Boot CD. It
might cause the trouble and the breakdown of the equipment.
Use the Recovery Boot CD which is attached each device.
When using the Recovery Boot CD which is attached other device, it might
cause the trouble and the breakdown of the equipment.

The system file of JAN-701B/901B is saved on the flash disk. It becomes impossible to start
JAN-701B/901B normally when the system file on the flash disk is destroyed by some causes.
The following "Deployment procedure of the system image by Recovery Boot CD" is the method of the
return to the state when the system file is shipped in the factory was described.
The system that was not able to start normally can be restored and be started by this procedure.

Note
When the flash disk is physically out of order, it is not possible to restore it.
After the system is restored, it is not possible to start normally when the hard disk is out of order.
When an upgrade of software or an individual sensor setting is changed after the factory is shipped, all
those changes are deleted.
The setting of the sensor after the system is restored becomes set when the factory is shipped.

ECDIS

10-15

10 Maintenance and Inspection

Use of [Recovery Boot CD]


Deployment procedure of system image by Recovery Boot CD
Recovery Boot CD is distinguished old type for using old processing unit (NCM-860) and new type for
using new processing unit (NCM-860A). Each recovery Boot CD is printed as follows.

JMA-900B
JAN-701B/901B
Recovery Boot CD

JMA-900B
JAN-701B/901B
Recovery Boot CD
For
NCM-860A

H-7ZZNA4026

H-7ZZNA4105

Recovery Boot CD
For old processing unit (NCM-860)

Recovery Boot CD
For old processing unit (NCM-860A)

In case of using Recovery Boot CD for old processing unit; see 10.6.1 Recovery by Image file in

In case of using Recovery Boot CD for new processing unit; see 10.6.2 Recovery by Image file in

case of old processing unit (NCM-860).


case of new processing unit (NCM-860A).

10 Maintenance and Inspection

10-16

10.6.1 Recovery by Image file in case of old


processing unit (NCM-860)
(1) Turn on the power supply of JAN-701B/901B, and turn off the power supply after inserting the
boot disk [Recovery Boot CD] into the DVD drive.
(2) Confirm Disk information when the power supply of JAN-701B/901B is turned on, and the following
message is displayed.
--------------------------------------------------------Disk information
--------------------------------------------------------Disk:1 (1.90GB) M:[HAGIWARA SYS-COM NFD25-02GBI] S:[HSCI02G07Y0200000700]
1.1 (1.90GB)
Active Volume NTFS Primary
(2.95MB) Unused Space Primary
Disk:2 (76.69GB) M:[Hitachi HDS721680PLA380] S:[PVC200Z30GK6NJ]
2.1 (76.69GB)
Active Volume NTFS l:[Local Disk] Primary
( 2.46MB) Unused Space Primary
Disk:3 (76.69GB) M:[Hitachi HDS721680PLA380] S:[PVC200Z3S2W56J]
3.1 (76.69GB)
Active Volume NTFS l:[New Volume] Primary
( 2.46MB) Unused Space Primary
--------------------------------------------------------..
--------------------------------------------------------Recovery Boot CD
For JAN-701B/901B
ver.1.0
--------------------------------------------------------Restore Image file from CD to System Drive (Disk:1)
.
1) Remove Boot CD.
2) Insert CD-R "JAN-701B/901B Recovery Image" printed.
3) Wait for a few seconds.
4) Left-click to continue.....
Confirm the System disk construction below.
Disk1[HAGIWARA SYS-COM NFD25-02GBI]
Type of Flash Disk
Disk2[Hitachi HDS721680PLA380]
Type of Hard Disk
Disk3[Hitachi HDS721680PLA380]
ECDIS

Type of Hard Disk


The type of disk might be different depending on the shipping time. Confirm the content of
the composition becomes Disk1/2, and the Disk1 is flash disk.
Recovery Boot CD deploys [Recovery Image CD] with Disk1.

The flash disk and the hard disk will be subjected to change in the future. In that case,
the type of different from the above-mentioned is displayed.

The power supply is turned off pushing the power switch of JAN-701B/901B long when
the composition of Disk1/2 has reversed. Push the Ctrl+C key to the keyboard again
after the power supply is turned on, and the JRC logo is displayed.
Execute the following operation after confirming the Disk composition is restored.

When either or neither of Disk1/2 is displayed, the breakdown of the drive etc. are
thought. In that case, do not execute the following operation until the breakdown
etc. are resolved.

When abnormality continues operating to the disk configuration, all charts etc. of
the import settlement are deleted.
10-17

10 Maintenance and Inspection

(3) Push the eject button of the DVD drive, and eject the boot disk [Recovery Boot CD].
(4) Insert the [Recovery Image CD] into DVD drive.
(5) Wait for blinking LED of the DVD drive to stop, and click a left button of the mouse or the track ball.
(6) GHOST starts, and the copy of the system from [Recovery Image CD] to Flash Disk is begun on the
automatic operation.

(7) After the copy of the system is complete, the following messages are displayed.
Eject [Recovery Image CD] of the DVD drive, push the POWER switch of JAN-701B/901B
long, and turn off the power supply.
_______________________________________________________________________________
.
* Remove FD and CD-R.
* KEEP pressing [POWER] button until power off.
____
I
I
--+
+-
/

/
/
/
[ POWER ]
_______________________________________________________________________________

After turning on the power supply again, confirm that the system starts normally, and ends the
system recovery operation.

10 Maintenance and Inspection

10-18

10.6.2 Recovery by Image file in case of new


processing unit (NCM-860A)
(1) Turn on the power supply of JAN-701B/901B, and turn off the power supply after inserting the
boot disk [Recovery Boot CD] into the DVD drive.
(2) Turn on the power supply of JAN-701B/901B again, and then push the eject button of the DVD
drive, and eject the boot disk [Recovery Boot CD] after following message is displayed.
Under initialization. Please wait for a while.
The command completed successfully.
Microsoft (R) Windows Script host Version 5.7
Copyright (C) Microsoft Corporation. All right reserved.
--------------------------------------------------------Disk information
--------------------------------------------------------Disk:0(7685MB). [8GB SATA Flash Drive ATA Device]
Disk:1(152625MB). [Hitachi HDS721016CLA382 ATA Device]
Disk:2(152625MB). [Hitachi HDS721016CLA382 ATA Device]
..
--------------------------------------------------------Restore
JAN-701B/901B Recovery Boot
DVD Image file from DVD to System Drive(Disk:0)
1) Remove Boot DVD.
ver.1.0
2) Insert DVD-R JAN-701B/901B Recovery Image (For NCM-860A) printed.
--------------------------------------------------------3) Wait for a few seconds.
4) Click OK button to continue.
OK
Message
Confirm the System disk construction below.
Disk:0(7685MB). [8GB SATA Flash Drive ATA Device]
Type of Flash Disk
Disk:1(152625MB). [Hitachi HDS721016CLA382 ATA Device]
Type of Hard Disk
Disk:2(152625MB). [Hitachi HDS721016CLA382 ATA Device]
Type of Hard Disk
Recovery Boot CD deploys [Recovery Image CD] with Disk0.

The flash disk and the hard disk will be subjected to change in the future. In that case,
the type of different from the above-mentioned is displayed.

The power supply is turned off pushing the power switch of JAN-701B/901B long when
the composition of Disk0/1 has reversed. Push the Ctrl+R key to the keyboard again
after the power supply is turned on, and the JRC logo is displayed.
Execute the following operation after confirming the Disk composition is restored.

When either or neither of Disk1/2 is displayed, the breakdown of the drive etc. are
thought. In that case, do not execute the following operation until the breakdown
etc. are resolved.

When abnormality continues operating to the disk configuration, all charts etc. of
the import settlement are deleted.
10-19

10 Maintenance and Inspection

ECDIS

(3) Insert the [Recovery Image CD] into DVD drive.


(4) Wait for blinking LED of the DVD drive to stop, and left-click [OK] button.

Restore Image file from DVD to System Drive(Disk:0)


1) Remove Boot DVD.
2) Insert DVD-R JAN-701B/901B Recovery Image (For NCM-860A) printed.
3) Wait for a few seconds.
4) Click OK button to continue.
OK
(5) GHOST starts, and the copy of the system from [Recovery Image CD] to Flash Disk is begun on the
automatic operation.

(6) After the copy of the system is complete, the following messages are displayed.
Eject [Recovery Image CD] of the DVD drive, push the POWER switch of JAN-701B/901B
long, and turn off the power supply.
Disk:0(7685MB). [8GB SATA Flash Drive ATA Device]
Disk:1(152625MB). [Hitachi HDS721016CLA382 ATA Device]
Disk:2(152625MB). [Hitachi HDS721016CLA382 ATA Device]
..
--------------------------------------------------------JAN-701B/901B Recovery Boot DVD
ver.1.0
--------------------------------------------------------_______________________________________________________________________________
.
* Remove DVD-ROM.
* KEEP pressing [POWER] button until power off.
____
I
I
--+
+-
/

/
/
/
[ POWER ]
_______________________________________________________________________________
X:windowssystem32>
After turning on the power supply again, confirm that the system starts normally, and ends the
system recovery operation.
10 Maintenance and Inspection

10-20

10.7 Troubleshooting
If the unit is not working properly, check the following points and carry out the appropriate repair before
you ask for repair.
If the following remedies do not rectify the problem, or a location not mentioned in the following tables is
not in order, contact the nearest JRC office or agent, and ask for repair.
Trouble
Symptom
Power does not turn ON.

Cause

Remedy

The AC power is not ON.

Turn the AC power ON.

The breaker in the main unit

Turn the breaker ON. *

power supply is not ON.


When 220V input is being used,

Switch the input protective

the input protective circuit switch

circuit switch to AC 220V.

of the power supply is set to AC


110V.
AC power is not being input

Input AC power within the rated

within the rated range.

range.

The AC power cable is not

Call the JRC sales

connected to the main unit.

representative for repair.

Malfunction of main unit.

Call the JRC sales


representative for repair.

POWER FAIL lamp is lit.

DC power is not being supplied

Supply DC power from the

from the distribution board.

distribution board.

The AC voltage has dropped.

Input AC voltage within the rated


range.

The main unit has

Call the JRC sales

malfunctioned.

representative for repair.

Lift the lever to turn the breaker ON

ECDIS

Breaker
ON: Up
OFF: Down

10-21

10 Maintenance and Inspection

Trouble continued-Symptom
FAN alarm message is

Cause
The fan motor has stopped.

displayed on the LCD monitor.

Remedy
Immediately turn the power OFF,
and contact the nearest JRC
office or agent, and ask for
repair.

Nothing is displayed on screen.

The main unit has

Call the JRC sales

malfunctioned.

representative for repair.

The power switch is not ON.

Turn the power switch ON.

The monitor has malfunctioned.

Call the JRC sales


representative for repair.

Incorrect display

The display is shown out of

The video cable is not

Call the JRC sales

connected.

representative for repair.

The main unit has

Call the JRC sales

malfunctioned.

representative for repair.

The video cable is not

Call the JRC sales

connected. (terminal fault)

representative for repair.

The main unit has

Call the JRC sales

malfunctioned.

representative for repair.

The initial setup was faulty.

For JAN-701, keep the brilliance

place.

control pressed for a while. The


display will be adjusted
automatically.
For JAN-901M, press the
brilliance control. The display
will be adjusted automatically.

Radar echo is not displayed

The video cable is not

Call the JRC sales

correctly.

connected. (terminal fault)

representative for repair.

The connector cable is not

Call the JRC sales

connected to the radar.

representative for repair.

The main unit has

Call the JRC sales

malfunctioned.

representative for repair.

Chart Portfolio is working.

Stop Chart Portfolio.

Gyro compass is not displayed,

The initial setup has not been

Carry out the initial setup

and "GYRO" alarm is

carried out correctly.

correctly.

displayed.

The gyro compass is not ON.

Turn the gyro compass ON.

The connector cable is not

Check the connection between

connected to the gyro compass.

the gyro compass and main unit.

The ratio setting on the gyro

Set the ratio setting on the gyro

compass is incorrect.

compass correctly.

The polarities of the connector

Connect the cable at the correct

cable are incorrect.

polarities.

The main unit has

Call the JRC sales

malfunctioned.

representative for repair.

10 Maintenance and Inspection

10-22

Trouble continued-Symptom

Cause

Rudder angle is not displayed.

The rudder angle indicator is not

Turn the rudder angle indicator

Or, is not displayed correctly.

ON.

ON.

The ratio setting on the rudder

Set the ratio setting on the

angle is incorrect.

rudder angle.

The rudder angle indicator

Set the rudder angle indicator

setting is incorrect.

correctly.

The connector cable is not

Check the connection between

connected to the rudder angle

the rudder angle indicator and

indicator.

the main unit.

The main unit has

Call the JRC sales

malfunctioned.

representative for repair.

The log is not ON.

Turn the log ON.

The ratio setting on the log is

Set the ratio setting on the log

incorrect.

correctly.

The connector cable is not

Check the connection between

connected to the log.

the log and the main unit.

The main unit has

Call the JRC sales

malfunctioned.

representative for repair.

Data is not displayed, even

The analog data setup has not

Carry out the analog data setup

though the data below is input.

been set correctly.

correctly.

Relative wind direction and

The interface board is not ON.

Turn the interface board ON.

Air temperature

The connector cable is not

Check the connection between

Water temperature

connected to the interface

the interface board and the main

Pitch

board.

unit.

Roll

The main unit has

Call the JRC sales

CPP angle

malfunctioned.

representative for repair.

Position information (e.g. GPS,

The initial setup has not been

Carry out the initial setup

gyro) is not displayed.

carried out correctly.

correctly.

The navigation unit is not

Check the state of the navigation

measuring.

unit.

The navigation unit is not ON.

Turn the navigation unit ON.

The connector cable is not

Check the connection between

connected to the navigation unit.

the navigation unit and the main

Log is not displayed.

Remedy

wind speed

unit.
The main unit has

Call the JRC sales

malfunctioned.

representative for repair.

10-23

10 Maintenance and Inspection

ECDIS

Trouble continued-Symptom
ARPA is not displayed.

Cause

Remedy

The [ARPA] key is not pressed.

Press the [ARPA] key.

The ARPA setting is incorrect.

Set the ARPA setting correctly.

The radar is not turned ON.

Turn the radar ON.

The connector cable is not

Check the connection between

connected to the radar.

the radar and main unit.

The main unit has

Call the JRC sales

malfunctioned.

representative for repair.

Wind direction, wind speed

The digital wind direction and air

Turn the digital wind direction

(digital wind direction and air

speedometer are not ON.

and air speedometer ON.

speedometer) are not

The connector cables are not

Check the connection between

displayed.

connected to the digital wind

the digital wind direction and air

direction and air speedometer.

speedometer.

The main unit has

Call the JRC sales

malfunctioned.

representative for repair.

The depth sounder is not ON.

Turn the depth sounder ON.

The connector cable is not

Check the connection between

connected to the depth sounder.

the depth sounder and the main

UKC is not displayed.

unit.

Engine data from data logger

The main unit has

Call the JRC sales

malfunctioned.

representative for repair.

The data logger is not ON.

Turn the data logger ON.

The connector cable is not

Check the connection between

connected to the data logger.

the main unit and the data

and weather data are not


displayed.

logger.
The main unit has

Call the JRC sales

malfunctioned.

representative for repair.

Automatic sailing is not

The initial setup has not been

Carry out the initial setup

possible.

carried out correctly.

correctly.

Operation is not carried out

Carry out the correct operation

correctly.

referring to the Instruction


Manual.

10 Maintenance and Inspection

The autopilot is not ON.

Turn the autopilot ON.

The connector cable is not

Check the connection between

connected to the autopilot.

the autopilot and the main unit.

The main unit has

Call the JRC sales

malfunctioned.

representative for repair.

10-24

Trouble continued-Symptom

Cause

Remedy

The brightness does not

The lighting control circuit does

Call the JRC sales

change even if the

not work.

representative for repair.

[BRILLIANCE] knob is turned.

The cable is damaged.

Call the JRC sales


representative for repair.

The main unit has

Call the JRC sales

malfunctioned.

representative for repair.

None of the keys on the

The cursor is displayed as an

Wait until the hourglass returns

operation panel work.

hourglass.

to a cursor.

The operation panel circuit is

Call the JRC sales

malfunctioning.

representative for repair.

The main unit has

Call the JRC sales

malfunctioned.

representative for repair.

The trackball is dirty.

Clean the trackball.

The main unit has

Call the JRC sales

malfunctioned.

representative for repair.

The [EBL] and [VRM] dials do

The [EBL] and [VRM] dials are

Press the [EBL]/[VRM] keys.

not work even if turned. Or,

not ready for operation.

response is slow.

The knob is not secured to the

Use a hexagonal wrench to

shaft.

secure the knob to the shaft.

The main unit has

Call the JRC sales

malfunctioned.

representative for repair.

The [GAIN], [VIDEO] and

The [GAIN], [VIDEO] and

Press the [RADAR] key.

[SEA/RAIN] dials do not work

[SEA/RAIN] dials are not ready

even if turned. Or, response is

for operation.

slow.

The knob is not secured to the

Use a hexagonal wrench to

shaft.

secure the knob to the shaft.

The main unit has

Call the JRC sales

malfunctioned.

representative for repair.

Hard disk failure

See 13.5 User Maintenance

The trackball does not work.

When the [

] (Navigation &

Planning) button in the startup

Menu.

menu, the message Path is


incorrect or Master Drive is
failed is displayed.
The power was turned off

Chart index failure

Start Chart Portfolio, select

during ARCS index creation by

[Chart] - [ARCS] - [Regenerate

Chart Portfolio, and Navigation

Index] to create the chart index

& Planning cannot be started

again.

with an error message being


displayed.

10-25

10 Maintenance and Inspection

ECDIS

Trouble continued-Symptom

Cause

Remedy

Error code (0XFFFFFFA) is

Wrong authorization code was

Input the proper authorization

displayed in Chart Portfolio.

input.

code you obtained again.

Error code (0xFFFFFF73) is

Reading from CD-ROM was

Clean the CD-ROM, and

displayed while ARCS chart is

faulty.

perform the import procedure

imported in Chart Portfolio.

again. If the error persists, the


CD-ROM or CD-ROM drive may
be out of order.
Contact the distributor of the
chart to request for replacement
of CD-ROM, or contact the JRC
sales representative to request
repair of the CD-ROM drive.

When the [

] (Navigation &

Dongle (key lock device) is

Call the JRC sales

Planning) button is left-clicked

broken or the information of

representative for repair.

in the startup menu, the

Dongle and Software are not

message ECDIS License

matched.

Invalid is displayed.
ARCS chart is not displayed.

Chart is imported when the term

Register the latest Chart Permit

of validity of ARCS has expired.

within the expiration date, and

Chart Permit was registered

then import ARCS chart.

when the term of validity of


ARCS has expired.
PIN input was canceled when

Input PIN when starting

Navigation & Planning was

Navigation & Planning, and

started.

select ARCS chart. ([Menu] [Chart] - [Option] - [S57/C-MAP/


ARCS])

ARCS chart will not be

Chart Permit type was changed

Contact the retailer from whom

displayed, though it has been

from trial version to regular

ARCS was purchased to check

displayed normally by that time.

contract.

the details of the contract.

Details of contract were


changed.
Alarm occurs frequently while

ECDIS has detected the alarm

ARCS chart is displayed.

information regarding ARCS


chart itself and displayed the
alarm.

Check the details of the alarm.


See 10.2.1 Alarm Information of
ARCS Chart.

Error message

Index was not generated in

Re-generate Index in Chart

????Earcs.dll???? is

Chart Portfolio for such reasons

Portfolio. ([Chart] - [ARCS] -

displayed when Navigation &

as forced termination of this

[Regenerate Index])

Planning is started.

equipment during ARCS Index


generation.

10 Maintenance and Inspection

10-26

Trouble continued-Symptom

Cause

Remedy

eToken panel is displayed in Navigation &

It is an authentication

Planning or Chart Portfolio, and a password is

procedure when C-MAP

demanded.

security device (eToken)

Press Cancel button.

is accessed.

Message C-MAP Ed.3 : Key device (e-Token)

C-MAP security device

Press [POWER] to exit

not found is displayed in Navigation &

(eToken) was not

software and OS, and

Planning.

recognized.

then, press [POWER]


again to start ECDIS
again.
It is not necessary to
keep [POWER] pressed
to turn off the power.

Message System detected non response from

C-MAP security device

Press [POWER] to exit

security device (eToken),and needs to reboot.

(eToken) was not

software and OS, and

Please press [POWER] button shutdown. is

recognized.

then, press [POWER]

displayed in Chart Portfolio.

again to start ECDIS


again.
It is not necessary to
keep [POWER] pressed
to turn off the power.

Message Confirm CD type, and retry Auto

A CD is not inserted in

Insert the chart CD into

Detect. is displayed in Chart Portfolio.

the CD-ROM drive.

the CD-ROM drive.

The CD in the CD-ROM


drive is not a chart CD.
Message CD is not inserted, or this CD might

The path setting is

have errors. Confirm, or contact with your chart

wrong.

Set the path correctly.

provider. is displayed in Chart Portfolio.

10-27

10 Maintenance and Inspection

ECDIS

Trouble continued-Symptom

Cause

Remedy

On the Chart Portfolio

C-MAP

System detected non response from security

device (eToken) is not

security

finish

device (eToken), and needs to reboot.

accepted

OS.Re-start by pushing

Push POWER key to


software

Please press [POWER] button shutdown.

POWERKey

message is displayed

Dont

keep

and

pressing

POWER key

On the Chart Manager

DVD is not inserted into Insert DVD into DVD

No database found at specified location


message is displayed

DVD drive

On the Chart Manager

C-MAP security device Push POWER key to


(eToken) is not accepted finish
software
and

Key is not plugged inmessage is displayed

drive

OS.Re-start by pushing
POWERKey
Dont keep pressing
POWER key
C-MAP Ed.3 chart is not displayed.

The eToken license is

Register the latest valid

invalid.

eToken license and


import C-MAP Ed.3
chart. (See 10.2.2 Alarm
Information of C-MAP
Ed.3 Chart.)

10 Maintenance and Inspection

10-28

Trouble continued-Symptom

Cause

Remedy

C-MAP Ed.3 chart that used to be displayed is

The details of the

Ask your C-MAP Ed.3

no longer displayed.

license agreement have

distributor for the details.

been changed.
Startup Menu is in hang-up state.

C-MAP security device

Install C-MAP security

(eToken) is not installed.

device (eToken).

Message error (0xFFFFFFFA) or Error: Bad

Authorization code is

Enter the received autho-

Authorization Code or file format error is

wrong.

rization code again.

A chart list is not displayed with Chart Portfolio.

Selectable Filter is set.

Turn off Selectable Filter.

Message Insert another C-MAP Ed.2 CD. is

Selected zones are not

Select zones under

displayed in Chart Portfolio.

under contract.

contract, and import/

displayed in the log window of Chart Portfolio.

update data.

Message error (0x000000xx) is displayed in

See 10.2.3 Alarm

the log window of Chart Portfolio.

Information of S-57/S-63 Information of S-57/S-63


Chart.

10-29

See 10.2.3 Alarm


Chart.

10 Maintenance and Inspection

ECDIS

Trouble continued-Symptom

Cause

Remedy

Message There is no licensed chart. is

This CD does not contain

Insert the licensed CD

displayed in Chart Portfolio.

any licensed charts.

into the CD-ROM drive.

Message Warning SA public key supplied on

The selected SA Certifi-

Select the SA Certificate

the ENC media unmatches the pre-installed SA cate file is incorrect.

file relevant to the data

public key. is displayed in Chart Portfolio.

server.

Message Errors occurred in Decryption! Refer

Cell Permit is not

Import correct Cell

the log to check the detail. is displayed in

imported yet.

Permit.

Chart Portfolio.

Imported Cell Permit is


incorrect.
Cell Permit has been
deleted.
Cell Permit has already
expired.

10 Maintenance and Inspection

10-30

11
Operation of
Multi Window

11-1

11.1 Operation of Multi Window


11.1.1 Selecting Multi Window
Multi Window can be select in the following way. (This is optional function.)
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(8) Multi Window] and select to want to display more than the menu, the
supporting menu has a check mark and the panel is displayed.

Preset the multi window display condition:


The condition of the multi window can be saved and presented.
Save the multi window condition:
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(8) Multi Window] [(7) PreSet Save] in that order.
It maintains the display condition and the display position of the present multi window. When
doing the same operation once again from the menu, the display condition and the display
position maintain new one.
Preset the multi window condition:
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(8) Multi Window] [(1) PreSet] in that order.
It presets the display condition and the display position of the multi window to have maintained.

11 Operation of Multi Window

11-2

2) In the [Option1], [Option2] and [USER] key


Multi Window function can be assigned to the [Option1], [Option2] and [USER] key.
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(2) Option Key Setting] in that order.
The [Option Key] dialog box will be displayed.

Multi Window

After registering, push the assigned key.

USER

OPTION
1

11-3

OPTION
2

11 Operation of Multi Window

11.2 Configuration for Each Graph


Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(8) Multi Window] [(0) Setup...] in that order, and the Setup panel will be
displayed. Press a tab written the name of the block will change each display block setting.
Engineer can only set each data display On/Off by entering Password in Maintenance window.
These buttons are common buttons of the Setup panel.
[Exit] button:

Exit the Conning Display and display Startup screen.

[OK] button:

Accept settings and close Setup panel.

[Cancel] button: Cancel change setting and close Setup panel.

Click tab of setting block

11 Operation of Multi Window

11-4

11.2.1Course BarTab

Multi Window

[Range of Bar]: Setting angle range of course bar.

11.2.2ClimateTab

11-5

11 Operation of Multi Window

11.2.3Ship (Voyage)Tab

11.2.4Ship(Docking)Tab

[Speed Range at Docking]: Setting maximum of ship speed at Docking.

11 Operation of Multi Window

11-6

11.2.5Current/WindTab

Multi Window

11.2.6Depth GraphTab

[Graph Depth Range at Voyage]:


Setting depth range of Depth graph at Voyage.
[Graph Depth Range at Docking]:
Setting depth range of Depth graph at Docking.
[Graph Time Range]:
Setting time range of Depth graph.

11-7

11 Operation of Multi Window

11.2.7Engine GraphTab

[Graph Time Range]: Setting time range of engine graph.


[Upper RPM]:

Setting upper rpm range of engine graph.

[Lower RPM]:

Setting lower rpm range of engine graph.

11.2.8Gyro/RudderTab

[Graph Time Range]: Setting time range of course rudder graph.


[Rudder Range]:

11 Operation of Multi Window

Setting rudder angle range of course rudder graph.

11-8

11.2.9DraftTab

Multi Window

11.2.10CurrentTab

11-9

11 Operation of Multi Window

11.2.11Menu ControlTab

11 Operation of Multi Window

11-10

12
Display and View
of
Multi Window

12-1

12.1 Display of Each Information


12.1.1 Display of Navigation Information
The navigation information is displayed in blocks on the screen. For details, see 12.2.1 View of
Navigation Information.
Note:
The number and type of display blocks, and display items in each block differ depending on the
system configuration used.
(Sample Display Example)
(1) Course Bar Block
(9) Current Block

(2) Climate Block


(3) Draft Block

(7) Ship Block


(4) Current Wind Block

(5) Gyro Rudder


Graph Block

(8) Depth Graph Block

(6) Engine Graph Block

The items displayed in each block are as follows.


No.
(1)

Blocks
Course Bar Block

(2)
(3)
(4)

Climate Block
Draft Block
Current/Wind Block

(5)
(6)
(7)

True
Relative
Gyro/Rudder Graph Block
Engine Graph Block
Ship Block
Docking

Voyage

(8)
(9)

Depth Graph Block


Current Block

Displayed Items
Planned course, gyro course, course, course to steer (CTS), rate of turn
(ROT)
Air temperature, water temperature, atmospheric pressure, humidity
Forward draft, middle draft (starboard, port), after draft
True wind, true tidal stream
Relative wind, Relative tidal stream
Rudder angle (starboard, port), gyro course
Engine revolution
Ship speed (ahead/astern, bow starboard/port direction, stern starboard/
port direction), rudder (starboard, port), stern thruster pitch angle (starboard, port), bow thruster pitch angle (starboard, port), stern thruster
rotational speed (starboard, port), bow thruster rotational speed
(starboard, port), stern thruster output (starboard, port), bow thruster
output (starboard, port)
Rudder (starboard, port), ship speed (ground, water), planned ship speed,
propeller pitch angle (starboard, port), propeller rotational speed
(starboard, port)
Water depth
Water depth, current drift, current set

12 Display and View of Multi Window

12-2

12.1.1.1 Rearranging Blocks


The blocks can be dragged and dropped. The screen is broken down into a transparent matrix made up
of 64 equally sized sections. A block can be moved to a give part of the matrix by aligning its upper left
corner.
Blocks

12.1.1.2 Changing Block Size

Conning Display

The size of a block can be changed by placing the cursor over a corner of the block, then dragging the
corner to resize the block. (However, there is a limit to the size that is determined by the mesh size,
displayed characters.)

12-3

12 Display and View of Multi Window

12.2 View of Each Information


12.2.1 View of Navigation Information
This section describes the screen configuration and displayed items of the block that displays navigation
information.

(1) Course Bar Block


1)

3)

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

4) 2) 5)

1) Planned Course
The course in the navigation plan that was programmed into the ECDIS system is displayed by
the mark.
2) Gyro (Gyro course)
The ships heading according to the gyro compass is displayed.
3) Course
The course from GPS is displayed.
4) CTS (Course to steer)
When the route tracking mode is selected in the ECDIS, the course used for automatic sailing is
displayed by the mark.
5) ROT (Rate of turn)*1
The rate of turn per minute is displayed.
The full span value of the displayed graph can be set to 30, 60, 90, 120 or 150 degrees/minute
from the Setup panel.
*1 ROT is displayed when this information is sent from the gyro compass.

12 Display and View of Multi Window

12-4

(2) Climate Block


1)
2)
3)
4)

1) Air Temp. (Air temperature)


The measurement from the temperature sensor placed outside the vessel is displayed.
Nothing will be displayed if this unit is not connected to a temperature sensor.
2) Water Temp. (Water temperature)
The measurement from the water temperature sensor placed outside the vessel is displayed.
Nothing will be displayed if this unit is not connected to a seawater temperature sensor or data
logger.
3) Pressure (Atmospheric pressure)
The measurement from the atmospheric pressure sensor placed outside the vessel is displayed.
Nothing will be displayed if this unit is not connected to an atmospheric pressure sensor.
4) Humidity
The measurement from the humidity sensor placed outside the vessel is displayed.
Nothing will be displayed if this unit is not connected to a humidity sensor.

(3) Draft Block


1)
2)
3)

1) Fore Draft (forward draft)


The measurement from the draft sensor placed outside the vessel on the fore body is displayed.
No measurement is displayed if this unit is not connected to the draft sensor.
2) Mid draft (middle draft --- both starboard and port sides)
The measurements from the draft sensors placed outside the vessel amid ship on both
starboard and port sides are displayed.
No measurement is displayed if this unit is not connected to the draft sensors.
3) Aft Draft (after draft)
The measurement from the draft sensor placed outside the vessel on the aft body is displayed.
No measurement is displayed if this unit is not connected to the draft sensor.

12-5

12 Display and View of Multi Window

Conning Display

(4) Current/Wind Block


1)

1)
2)

Relative

6)

2)

3)

3)

4)

4)

1)

1)

True

6)

5)

5)

3)

3)

7)

7)

1) Wind Direction
True wind direction or relative wind direction is displayed in 16 bearings and graphically.
Direction of arrowhead means following wind direction.
True wind direction and relative wind direction can be switched by clicking the [True/Relative]
switching button at the bottom right of this block.
2) Wind Speed
True wind speed or relative wind speed is displayed in meters per second (m/sec).
True wind speed and relative wind speed can be switched by clicking the [True/Relative]
switching button at the bottom right of the screen.
The unit of wind speed can be switched back and forth between meters per second (m/sec) and
nautical miles per hour (kn) by clicking the [m/s/kn] switching button.
3) Current Set (current direction)
True current direction or relative current direction is displayed in 16 bearings and graphically.
Direction of arrowhead means following current direction.
True current direction and relative current direction can be switched by clicking the
[True/Relative] switching button at the bottom right of the screen.
4) Current Drift (current speed)
True current speed or relative current speed is displayed in knots (Knots).
True current speed and relative current speed can be switched by clicking the [True/Relative]
switching button at the bottom right of the screen.
5) Own Ship
The own ship direction is displayed together with the wind direction and current direction.
6) [m/s/kn] switching button
The display of wind speed unit can be switched back and forth between meters per second
(m/sec) and nautical miles per hour (kn) by clicking the [m/s/kn] switching button.
7) [True/Relative] switching button
Wind direction, wind speed, current direction, current speed and tidal stream can be switched
back and forth between true and relative display by clicking the [True/Relative] switching button.
All data will be switched when this button is clicked.

12 Display and View of Multi Window

12-6

(5) Gyro/Rudder Graph Block

Conning Display

Gyro/Rudder (Gyro course, Rudder (starboard/port))


This graph displays the gyro course of the ship, and changes in true rudder angle over time.
The number of true rudder angles and recording time intervals can be set from the Setup panel.
The display range of the rudder angle available are 30, 40, 50, 60, 70 and 80. The
recording time intervals available are 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes and 30 minutes.

(6) Engine Graph Block

This graphs displays the changes in engine revolution over time.


The number of engines and recording time intervals can be set from the Setup panel. The
display range of the engine revolution available are AH100RPM, AH200RPM, AH300RPM,
AS50RPM and AS100RPM. The recording time intervals available are 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30
minutes and 60 minutes.

12-7

12 Display and View of Multi Window

(7) Ship Block


Docking

1)

5)

2)

8)
9)

3)
6)

4)

7)

1) Bow Speed (bow speed of the ship to starboard or port)*1


The bow speed in the starboard and port directions from a Doppler sonar is displayed.
Nothing will be displayed if this unit is not connected to a Doppler sonar.
2) Fore-Aft (ahead/astern speed)*1
The ship speed in the ahead and astern directions from a Doppler sonar.
3) Stern Speed (stern speed of the ship to starboard or port)*1
The stern speed in the starboard and port directions from a Doppler sonar is displayed.
Nothing will be displayed if this unit is not connected to a Doppler sonar.
4) Rudder (true rudder angle)
The true rudder angle is displayed. Single-shaft rudder angle or double-shaft rudder angle is
selected from the initial screen.
5) Bow Thruster, Pitch/RPM/Power (bow thruster information)
Data from the thruster installed in the bow (pitch angle, rotational speed, power) is displayed.
6) Stern Thruster, Pitch/RPM/Power (stern thruster information)
Data from the thruster installed in the stern (pitch angle, rotational speed, power) is displayed.
7) [Docking/Voyage] switching button
This button can be clicked to change from the Docking screen to the Voyage screen and vice
versa.
*1 Each value is shown by * if the speeds became the speed through water.

12 Display and View of Multi Window

12-8

Voyage

3)
4)
Conning Display

5)
6)

6)

1)

2)

1) Rudder (actual rudder angle)


The actual rudder angle is displayed. Single-shaft rudder angle or double-shaft rudder angle
is selected from the initial screen.
2) [Docking/Voyage] switching button
This button can be clicked to change from the Docking screen to the Voyage screen and vice
versa.
3) STW (speed through water)*1
The STW from a Doppler sonar or the EM log is displayed.
4) Speed (ground speed)
The ground speed from the GPS is displayed.
5) Planned Speed
The ship speed in the navigation plan that was set into the ECDIS is displayed.
6) Propeller (Propeller information)
The propeller pitch angle, rotational speed and output are displayed. Either a single-shaft
propeller or double-shaft propellers can be selected.
*1 The value is shown by * if the speed became the ground speed.

12-9

12 Display and View of Multi Window

(8) Depth Graph Block

Depth (Keel)depth from the keel


The depth from the keel and time variation of the depth are displayed.
Depth (Surface)depth from the surface
The depth from the surface and time variation of the depth are displayed.
Depth (Tran.)depth from the transducer
The depth from the transducer and time variation of the depth are displayed.
Scale of the depth and time interval can be set in the [Setup] dialog box. Depth display range in
Docking can be selected from 10, 25 and 50 meters, depth display range in Voyage can be selected
from 50, 100 and 250 meters. There is a switch of Docking and Voyage in the Ship Block. Time
interval can be selected from 10, 15, 30 and 60 minutes.
The depth display from the keel, surface and transducer automatically switch by data from echo
sounder.

(9) Current Block

1)

2)

3)

1) Measuring Depth Rangedepth


The depth at the observation point is displayed.
2) Current Speed
The current speed at the observation point is displayed.
3) Current Direction
The current direction at the observation point is displayed.

12 Display and View of Multi Window

12-10

Display Item List of Navigation Information


Block
Course Bar
Block

Climate
Block

Ship Block

Mode

Item
Planned Course
Gyro course
Course
Course to steer
Rate of turn
Weather data

Docking Ship speed

Display name
Planned Course
Gyro
Course
CTS
ROT
Air temperature Air Temp.
Water
Water Temp.
temperature
Atmospheric
Pressure
temperature
Humidity
Humidity
Bow STBD/Port Bow
Ahead/Stern
Fore-Aft
Stern
Stern
STBD/Port

Rudder angle
(Starboard)
Rudder angle (Port)
Stern Thruster pitch
angle (Starboard)
Stern Thruster pitch
angle (Port)
Bow Thruster pitch
angle (Starboard)
Bow Thruster pitch
angle (Port)
Stern Thruster
rotational speed (Port)
Bow Thruster rotational
speed (Port)
Stern Thruster output
(Port)
Bow Thruster output
(Port)
Voyage Planned speed
Ship's speed
Water speed
Ground speed
Rudder angle
(Starboard)
Rudder angle (Port)
Propeller Pitch angle
(Starboard)
Propeller Pitch angle
(Port)
Propeller rotational
speed (Starboard)
Propeller rotational
speed (Port)

Unit

Display format

Updating Standard input


cycle
system

deg.
deg.
deg.
deg.
/min
deg.
deg.

xxx.x
xxx.x
xxx.x
xxx.x
[P/S] xxx.x/min
xx.x
xx.x

10 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
10 sec
10 sec

ECDIS
exterior sensor
exterior sensor
ECDIS
exterior sensor
exterior sensor
exterior sensor

hPa

xxxxhPa

10 sec

exterior sensor

%
kn
kn
kn

100%
[P/S] xx.xkn
[AH/AS] xx.xkn
[P/S] xx.xkn

10 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec

exterior sensor
exterior sensor
exterior sensor
exterior sensor

deg. [P/S] xx.x

1 sec

exterior sensor

Thruster

deg. [P/S] xx.x


deg./% [P/S] xx/%

1 sec
1 sec

exterior sensor
exterior sensor

Thruster

deg./% [P/S] xx/%

1 sec

exterior sensor

Thruster

deg./% [P/S] xx/%

1 sec

exterior sensor

Thruster

deg./% [P/S] xx/%

1 sec

exterior sensor

Thruster

RPM

[AH/AS] xxxRPM

1 sec

exterior sensor

Thruster

RPM

[AH/AS] xxxRPM

1 sec

exterior sensor

Thruster

KW

xxKW

1 sec

exterior sensor

Thruster

KW

xxKW

1 sec

exterior sensor

xx.xkn
xx.xkn
xx.xkn
[P/S] xx.x

10 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec

ECDIS
exterior sensor
exterior sensor
exterior sensor

Planned Speed kn
STW
kn
Speed
kn
deg.

Propeller Pitch

deg. [P/S] xx.x


deg. [AH/AS] xx.x

1 sec
1 sec

exterior sensor
exterior sensor

Propeller Pitch

deg. [AH/AS] xx.x

1 sec

exterior sensor

Propeller RPM

RPM

[AH/AS] xxxRPM

1 sec

exterior sensor

Propeller RPM

RPM

[AH/AS] xxxRPM

1 sec

exterior sensor

12-11

12 Display and View of Multi Window

Conning Display

Block

Mode

Current
True
Wind Block

Item
True set and drift

Display name

Depth Graph
Block
Gyro Ruder
Graph Block

Draft Block

Current
Block

Standard input
system

deg.

16

1 sec

Drift

Drift

kn

xx.xkn

1 sec

deg.
m/sec,kn
deg.

16 cardinal points
xx.xm/sec, xx.xkn
360

1 sec
1 sec
1 sec

kn

xx.xkn

1 sec

deg.
m/sec,kn
RPM

360
xx.xm/sec, xx.xkn
[AH/AS] xxxRPM

1 sec
1 sec
1 sec

Calculation from
exterior sensor
Calculation from
exterior sensor
exterior sensor
exterior sensor
Calculation from
exterior sensor
Calculation from
exterior sensor
exterior sensor
exterior sensor
exterior sensor

Engine P

RPM

[AH/AS] xxxRPM

1 sec

exterior sensor

Depth

Xxxxm

1 sec

exterior sensor

Drift

Engine rotational
speed (Starboard)
Engine rotational
speed (Port)
Depth

Updating
cycle

Set

Wind direction Direction


Wind speed
Speed
Relative Relative set and drift Set
Set

Engine
Graph Block

Display format

Set

True Wind speed

Relative wind speed

Unit

Drift

Wind direction Direction


Wind speed
Speed
Engine S

Rudder
angle(Starboard)
Rudder angle (Port)
Gyro course
Fore

Rudder S

deg.

[P/S] xx.x

1 sec

exterior sensor

Rudder P
Gyro
Fore

deg.
deg.
M

[P/S] xx.x
xxx.x
xx.xm

1 sec
1 sec
1 sec

exterior sensor
exterior sensor
exterior sensor

Mid(port)

Mid

xx.xm

1 sec

exterior sensor

Mid(starboard)

Mid

xx.xm

1 sec

exterior sensor

Aft

Aft

xx.xm

1 sec

exterior sensor

A layer

Xxxxm, xx.xkn, [P/S] xx.x 1 sec

exterior sensor

B layer

Xxxxm, xx.xkn, [P/S] xx.x 1 sec

exterior sensor

C layer

m.kn,
deg.
m.kn,
deg.
m.kn,
deg.

Xxxxm, xx.xkn, [P/S] xx.x 1 sec

exterior sensor

12 Display and View of Multi Window

12-12

13

After-Sales
Service

13-1

13.1 Maintenance Service


Your equipment is guaranteed for one year after it is delivered to you.

13.2 Retention Period of Repair Parts


The replacement parts for repairing this equipment (parts essential to keeping the functional integrity of
this equipment) will be retained for ten years after its production is discontinued.

13.3 When Asking for Service


When you think the system is not operating normally, see 10.6 Troubleshooting, and check again. If
the problem still cannot be corrected, turn off the unit and consult your dealer, our agent, branch, sales
department or subsidiary for advice.
In that case, use the Repair Request Form at the end of this manual.

Repair during warranty period


Should a malfunction occur when the fishfinder has been operated according to descriptions and
instructions in the instruction manual, it will be repaired free of charge.

However, breakdowns

resulting from abuse, negligence, natural disaster, fire or other unforeseeable incident will be charged.

Repair after warranty period


Repairs that restore normal operation made after the warranty period have to be paid in full by the
client.

Product data that should be provided when you ask for service
* Name of product, model, date of manufacture and serial number
* Description of malfunction (as detailed as possible)
* Company address or name of organization, address and telephone number

13.4 Checks and Inspection


Product performance gradually declines with long use resulting in inaccurate measurements, although
the rate of this decline varies with frequency of use.
To prevent this, periodic inspection is required in addition to routine maintenance. For information on
inspection, contact your dealer.
Note that inspection is charged.
When you may not understand about after sales service, ask your dealer or our nearby sales department.

11 After-Sales Service

13-2

14

Disposal

14-1

Before disposing of used lithium batteries, insulate them by applying tapes


on their
and
terminals.
Otherwise, they may short-circuit to generate heat, explode or cause a fire.

14.1 Disposal of the Product


Dispose of the system in accordance with local bylaws and regulations.

14.2 Disposal of Used Batteries


Lithium cells for backing up data at built into the system.
Do not store used lithium cells. Dispose of them as unburnable garbage.
Used lithium cells must be insulated, for example, by insulating the

terminals with tape before

disposal. In local authorities that collect unburnable and burnable garbage, dispose of used lithium
cells in accordance with local bylaws and regulations.
For details, contact the nearest JRC office, agent or your local authority.

14.3 Disposal of LCD Module


The fluorescent lamp built in the LCD module contains mercury. When disposing of the LCD module, you
need to observe the ordinances or regulations of your local government.

If the LCD module breaks and the liquid inside spills out to stick to your
skin, wash it off immediately under running water for more than 15 minutes.
If you find any skin problem afterwards, consult a doctor immediately. If the
liquid gets in your eye, wash it off immediately under running water for more
than 15 minutes, and then, consult a doctor as soon as possible.

12 Disposal

14-2

15
Specifications

15-1

15.1 Bridge Display Terminal


(1) Display

19 inch color LCD (JAN-701B)


23.1 inch color LCD (JAN-901B)
Resolution : 1280 x 1024 (JAN-701B)
Resolution : 1600 x 1200 (JAN-901B)

(2) Operation panel

Keys and switches


Track ball
EBL (Electronic Bearing Line) dial
VRM (Variable Range Marker) dial
Joystick

(3) Processor

CPU mother board


Video board
Level interface board
8-channel serial interface A/B board
Gyro/log interface (NSK) board
Radar overlay board
Radar interface board
Power supply circuit (including UPS)
Terminal board circuit
Peripherals
Silicon disk
Hard disk (Two-set component of main and sub)
CD-ROM drive
Floppy disk drive (1.44 Mbyte)

(4) Environmental conditions

IEC60945 Ver4.0 compliant

(5) Power voltage

Voltage : AC100V to 115V/AC200V to 230V (10%)


Frequency : 60 Hz/50Hz (5%)

(6) Power consumption

330VA or less (JAN-701B)


350VA or less (JAN-901B)

13 Specifications

15-2

Index

Abbreviation for Geodetic System 9-16, 9-17


Accepting the S-57 Updating Chart.... 3-183
Adjust Radar Bearing, Range and Antenna
Height ................................................. 7-23
Adjusting Datum (ARCS Only)............. 3-81
Adjusting the Brightness and Sound
Volume ................................................ 3-24
Alarm Fuction.......................................... 9-2
Alarm Information of ARCS Chart ......... 9-7
Alarm Information of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart
.............................................................. 9-9
Alarm Information of S-57/S-63 Chart . 9-10
ARCS Chart Display Options (ARCS Only)
............................................................ 3-74
Association Setting .............................. 3-194
Automatic Sailing Operation .................. 6-7
Automatic Sailing System....................... 6-2

Beam Line............................................ 3-160


Bearing Setting........................................ 7-8
Bridge Display Terminal ....................... 15-2
Button Functions..................................... 5-8

Distance Measurement ......................... 3-91


Canceling the Ship Offset ................... 3-199
Change of Course (Turning) ............. 6-2, 6-3
Changing Active Panels (ARCS Only) .. 3-77
Changing the Display Color .................. 3-28
Changing the Object Category (S-57/C-MAP
Only) ................................................... 3-64
Chart Abbreviations ............................ 3-182
Chart Edit Mode ...................................... 5-3
Chart Editing Menu ................................ 5-4
Chart-Related Alarm Information .......... 9-7
Checks and Inspection........................... 13-2
Clear Voyage Distance........................... 7-14
Code Input ............................................. 7-18
Color and Brilliance Setting...................7-11
Color Pattern (S-57)............................... 10-5
Color Test (ARCS Only)........................... 7-6
Components ............................................. 1-5
Configuration for Each Graph ...............11-4
Confirming Alarm.................................. 10-3
Line Monitor .......................................... 7-22
Construction ............................................ 1-6
Creating a New User Chart ...................5-11
Creating a Route Using EBL/VRM Keys and
Dials...................................................... 4-54
Creating Alternate Route ...................... 4-58
Creating an Alternate Route................. 4-57

Cross Bearing....................................... 3-127


Cursor Auto Mode ................................ 3-143

Daily Maintenance................................. 10-4


Danger Detection Vector and Sector ... 3-157
Data Backup/Restore ............................. 7-28
Data Formats of Files that ECDIS ....... 9-22
Date Data Source Setting ........................ 7-9
Display of Navigation Information ....... 12-2
Display Panel ........................................... 2-7
Auto Sailing Status................................ 2-12
Brilliance Setting Panel ........................ 2-18
CHART Information for ARCS .............. 2-16
CHART Information for S-57/C-MAP ... 2-15
Displaying a User Map .......................... 3-95
Displaying Temporary and Preliminary Notice
............................................................. 3-80
Displaying the Chart by Entering the Position
............................................................. 3-59
Displaying the Note and Diagram (ARCS Only)
..............................................................3-79
Displaying the Radar Image ([RADAR])
............................................................. 3-37
Displaying the Startup Menu.............. 3-201
Disposal of LCD Module ........................ 14-2
Disposal of the Product.......................... 14-2
Disposal of Used Batteries .................... 14-2

EBL Manager....................................... 3-125


Editing a Previous Route File (Graphic Editor)
..............................................................4-51
Editing a Previous Route File (Table Editor)
............................................................. 4-28
Editing a User Chart ...........5-14, 5-18, 5-23
Entering Objects .................................... 5-27
Entering/Exiting the Playback................ 8-2
Exporting Route Files....................4-30, 4-53

Features ................................................... 1-4


File Manager ............................................ 7-2
Flowchart (Alternate Route) ................. 4-57
Flowchart (For Sailing).......................... 3-18
Flowchart (General)............................... 3-17
Flowchart (Graphic Editor) ................................4-37
Flowchart (Manual Update) .................. 5-19
Flowchart (Table Editor) ....................... 4-14
Flowchart (User Chart) ........................... 5-9
Function ................................................... 1-2
Function of Operation Panel ................... 2-2
Function of the Screen (ECDIS).............. 2-5


Graphic Editing Menu and Button Functions (Graphic
Editor)...................................................... 4-33
Graphic Editing Mode ........................... 4-32
Graphical Index ................................... 3-185
Gray Scale.............................................. 10-6

Heading Line ...................................... 3-160


Hiding Objects (Only during the Manual
Update Operation) ............................. 5-40
Highlight .............................................. 3-123
How to Enter Numbers and Letters ..... 3-12
How to Release the Alarm ([ALARM ACK])
............................................................ 3-30
How to Select the Menu .......................... 3-3

Importing Route Files ................... 4-29, 4-52


Importing User Charts.......................... 5-17
Inputting Clearing Lines..................... 3-129
Installation Information........................ 7-25

Language ............................................... 7-17


Loading a Low Resolution Chart (ARCS Only)
.............................................................3-78
Logbook ................................................ 3-145
LOP(Line Of Position) ......................... 3-130

Maintenance Service ............................. 13-2


Making a New Route File (Graphic Editing)
............................................................ 4-39
Making a New Route File (Table Editor)
............................................................ 4-16
Marking the Event Mark (EVENT) .....3-119
Marking the Information Mark .......... 3-121
Marking the Tidal Stream Mark ........ 3-122
Menu Operation....................................... 3-3
Menu Title Bar ...................................... 2-19
Merging User Charts............................. 5-16
Monitoring Dragging Anchor ...............3-117
Multi View Screen ................................. 3-86
My Port List ........................................... 3-71

Names and Functions.............................. 2-3

Operating EBL/VRM ........................... 3-101


MOB (Man OverBoard) ......................... 3-53
Operating Time........................................ 7-5
Operation when Editing User Charts....5-11
Operation when Manually Updating
Objects ................................................ 5-20

Own Ship Information ............................. 2-8


Own ships Parameter......................... 7-20
Own Ships Setting ([Ship] - [Option])........... 3-154

Playing Back the Logging Data............... 8-6


Power OFF Operation............................ 3-24
Power ON ............................................... 3-20
Primary Position and Secondary Position
............................................................... 7-7
CCRP Setting ......................................... 7-21
Ships Parameter................................. 7-20
Printing Display................................... 3-200

Radar Initial Setup ................................ 7-27


Radar Process Setting ........................... 7-17
Reading Out Information on the Object ........... 3-96
Replacing Consumables......................... 10-6
Retention Period of Repair Parts .......... 13-2
Route Monitoring and System Alarm ..... 6-4
Route Planning ........................................ 4-2
Route Planning Using the Graphic Editor
............................................................. 4-32
Route Planning Using the Table Editor.. 4-8
Running Fix ......................................... 3-116

Saving the Screen ................................ 3-200


Selecting a S-57 Chart (S-57 Only) ....... 3-73
Selecting an Area ................................... 3-87
Selecting Azimuth Mode (S-57/C-MAP
Only).................................................... 3-69
Selecting Chart from All (ARCS Only).. 3-76
Selecting Chart under Cursor (ARCS Only)
............................................................. 3-75
Selecting Larger/Smaller Chart (ARCS Only)
............................................................. 3-74
Selecting Motion Mode .......................... 3-69
Selecting Multi Window......................... 11-2
Selecting Object Types........................... 5-26
Selecting Route and To WPT ................. 3-89
Selecting Route and To WPT Using the
Display Panel...................................... 3-89
Selecting the Route and the WP.............. 6-8
Selecting the Startup Menu .................. 3-21
Sensor ....................................................... 7-7
Setting AIS/TT Options ....................... 3-189
Setting Chart Fix Mode ......................... 3-70
Setting Date/Time......................... 7-13, 7-14
Setting Radar Options ......................... 3-188
Setting the Alarm Options..................... 7-15
Setting the Automatic Sailing ................. 6-5
Setting the Chart Options ................... 3-161
Setting the Route Options ....................... 4-4
Setting the User Key ............................. 7-12
Shifting Own Ship Position ................. 3-196
Shifting the Chart.................................. 3-56

Shifting the Chart with the [HOME] button


............................................................ 3-56
Shifting the Chart with the [Port List] Button
............................................................. 3-58
Shifting the Chart with the Cross Cursor
............................................................ 3-57
Shifting the Chart with the Hand Cursor
............................................................ 3-58
Own Ship Symbol ................................ 3-155
Speed Setting ........................................... 7-9
Startup Screen and ARCS PIN Input (ARCS
Only) ..................................................... 3-22
Switching the Range (S-57/C-MAP Only)
............................................................ 3-62
Switching the Scale (S-57/C-MAP Only)
............................................................ 3-63
System Configuration............................ 1-12
System Information................................. 7-4

Table Editing Menu and Button Functions......... 4-9


Table Editing Mode ................................. 4-8
TCS Maintenance .................................. 7-26
Terminating the Automatic Sailing ......6-11,
6-12
The other information on the own ship 2-13
The Other Ship Displaying Status ....... 2-10
The PWR FAIL Lamp and Power Supply
Input ................................................... 10-7
The setting of the route ......................... 2-12
Time Zone Data Source Setting ............ 7-10
To Select the High Resolution Chart (ARCS
Only).....................................................3-78
Tools Panel ............................................. 2-17
Track and Time Label Display ............ 3-159

Troubleshooting......................... 10-15, 10-18


File operation ......................................... 3-49
Activating and Deactivating AIS Targets
............................................................. 3-50
AIS sentence........................................... 3-50
Display Received Message..................... 3-50
Panel Display of AIS/TT Target ............ 3-52
Target Track ........................................... 3-46
AIS/TT display ON/OFF ........................ 3-40
The AIS/TT target Display .................... 3-40
Opening the AIS/TT list......................... 3-41

Use XTD Alarm ...................................... 3-94


Using the Analog Meter............ 3-140, 3-141
Acquisition Zone .................................. 3-138
Multi Window....................................... 3-140
Using the DVD Drive and Floppy Disk
Drive.................................................... 3-55

Various Panels ....................................... 3-10


Vector Display at POSN1 .................... 3-156

When Asking for Service........................ 13-2


Wide View Screen (S-57/C-MAP Only).. 3-88

Zooming Area Using the Rubber Band


(S-57/C-MAP Only) ............................. 3-60
Zooming In/Out (S-57/C-MAP Only) ..... 3-61

END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT


FOR JAN-701B/901B SERIES ECDIS SOFTWARE
IMPORTANT-READ CAREFULLY: This End-User License Agreement (EULA) is a
legal agreement between you (either an individual or a single entity) and Japan
Radio Co., Ltd. (JRC) for the JRC ECDIS equipment that includes Microsoft
software products.
You have acquired a device (DEVICE) that includes software licensed by JRC from Microsoft
Licensing Inc. or its affiliates (MS). Those installed software products of MS origin, as well as
associated media, printed materials, and online or electronic documentation (SOFTWARE) are
protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold.
All rights reserved.

IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS EULA, DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE
SOFTWARE. INSTEAD, PROMPTLY CONTACT JRC FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON RETURN
OF THE UNUSED DEVICE(S) FOR A REFUND. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR
AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE. This EULA grants you the following license:
You may use the SOFTWARE only on the DEVICE.
NOT FAULT TOLERANT. THE SOFTWARE IS NOT FAULT TOLERANT.
JRC HAS
INDEPENDENTLY DETERMINED HOW TO USE THE SOFTWARE IN THE DEVICE, AND MS HAS
RELIED UPON JRC TO CONDUCT SUFFICIENT TESTING TO DETERMINE THAT THE
SOFTWARE IS SUITABLE FOR SUCH USE.
NO WARRANTIES FOR THE SOFTWARE. THE SOFTWARE is provided AS IS and with all
faults. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCUARACY,
AND EFFORT (INCLUDING LACK OF NEGLIGENCE) IS WITH YOU . ALSO THERE IS NO
WARRANTY AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE OR
AGAINST INFRINGEMENT. IF YOU HAVE RECEIVED ANY WARRANTIES REGARDING THE
DEVICE OR THE SOFTWARE, THOSE WARRANTIES DO NOT ORIGINATE FROM, AND ARE
NOT BINDING ON, MS.
Note on Java Support. The SOFTWARE may contain support for programs written in Java. Java
technology is not fault tolerant and is not designed, manufactured, or intended for use or resale as
online control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the
operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct
life support machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of Java technology could lead
directly to death, personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage. Sun Microsystems,
Inc. has contractually obligated MS to make this disclaimer.
No Liability for Certain Damages. EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, MS SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES
ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE
SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS
ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL MS BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS
OF U.S. TWO HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.$250.00).
Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation, and Disassembly. You may not reverse
engineer, decompile, or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such
activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation.
SOFTWARE TRANSFER ALLOWED BUT WITH RESTRICTIONS. You may permanently transfer
rights under this EULA only as part of a permanent sale or transfer of the Device, and only if the
recipient agrees to this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any transfer must also include all
prior versions of the SOFTWARE.
EXPROT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that SOFTWARE is of US-origin. You agree to
comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE, including the
U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use and country destination
restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments. For additional information on exporting the
SOFTWARE, see http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.

Repair Request Form


Date :

To:
Mr/Ms
Reading

Point of
Contact

Repair
Requested by

TEL

FAX

Address

Ship's Name

Port Name

Product Name

Product No.

Symptom: (in as much detail as possible)


Date of Malfunction:

Desired Repair
Method

Malfunction Location:

Repair On Site/
Repair at JRC Office

Desired
Repair Date

(yyyy.mm.dd)

. . .

Declaration on toxic & hazardous substances or elements


of Electronic Information Products
Japan Radio Company Limited

(Names & Content of toxic and hazardous substances or elements

(Type): JAN-701B

(Name): ECDIS

(Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements)

(Part name)

(Inboard Unit)
(Display Unit)
(Inboard Unit)

(Keyboard Unit)
(Inboard Unit)

(Processing Unit)
(Peripherals)
(Options)
(Cables)
(Documennts)

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr6+)

(PBB)

(PBDE)

SJ/T11306-2006
(Indicates that this toxic, or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the requirement in
SJ/T11363-2006.)
SJ/T11363-2006
(Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above
the limit requirement in SJ/T 11363-2006.)

JRC Code No. :

7ZPNA4056D

RE:
Management Methods on Control of Pollution from Electronics Information Products of the People's Republic of China

1/1

Declaration on toxic & hazardous substances or elements


of Electronic Information Products
Japan Radio Company Limited

(Names & Content of toxic and hazardous substances or elements

(Type): JAN-901B

(Name): ECDIS

(Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements)

(Part name)

(Inboard Unit)
(Display Unit)
(Inboard Unit)

(Keyboard Unit)
(Inboard Unit)

(Processing Unit)
(Peripherals)
(Options)
(Cables)
(Documennts)

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr6+)

(PBB)

(PBDE)

SJ/T11306-2006
(Indicates that this toxic, or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the requirement in
SJ/T11363-2006.)
SJ/T11363-2006
(Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above
the limit requirement in SJ/T 11363-2006.)

JRC Code No. :

7ZPNA4056D

RE:
Management Methods on Control of Pollution from Electronics Information Products of the People's Republic of China

1/1

JAN-701B/901B
ECDIS

INSTRUCTION
MANUAL

For further information,contact:

Not use the asbestos

URL

http://www.jrc.co.jp

Marine Service Department


Telephone : +81-3-3492-1305
+81-3-3779-1420
Facsimile :
tmsc@jrc.co.jp
e-mail :
AMSTERDAM Branch
Telephone : +31-20-658-0750
Facsimile :
+31-20-658-0755
e-mail :
service@jrceurope.com
SEATTLE Branch
Telephone : +1-206-654-5644
Facsimile :
+1-206-654-7030
e-mail :
marineservice@jrcamerica.com
CODE No.7ZPNA4056D

01ETM

OCT. 2012 Edition 6

ISO 9001, ISO 14001 Certified

JRC

Printed in Japan